Infoprint 6500 Series Line Matrix Printers


ASCII Programmer’s Reference Manual

G544-5979-00
Infoprint 6500 Series Line Matrix Printers


ASCII Programmer’s Reference Manual

G544-5979-00
 Note!
Before using this information and the product it supports, read the information in “Notices” on
page 5.

First Edition (May 2005)

This edition applies to the IBM 6500-v Line Matrix Printer.
Requests for IBM® publications should be made to your IBM representative or
to the IBM branch office serving your locality. If you request publications from
the address given below, your order will be delayed because publications are
not stocked here. Many of the IBM Printing Systems Division publications are
available from the web page listed below.

Internet
Visit our home page at: http://www.ibm.com/printers

A Reader’s Comment form is provided at the back of this publication. If the

form has been removed, you can send comments by fax to 1-800-524-1519
(USA only) or 1-303-924-6873; by E-mail to [email protected]; or by mail
to:
IBM Printing Systems Division
Department H7FE Building 004N
Information Development
PO Box 1900
Boulder CO 80301-9191 USA
IBM may use or distribute whatever information you supply in any way it
believes appropriate without incurring any oblication to you.
© Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 2005. All
rights reserved.
US Government Users Restricted Rights – Use, duplication or disclosure
restricted by GSA ADP Schedule Contract with IBM Corp.
 Energy Star

Notices
Energy Star

The Environmental Protection Agency ENERGY STAR® Computers program is

a partnership effort with manufacturers of data processing equipment to
promote the introduction of energy-efficient personal computers, monitors,
printers, fax machines, and copiers to help reduce air pollution and global
warming caused by electricity generation.
IBM Printing Systems Company participates in this program by introducing
printers that reduce power consumption when they are not being used. As an
ENERGY STAR® Partner, IBM Printing Systems Company has determined that
this product meets the ENERGY STAR® guidelines for energy efficiency.
NOTE: The ENERGY STAR® emblem does not represent EPA endorsement of
any product or service.

Notices
This information was developed for products and services offered in the
U.S.A.
IBM® may not offer the products, services, or features discussed in this
document in other countries. Consult your IBM representative for information
on the products and services currently available in your area. Any reference
to an IBM product, program, or service is not intended to state or imply that
only that IBM product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally
equivalent product, program, or service that does not infringe any IBM
intellectual property rights may be used instead. However, it is the user’s
responsibility to evaluate and verify the operation of any non-IBM product,
program, or service.
IBM may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter
described in this document. The furnishing of this document does not give you
any license to these patents. You can send license inquires, in writing, to:
IBM Director of Licensing
IBM Corporation
North Castle Drive
Armonk, NY 10504-1785 U.S.A.
Notices

The following paragraph does not apply to the United Kingdom or any
other country where such provisions are inconsistent with local law:
INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MACHINES CORPORATION PROVIDES
THIS PUBLICATION “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or
implied warranties in certain transactions, therefore, this statement may not
apply to you.
This information could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors.
Changes are periodically made to the information herein; these changes will
be incorporated in new editions of the publication. IBM may make
improvements and/or changes in the product(s) described in this publication
at any time without notice.
Any references in this information to non-IBM Web sites are provided for
convenience only and do not in any manner serve as an endorsement of
those Web sites. The materials at those Web sites are not part of the
materials for this IBM product and use of those Web sites is at your own risk.
IBM may use or distribute any of the information you supply in any way it
believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you. All models of the
printer meet the requirements of IEC 950, First Edition, Amendments 1 and 2.
The laser used in the printer complies with IEC 825 and EN 60825.
Any performance data contained herein was determined in a controlled
environment. Therefore, the results obtained in other operating environments
may vary significantly. Some measurements may have been made on
development-level systems and there is no guarantee that these
measurements will be the same on generally available systems. Furthermore,
some measurement may have been estimated through extrapolation. Actual
results may vary. Users of this document should verify the applicable data for
their specific environment.
Information concerning non-IBM products was obtained from the suppliers of
those products, their published announcements or other pubicly available
sources. IBM has not tested those products and cannot confirm the accuracy
of performance, compatibility or any other claims related to non-IBM products.
Questions on the capabilities of non-IBM products should be addressed to the
suppliers of those products.
IBM encourages owners of information technology (IT) equipment to
responsibly recycle their equipment when it is no longer needed. IBM offers a
variety of programs and services to assist equipment owners in recycling their
IT products. Information on these product recycling offerings can be found on
IBM’s Internet site at
http://www.ibm.com/ibm/environment/products/prp.shtml.
 Notices

All statements regarding IBM’s future direction or intent are subject to change
or withdrawal without notice, and represent goals and objectives only.
All IBM prices shown are IBM’s suggested retail prices, are current and are
subject to change without notice. Dealer prices may vary.

Note!
Before using this information and the product it supports, read the information and
Communication Statements in “Notices” on page 5.

If you are viewing this information softcopy, the photographs and color
illustrations may not appear.
For online versions of this book, we authorize you to:
• Copy, modify, and print the documentation contained on the media, for
use within your enterprise, provided you reproduce the copyright notice,
all warning statements, and other required statements on each copy or
partial copy.
• Transfer the original unaltered copy of the documentation when you
transfer the related IBM product (which may be either machines you own,
or programs, if the program’s license terms permit a transfer). You must,
at the same time, destroy all other copies of the documentation.
You are responsible for payment of any taxes, including personal property
taxes, resulting from this authorization.
Your failure to comply with the terms above terminates this authorization.
Upon termination, you must destroy your machine readable documentation.
 Trademarks

Trademarks
The following terms, denoted by an asterisk (*) in this publication, are
trademarks of IBM Corporation in the United States or other countries or both:
AIX
AS/400
IBM
IPDS
OS/2
Proprinter
SCS
The following terms, denoted by a double asterisk (**) in this publication, are
trademarks of other companies:
Centronics Genicom Corporation
Code V Quality Micro Systems, Inc.
Dataproducts Dataproducts Corporation
Epson Seiko Epson Corporation
Hewlett-Packard Hewlett-Packard Company
IGP Printronix, Inc.
JetDirect Hewlett-Packard Company
PGL Printronix, Inc.
Printronix Printronix, Inc.
Microsoft Microsoft Corporation
MS-DOS Microsoft Corporation
POSTNET United States Postal Service
UNIX X/Open Company Limited
Windows Microsoft Corporation

Product Recycling and Disposal

This unit may have lead-containing materials – such as circuit boards and
connectors – that require special handling. Before this unit is disposed of,
these materials must be removed and recycled or discarded according to
applicable regulations. This book contains specific information on batteries
and refrigerant where applicable.
This product may contain a sealed, lead-acid battery; lithium battery; nickel-
metal-hydride battery; or nickel-cadium battery. Batteries of these types must
be recycled or disposed of properly. Recycling facilities may not be available
in your area.
In the United States, IBM has established a collection process for reuse,
recycling, or proper disposal of used batteries and batter packs from IBM
equipment. For information on proper disposal of the batteries in this product,
please contact IBM at 1-800-426-4333.
For information on disposal of batteries outside the United States, contact
your local waste disposal facility.
 Notices

Communication Statements
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Statement
This equpment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when
the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment
generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed
and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference
to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is
likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to
correct the interference at his own expense.
Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used in order
to meet FCC emission limits. IBM is not responsible for any radio or television
interference caused by using other than recommended cables and
connectors or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment.
Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Fules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.

European Union (EU) Conformity Statement

Hereby, IBM declares that this product is

in complicance with the essential
requirements and other relevent
provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.

IBM cannot accept responsibility for any failure to satisfy the protection
requirements resulting from a non-recommended modification of the product,
including the fitting of non-IBM option cards.
This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for Class A
Information Technology Equipment according to European standard EN
55022. The limits for Class A equipment were derived for commercial and
industrial environments to provide reasonable protection against interference
with licensed communication devices.

WARNING
This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference
in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.
Communication Statements

Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used in order
to reduce the potential for causing interference to radio and TV
communications and to other electrical or electronic equipment. IBM cannot
accept responsibility for any interference caused by using other than
recommended cables and connectors.

Industry Canada Compliance Statement

This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe A conform á la norme
NMB-003 du Canada.

Statement of CISPR 22 Edition 2 Compliance

Attention: This is a Class A Product. In a domestic environment this product
may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take
adequate measures.

Japanese VCCI Class A

Japan JEITA Statement

533
 Notices

German Conformity Statement

Handbuchtexte: FCC class A entspricht: EMVG Klasse A
Text Für alle in Deutschland vertriebenen EN 55022 Klasse A Geräte:
Zulassungsbescheinigung laut dem Deutschen Gesetz über die
elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit von Geräten (EMVG) vom 18. September
1998 (bzw. der EMC EG Richtlinie 89/336):
Dieses Gerät ist berechtigt in Übereinstimmung mit dem Deutschen EMVG
das EG-Konformitätszeichen - CE - zu führen. Verantwortlich für die
Konformitätserklärung nach Paragraph 5 des EMVG ist die: IBM Deutschland
GmbH, 70548 Stuttgart. Informationen in Hinsicht EMVG Paragraph 4 Abs.
(1) 4:
Das Gerät erfüllt die Schutzanforderungen nach EN 55024 und EN 55022
Klasse A.
EN 55022 Klasse A Geräte müssen mit folgendem Warnhinweis versehen
werden: “Warnung: dies ist eine Einrichtung der Klasse A. Diese Einrichtung
kann im Wohnbereich Funkstörungen verursachen; in diesem Fall kann vom
Betreiber verlangt werden, angemessene Maßnahmen durchzuführen und
dafür aufzukommen.”
EN 55024 Hinweis:
Wird dieses Gerät in einer industriellen Umgebung betrieben (wie in EN
55024 festgelegt), dann kann es dabei eventuell gestört werden. In solch
einem Fall ist der Abstand bzw. die Abschirmung zu der industriellen
Störquelle zu öergrvßern.
Anmerkung:
Um die Einhaltung des EMVG sicherzustellen sind die Geräte, wie in den IBM
Handbüchern angegeben, zu installieren und zu betreiben.

China
Declaration:
This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause
radio interference in which case the user may need to perform practical
actions.
Communication Statements

Taiwannese
Warning:
This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause
radio interference in which case the user will be required to take adequate
measures.

Korea

CAUTION:
This product is equipped with a 3-wire power cord and plug for the user’s
safety. Use this power cord in conjunction with a properly grounded electrical
outlet to avoid electrical shock.
 Notices

Software License Agreement

Your printer contains, among other software, Printronix operating software
including, but not limited to the Embedded Configurable Operating System
(the “eCos Software”) as embedded software. The terms of this Agreement
apply only to the eCos Software, and all other embedded software supplied
with the printer. You accept the terms of this Agreement by your initial use of
your printer.
1. Object Code License.
Printronix grants you a nonexclusive license to use the Printronix Software,
the eCos Software and all other embedded software (collectively, the
“Embedded Software” or the “Software”) only in conjunction with the printer.
As the rightful possessor of the printer, you may make a reasonable number
of copies of the Software as necessary for backup, configuration, and
restoration of the printer. You must reproduce the copyright notice and any
other legend of ownership on each copy of the Software you make.
You may transfer possession of the Software and its media to another party
only with the transfer of the printer on which the Software is used. If you do
so, you must give the other party a copy of these terms and provide all user
documentation to that party. When you do so, you must destroy any copies of
Software not resident in the printer.
Your license for the Software terminates when you no longer rightfully
possess the printer. No other rights under this license are granted.
2. Source Code
A source code version of eCos Software is available under the terms of the
Red Hat eCos Public License v1.1 at www.printronix.com. Printronix grants
no rights whatsoever in the source code for the Printronix Software.
3. No Warranty
THE EMBEDDED SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED UNDER THIS LICENSE ON
AN "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER
EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION,
WARRANTIES THAT THE EMBEDDED SOFTWARE IS FREE OF
DEFECTS, MERCHANTABLE, FIT FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR
NON-INFRINGING. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND
PERFORMANCE OF THE EMBEDDED SOFTWARE IS WITH YOU.
SHOULD ANY OF THE EMBEDDED SOFTWARE PROVE DEFECTIVE IN
ANY RESPECT, YOU (NOT RED HAT, PRINTRONIX, ANY OTHER
CONTRIBUTOR OR ANY DISTRIBUTOR) ASSUME THE COST OF ANY
NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. THIS DISCLAIMER
OF WARRANTY CONSTITUTES AN ESSENTIAL PART OF THIS LICENSE.
NO USE OF ANY OF THE EMBEDDED SOFTWARE IS AUTHORIZED
HEREUNDER EXCEPT UNDER THIS DISCLAIMER.
Software License Agreement

4. Conflicting Terms
You agree that this Agreement provides you no more rights with regards to
warranty, support, indemnity or liability terms with respect to Red Hat, Inc.,
Printronix, Inc. or any contributor to the Embedded Software than that
provided by the Red Hat eCos Public License v.1.1 or any express warranty
that may be made by Printronix, Inc.
5. Limitation of Liability
UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES AND UNDER NO LEGAL THEORY,
WHETHER TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), CONTRACT, OR
OTHERWISE, SHALL RED HAT, PRINTRONIX, ANY OTHER
CONTRIBUTOR, OR ANY DISTRIBUTOR OF THE EMBEDDED
SOFTWARE, OR ANY PART THEREOF, OR ANY SUPPLIER OF ANY OF
SUCH PARTIES, BE LIABLE TO YOU OR ANY OTHER PERSON FOR ANY
INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF
ANY CHARACTER INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR
LOSS OF GOODWILL, WORK STOPPAGE, COMPUTER FAILURE OR
MALFUNCTION, OR ANY AND ALL OTHER COMMERCIAL DAMAGES OR
LOSSES, EVEN IF SUCH PARTY SHALL HAVE BEEN INFORMED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. THIS LIMITATION OF LIABILITY
SHALL NOT APPLY TO LIABILITY FOR DEATH OR PERSONAL INJURY
RESULTING FROM SUCH PARTY'S NEGLIGENCE TO THE EXTENT
APPLICABLE LAW PROHIBITS SUCH LIMITATION. SOME
JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF
INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THAT EXCLUSION
AND LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
6. U.S. Government Users
The Embedded Software is a "commercial item," as that term is defined in 48
C.F.R. 2.101 (Oct. 1995), consisting of "commercial computer software" and
"commercial computer software documentation," as such terms are used in
48 C.F.R. 12.212 (Sept. 1995). Consistent with 48 C.F.R. 12.212 and 48
C.F.R. 227.7202-1 through 227.7202-4 (June 1995), all U.S. Government End
Users acquire Covered Code with only those rights set forth herein.
7. Miscellaneous
This Agreement represents the complete agreement concerning subject
matter hereof. If any provision of this Agreement is held to be unenforceable,
such provision shall be reformed only to the extent necessary to make it
enforceable. This Agreement shall be governed by California law provisions
(except to the extent applicable law, if any, provides otherwise), excluding its
conflict-of-law provisions.
 Notices

8. Red Hat Statement with regards to eCos Software

Part of the software embedded in this product is eCos - Embedded
Configurable Operating System, a trademark of Red Hat. Portions created by
Red Hat are Copyright (C) 1998, 1999, 2000 Red Hat, Inc.
(http://www.redhat.com) All Rights Reserved.
THE SOFTWARE IN THIS PRODUCT WAS IN PART PROVIDED BY RED
HAT AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY
OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT
OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
 Product Registration Information

Product Registration Information

Special Offers at the

IBM Product Registration Web site

By registering your printer or multifunction device with IBM today:

• Take advantage of special offers
• Registration is quick, easy and on-line
• Quick links to other IBM on-line sites: new promotions, drivers, software,
and more!
Register your new IBM printer today:
www.ibm.com/printers/register
N’attendez pas! Enregistrez votre nouvelle imprimante ou votre dispositif
multifunction sur www.ibm.com/printers/register
Jetzt registristrieen! Registrieren Sie Ihren neuen IBM Drucker oder Ihr neues
Multifunktionsgerät. Registrieren Sie Ihren: www.ibm.com/printers/register
Registra subito la tua nuova stampante sul sito: www.ibm.com/printers/
register
¡Registtresse ahora! Registre su nueva impresora IBM, o su nueva opción
multifunctional en: www.ibm.com/printers/register
Registreer nu! Registreer uw nieuwe printer of multifunktionele apparaten op
www.ibm.com/printers/register
Registe agora! Registe a sua nova impressora ou o seu novo equipamento
multifuncional IBM em:
www.ibm.com/printers/register
 Notices

www.ibm.com/printers/register
Product Registration Information
 Table Of Contents

1 Introduction ........................................................... 33
About This Manual..................................................................................33
Warnings And Special Information ...................................................34
Related Documentation....................................................................34
The IBM 6500-v ASCII Line Matrix Printer..............................................34
Host Interfaces And Emulations .............................................................35
Host Computer Interfaces ................................................................35
Printer Emulations ............................................................................35
Standard 6500-v Printer Features ..........................................................35
Text Formatting and Language Options...........................................35
Graphics And Vertical Formatting ....................................................36
Diagnostics.......................................................................................36
Line Matrix Printing Overview .................................................................37
Printing Speed ........................................................................................38

2 IBM Proprinter III XL Emulation ............................ 39

Overview.................................................................................................39
Default Values And States ...............................................................40
Proprinter III XL Emulation Exceptions and Differences ..................41
Combining Print Modes ....................................................................42
Configuring The Proprinter Emulation With Control Codes ....................44
Format For Control Code Descriptions.............................................44
Escape Control Codes Overview .....................................................44
Graphics Control Codes Overview ...................................................45
The Control Codes ...........................................................................51
Backspace........................................................................................53
Bell ...................................................................................................53
Bit Image Mode, Single Density (Normal Speed).............................54
Bit Image Mode, Double Density (Half Speed).................................55
Bit Image Mode, Double Density (Normal Speed) ...........................56
Bit Image Mode, Quadruple Density (Half Speed) ...........................57
Bold Printing .....................................................................................58
Bold Printing, Cancel........................................................................58
Cancel ..............................................................................................59
Carriage Return................................................................................59
Carriage Return Set .........................................................................59

19
 Table of Contents

Character Pitch 12 cpi...................................................................... 60

Character Set Select: Set 1 (A) ........................................................60
Character Set Select: Set 2 (B) ........................................................60
Condensed Print .............................................................................. 61
Condensed Print Cancel .................................................................. 62
Deselect Printer................................................................................ 62
Double Wide Print ............................................................................63
Double Wide Print (One Line Only) ..................................................64
Double Wide Print (One Line Only) Cancel...................................... 65
Emphasized Print ............................................................................. 65
Emphasized Print Cancel ................................................................. 66
Form Feed........................................................................................ 66
Forms Length Set In Inches ............................................................. 66
Forms Length Set In Lines ...............................................................67
Initialize Parameters......................................................................... 68
Line Feed .........................................................................................71
Line Feed n/216 Inch (One Line Only) ............................................. 71
Line Spacing 1/8 Inch (8 lpi)............................................................. 72
Line Spacing 7/72 Inch (10.3 lpi)...................................................... 73
Line Spacing n/72 Inch (Executes) ..................................................74
Line Spacing n/72 Inch (Storage)..................................................... 75
Line Spacing n/216 Inch................................................................... 76
Margin, Bottom ................................................................................. 76
Margin, Bottom (Cancel) .................................................................. 77
Margins, Horizontal .......................................................................... 77
Overscoring ...................................................................................... 78
Print All Characters .......................................................................... 78
Print Next Character......................................................................... 79
Print Mode ........................................................................................ 79
Print Quality...................................................................................... 80
Proportional Spacing........................................................................ 81
Select Attributes ............................................................................... 82
Superscript/Subscript Printing.......................................................... 84
Superscript/Subscript Printing, Cancel............................................. 85
Super-Set Commands...................................................................... 85
Set Top-of-Form ............................................................................... 85
Tab, Horizontal ................................................................................. 86
Tab Set/Clear, Horizontal ................................................................. 86
Tab, Vertical ..................................................................................... 87
Tab Set/Clear, Vertical .....................................................................88
Tabs, Clear All (Return to Default) ................................................... 88

20
 Table of Contents

Underline ..........................................................................................89
Unidirectional Printing ......................................................................89

3 Epson FX-1050 Emulation .................................... 91

Overview.................................................................................................91
Default Values And States ...............................................................92
Epson Emulation Exceptions And Differences .................................94
Epson Character Sets ......................................................................95
Configuring The Epson FX-1050 Emulation With Control Codes ...........96
Format for Control Code Descriptions..............................................96
Escape Sequences ..........................................................................96
Set And Reset Codes.......................................................................97
NUL Code ........................................................................................97
Print Modes Supported For Character Sets .....................................97
The Control Codes .........................................................................100
Backspace......................................................................................102
Bell .................................................................................................103
Cancel Line ....................................................................................103
Carriage Return..............................................................................103
Character Pitch 10 CPI ..................................................................103
Character Pitch 12 CPI ..................................................................104
Character Pitch 15 CPI ..................................................................104
Character Set Select: International Languages..............................104
Clear Bit 7 Of Incoming Data Bytes To 0 .......................................106
Condensed Print ............................................................................106
Condensed Print Reset ..................................................................107
Cut-Sheet / Paper Feed Control.....................................................107
Define a Download Character ........................................................107
Delete Character ............................................................................108
Double High Print, Set/Reset .........................................................108
Double Strike..................................................................................109
Double Strike, Cancel ....................................................................109
Double Wide Print ..........................................................................110
Double Wide Print (1 Line) .............................................................111
Double Wide Print (1 Line), Cancel ................................................111
Emphasized Print ...........................................................................112
Emphasized Print, Cancel ..............................................................112
Enable Printing Hex Codes 00-1F and 80-9F ................................113
Form Feed......................................................................................113
Graphics, Standard Density ...........................................................115
Graphics, Double Density...............................................................116
Graphics, Double Density Double Speed.......................................117

21
 Table of Contents

Graphics, Quadruple Density ......................................................... 118

Half Speed Mode, On/Off............................................................... 118
Horizontal Tab Execute .................................................................. 119
Horizontal Tab Set/Release ........................................................... 119
Initialize Printer............................................................................... 120
Italic Printing................................................................................... 120
Italic Printing, Cancel ..................................................................... 120
Line Feed .......................................................................................121
Line Feed n/216 Inch ..................................................................... 121
Line Spacing 1/6 Inch (6 lpi)........................................................... 122
Line Spacing 1/8 Inch (8 lpi)........................................................... 122
Line Spacing 7/72 Inch...................................................................123
Line Spacing n/216 Inch................................................................. 123
Line Spacing n/72 Inch...................................................................124
Make Hex 80-9F Control Codes..................................................... 124
Make Hex 80-9F Printable .............................................................125
Master Print Select ......................................................................... 127
Paper Out Detection, Enable ......................................................... 127
Paper Out Detection, Disable......................................................... 128
Pass Bit 7 From Host ..................................................................... 128
Printer Select.................................................................................. 128
Printer Deselect.............................................................................. 128
Reassign Graphics Mode............................................................... 129
Remove Downloaded Characters .................................................. 129
Reverse Line Spacing n/216 Inch .................................................. 129
Select Graphics Mode.................................................................... 130
Select Italic Character Set.............................................................. 131
Select 9-Pin Graphics Mode .......................................................... 131
Select Print Quality......................................................................... 131
Select/Deselect Proportional Spacing ............................................ 132
Select Serif Or Sans Serif Font ......................................................132
Select User-Defined Font............................................................... 132
Select Vertical Tab Channel........................................................... 133
Set Absolute Horizontal Print Position In 1/60 Inch........................ 133
Set Bit 7 Of Incoming Data Bytes To 1 .......................................... 133
Set Relative Horizontal Print Position in 1/120 Inch ....................... 133
Set Intercharacter Spacing In 1/120 Inch ....................................... 134
Set Margin, Left.............................................................................. 134
Set Margin, Right ........................................................................... 134
Set Forms Length By Lines ............................................................ 135
Set Form Length In Inches .............................................................135
Set Vertical Tabs In Channels........................................................ 136

22
 Table of Contents

Skip Over Perforation .....................................................................136

Skip Over Perforation, Cancel........................................................137
Superscript/Subscript Printing ........................................................137
Superscript/Subscript Printing, Cancel...........................................138
Super-Set Commands....................................................................138
Underline ........................................................................................139
Unidirectional Printing, 1 Line.........................................................139
Unidirectional Printing, Set/Reset...................................................139
Vertical Tab, Execute .....................................................................140
Vertical Tab, Set/Clear ...................................................................140

4 P-Series Printer Emulation.................................. 141

Overview...............................................................................................141
P-Series Default Values And States...............................................142
Configuring The P-Series Emulation With Control Codes ....................144
Format For Control Code Descriptions...........................................144
Special Function Control Code (SFCC) Header.............................144
The Control Codes .........................................................................148
Backspace......................................................................................151
Bell .................................................................................................151
Bold Print........................................................................................151
Bold Print Reset .............................................................................152
Carriage Return..............................................................................152
Character Set Select ......................................................................153
Characters 80-9F (Control Codes) .................................................155
Characters 80-9F (Printable Symbols) ...........................................155
Character Set Select: ECMA 94 Latin 1 Extended.........................156
Character Set Select: International Languages..............................157
Download A Character Set Overlay ...............................................158
Elongated (Double High) Print, 1 Line Only ...................................160
Elongated (Double High) Print, Set/Reset......................................161
Emphasized Print ...........................................................................162
Emphasized Print Reset.................................................................162
Emulation Reset .............................................................................163
Expanded Print (Double Wide).......................................................163
Expanded Print (Double Wide), 1 Line Only...................................164
Extended Character Set .................................................................164
Extended Character Set Cancel (Primary Set Select)....................165
Form Feed......................................................................................165
Forms Length Set (Inches).............................................................166
Forms Length Set (Lines)...............................................................166
Form Margins, Set..........................................................................167

23
 Table of Contents

Line Feed .......................................................................................168

Line Spacing 1/6 Inch (6 lpi)........................................................... 168
Line Spacing 1/8 Inch (8 lpi)........................................................... 169
Line Spacing 8 or 10.3 lpi (1 Line Only) ......................................... 169
Line Spacing 7/72 Inch...................................................................170
Line Spacing n/72 Inch...................................................................171
Line Spacing n/216 Inch................................................................. 171
Overscoring .................................................................................... 172
Plot, Even Dot (P-Series High Density Graphics) .......................... 173
Plot, Odd Dot (P-Series Normal Density Graphics) ....................... 173
Print Mode/Pitch Selection .............................................................173
Reverse.......................................................................................... 176
Select Attributes ............................................................................. 177
Superscript/Subscript Printing........................................................ 178
Superscript/Subscript Printing Reset ............................................. 179
Super-Set Commands.................................................................... 179
Underline........................................................................................ 180
VFU Commands (P-Series) ........................................................... 180
Vertical Tab .................................................................................... 180

5 Serial Matrix Printer Emulation............................ 181

Overview............................................................................................... 181
Serial Matrix Default Values And States ........................................ 182
Configuring The Serial Matrix Emulation With
Control Codes.......................................................................................184
Format For Control Code Descriptions .......................................... 184
Special Function Control Code (SFCC) ......................................... 184
Attribute Set And Reset Codes ......................................................185
NUL Code ...................................................................................... 185
Print Modes Supported For Character Sets ...................................185
The Control Codes ......................................................................... 188
Backspace...................................................................................... 190
Bell ................................................................................................. 190
Bit Image Mode, Single Density ..................................................... 191
Bit Image Mode, Double Density.................................................... 191
Bit Image Mode, Double Density Double Speed ............................ 192
Bit Image Mode, Quadruple Density .............................................. 192
Bold Print Set ................................................................................. 193
Bold Print Reset ............................................................................. 193
Cancel ............................................................................................ 194
Carriage Return.............................................................................. 194
Character Pitch 10 CPI .................................................................. 195

24
 Table of Contents

Character Pitch 12 CPI ..................................................................195

Character Set Select ......................................................................195
Characters 80-9F (Control Codes) .................................................197
Characters 80-9F (Printable Symbols) ...........................................197
Characters 80-9F (Printable Symbols) ...........................................198
Character Set Select: International Languages..............................198
Condensed Print ............................................................................200
Condensed Print Reset ..................................................................200
Delete .............................................................................................201
Elongated (Double High) Print (One Line Only) .............................201
Elongated (Double High) Print, Set/Reset......................................202
Emphasized Print ...........................................................................202
Emphasized Print Reset.................................................................203
Emulation Reset .............................................................................203
Expanded (Double Wide) Print.......................................................204
Expanded (Double Wide) Print (One Line Only) ............................204
Extended Character Set .................................................................205
Extended Character Set Cancel (Primary Character Set Select)...206
Form Feed......................................................................................206
Forms Length Set (Inches).............................................................207
Forms Length Set (Lines)...............................................................208
Form Margins, Set..........................................................................208
Horizontal Tab ................................................................................209
Horizontal Tab Set .........................................................................210
Line Feed .......................................................................................210
Line Feed n/216 Inch (One Line Only) ...........................................211
Line Spacing 1/6 Inch (6 lpi)...........................................................212
Line Spacing 1/8 Inch (8 lpi)...........................................................212
Line Spacing 7/72 Inch...................................................................213
Line Spacing n/72 Inch...................................................................214
Line Spacing n/216 Inch.................................................................215
Overscoring ....................................................................................215
Print Mode/Pitch Selection .............................................................216
Printer Select..................................................................................218
Printer Deselect..............................................................................218
Reverse ..........................................................................................219
Skip-Over Perforation.....................................................................219
Skip-Over Perforation Cancel.........................................................219
Superscript/Subscript Printing ........................................................220
Superscript/Subscript Printing Reset..............................................220
Super-Set Commands....................................................................221
Underline ........................................................................................221

25
 Table of Contents

Vertical Tab .................................................................................... 222

Vertical Tab, Set/Clear ...................................................................223

6 P-Series XQ Variant Printer Emulation ............... 225

Overview............................................................................................... 225
P-Series XQ Variant Default Values And States ............................ 226
Configuring The XQ Variant Emulation With Control Codes ................228
Format For Control Code Descriptions .......................................... 228
Edit Mode .......................................................................................229
NUL Code ...................................................................................... 229
The Control Codes ......................................................................... 230
Alternate Character Set Deselect (Shift In) .................................... 231
Alternate Character Set Select (Shift Out) ..................................... 231
Carriage Return.............................................................................. 232
Compressed Print ..........................................................................233
Delete .............................................................................................234
Electronic Vertical Format Unit (EVFU).......................................... 234
Elongated Characters (Double High Print) ..................................... 235
Form Feed...................................................................................... 236
Line Feed .......................................................................................236
Line Spacing (8 or 10.3 LPI) .......................................................... 237
Plot, Even Dot (P-Series XQ High Density Graphics) .................... 238
Plot, Odd Dot (P-Series XQ Normal Density Graphics) ................. 238
Select Draft Print ............................................................................ 239
Space .............................................................................................239
Underline........................................................................................ 240
Vertical Tab .................................................................................... 240

7 Super-Set Programming ..................................... 241

Introduction ........................................................................................... 241
Using the Super-Set Commands .......................................................... 241
Character Sets ............................................................................... 242
Character Spacing n/240 Inch........................................................ 245
Line Spacing n/288 Inch................................................................. 245
Printer Protocol Select ...................................................................246
Bar Codes.............................................................................................247
Bar Code Format............................................................................ 248
Codabar ......................................................................................... 252
Code 39.......................................................................................... 257
Code 93.......................................................................................... 259
Code 128........................................................................................ 265
EAN 8 .............................................................................................270
EAN 13........................................................................................... 271

26
 Table of Contents

FIM .................................................................................................272
Interleaved 2/5 (I-2/5), German I-2/5, and ITF-14 ..........................274
Interleaved 2/5 (I-2/5) .....................................................................280
MSI .................................................................................................281
PDF417 ..........................................................................................286
PostBar and Royal Mail (KIX).........................................................292
POSTNET ......................................................................................296
Royal Mail ......................................................................................298
Telepen ..........................................................................................299
UCC/EAN-128 ................................................................................305
UPC-A ............................................................................................317
UPC-E ............................................................................................318
UPC Shipping.................................................................................321
UPS 11 ...........................................................................................322

8 Graphics.............................................................. 327
Overview...............................................................................................327
Bit Image Graphics ...............................................................................327
Designing A Bit Image Pattern .......................................................329
Bit Image Density ...........................................................................329
Plot Mode..............................................................................................332
Plot Density ....................................................................................332
Plot Data Byte Format ....................................................................333
Plot Data Line Format ....................................................................334
Plotting The Data ...........................................................................337
Exiting From P-Series/P-Series XQ Variant Plot Mode..................338
Combining Graphics And Text..............................................................338
Plot Data Byte Dot Patterns ...........................................................339

9 Vertical Page Formatting .................................... 341

Overview...............................................................................................341
Planning A Vertical Page Format..........................................................341
VFU Characteristics .......................................................................342
Vertical Tab Table For Proprinter, Epson, And Serial Matrix................342
Executing Vertical Tabs .................................................................342
Vertical Tab Positions ....................................................................343
EVFU For P-Series And P-Series XQ Variant Emulations ...................344
Start Load Code - Hex 1E or 6E ....................................................344
Channel Assignment ......................................................................344
End Load - Hex 1F Or 6F ...............................................................345
Using The EVFU ............................................................................345
Clearing the EVFU Memory ...........................................................347
Relative Line Slewing .....................................................................348

27
 Table of Contents

A Migration To The IBM 6500-v Printer .................. 351

Overview............................................................................................... 351
Documentation Related To Migration............................................. 352
Migration Checklist ............................................................................... 352
Printer–Specific Migration Information.................................................. 353
Migrating From P4280 And P9212 ASCII Printers ......................... 357
Migrating from P9012 ASCII Printers ............................................. 364
Migrating From P3000 ASCII Printers ............................................ 370
Migrating From P6000 ASCII Printers ............................................ 375
Migrating From MVP–Series ASCII Printers .................................. 384
Migrating From P300/P600 ASCII Printers .................................... 393
Selecting A Communications Interface And Cables .............................406
Troubleshooting .................................................................................... 407
Contacting IBM Technical Support ....................................................... 410

B Attaching Host Systems To An ASCII Printer ..... 411

Overview............................................................................................... 411
Attaching A DOS Workstation............................................................... 411
Attaching A Windows Workstation........................................................ 413
Attaching An AIX Workstation............................................................... 415
Installing An AIX Printer Device ..................................................... 416
Adding A Virtual Printer To AIX ......................................................417
Printing To An AIX Attached Printer ............................................... 419
Attaching An iSeries ASCII Workstation Controller .............................. 424
Host-Directed Printing .................................................................... 424
Host Print Transform ...................................................................... 424

C PTR_SETUP Option ........................................... 427

Overview............................................................................................... 427
The PTR_SETUP Commands .............................................................. 427
Commands ..................................................................................... 428

D ASCII Character Set............................................ 433

E Proprinter III XL Character Sets .......................... 435

Overview............................................................................................... 435
0437 PC CHARACTER SET 1....................................................... 436
0737 GREEK.................................................................................. 437
0813 GREEK.................................................................................. 438
0819 ISO/ANSI MULTILINGUAL ................................................... 439
0850 PC MULTILINGUAL .............................................................. 440
0851 GREEK OLD ......................................................................... 441

28
 Table of Contents

0852 LATIN 2/ROECE ...................................................................442

0853 LATIN 3 PC ...........................................................................443
0855 CYRILLIC ..............................................................................444
0857 TURKISH ..............................................................................445
0858 PC EURO MULTILINGUAL...................................................446
0860 PORTUGUESE .....................................................................447
0861 ICELANDIC ...........................................................................448
0862 HEBREW ..............................................................................449
0863 CANADIAN FRENCH............................................................450
0864 ARABIC .................................................................................451
0865 DANISH/NORWEGIAN .........................................................452
0866 CYRILLIC ..............................................................................453
0869 GREEK NEW ........................................................................454
0874 THAI ......................................................................................455
0876 OCR A ...................................................................................456
0877 OCR B ...................................................................................457
0912 ISO LATIN 2 PC ....................................................................458
0913 ISO LATIN 3 ..........................................................................459
0914 ISO LATIN 4 ..........................................................................460
0915 ISO CYRILLIC PC .................................................................461
0916 HEBREW ..............................................................................462
0920 ISO LATIN 5 TURKISH .........................................................463
0921 ISO BALTIC MULTILINGUAL ...............................................464
0922 ESTONIAN ............................................................................465
0923 LATIN 9 8859-15 ...................................................................466
1006 ISO URDU.............................................................................467
1008 ISO ARABIC..........................................................................468
1045 ARABIC EXTENDED ............................................................469
1098 FARSI 1285 (PC) ..................................................................470
1116 ESTONIAN ............................................................................471
1117 LATVIAN ...............................................................................472
1118 LITHUANIAN .........................................................................473
1129 VIETNAMESE .......................................................................474
1134 HEBREW OLD ......................................................................475

29
 Table of Contents

F Epson FX-1050 Emulation Character Sets ......... 477

Overview............................................................................................... 477
OCR A ............................................................................................ 478
OCR B ............................................................................................ 479
0437 PC CHARACTER SET.......................................................... 480
0737 GREEK.................................................................................. 481
0813 GREEK.................................................................................. 482
0819 ISO/ANSI MULTILINGUAL ................................................... 483
0850 PC MULTILINGUAL .............................................................. 484
0851 GREEK OLD ......................................................................... 485
0852 LATIN 2/ROECE ...................................................................486
0853 LATIN 3 PC ........................................................................... 487
0855 CYRILLIC .............................................................................. 488
0857 TURKISH .............................................................................. 489
0858 PC EURO MULTILINGUAL................................................... 490
0860 PORTUGUESE ..................................................................... 491
0861 ICELANDIC ........................................................................... 492
0862 HEBREW .............................................................................. 493
0863 FRENCH CANADIAN............................................................ 494
0864 ARABIC................................................................................. 495
0865 DANISH/NORWEGIAN ......................................................... 496
0866 CYRILLIC .............................................................................. 497
0869 GREEK NEW ........................................................................ 498
0874 THAI ...................................................................................... 499
0912 ISO LATIN 2 PC.................................................................... 500
0913 ISO LATIN 3 ..........................................................................501
0914 ISO LATIN 4 ..........................................................................502
0915 ISO CYRILLIC PC ................................................................. 503
0916 HEBREW .............................................................................. 504
0920 ISO LATIN 5 TURKISH ......................................................... 505
0921 ISO BALTIC MULTILINGUAL ............................................... 506
0922 ESTONIAN............................................................................ 507
0923 LATIN 9 8859-15 ...................................................................508
1006 ISO URDU............................................................................. 509
1008 ISO ARABIC..........................................................................510
1046 ARABIC EXTENDED ............................................................ 511
1089 ISO ARABIC..........................................................................512
1098 FARSI 1285........................................................................... 513
1116 ESTONIAN............................................................................ 514
1117 LATVIAN ............................................................................... 515
1118 LITHUANIAN ......................................................................... 516
1129 VIETNAMESE ....................................................................... 517

30
 Table of Contents

1134 HEBREW OLD ......................................................................518

EPSON SET, ASCII (USA).............................................................519
EPSON SET, FRENCH..................................................................520
EPSON SET, GERMAN .................................................................521
EPSON SET, ENGLISH (UK).........................................................522
EPSON SET, DANISH I .................................................................523
EPSON SET, SWEDISH ................................................................524
EPSON SET, ITALIAN ...................................................................525
EPSON SET, SPANISH I ...............................................................526
EPSON SET, JAPANESE ..............................................................527
EPSON SET, NORWEGIAN ..........................................................528
EPSON SET, DANISH II ................................................................529
EPSON SET, SPANISH II ..............................................................530
EPSON SET, LATIN AMERICAN I.................................................531
EPSON SET, FRENCH CANADIAN ..............................................532
EPSON SET, LATIN AMERICAN II................................................533

G P–Series And Serial Matrix Character Sets ........ 535

Overview...............................................................................................535
IBM PC, PRIMARY SUBSET: ASCII (USA) ...................................536
IBM PC, PRIMARY SUBSET: FRENCH ........................................537
IBM PC, PRIMARY SUBSET: GERMAN .......................................538
IBM PC, PRIMARY SUBSET: ENGLISH (UK) ...............................539
IBM PC, PRIMARY SUBSET: DANISH..........................................540
IBM PC, PRIMARY SUBSET: SWEDISH ......................................541
IBM PC, PRIMARY SUBSET: ITALIAN..........................................542
IBM PC, PRIMARY SUBSET: SPANISH .......................................543
IBM PC, PRIMARY SUBSET: JAPANESE ....................................544
IBM PC, PRIMARY SUBSET: FRENCH CANADIAN.....................545
IBM PC, PRIMARY SUBSET: LATIN AMERICAN .........................546
IBM PC, PRMARY SUBSET: DANISH II........................................547
IBM PC, PRIMARY SUBSET: SPANISH II ....................................548
IBM PC, PRIMARY SUBSET: LATIN AMERICAN II ......................549
IBM PC, EXTENDED SUBSET: 0437 PC CHARACTER SET.......550
IBM PC, EXTENDED SUBSET:0850 PC MULTILINGUAL............551
MULITNATIONAL, ASCII (USA) ....................................................552
MULTINATIONAL, EBCDIC ...........................................................553
ECMA LATIN 1, PRIMARY SUBSET: ASCII (USA).......................554
ECMA LATIN 1, PRIMARY SUBSET: GERMAN ...........................555
ECMA LATIN 1, PRIMARY SUBSET: SWEDISH ..........................556
ECMA LATIN 1, PRIMARY SUBSET: DANISH .............................557
ECMA LATIM 1, PRIMARY SUBSET: NORWEGIAN ....................558

31
 Table of Contents

ECMA LATIN 1, PRIMARY SUBSET: FINNISH ............................ 559

ECMA LATIN 1, PRIMARY SUBSET: ENGLISH (UK)................... 560
ECMA LATIN 1, PRIMARY SUBSET: DUTCH .............................. 561
ECMA LATIN 1, PRIMARY SUBSET: FRENCH ............................ 562
ECMA LATIN 1, PRIMARY SUBSET: SPANISH ........................... 563
ECMA LATIN 1, PRIMARY SUBSET: ITALIAN .............................564
ECMA LATIN 1, PRIMARY SUBSET: TURKISH ........................... 565
ECMA LATIN 1, PRIMARY SUBSET: JAPANESE ........................ 566
ECMA LATIN 1, EXTENDED SUBSET: MULTINATIONAL ........... 567
ECMA LATIN 1, EXTENDED SUBSET: BARCODE ......................568
ECMA LATIN 1, EXTENDED SUBSET: GREEK ........................... 569
ECMA LATIN 1, EXTENDED SUBSET: GRAPHIC ....................... 570
ECMA LATIN 1, EXTENDED SUBSET: SCIENTIFIC.................... 571
DEC MULTINATIONAL, ASCII (USA)............................................ 572
DEC MULTINATIONAL, FRENCH ................................................. 573
DEC MULTINATIONAL, GERMAN ................................................574
DEC MULTINATIONAL, ENGLISH (UK)........................................ 575
DEC MULTINATIONAL, NORWEGIAN/DANISH........................... 576
DEC MULTINATIONAL, SWEDISH ............................................... 577
DEC MULTINATIONAL, ITALIAN .................................................. 578
DEC MULTINATIONAL, SPANISH ................................................579
DEC MULTINATIONAL, JAPANESE ............................................. 580
DEC MULTINATIONAL, FRENCH CANADIAN .............................581
DEC MULTINATIONAL, DUTCH ................................................... 582
DEC MULTINATIONAL, FINNISH ................................................. 583
DEC MULTINATIONAL, SWISS .................................................... 584

Glossary .............................................................. 585

32
 1 Introduction

About This Manual

This manual is designed so that you can quickly find the information you need
to program the IBM ASCII 6500-v printer. Brief descriptions follow for each
chapter in this book:
• Chapter One, Introduction. Provides an overview of this book, printer
features, and line matrix printing technology.
• Chapter Two, IBM Proprinter* III XL Emulation. Describes the
Proprinter III XL control code commands that you can send to the printer
through the host data stream. These commands allow you to send
instructions to the printer and configure many Proprinter III XL emulation
parameters.
• Chapter Three, Epson** FX-1050 Emulation. Explains the Epson
control code commands that you can send to the printer through the host
data stream. These commands allow you to send instructions to the
printer and configure many Epson FX emulation parameters.
• Chapter Four, P-Series Emulation. Covers the P-Series control code
commands that you can send to the printer through the host data stream.
These commands allow you to send instructions to the printer and
configure many P-Series emulation parameters.
• Chapter Five, Serial Matrix Emulation. This emulation can be used only
with IBM 6500-v printers. Covers the Serial Matrix control code
commands that you can send to the printer through the host data stream.
These commands allow you to send instructions to the printer and
configure many Serial Matrix emulation parameters.
• Chapter Six, P-Series XQ Variant Emulation. This emulation can be
used only with IBM 6500-v printers. Covers the P-Series XQ Variant
control code commands that you can send to the printer through the host
data stream. These commands allow you to send instructions to the
printer and configure many XQ emulation parameters.
• Chapter Seven, Super-Set Programming. Covers control codes
introduced by the Super-Set Commands selection. The commands are
sent through the host in the input data stream, and enact the features
described in the following subsections.
• Chapter Eight, Graphics. Consists of overview information about Bit
Image graphics printing and programming. Descriptions are provided for
designing a bit image pattern, using control codes to set bit image
density, and issuing commands for bit image programming. A bit image
sample program is included.

33
Chapter 1 The IBM 6500-v ASCII Line Matrix Printer

• Chapter Nine, Vertical Page Formatting. Includes information on

programming and using vertical format unit (VFU) programs that regulate
vertical paper movement and vertical tabs for printing forms.
• Appendices. Several appendices provide information on migrating from
previous printers to the IBM 6500-v ASCII printer and attaching several
types of host computer to your printer. In addition, codes pages for the
character sets available with each emulation are provided. A Glossary
and Index follow the appendices.

Warnings And Special Information

Information requiring special attention is highlighted under special headings.
Always read and comply with this information. The heading reveals the nature
of the information:
IMPORTANT

Important draws your attention to information vital to proper operation

of the printer.
NOTE: A note gives you helpful tips about printer operation and
maintenance.

Related Documentation
The following manuals provide information that is closely related to the ASCII
emulation information provided in this book:
The IBM Infoprint 6500 Line Matrix Printers User’s Manual describes how to
unpack, install, and configure the 6500-v printer. This manual explains the
menus that allow you to select a printer emulation and configure printer
emulation options. Proprinter III XL, Epson FX-1050, P-Series, Serial Matrix,
and P-Series XQ emulation menu options are described in detail.
The IBM Infoprint 6500 Line Matrix Printers User’s Manual provides
descriptions of the operator panel keys and LCD display. Procedures are
provided for daily printer operations such as loading paper, installing the ink
transport assembly, and cleaning the printer. Some configuration menu
information is provided.

The IBM 6500-v ASCII Line Matrix Printer

The IBM 6500-v printers are line matrix printers. They use a variable-speed
shuttle, micro-step paper feed control, and multi-phase hammer firing to
generate a wide range of horizontal and vertical dot densities with no speed
penalties. For a brief discussion of line matrix printing, see page 37.
Most line printers have specialized architectures that enable them to emulate,
(behave like) another printer. These specialized architectures are restricted.
Your IBM printer, however, introduces an open architecture in which many
different emulations may be selected from the operator panel. Proprinter III
XL, Epson FX, P-Series, P-Series XQ Variant, and Serial Matrix emulations
are all provided.

34
 Host Computer Interfaces

Host Interfaces And Emulations

The IBM 6500-v ASCII printer supports several host interfaces and
emulations, as described below.

Host Computer Interfaces

The following host computer interface choices are available:
• PC-Parallel interface
• RS-232 serial interface
• RS-422 serial interface
• Dataproducts** parallel interface

Printer Emulations
Each emulation provides a different set of configuration menus, control codes,
and character sets. The following printer emulations (or protocols) are
selectable at the operator panel:
• Proprinter III XL emulation
• Epson FX emulation
• Serial Matrix emulation
• P-Series emulation
• P-Series XQ Variant emulation
The following printer emulations are available as options:
• PGL** (Printronix** Graphics Language) emulation
• Code V** Graphics Language emulation

Standard 6500-v Printer Features

Several standard features are provided with the IBM ASCII 6500-v printers, as
described below.

Text Formatting and Language Options

You can modify several parameters used primarily for printing text, either by
means of the host data stream or the configuration menus:
• Selectable print quality
• Selectable forms length and width

35
Chapter 1 Standard 6500-v Printer Features

• Character-by-character attribute specification:

Selectable pitch: normal, expanded, and compressed
Emphasized (shadow) print
Bold print
Overscoring
Single underline
Superscript and subscript printing
• Resident multinational character sets

Graphics And Vertical Formatting

Brief descriptions follow for some graphics and vertical format capabilities:
• Bit Image graphics is provided for the Proprinter III XL, Epson FX, and
Serial Matrix emulations.
• Plot mode graphics is provided for the P-Series and P-Series XQ Variant
emulations.
• Programmable electronic vertical formatting provides rapid vertical paper
movement to specified lines for printing repetitive and continuous forms.
The following two methods are provided:
Vertical tab table: a set of programmed vertical tabs for use with the
IBM Proprinter III XL, Epson FX, and Serial Matrix emulations.
Electronic Vertical Format Unit (EVFU): a vertical formatting program
available with the P-Series and P-Series XQ Variant emulations.

Diagnostics
The User’s Manual for each printer discusses the following diagnostic
features in more detail:
• Built-in diagnostic self-tests
• Configuration printout
• Data stream hexadecimal code printout

36
 Diagnostics

Line Matrix Printing Overview

The IBM 6500-v printers are impact printers; they create characters by
printing ink dots on paper. The dots are printed on an invisible matrix mapped
in printer memory. (See Figure 1.) Dot impressions are made by an array of
steel hammers mounted on a rapidly oscillating shuttle. The hammers strike
the paper through a moving ink ribbon.

Matrix visible only to the printer

Figure 1. Dot Matrix Character Formation

Unlike serial dot matrix printers, which form whole characters one at a time
with a moving printhead, the 6500-v printers divide every printable line into
horizontal dot rows. These printers print a dot row of the entire line with every
lateral sweep of the shuttle. (See Figure 2.)
During each sweep of the shuttle, the hammers print dots at the required
positions in the dot row. When the shuttle reaches the end of a sweep, it
reverses direction, the paper is advanced one dot row, and the hammers print
the next row of dots as the shuttle sweeps in the opposite direction.
After a line of characters is printed, hammer action stops while the paper is
advanced to the first dot row of the next print line. The number of rows
allowed for line separation depends on the line spacing you select.

37
Chapter 1 Printing Speed

DIRECTION OF SHUTTLE MOVEMENT

DOT PAPER
ROW START ADVANCES
1
2
3
4
5 PAPER
CHARACTER FEED
6
LINE 7
8 *
9 * *
10
11 SPACE PAPER
ADVANCES
12
1
2

1 HAMMER 1 HAMMER
PRINT SPAN PRINT SPAN

* USED FOR LOWERCASE DESCENDER ONLY

** USED FOR UNDERLINE AND LOWERCASE DESCENDER

Figure 2. Dot Matrix Line Printing

Printing Speed
The speed at which text prints is measured in lines per minute (lpm). This
speed is directly proportional to the number of dot rows required to produce a
character line, regardless of the number of characters in the line. More dot
rows are required to print lowercase characters with descenders;
consequently, those character lines print at a fractionally lower rate.
The IBM 6500-v printers also print dot-addressable graphic images. The
speed at which graphics are plotted is measured in inches per minute (ipm).
Unidirectional plotting produces slightly better print quality, and takes about
twice as long as bidirectional plotting. You can select either plotting mode
from the operator panel.
Printing and plotting rates also vary according to the print quality you select.
Print quality refers to the way you instruct the printer to create characters. If,
for example, you select near letter quality (NLQ), the printer uses more dot
rows to form characters than if you choose high speed (HS) print quality.
Character formation and print speed are faster in HS because the printer uses
fewer dot rows to form characters. Vertical dot density is thus a factor in
printing speed. Nominal printing rates are charted in Appendix A of the IBM
Infoprint 6500 User’s Manual.

38
 2 IBM Proprinter III XL
Emulation

Overview
This chapter describes the Proprinter III XL emulation host control codes that
are supported for the IBM 6500-v printers. Emulation refers to the ability of a
printer to execute the commands of a particular printer control language. A
printer control language is the coding system used to convey, manipulate, and
print data. Carriage Return, print quality, character attributes such as bold and
underline, margins, and tabs are typical functions selected by printer control
language codes. In this manual, the terms emulation, printer protocol, and
printer control language are synonymous.
In Proprinter III XL emulation mode, the 6500-v printers can print files coded
for the Proprinter III XL printer control language. To select the Proprinter III XL
emulation mode as the active printer configuration, refer to the ASCII
Emulation Selection menu option described in Chapter 4 of the IBM Infoprint
6500 Line Matrix Printer User’s Manual.
The Proprinter III XL emulation provides many configurable parameters. The
default parameter values for this emulation are shown in Table 1. You can
modify these parameter values in two ways:
• The Proprinter III XL host control codes. An extensive set of Proprinter
III XL control code commands can be sent to the printer from an attached
host computer via the host data stream. Most of this chapter is devoted to
describing the Proprinter III XL control code commands.
• The printer configuration menus. You can modify a subset of the
Proprinter III XL emulation parameters using the printer configuration
menus, operator panel keys, and LCD display, as described in the User’s
Manual.
Control codes sent from a host system generally override previous settings
that result from the configuration menus. However, any configuration settings
from host control codes will be gone once the printer is powered off (or reset
to the default values), unless you have saved them to NVRAM using the
configuration menus. The User’s Manual describes the Save Custom Sets
option for saving changes to NVRAM.
The emulation’s response to several of the control codes depends on the
configuration. For example, upon receipt of the carriage return control code,
the emulation will perform either a carriage return function only, or a carriage
return and line feed, based on the configuration for the CR function.

39
Chapter 2 Overview

Default Values And States

Your printer memory stores a set of typical operating states and conditions for
the Proprinter III XL emulation. When you power on the printer and select this
emulation, the factory settings in Table 1 are automatically invoked.

Table 1. Proprinter Emulation Default Settings

Characteristic Default Setting

Print Language 0437 PC Character Set

Alternate Character Set PC Character Set

Define CR Code CR = CR

Auto Line Feed Enable

Define LF Code LF =LF

FF Valid at TOF Enable

20 CPI Condensed Enable

40
 Proprinter III XL Emulation Exceptions and Differences

Table 2 lists several additional default settings for parameters that are
provided by the Print Format menus (described in Chapter 4 of the User’s
Manual). Many of the settings shown in Table 2 can be overridden by
Proprinter III XL host control codes for the same parameter.

Table 2. Print Format Default Settings

Characteristic Default Settings

CPI 10.0
LPI 6.0

Forms Width 13.6 inches

345.4 millimeters
136 characters

Forms Length 11.0 inches

279 millimeters
66 lines

Print Quality DP Quality

Proportional Spacing Disable

Italic Print Disable

Slashed Zero Disable

Left Margin 0 columns

Right Margin 0 columns

Bottom Margin 0 lines

Perforation Skip Disable

Proprinter III XL Emulation Exceptions and Differences

Because of mechanical differences between your printer(s) (line matrix
printers) and IBM Proprinters (moving printhead serial matrix printers), some
IBM Proprinter features are approximated or not supported.
• Proprinter codes that produce different behavior in your printer from an
IBM Proprinter are indicated by a “dagger” (†) in the Control Code Index
and code section.
• Table 3 in the following subsection summarizes the results that occur
when several control codes that regulate print attributes such as bold,
condensed print, etc. are combined. The results from the print mode
combinations are shown for both a standard IBM Proprinter and a 6500-v
printer in Proprinter III XL emulation mode. Results that are unique to the
6500-v Proprinter emulation are shown in underlined italics.
• Downloadable and user-defined fonts are not supported for the 6500-v
Proprinter III XL emulation.

41
Chapter 2 Overview

• Emphasized, bold, and double-strike are equivalent in 6500-v printers;

each is implemented differently for the IBM Proprinter.
• When a single backspace control code follows one of the Bit Image
Graphics commands (ESC K, ESC L, ESC Y, ESC Z), IBM 6500-v
printers backspace to the last character position at the end of the graphics
data printout. The IBM Proprinter backspaces to the beginning of the line,
at the beginning of the graphics data.
• After a backspace, IBM 6500-v printers will overstrike a character
preceded by a control code (such as bold or proportional) with a partially
or incorrectly formed letter. The IBM Proprinter overstrikes properly in this
situation.

Combining Print Modes

You can request many print modes (i.e. character attributes such as
compressed, NLQ, and super/subscript printing) via control codes. When
several modes are combined, all may take effect; however, with certain
combinations of print modes, some modes may take priority while others are
ignored.
The results from combining different print modes are shown in Table 3, for the
IBM Proprinter and for the 6500-v printers in Proprinter III XL emulation mode.
6500-v results that differ from the IBM Proprinter results are shown in
underlined italics.

Table 3. Print Mode Priority Table

Print Mode Combination IBM Proprinter Result IBM 6500-v Result

Compressed, 12 CPI 20 CPI 20 CPI 1

(If setting 6 of the Printer
Function Menu is Off.)

12 CPI
(If setting 6 of the Printer
Function Menu is On.)

Compressed, 12 CPI 20 CPI 17.16 CPI NLQ (Serif/Sans

NLQ (Serif/Sans Serif) (If setting 6 of the Printer Serif)
Function Menu is OFF)

12 CPI, NLQ (Serif/Sans

Serif) (If setting 6 of Printer
Function Menu is ON)

Emphasized, Compressed Emphasized Emphasized2, Compressed1

Compressed, NLQ Compressed Compressed, NLQ (Serif/

(Serif/Sans Serif) Sans Serif)
Emphasized, NLQ (Serif/ Emphasized, NLQ Emphasized, NLQ (Serif/
Sans Serif) Compressed (Serif/Sans Serif) Sans Serif), Compressed

42
 Combining Print Modes

Table 3. Print Mode Priority Table (continued)

Print Mode Combination IBM Proprinter Result IBM 6500-v Result

Super/Subscript, Super/Subscript Super/Subscript, Bold2

Double Strike

Super/Subscript, Super/Subscript Super/Subscript,

NLQ (Serif/Sans Serif) (Serif/Sans Serif)
Super/Subscript, Super/Subscript, Graphic with Super/Subscript,
12-High Characters Top 8 Dots Only 12-High Characters3
Over/Underscore, 12-High Characters 12-High Characters
12- High Characters

Double-High, Draft Double-High, NLQ Sans Serif Double-High, Draft

Double-High, 12 CPI Double-High, 10 CPI Double-High, 12 CPI

Double-High, Compressed1 Double-High, 10 CPI Double-High

Double-High, NLQ Serif Double-High, NLQ Sans Serif Double-High, NLQ Serif
Double-High, Double-High, Double-High
Super/Subscript

Double-High, All-Points- All-Points-Addressable All-Points-Addressable

Addressable Graphics Graphics (Single Line Feed) Graphics (Single Line Feed)

NLQ Serif, 12 CPI Bold NLQ Serif, 12 CPI NLQ Serif, 12 CPI, Bold
Double-Wide, NLQ Serif Double-Wide, NLQ Sans Serif Double-Wide4, NLQ Serif

Proportional Space, NLQ Proportional Space, NLQ Proportional Space, NLQ

Serif Sans Serif Serif

Proportional Space, 12 CPI Proportional Space Proportional Space

Proportional Space, Proportional Space Proportional Space

Condensed
1. If the condensed print feature is disabled via the operator panel (described in Chapter 4 of
the User’s Manual), then compressed print will not occur (the default setting for Condensed
Print is enabled). See page 61 for several examples of compressing initial print sizes (5 cpi,
6 cpi, etc.)

2. Emphasized, bold, and double-strike are equivalent for the 6500-v Proprinter III XL
emulation.

3. 12-high characters (with a vertical height of 12 dots) occur in code pages 437 and 850,
positions 176-223 and 244.

4. See page 64 for several examples of expanding initial print sizes (5 cpi, 6 cpi, etc.).

43
Chapter 2 Configuring The Proprinter Emulation With Control Codes

Configuring The Proprinter Emulation With Control Codes

The remainder of this chapter describes the Proprinter III XL printer control
language codes that may be sent from a host computer attached to the
printer, in order to invoke and configure numerous Proprinter III XL emulation
functions.

Format For Control Code Descriptions

The following information is listed for each control code (where applicable):
Name The title or function of the command.
ASCII The ASCII mnemonic for the command. Command
sequences are in 7-bit (ASCII) form.
Hex The code or command sequence in hexadecimal numbers.
Dec The code or command sequence in decimal numbers.
Purpose The function(s) of the control code.
Discussion A discussion of the uses of the code or command sequence,
including exceptions or limitations to its use.
Example A sample output is provided when it is possible to illustrate
the effect of a control code or if a specific syntax is required.

IMPORTANT If you specify any parameters for a control code other than the ones that
are defined in the control code description, unpredictable results may
occur.
NOTE: The PI line is never recognized in Proprinter III XL Emulation mode.

Escape Control Codes Overview

Printer capability is greatly increased by the use of escape control code
sequences. Escape sequences always begin with the ASCII escape
sequence introducer, ESC (hex 1B). Many of the ASCII control codes
described in this chapter are escape sequences.

IMPORTANT An Escape code can occur anywhere in the datastream and is acted
upon immediately if it precedes a valid command.

44
 Graphics Control Codes Overview

An ESC sequence introducer in the data stream signals the printer to wait for
special instructions, even if it is ready and printing. The character codes
following the ESC character tell the printer what to do.
NOTE: For readability, code sequences appear in this manual with spaces
inserted between command elements. Do not insert spaces between
code characters when you are programming unless the ASCII space
character (SP) is part of a code sequence. For example, a code
sequence printed in this manual as ESC [ 1 is programmed as ESC[1
An escape sequence uses two or more bytes to define a specific printer
control function. The format for an escape sequence is:

ASCII ESC X n
Hex 1B 00 - 7F 0 - FF

Escape Character(s) Numerical

Sequence parameters
Introducer

After the ESC character are one or more characters which indicate the action
of the control code. One or more numerical parameters may in turn follow
these characters. For example, the sequence ESC S n tells the printer to
begin the superscript print attribute if n is an even number, or to begin the
subscript attribute if n is an odd number.
If the characters following the ESC code are not within the defined ranges, or
if they are within the defined ranges but not recognized as a function of this
printer, the entire sequence is ignored.

Graphics Control Codes Overview

The individual control codes that set graphics print quality are described
starting on page 53. Some additional background information about graphics
printing for the Proprinter III XL emulation is provided here.
The Proprinter III XL emulation provides one data protocol for printing
graphics information; the Bit Image graphics protocol allows an image block to
be printed. When using the Bit Image protocol, you can mix text and graphics
on the same line.

45
Chapter 2 Configuring The Proprinter Emulation With Control Codes

Setting Bit Image Modes via Control Codes

Control codes select bit image modes. The following bit image modes can be
mixed on the same line as text characters:

Table 4. Bit Image Modes

Control Code Bit Image Mode

ESC K n1 n2 data Normal density

ESC L n1 n2 data Double density

ESC Y n1 n2 data Double density, double speed

ESC Z n1 n2 data Quadruple density

Parameters n1 and n2 together represent a 16-bit (hexadecimal) unsigned

number of the quantity (n1+256n2), which equals the number of bit image
characters (i.e. data bytes) to follow. If n1 and n2 are programmed so that
data extends past the last character position, the data is truncated at the last
character position. If n1 and n2 are both zero, then the ESC sequence is
ignored.
See Chapter 8 for details on Bit Image graphics.

Dot Density Versus Printing Speed

When you select ESC K (normal density), the dot columns are printed at 60
dots per inch (dpi) horizontally and 72 dpi vertically. This does not decrease
printing speed.
If ESC L (double density) is selected, the dot columns are printed at 120 dpi
horizontally and 72 dpi vertically. Double density reduces printing speed by
one half.
With ESC Y (double density, double speed), dot columns are printed at 120
dpi horizontally and 72 dpi vertically, but adjacent dots are not printed. Double
density, double speed does not decrease printing speed.
When ESC Z (quadruple density) is selected, the dot columns are printed at
240 dpi horizontally and 72 dpi vertically. Quadruple density reduces printing
speed by one half.
All line-by-line character print attributes are ignored in Bit Image graphics. The
most significant bit for each data character is the uppermost dot position in the
vertical dot image pattern. A bit value of 1 indicates a dot; a value of 0
indicates a blank. In 7-bit RS-232E serial interface protocol, the most
significant bit (bit 8) is cleared to 0.

46
 Graphics Control Codes Overview

Code Page and Character Set Control Codes Overview

A code page is a set of symbols consisting of letters, numbers, and graphic
elements. For the Proprinter III XL emulation, the IBM 6500-v ASCII printers
support characters from IBM’s Code Page 0437 and Code Page 0850, among
an extensive array of different print quality and print language sets. The print
language sets are selected using the Print Language configuration menu
option, which is described in detail in your User’s Manual.
Appendix E provides print samples for each character set, shown in NLQ Serif
mode and additional modes in some cases. Table 5 provides detailed notes
on print mode support for each character set.
Two columns of characters, hex 80 through 9F, may be configured as either
control codes or printable symbols. The following control codes are used to
configure this option:

Control Code Character Set Selected

ESC 7 Character Set 1

(hex 80-9F configured as control codes)

ESC 6 Character Set 2

(hex 80-9F configured as printable symbols)

Fault Detection
If the printer detects a fault condition, the operator panel displays an
appropriate message, the Attention indicator lights, and an audible alarm
sounds if it was enabled as part of printer configuration.
After a fault condition is corrected, press Clear to return the printer to the Not
Ready mode, or press Start to return the printer to the Ready mode. Data that
were in the printer buffer when the fault occurred will print, but may be
distorted or illegible as a result of the fault.
Fault conditions are described in the User’s Manual.

Ignored and Reserved Codes

The control codes recognized by the 6500-v Proprinter III XL emulation
software are described in this chapter. Control codes not described in this
chapter are undefined and ignored. In addition, codes that represent printable
characters (Hex 10, 11, 15, 21-7E, and 80-FF) are not available as Proprinter
III XL control codes.

IMPORTANT Entering control codes that are not defined in this chapter may produce
unpredictable results.

47
Chapter 2 Configuring The Proprinter Emulation With Control Codes

The following control code is ignored as a Proprinter III XL control code, but is
valid for the Serial Interface Protocol.

Hex Code ASCII Code Function

03 or 1B 03 ETX If this code is used in the Serial Interface

Protocol (SIP), the SIP function takes
precedence.

The Download Characters control code is a reserved code. It is not

implemented at this time. When implemented, this code is usually followed by
large blocks of data. The Proprinter III XL emulation will currently ignore this
control code and any data applicable to it. The Hex and ASCII codes for this
function are as follows:

Hex Code ASCII Code Function

1B 3D ESC = Download Characters

NUL Code
NUL (Hex 00) is ignored by the printer and can be used as a fill character;
however, it can not be used to add blank spaces since it is not a space
character. NUL can also be used as a parameter terminator for the Set
Horizontal Tabs (page 86) or Set Vertical Tabs multibyte control code
(page 87).
NOTE: Hex 80 in the 0437 PC Character Set and Hex 7F in the 0850 PC
Character Set are treated as a NUL; however, these two controls can
not be used as parameter terminators.

48
 Graphics Control Codes Overview

Print Modes Supported for Character Sets

Following is a summary of which print modes are supported for the Proprinter
III XL character sets. An “X” indicates support for a print mode. Additional
information about character set support is provided under the heading
“Notes.” Appendix E shows each code page in NLQ Serif mode.

Table 5. Print Modes Supported

Character Set NLQ(Serif)/DP/Draft Notes

0437 PC Character Set X

0737 Greek X

0813 Greek X Limited character set support for most

CPI settings in Draft mode.

0819 ISO/ANSI Multilingual X

0850 Multilingual X Variant character set for NLQ Sans

Serif.

0851 Greek Old X

0852 Latin 2/Roece X

0853 Latin 3 PC X

0855 Cyrillic X Limited character set support for most

CPI settings in Draft mode.

0857 Turkish X

0858 PC Euro Multilingual X

0860 Portuguese X

0861 Icelandic X

0862 Hebrew X

0863 Canadian French X

0864 Arabic X Limited character set support for most

CPI settings in Draft mode. Variant
character set for NLQ Sans Serif.

0865 Danish/Norwegian X

0866 Russian Cyrillic 996 X Limited character set support for most
CPI settings in Draft mode.

0869 Greek New X

0874 Thai X Limited character set support for most
CPI settings in Draft mode. Variant
character set for NLQ Sans Serif.

49
Chapter 2 Configuring The Proprinter Emulation With Control Codes

Table 5. Print Modes Supported (continued)

Character Set NLQ(Serif)/DP/Draft Notes

0876 OCR A N/A 10 CPI OCR only.

0877 OCR B N/A 10 CPI OCR only.

0912 ISO Latin 2 PC X

0913 ISO Latin 3 X

0914 ISO Latin 4

0915 ISO Cyrillic PC X Limited character set support for most

CPI settings in Draft mode.

0916 Hebrew X

0920 ISO Latin 5 Turkish X

0921 ISO Baltic Multilingual X

0922 Estonian X

0923 Latin 9 8859-15 X

1006 ISO URDU X

1008 ISO Arabic X

1046 Arabic Extended X Limited character set support for most

CPI settings in Draft mode. Variant
character set for NLQ Sans Serif.

1098 Farsi 1285 (PC) X Limited character set support for most
CPI settings in Draft mode. Variant
character set for NLQ Sans Serif.

1116 Estonian X

1117 Latvian X
1118 Lithuanian X

1129 Vietnamese X

1134 Hebrew Old X

50
 The Control Codes

The Control Codes

This index lists each printer command by function, ASCII mnemonic, and the
page where the command is explained in detail. “N/A” means not applicable.
The rest of this chapter defines the control code functions for Proprinter III XL
emulation mode. The commands are listed in alphabetical order.
† = Produces non-Proprinter behavior in your printer.

FUNCTION ASCII CODE PAGE

Paper Motion
Form Feed FF 66
Line Feed LF 71
Line Feed n/216” (One Line Only) ESC J n 71
Tab, Vertical VT 87
Tab Set/Clear, Vertical ESC B n1 n2 ... nk NUL 88
Tabs, Clear All (Return to default) ESC R 88

Format
† Backspace BS 53
Cancel CAN 59
Carriage Return CR 59
Carriage Return Set ESC 5 n 59
Forms Length Set in Inches ESC C NUL n 66
Forms Length Set in Lines ESC C n 67
Margin, Bottom ESC N n 76
Margin, Bottom (Cancel) ESC O 77
Margins, Horizontal ESC X n m 77
Set Top-of-Form ESC 4 85
Tab, Horizontal HT 86
Tab Set/Clear, Horizontal ESC D n1 n2 nk NUL 86
Tabs, Clear All (Return to default) ESC R 88

Line Spacing
Line Spacing 1/8 Inch (8 lpi) ESC 0 72
Line Spacing 7/72 Inch (10.3 lpi) ESC 1 73
Line Spacing n/72 Inch (Executes) ESC 2 74
Line Spacing n/72 Inch (Storage) ESC A n 75
Line Spacing n/216 Inch ESC 3 n 76

Selection of Character Set

Character Set Select: Set 1 (A) ESC 7 60
Character Set Select: Set 2 (B) ESC 6 60

Print Quality
† Bold Printing ESC G 58
Bold Printing, Cancel ESC H 58
† Character Pitch 12 cpi ESC : 60
† Condensed Print SI 61
Condensed Print Cancel DC2 62
† Double Wide Print ESC W n 63

51
Chapter 2 Configuring The Proprinter Emulation With Control Codes

FUNCTION ASCII CODE PAGE

† Double Wide Print (One Line Only) SO 64
Double Wide Print (One Line Only) DC4 65
Cancel
† Emphasized Print ESC E 65
Emphasized Print Cancel ESC F 66
† Overscoring ESC _ n 78
† Print Mode ESC I n 79
† Print Quality ESC x n 80
† Proportional Spacing ESC P n 81
† Select Attributes ESC [ @ n1 NUL NUL NUL n2 n3 82
† Superscript/Subscript Printing ESC S n 84
Superscript/Subscript Printing, Cancel ESC T 85
† Underline ESC – n 89

Bit Image
Bit Image, Single Density ESC K n1 n2 54
(Normal Speed)
Bit Image, Double Density ESC L n1 n2 55
(Half Speed)
Bit Image, Double Density, ESC Y n1 n2 56
(Normal Speed)
Bit Image, Quadruple Density, ESC Z n1 n2 57
(Half Speed)

Other Functions
Bell BEL 53
Deselect Printer ESC Q 22 62
Escape Sequence ESC 44
Initialize Parameters ESC [ K n1 NUL n2 n3 n4 n5 68
Print All Characters ESC \ n1 n2 78
Print Next Character ESC ^ n 79
Super-Set Commands ESC | } ; 85
Unidirectional Printing ESC U n 89

52
 Backspace

Backspace
ASCII BS
Hex 08
Dec 08
Purpose Moves the logical print head to the left one character space
toward the first character column.
Discussion BS moves the character position indicator (the logical print
head position) one character space to the left at the current
character pitch setting. This code is ignored if the logical print
head is positioned at the first character column.

When the backspace code is received, printing speed will be

reduced. If the printer is in double width mode, the backspace
code moves the print head left two normal character spaces.
† When a single backspace control code follows one of the Bit
Image Graphics commands (ESC K, ESC L, ESC Y, ESC Z),
IBM 6500-v printers backspace to the last character position
at the end of the graphics data printout. The IBM Proprinter
backspaces to the beginning of the line, at the beginning of
the graphics data.
† After a backspace, IBM 6500-v printers will overstrike a
character preceded by a control code (such as bold or
proportional) with a partially or incorrectly formed letter. The
IBM Proprinter overstrikes properly in this situation.
Example If you were to print five “T” characters, then two BS
commands, then two “=” characters, the output would look
like the sample below:

Bell
ASCII BEL
Hex 07
Dec 07
Purpose Sounds a buzzer/beeper.
Discussion The BEL function will sound the buzzer/beeper for 0.2
seconds upon receipt of this command.

53
Chapter 2 Configuring The Proprinter Emulation With Control Codes

Bit Image Mode, Single Density (Normal Speed)

ASCII ESC K n1 n2
Hex 1B 4B n1 n2
Dec 27 75 n1 n2
Purpose Selects single (normal) density bit image graphics.
where: n1 + 256n2 defines the number of data bytes to
follow.
DATA = ASCII characters for the dot pattern bytes.
Discussion This code prints specified data as bit image graphics at
normal density, 60 dots per inch horizontally and 72 dots per
inch vertically. For more information, see “Graphics Control
Codes Overview” on page 45 and page “Bit Image Graphics”
on page 327.
Example The following example produces a pattern of Single Density
Bit Image graphics. The 9-byte bit pattern is repeated 27
times. Compare this example to the double density and
quadruple density examples.

54
 Bit Image Mode, Double Density (Half Speed)

Bit Image Mode, Double Density (Half Speed)

ASCII ESC L n1 n2
Hex 1B 4C n1 n2
Dec 27 76 n1 n2
Purpose Selects double density bit image graphics.
where: n1 + 256n2 defines the number of data bytes to
follow.
DATA = ASCII characters for the dot pattern bytes.
Discussion This code prints specified data as bit image graphics at
double horizontal density, 120 dots per inch horizontally and
72 dots per inch vertically. This code causes print speed to
be reduced by half from normal density speed. For more
information, see “Graphics Control Codes Overview” on page
45 and “Bit Image Graphics” on page 327.
Example The following example produces Double Density Bit Image
graphics of the pattern used in the Single Density Bit Image
Mode example. Note that the amount of data must be
doubled in order to produce this pattern for double density
(the data is used 54 times rather than 27).

55
Chapter 2 Configuring The Proprinter Emulation With Control Codes

Bit Image Mode, Double Density (Normal Speed)

ASCII ESC Y n1 n2
Hex 1B 59 n1 n2
Dec 27 89 n1 n2
Purpose Selects double density bit image graphics at single density
speed.
where: n1 + 256n2 defines the number of data bytes to
follow.
DATA = ASCII characters for the dot pattern bytes.
Discussion This code prints specified data as bit image graphics at
double horizontal density, 120 dots per inch horizontally and
72 dots per inch vertically. By ignoring adjacent dots, the print
speed is not reduced from the normal density speed. For
more information, see “Graphics Control Codes Overview” on
page 45 and “Bit Image Graphics” on page 327.
Example The following example produces a Double Density Normal
Speed Bit Image graphics for the same pattern as in the
Normal (Single) Density example. Note that the amount of
data must be doubled for double density (the data is used 54
times rather than 27).

56
 Bit Image Mode, Quadruple Density (Half Speed)

Bit Image Mode, Quadruple Density (Half Speed)

ASCII ESC Z n1 n2
Hex 1B 5A n1 n2
Dec 27 90 n1 n2
Purpose Selects quadruple density bit image graphics.
where: n1 + 256n2 defines the number of data bytes to
follow.
DATA = ASCII characters for the dot pattern bytes.
Discussion This code prints specified data as bit image graphics at
quadruple density, 240 dots per inch horizontally and 72 dots
per inch vertically. This code causes print speed to be
reduced by half. For more information, see “Graphics Control
Codes Overview” on page 45 and “Bit Image Graphics” on
page 327.
Example The following example produces quadruple density graphics
of the pattern used in the Single Density Bit Image Mode
example. Note that the amount of data must be quadrupled
for quadruple density (the data is used 108 times rather than
27).

57
Chapter 2 Configuring The Proprinter Emulation With Control Codes

Bold Printing
ASCII ESC G
Hex 1B 47
Dec 27 71
Purpose Selects bold character printing.
Discussion When this command is received, all characters are printed in
bold until reset by the Bold Print Reset control code or printer
reset. The bold print attribute is implemented by increasing
the dot density for the bolded text (with a similar result to
double strike printing).
The ESC E (page 65) and ESC G commands are equivalent;
they produce the same print effect.
† IBM 6500-v printers print both Bold and Condensed when
this control code is combined with Condensed (SI). The IBM
Proprinter prints only Emphasized when control codes for
Compressed and Emphasized are combined. (See Table 3
on page 42.)
Example The following sample illustrates bold character printing.

Bold Printing, Cancel

ASCII ESC H
Hex 1B 48
Dec 27 72
Purpose Cancels bold printing.
Discussion No other print attributes are changed.

58
 Cancel

Cancel
ASCII CAN
Hex 18
Dec 24
Purpose Clears the print buffer of all symbols since the last paper
motion command was received.
Discussion The CAN command cancels all characters sent to the printer
after the last paper motion command.
This command will cancel the double wide attribute if set by
SO. No other print attributes are affected.

Carriage Return
ASCII CR
Hex 0D
Dec 13
Purpose Returns the logical print head to the first character column
(resets the pointer to the first character position). May be
configured to include a line feed.
Discussion The CR code is configured via the ESC 5 code or via the
operator panel menus (described in Chapter 4 of the User’s
Manual). The CR = CR configuration causes the character
position indicator to be positioned at character column one;
subsequent printable data preceding a paper motion
command overstrikes previously printed data. The CR = CR
+ LF configuration causes the CR code to perform a carriage
return plus a line feed.
The CR code also cancels expanded (double wide) print
when set by code SO (single line printing attribute).

Carriage Return Set

ASCII ESC 5 n
Hex 1B 35 n
Dec 27 53 n
Purpose Defines the result from the Carriage Return (CR) code.
where: n may range from 0 through 255
If n = 0, 2, 4 ... (any even value), then CR = CR (the
default).
If n = 1, 3, 5 ... (any odd value), then CR = CR + LF.
Discussion This command overrides the configuration menu setting.

59
Chapter 2 Configuring The Proprinter Emulation With Control Codes

• CR = CR (default) configuration causes the character position indicator to

be positioned at character column one. Subsequent printable data
preceding a paper motion command overstrikes previous printable data.
• CR = CR + LF configuration causes the CR code to perform a carriage
return plus a line feed.

Character Pitch 12 cpi

ASCII ESC :
Hex 1B 3A
Dec 27 58
Purpose Sets character pitch to 12 cpi.
Discussion An ESC: code overrides any operator panel setting.
† When this control code is combined with Condensed (SI) and
NLQ Serif/Sans Serif (via ESC I or ESC x), IBM 6500-v
printers print 17.16 cpi plus NLQ (Serif/Sans Serif). The IBM
Proprinter prints at 20 cpi (without NLQ) when the same print
attributes are combined (see Table 3 on page 42).

Character Set Select: Set 1 (A)

ASCII ESC 7
Hex 1B 37
Dec 27 55
Purpose Selects hex codes 80 through 9F in the character sets as
control codes. Cancels the command ESC 6.
Discussion This control code overrides the operator panel setting
(described in Chapter 4 of the User’s Manual).

Character Set Select: Set 2 (B)

ASCII ESC 6
Hex 1B 36
Dec 27 54
Purpose Selects hex codes 80 through 9F in the character sets as
printable symbols. Cancels the command ESC 7.
Discussion This control code overrides the operator panel setting
(described in Chapter 4 of the User’s Manual). Appendix E
shows the printable symbols for hex codes 80 through 9F.

60
 Condensed Print

Condensed Print
ASCII SI ESC SI
Hex 0F 1B 0F
Dec 15 27 15
Purpose Sets condensed print.
Discussion You may enable or disable the condensed print feature using
the operator panel (the default setting for the Condensed
Print option is enabled, as described in Chapter 4 of the
User’s Manual). Once condensed print is enabled, this
control code sets condensed print until it is canceled by
control code DC2, a printer reset, or a new print mode (ESC
I) control code.
The manner in which the print is condensed varies depending
on the initial print size. Several examples are listed in Table
6:

Table 6. Condensed Print

Initial Print Size Condenses To

5 cpi 8.55 cpi

6 cpi 10 cpi

8.58 cpi no change

10 cpi 17.16 cpi

12 cpi (except NLQ) 20 cpi

† 12 cpi NLQ 17.16 cpi

17.16 cpi no change

20 cpi no change

† IBM 6500-v printers print both Condensed and Bold when

this control code is combined with Bold (ESC E or ESC G).
The IBM Proprinter prints only Emphasized if control codes
for Compressed and Emphasized are combined. (See Table
3 on page 42.)
Double-high characters combined with Condensed will print
as double-high only.

61
Chapter 2 Configuring The Proprinter Emulation With Control Codes

Example The following sample shows condensed character printing

and reset.

Condensed Print Cancel

ASCII DC2 ESC DC2
Hex 12 1B 12
Dec 18 27 18
Purpose Cancels condensed character printing and sets pitch to 10
cpi.
Discussion The Condensed Print Cancel command sets the character
pitch to 10 cpi, or 5 cpi if printing is set for double wide.
Example See the SI control code (page 61) for an example of
Condensed Print Cancel.

Deselect Printer
ASCII ESC Q 22
Hex 1B 51 16
Dec 27 81 22
Purpose Stops the printer from processing data received from the host
computer.
Discussion This code is for diagnostic use; it instructs the printer to stop
processing data received from the host system. In order to
resume processing data, the printer must be reset from the
host system.
Example Using the BASIC language, you may deselect the Proprinter
III XL with the following:
LPRINT CHR$(27);CHR$(81);CHR$(22);

62
 Double Wide Print

Double Wide Print

ASCII ESC W n
Hex 1B 57 n
Dec 27 87 n
Purpose Selects or cancels double wide (expanded) print.
where: n may range from 0 through 255
If n = 1, 3, 5 ... (any odd value), double wide print is
selected.
If n = 0, 2, 4 ... (any even value), double wide print
is cancelled.
Discussion An ESC W code sets or cancels double wide print, as follows:
When expanded print using ESC W is received, all
characters print double wide until cancelled by an even
parameter hex code.
Double wide print can also be set via the command SO and
ESC SO, double wide print for one line only. An ESC W code
overrides these settings.
The manner in which the print is expanded varies depending
on the initial print size. Several examples are listed in Table
7:

Table 7. Double-Wide Print

Initial Print Size Expands To

5 cpi no change

6 cpi no change

8.58 cpi no change

10 cpi 5 cpi

12 cpi 6 cpi

17.16 cpi 8.55 cpi

20 cpi 10 cpi

† IBM 6500-v printers print both Double-Wide and NLQ Serif

when this control code is combined with NLQ Serif (via ESC
I). The IBM Proprinter prints Double-Wide plus NLQ Sans
Serif if control codes for Double-Wide and NLQ Serif are
combined. (See Table 3 on page 42.)

63
Chapter 2 Configuring The Proprinter Emulation With Control Codes

Example The following sample illustrates expanded character printing

and expanded character printing reset.

Double Wide Print (One Line Only)

ASCII SO ESC SO
Hex 0E 1B 0E
Dec 14 27 14
Purpose Selects double wide print for one line only.
Discussion This expanded print command is a line-by-line print attribute;
when the SO or ESC SO command is received, the current
line will be printed double wide and automatically reset. This
command can be reset by a paper motion command (FF, LF,
VT, CR), by the DC4 (double wide cancel) code, CAN or ESC
W (double wide print).
See the previous control code (ESC W) for examples of print
expansion for various initial print sizes.
† IBM 6500-v printers print both Double-Wide and NLQ Serif
when this control code is combined with NLQ Serif (via ESC
I). An IBM Proprinter prints Double-Wide plus NLQ Sans Serif
if control codes for Double-Wide and NLQ Serif are
combined. See Table 3 on page 42.
Example The following sample illustrates Expanded Print for one line
only.

64
 Double Wide Print (One Line Only) Cancel

Double Wide Print (One Line Only) Cancel

ASCII DC4 ESC DC4
Hex 14 1B 14
Dec 20 27 20
Purpose Cancels double wide print, if it was set by command SO.
Discussion The DC4 code cancels Double Wide Print command SO. If
Double Wide Print is not enabled, the DC4 code is ignored. A
DC4 code can occur at any place in the datastream and is
acted upon immediately.

Emphasized Print
ASCII ESC E
Hex 1B 45
Dec 27 69
Purpose Selects emphasized character print format.
Discussion When the emphasized print command is received, all
characters will be printed in emphasized (bold) print until
reset by the Emphasized Print Reset command or printer
reset. Emphasized print reduces the current print speed.
NOTE: The ESC G (page 58) and ESC E commands are equivalent; they
produce the same print effect.
† IBM 6500-v printers print both Condensed and Emphasized
when this control code is combined with Condensed (SI). An
IBM Proprinter prints only Emphasized when control codes
for Compressed and Emphasized are combined. (See Table
3 on page 42.)
Example The following sample illustrates emphasized character
printing.

65
Chapter 2 Configuring The Proprinter Emulation With Control Codes

Emphasized Print Cancel

ASCII ESC F
Hex 1B 46
Dec 27 70
Purpose Cancels emphasized character printing.
Discussion The emphasized print reset command only resets the
emphasized print character attribute. See Example above for
using ESC E combined with ESC F.

Form Feed
ASCII FF
Hex 0C
Dec 12
Purpose Prints the data in the buffer, advances the paper to the next
top-of-form, and moves the logical printhead to the first
character column.
Discussion Forms length is set by using the operator panel or forms
length control codes. This code cancels double wide
(expanded) characters if set by the SO command.
The Form Feed command will react differently when the VFU
is active. Refer to Chapter 9 for further information.

Forms Length Set In Inches

ASCII ESC C NUL n
Hex 1B 43 00 n
Dec 27 67 0 n
Purpose Sets the length of forms (paper) in inches.
where: n = whole numbers from 1 through 24 to specify the
number of inches on a page. (All larger values are
ignored.)
Discussion Upon receipt of this code, the current line becomes the first
line of the form, and the forms length set becomes the current
forms length. Vertical tab positions set below the bottom of
the form are ignored; in addition, once a new forms length is
set the bottom margin is set to zero.
Line spacing changes do not affect the result of this
command. If the forms length is set smaller than the line
spacing, a form feed advances the paper position to the next
top-of-form position.

66
 Forms Length Set In Lines

Forms length in inches can also be set at the operator panel

via the Print Format menu (refer to Chapter 4 of the User’s
Manual). However, this host control code overrides the
operator panel setting.

Forms Length Set In Lines

ASCII ESC C n
Hex 1B 43 n
Dec 27 67 n
Purpose Sets the length of a form (paper) in lines.
where: n = 1 through 192 (1 through C0 hex) to specify the
number of lines per page at the current line
spacing.
Discussion The forms length is defined in inches as the quotient of n
divided by the current lines per inch (lpi) setting. Once the
forms length has been set, subsequent line spacing changes
do not affect the result of this command.
If the forms length is set smaller than the line spacing, a form
feed advances the paper position to the next top-of-form.
If the forms length derived from the quotient of n lines divided
by lines per inch is not an exact multiple of the printer dot
resolution, the value is adjusted down until the forms length
and dot resolution distance match.
Forms length in lines can also be set at the operator panel via
the Print Format menu (refer to Chapter 4 of the User’s
Manual). However, this host control code overrides the
operator panel setting.

67
Chapter 2 Configuring The Proprinter Emulation With Control Codes

Initialize Parameters
ASCII ESC [ K n1 NUL n2 n3 n4 n5
Hex 1B 5B 4B n1 00 n2 n3 n4 n5
Dec 27 91 75 n1 0 n2 n3 n4 n5
Purpose Sets the printer initial condition.
Discussion This command causes the printer to reset and defines the
configuration that will be loaded to the printer during the
reset. Several variables must be specified to define the load
configuration, as described below.
NOTE: An ESC[K code can occur at any place in the datastream and is acted
upon immediately. All numerical parameters are in the hex 00 through
FF range unless stated otherwise. Only specified parameters are
supported. Other values may be ignored or cause unpredictable
results, and should be avoided.
n1 The value of n1 defines which of the following n bytes will be
included in the command line, as shown in Table 8.

Table 8. Defining Bytes in the Command Line

n1
Function
Hex Value

1 One byte follows (n2)

3 Three bytes follow (n2, n3, and n4)
4 Four bytes follow (n2, n3, n4, and n5)

IMPORTANT Specifying any value for n1 other than 1, 3, or 4 may cause

unpredictable results, and should be avoided.
n2 The 2-digit hexadecimal value for n2 defines the load
configuration for the printer. The Proprinter III XL supports six
hexadecimal values for this parameter: 00, 01, 04, 05, 254,
and 255. The following table describes the different load
configurations that will result with each value:

68
 Initialize Parameters

Table 9. Load-up Configuration

n2
Function
Hex Value

00, 01, 254 The printer will load the power-up configuration that is
stored in memory. Configuration changes that are defined
by command bytes n4 and n5, if present, will override
conflicting values stored in memory.

04, 05, 255 The printer will load the factory default configuration.
Configuration parameters defined by command bytes n4
and n5, if present, will override conflicting factory default
values.

n3 Parameter n3 is provided for compatibility with the Proprinter

III XL printer control language standard. You may define any
value for this parameter for use with the IBM 6500-v printers.
(For Proprinters, this bit must define the attached printer as
either Proprinter III, hex value 03, or Proprinter III XL, hex
value 16.)
n4 and n5 Parameter bytes n4 and n5 allow you to define several
configuration parameters that will override conflicting factory
default and NVRAM-based configuration values when the
printer is reinitialized. Depending on the value that is defined
for n2 (refer to Table 9), these values may also be saved to
memory.
NOTE: In addition to the formatting from bytes n4 and n5, this command sets
the current line as top-of-form. It also clears vertical tabs and sets the
horizontal tabs at every eight columns, starting at column 9.

69
Chapter 2 Configuring The Proprinter Emulation With Control Codes

Table 10. Configuration Parameters (n4)

n4 Bit Function OFF (0) ON (1)

7 Process this byte. Process Ignore

6 Reserved Reserved Reserved

5 N/A -------- ----------

4 Line Feed = LF LF + CR
(add CR with each LF)

3 Carriage Return = CR CR + LF
(add LF with each CR)

2 Set forms length 11” 12”

1 Slashed zero Disable Enable

0 Character set 1 (A) 2 (B)

Table 11. Configuration Parameters (n5)

n5 Bit Function OFF (0) ON (1)

7 Process this byte. Process Ignore

6 Code page 437 850

5 Unidirectional printing bidirectional unidirectional

4 12 cpi compressed to 20 20 12

3 n/a --- ---

2 Form feed at TOF Enable Ignore

1 Print width 13.6 inch 8 inch

0 Sheet feeder N/A N/A

70
 Line Feed

Line Feed
ASCII LF
Hex 0A
Dec 10
Purpose Prints the data in the buffer (if any) and advances the paper
one line at the current line space setting.
Discussion If configured for LF equals new line (LF = CR + LF), the
logical print head is positioned at character column 1 of the
new line. Otherwise, the logical print head does not move
when configured for LF function only (LF = LF only). The LF
function cancels double wide (expanded) characters if set by
the SO command.
Line feed can occur at any place in the datastream and is
acted upon immediately.

Line Feed n/216 Inch (One Line Only)

ASCII ESC J n
Hex 1B 4A n
Dec 27 74 n
Purpose Advances the vertical character position n/216 inch for one
line only.
where: n = 1 through 255
Discussion The n/216-inch line feed control code is effective for one line
only. All single-line-only print attributes are canceled.
If the emulation is configured for LF equals newline
(LF=CR+LF), the paper advances one line at the current line
space setting and the logical print head is positioned at
character column 1.
The paper position moves only in multiples of the current dot
row spacing. If the distance to move is other than a multiple
of the current dot row spacing, the remainder is added to the
next paper motion command.
Small values of n may result in overlapping lines.
Overlapping lines may also occur if print attributes such as
Elongated (Double High), Superscript, or Subscript
characters are used on the same line. Printing at different
horizontal and vertical densities will not overlap.

71
Chapter 2 Configuring The Proprinter Emulation With Control Codes

Example The following example illustrates n/216-inch line spacing.

Line Spacing 1/8 Inch (8 lpi)

ASCII ESC 0
Hex 1B 30
Dec 27 48
Purpose Specifies continuous line spacing at 1/8-inch increments (8
lpi).
Discussion When the 1/8-inch line spacing control code is received, all
lines will be printed at 8 lpi until a new line spacing is selected
or the printer is reset.
Example The following example illustrates 1/8-inch line spacing.

72
 Line Spacing 7/72 Inch (10.3 lpi)

Line Spacing 7/72 Inch (10.3 lpi)

ASCII ESC 1
Hex 1B 31
Dec 27 49
Purpose Specifies the line spacing at 7/72-inch (10.3 lpi) increments.
Discussion When the 7/72-inch line spacing control code is received, all
lines will be printed at the 7/72-inch line spacing until a new
line spacing is selected or the printer is reset. The control
code line spacing selection will override the operator panel
line spacing setting, and the message display will reflect the
line spacing as 10.3 lines per inch.
Caution should be used when combining this control code
with other print attributes such as Elongated (Double High),
Superscript, or Subscript; overlapping lines may occur.
Example The following example illustrates 7/72-inch line spacing.

73
Chapter 2 Configuring The Proprinter Emulation With Control Codes

Line Spacing n/72 Inch (Executes)

ASCII ESC 2
Hex 1B 32
Dec 27 50
Purpose ESC 2 sets line spacing to 6 lpi or as set by ESC A.
Discussion ESC 2 asserts n/72-inch line spacing as set by ESC A (page
page 74). If no distance has been set by ESC A, the distance
is 1/6 inch.
The control code line spacing selection will override the
operator panel line spacing setting.
Example The following example illustrates 1/6-inch line spacing and
assumes that a distance has not been set by ESC A.

74
 Line Spacing n/72 Inch (Storage)

Line Spacing n/72 Inch (Storage)

ASCII ESC A n
Hex 1B 41 n
Dec 27 65 n
Purpose Stores a line spacing of n/72-inch increments.
where: n = 1 through 255 (all others are ignored)
Discussion This control code stores a value for line spacing of n/72 inch.
The ESC 2 control code (described on page 74) executes the
line spacing stored by the preceding ESC A, until a new line
spacing is selected or power to the printer is reset. A control
code line spacing overrides an operator panel line spacing
setting. (The operator panel display shows line spacing in
lines per inch.)
Small values of n may result in overlapping lines.
Overlapping lines may also occur if print attributes such as
Elongated (Double High), Superscript, or Subscript
characters are used on the same line. Common values of n
are shown in Table 12.

Table 12. Line Spacing (n/72 inch)

n Line Spacing

24 3 lpi

18 4 lpi

12 6 lpi

9 8 lpi

8 9 lpi

6 12 lpi

Example The following example illustrates 20/72-inch line spacing.

75
Chapter 2 Configuring The Proprinter Emulation With Control Codes

Line Spacing n/216 Inch

ASCII ESC 3 n
Hex 1B 33 n
Dec 27 51 n
Purpose Specifies the line spacing at n/216-inch increments.
where: n = 1 through 255
Discussion When the n/216-inch line spacing control code is received, all
line feeds following will be at n/216-inch line spacing until a
new line spacing is selected or the printer is reset. The
control code line spacing selection will override the control
panel line spacing setting.
The vertical character position moves only in multiples of the
current dot row spacing. If the distance to move is other than
a multiple of the current dot row spacing, the remainder is
added to the next paper motion command.
Caution should be used when combining this control code
with other print attributes such as Elongated (Double High),
Superscript, or Subscript; overlapping lines may occur.
Example The following example illustrates n/216-inch line spacing.

Margin, Bottom
ASCII ESC N n
Hex 1B 4E n
Dec 27 78 n
Purpose Sets the bottom margin.
Discussion n defines the number of lines above the bottom of the form to
set as the bottom margin. n has a range from 1 through 255.
The actual margin in inches is the quotient of n divided by the
current lines per inch (lpi).
If a line feed command causes the active position to advance
below the bottom margin, the paper advances to the top of
the next form. If the bottom margin is set equal to or greater
than the form length, printing is only allowed on the top line of
each page. If the forms length is changed by the ESC C code
(Forms Length sequence), the bottom margin is set to zero.

76
 Margin, Bottom (Cancel)

The bottom margin setting can also be selected from the

operator panel; however, the host control code will override
the operator panel setting. Any vertical tabs set within the
bottom margin zone will be ignored.

Margin, Bottom (Cancel)

ASCII ESC O
Hex 1B 4F
Dec 27 79
Purpose Resets the bottom margin to zero.

Margins, Horizontal
ASCII ESC X n m
Hex 1B 58 n m
Dec 27 88 n m
Purpose Sets left and right margins in character positions.
where: n = left margin position
m = right margin position
Discussion The values of n and m must be in the range from 0 through
255. The margins are measured in character positions at the
current characters per inch (cpi).
The value set for n is the left margin, where n is the number
of character positions from the left edge of the paper. The left
margin in inches is the quotient of the value for n divided by
the current cpi. Once the left margin is set, later changes in
the cpi do not affect the margin setting.
The value set for m is the right margin, where m is the
number of character positions from the left edge of the paper.
The right margin in inches is the quotient of the value for m
divided by the current cpi. Once the right margin is set, later
changes in the cpi do not affect the margin setting.

77
Chapter 2 Configuring The Proprinter Emulation With Control Codes

Overscoring
ASCII ESC _ n
Hex 1B 5F n
Dec 27 95 n
Purpose Enables or disables automatic overscoring of all characters.
where: n may range from 0 through 255
n = 00, 02, 04 (any even value) disables automatic
overscoring
n = 01, 03, 05 (any odd value) enables automatic
overscoring
Discussion When automatic overscore is enabled, all characters,
including spaces, are overscored. Full-height graphics
characters are not overscored. (Full-height characters are in
the upper ASCII character set for code pages 437 and 850, in
positions 176-233, or 244.)
Example The following sample illustrates automatic overscoring and
overscoring reset.

Print All Characters

ASCII ESC \ n1 n2
Hex 1B 5C n1 n2
Dec 27 92 n1 n2
Purpose Prints the characters assigned to code points as characters,
rather than interpreting the code values as commands.
where: n1 + 256n2 defines the number of data bytes to
follow.
Discussion The number of data bytes specified by n1 + 256n2 will print
as text. Valid numerical parameters are in the range hex 00
through hex FF. Data values that do not correspond to
standard ASCII codes will print as spaces.

78
 Print Next Character

Print Next Character

ASCII ESC ^ n
Hex 1B 5E n
Dec 27 94 n
Purpose Prints the graphic character assigned to n, rather than
interpreting the code value as a command.
Discussion This command may appear anywhere in the data stream, and
will be acted upon immediately. Valid numerical parameters
are in the range hex 00 through hex FF.

Print Mode
ASCII ESC I n
Hex 1B 49 n
Dec 27 73 n
Purpose Selects a print mode.
Discussion This control code selects a print mode from among the
choices in Table 13.

Table 13. Print Mode

n (Hex) Function

0 DP

1 Draft 12 CPI

2 NLQ Sans Serif

3 NLQ Serif

4 DP

5 Draft 12 CPI

6 NLQ Sans Serif

7 NLQ Serif

8 NLQ Serif-Italic-Proportional

9 NLQ Serif-Italic

There are several duplicate Hex values that select the same
print quality. These are provided for compatibility with the
Proprinter III XL standard.
† IBM 6500-v printers print at 17.16 cpi when NLQ (Serif or
Sans Serif) is combined with Condensed (SI) and 12 CPI

79
Chapter 2 Configuring The Proprinter Emulation With Control Codes

(ESC :). The IBM Proprinter prints at 20 cpi when any NLQ is
combined with Condensed and 12 CPI. (See Table 3 on page
42.)
† IBM 6500-v printers can print a combination of NLQ (Serif or
Sans Serif) and several additional print attributes (such as
compressed, emphasized, and super/subscript). However,
the IBM Proprinter prints only a subset of these attributes
when the same control codes are combined (see Table 3 on
page 42).

IMPORTANT If you specify any value other than those shown in Table 13,
unpredictable results may occur.

Print Quality
ASCII ESC x n
Hex 1B 78 n
Dec 27 120 n
Purpose This code selects a print quality.
where: n = hex 0 or hex 30 selects DP print quality
n = hex 1 or hex 31 selects NLQ Serif print quality
n = hex 2 or hex 32 selects Draft print quality
n = hex 3 or hex 33 selects OCR A print quality
n = hex 4 or hex 34 selects OCR B print quality
Comment Print qualities selected with this command override operator
panel selections. Selecting an OCR print quality overrides
any character attributes already set, such as condensed,
double-wide, etc., and forces 10 cpi. Character attributes set
when OCR is selected will be ignored.
NOTE: Some print attributes (such as condensed, double-wide, etc.) may not
return to their previous setting when changing from OCR-A or OCR-B
back to another Print Quality. For guaranteed results, all print
attributes should be set after the Print Quality is selected.
† IBM 6500-v printers print at 17.16 cpi when NLQ Serif is
combined with Condensed (SI) and 12 CPI (ESC :). The IBM
Proprinter prints at 20 cpi or 12 cpi with the same
combination, depending on the IBM Proprinter’s panel
settings (see Table 3 on page 42.)
† IBM 6500-v printers can print a combination of NLQ Serif and
several additional print attributes (such as compressed,
emphasized, and super/subscript). However, the IBM
Proprinter prints only a subset of these attributes when the
same control codes are combined (see Table 3 on page 42).

80
 Proportional Spacing

Proportional Spacing
ASCII ESC P n
Hex 1B 50 n
Dec 27 80 n
Purpose Enables/disables proportional spacing of characters.
where: n may range from 0 through 255
n = 1, 3, 5...(any odd value) enables proportional
spacing
n = 0, 2, 4...(any even value) disables proportional
spacing
Comment This command is ignored when a non-proportional font is
used.
† IBM 6500-v printers print proportional spacing and NLQ Serif
when this control code and the ESC I control code for NLQ
Serif are combined. The IBM Proprinter prints proportional
spacing and NLQ Sans Serif (instead of NLQ Serif). (See
Table 3 on page 42 for further information.)
† The IBM 6500-v and IBM Proprinter, print only proportional
spacing when the following control codes are combined:
Proportional spacing and 12 CPI will print as proportional spacing
only.
Proportional spacing and Condensed will print as proportional
spacing only.

81
Chapter 2 Configuring The Proprinter Emulation With Control Codes

Select Attributes
ASCII ESC [ @ n1 NUL NUL NUL n2 n3
Hex 1B 5B 40 n1 00 00 00 n2 n3
Dec 27 91 64 n1 0 0 0 n2 n3
Purpose Selects double high and double wide attributes, and single or
double high line spacing.
Discussion Parameter n1 selects the attributes from n2 and n3, as
follows:

Table 14. Select Attributes (n1)

n1
Function
Hex Value

03 Set character height and line feed settings according to

the value of n2 (If n1 = 03, there is no n3.)
04 Set character height, line feed, and character settings
according to the values of n2 and n3.

Parameter n2 defines the height attributes, as follows:

Table 15. Select Attributes (n2)

n2
Function
Hex Value

00 No change

01 Set single line height characters

02 Set double height characters

10 Set single line spacing

11 Set single height characters and single line spacing

12 Set double height characters and single line spacing

20 Set double line spacing

21 Set single height characters and double line spacing

22 Set double height characters and double line spacing

82
 Select Attributes

Parameter n3 defines the width attributes, as follows:

Table 16. Select Attributes (n3)

n3
Function
Hex

00 No change
01 Set single wide characters

02 Set double wide characters

An ESC [ @ code can occur at any place in the datastream

and is acted upon immediately.
All numerical parameters are in the hex 00 through FF range
unless stated otherwise.
† IBM 6500-v printers can combine printing double-high with
Draft, 12 CPI, or NLQ Serif. The IBM Proprinter has
unexpected results when the same combinations of attributes
are printed. (see Table 3 on page 42).
† For the IBM 6500-v, and Proprinter, only one of two control
codes takes effect when the double-high control code is
combined, as follows:
• Double-high characters combined with Super/Subscript (ESC S n) or
Condensed (SI) will print as double-high only.
• Double-high characters combined with All-Points-Addressable Graphics
(ESC K, ESC L, ESC Y, ESC Z) will print as All-Points-Addressable
Graphics only.
† The IBM 6500-v prints both double-wide and NLQ Serif when
this control code (n3=02) and the control code for NLQ Serif
(ESC I) are combined. The IBM Proprinter prints double-wide
and NLQ Sans Serif if control codes for double-wide and NLQ
Serif are combined. (See Table 3 on page 42 for further
information.)

83
Chapter 2 Configuring The Proprinter Emulation With Control Codes

Superscript/Subscript Printing
ASCII ESC S n
Hex 1B 53 n
Dec 27 83 n
Purpose Selects superscript or subscript printing.
where: n may range from 0 through 255
n = 01, 03, 05 (any odd value), selects subscript
printing.
n = 00, 02, 04 (any even value), selects superscript
printing.
Discussion When the super/subscript command is received, all
characters will be superscript or subscript until reset by the
super/subscript reset command or printer reset. Super/
subscript print modes are not available for the double high
attribute.
NOTE: Superscript and subscript characters print at the same size as the
current font, shifted up or down relative to the print line.
† IBM 6500-v printers allow you to combine super/subscript
printing with NLQ (Serif/Sans Serif), bold, or 12-high
characters; the IBM Proprinter does not print these
combinations (see Table 3 on page 42).
Superscript and subscript printing will not occur if this control
code is combined with double-high (ESC[@, n2 = 2,12, or
22).
Example The following sample illustrates superscript/subscript
printing.

84
 Superscript/Subscript Printing, Cancel

Superscript/Subscript Printing, Cancel

ASCII ESC T
Hex 1B 54
Dec 27 84
Purpose Cancels superscript and subscript printing (as set by ESC S).
This code can occur at any place in the datastream and is
acted upon immediately.

Super-Set Commands
ASCII ESC | } ;
HEX 1B 7C 7D 3B
Dec 27 124 125 59
Purpose Control code sequence used to introduce the super-set
commands.
Discussion The “|” in the command string is the pipe symbol.
Comment Super-set commands affect the ASCII emulation as a whole
regardless of the printer protocol currently active. The
commands are sent through the host in the input data stream,
and enact the following features:
•Select a printer protocol
•Bar codes
•Set variable character spacing
•Set variable line spacing
Refer to Chapter 7, “Super-Set Programming,” for further information
regarding the super-set commands.

Set Top-of-Form
ASCII ESC 4
Hex 1B 34
Dec 27 52
Purpose Sets the current paper position as the top-of-form.

85
Chapter 2 Configuring The Proprinter Emulation With Control Codes

Tab, Horizontal
ASCII HT
Hex 09
Dec 09
Purpose Moves the logical printhead right to the next horizontal tab
stop.
Discussion Power-on default horizontal tabs are set at every eighth
character starting at position 9 (9, 17, 25 ...). If there are no
horizontal tabs set or the logical printhead is located at the
last character column, the code is ignored and no movement
occurs.
If double-wide, double-high attributes are enabled, single-
wide character spacing is used.
Horizontal tabs are stored as a relative position; therefore,
character pitch changes will change horizontal tab positions.
Refer to the ESC D control code description (page 86) to set
new tab positions.

Tab Set/Clear, Horizontal

ASCII ESC D n1 n2...nk NUL
Hex 1B 44 n1 n2...nk 00
Dec 27 68 n1 n2...nk 0
Purpose Sets up to 28 horizontal tab positions.
Discussion n1, n2, up to nk denote character column positions for tab
stops (at the current character pitch), where n1 and n2
represent the first two tab stops and nk is the final tab stop.
You may specify from 1 up to 28 tab stops (all parameters
after 28 are ignored). The leftmost character column position
is 1. The value for each tab stop can range from 1 through
255, inclusive, and all tabs must be specified in ascending
order. Any out-of-order symbols are ignored, though the
remainder of the sequence is processed.
If you are defining a sequence of tabs, terminate the string
with a NUL (not an ESC D NUL). If you want every column to
be set with a horizontal tab, use ESC D NUL. If only one tab
position is set and it is beyond the right margin, then every
column is also set as a horizontal tab.
Any change in character pitch within a line changes the tab
positions for the entire line. All control codes that define
horizontal distance expressed in units of characters are
stored internally in character columns.

86
 Tab, Vertical

Example The following example illustrates horizontal tab setting and

accessing.

Tab, Vertical
ASCII VT
Hex 0B
Dec 11
Purpose Prints the data in the buffer and advances the paper to the
next vertical tab position.
Discussion In the Proprinter III XL emulation, vertical tab positions are
set by control code ESC B and executed by control code VT.
In this mode, if vertical tabs are loaded, the paper position
moves to the next vertical tab position.
If a vertical tab format is not defined, the paper position is
advanced to the next line at the current line spacing. If a
vertical tab format is defined but no vertical tab positions are
set between the current print position and the end of the form,
the paper position is advanced to the top of the next form.
The VT code resets all single line print attributes. More
information on vertical tabs is provided in Chapter 9.
If configured for LF = CR + LF (LF equals new line), the
character position indicator is positioned at character column
1 of the new line. Otherwise, the character position indicator
does not move.

87
Chapter 2 Configuring The Proprinter Emulation With Control Codes

Tab Set/Clear, Vertical

ASCII ESC B n1 n2 ... nk NUL
Hex 1B 42 n1 n2 nk 00
Dec 27 66 n1 n2 nk 0
Purpose Sets or clears vertical tab positions.
Discussion The physical position on the paper is defined by n and the
current line spacing.
where: n = vertical tab setting (in lines), and k = number of
tabs possible.
The value of n can be defined in the range of 1 through 255,
inclusive, while k is defined in the range of 1 through 64. Any
value for k over 64 is ignored. Subsequent line spacing
changes affect the tab position. If the value of n exceeds the
forms length, that tab position is ignored.
Vertical tab positions are set by the command ESC B and
executed by the command VT. The tab positions must be in
ascending order, or the emulation ignores the out-of-order
symbols. If the ESC B command is followed immediately by
00H, the vertical tab positions are cleared.
Example The following sample illustrates Vertical Tab Setting. To run
the sample, set your printer at top-of-form.

Tabs, Clear All (Return to Default)

ASCII ESC R
Hex 1B 52
Dec 27 82
Purpose Clears all horizontal and vertical tab stops.
Discussion When ESC R is invoked, horizontal tab stops reinitialize to
every eight columns, starting at column 9 (9, 17, 25,...). In
addition, the vertical tabs are cleared.

88
 Underline

Underline
ASCII ESC – n
Hex 1B 2D n
Dec 27 45 n
Purpose Enables or disables automatic underlining of all characters.
Discussion When automatic underline is enabled, all characters,
including spaces, are underlined until disabled.
where: n may range from 0 through 255
n = 01, 03, 05 ... (any odd value) selects
underlining.
n = 00, 02, 04 ... (any even value) cancels
underlining.
† The IBM 6500-v and Proprinter print only 12-High characters
when this control code is combined with 12-High characters.
See Table 3 on page 42. 12-high characters are characters in
the upper ASCII character set for code pages 437 and 850, in
positions 176-233, or 244.
Example The following sample illustrates automatic underlining and
underlining reset.

Unidirectional Printing
ASCII ESC U n
Hex 1B 55 n
Dec 27 85 n
Purpose Sets or cancels unidirectional printing.
Discussion This code sets or cancels unidirectional printing, as follows:
where: n may range from 0 through 255
n = 01, 03, 05 ... (any odd value) selects
unidirectional text printing.
n = 00, 02, 04 ... (any even value) cancels
unidirectional text printing.

89
Chapter 2 Configuring The Proprinter Emulation With Control Codes

90
 3 Epson FX-1050 Emulation

Overview
This chapter describes the Epson FX-1050 emulation host control codes that
are supported for the IBM 6500-v ASCII printers. Emulation refers to the
ability of a printer to execute the commands of a particular printer control
language. A printer control language is the coding system used to convey,
manipulate, and print data. Carriage Return, print quality, character attributes
such as bold and underline, margins, and tabs are typical functions selected
by printer control language codes. In this manual, the terms emulation, printer
protocol, and printer control language are synonymous.
In Epson emulation mode, the 6500-v can print files coded for the Epson
printer control language. To select the Epson emulation mode as the active
printer configuration, refer to the description of the ASCII Emulation Selection
option in Chapter 4 of the IBM Infoprint 6500 Line Matrix Printer User’s
Manual.
The Epson emulation provides many configurable parameters. The default
parameter values for this emulation are shown in Table 17. You can modify
these parameter values in two ways:
• The Epson host control codes. An extensive set of Epson control code
commands can be sent to the printer from an attached host computer via
the host data stream. Most of this chapter is devoted to describing the
Epson control code commands.
• The printer configuration menus. You can modify a subset of the
Epson emulation parameters using the operator panel switches and LCD
display, as described in the User’s Manual.
Control codes sent from a host system generally override previous settings
that result from the configuration menus. However, any configuration settings
from host control codes will be gone once the printer is powered off (or reset
to the default values), unless you have saved them to NVRAM using the
configuration menus. The User’s Manual describes the Save Custom Sets
option for saving changes to NVRAM.
The emulation’s response to several of the control codes depends on the
configuration. For example, upon receipt of the carriage return control code,
the emulation will perform either a carriage return function only, or a carriage
return and line feed, based on the configuration of the CR function.

91
Chapter 3 Overview

Default Values And States

Your printer memory stores a set of typical operating states and conditions for
the Epson emulation. When you power on the printer and select this
emulation, the factory settings in Table 17 are automatically invoked.

Table 17. Epson Emulation Default Settings

Characteristic Default Setting

Character Set Epson Set

Epson Print Language ASCII (USA)

Define CR Code CR = CR

Auto Line Feed Enable

Define LF Code LF = LF

Printer Select Disable

20 CPI Condensed Enable

92
 Default Values And States

Table 18 lists several additional default settings for parameters that are
provided by the Print Format menus (described in Chapter 4 of the User’s
Manual). Many of the settings shown in Table 18 can be overridden by Epson
FX-1050 host control codes for the same parameter.

Table 18. Print Format Default Settings

Characteristic Default Settings

CPI 10.0

LPI 6.0

Forms Width 13.6 inches

345.4 millimeters
136 characters

Forms Length 11.0 inches

279 millimeters
66 lines

Print Quality DP Quality

Proportional Spacing Disable

Italic Print Disable

Slashed Zero Disable

Left Margin 0 columns

Right Margin 0 columns

Bottom Margin 0 lines

Perforation Skip Disable

93
Chapter 3 Overview

Epson Emulation Exceptions And Differences

Because of mechanical differences between your printer(s) (line matrix
printers) and Epson printers (moving printhead serial matrix printers), some
Epson features are approximated or not supported.
• Epson codes that produce different behavior in your printer are indicated
by a “dagger” (†) in the Control Code Index and code section.
• The Epson emulation supports the following fonts: DP, NLQ Serif and
Sans Serif, Draft with 10 cpi, 12 cpi and 15 cpi in either condensed or
normal widths, and OCR A and OCR B in 10 cpi. Condensed printing at
10 cpi in DP quality maps to 17.1 cpi. Character pitches other than 10 DP
cpi map to 20 cpi in DP and 17.1 cpi in NLQ.
• Epson bit-image graphics are supported, including all plotter and CRT
densities.
• Many character sets are available, including IBM-PC Graphics (IBM Code
Page 0437) and Epson. You can configure the zero character to contain a
slash or no slash.
• The Double Wide print control codes (ESC W, SO) double character
width, but not inter-character spacing, unlike the Epson FX-1050. The
formulas for total character spacing are as follows:

Epson FX-1050 2 (char + 1 dot + space)

6500-v Epson Emulation 2 (char + 1 dot) + space
• The Condensed Print (SI) control code condenses character width but not
inter-character spacing, unlike the Epson FX-1050 which condenses both
character width and spacing.
• If one or more Backspace control codes follow directly after a Bit Image
Graphics command (ESC K, ESC L, ESC Y, or ESC Z), the 6500-v
printers will backspace into the graphic pattern, the number of dots
depending on the current cpi setting. For an Epson FX-1050 printer, one
Backspace will send the logical printhead directly to the beginning of the
graphics pattern.
• When backspacing over proportionally spaced characters, Epson printers
move back the width of each proportional character; this emulation moves
back based on the current cpi setting, as if proportional spacing is
disabled.

94
 Epson Character Sets

Epson Character Sets

Epson printers use five character sets. The IBM Graphics code page 437,
IBM PC Multilingual code page 0850, OCR A, and OCR B character sets may
be selected from the configuration menus. In addition, there is a unique
Epson character set. The Epson character set (shown in Table 19) is basically
the ASCII character set with the upper, non-ASCII set defined as italics, and
the usually unprintable codes designated as international characters.

Table 19. Epson Character Set

Hex 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F

0 à § SP 0 @ P ‘ p à § SP 0 @ P ‘ p

1 è ß ! 1 A Q a q è ß ! 1 A Q a q

2 ù DC2 " 2 B R b r ù Æ " 2 B R b r

3 ò DC3 # 3 C S c s ò æ # 3 C S c s

4 ì DC4 $ 4 D T d t ì ø $ 4 D T d t

5 ° ø % 5 E U e u ° ø % 5 E U e u

6 £ ¨ & 6 F V f v £ ¨ & 6 F V f v

7 BEL Ä ‘ 7 G W g w i Ä ’ 7 G W g w

8 BS CAN ( 8 H X h x ¿ Ö ( 8 H X h x

9 HT Ü ) 9 I Y i y Ñ Ü ) 9 I Y i y

A LF ä * : J Z j z ñ ä * : J Z j z

B VT ESC + ; K [ k { ¤ ö + ; K [ k {

C FF ü ’ < L \ l | Pt ü , < L \ l |

D CR É – = M ] m } Å É – = M ] m }

E SO é . > N ^ n ~ å é . > N ^ n ~

F SI ¥ / ? O _ o DEL Ç ¥ / ? O _ o ø

The international characters in hex 00-1F and hex 80-9F appear when you
invoke control code “ESC I 1”. You may use the Epson configuration menus
described in Chapter 4 of the User’s Manual (or the “ESC R” control code) to
select an international character set. Appendix F provides print samples for
each character set, shown in the NLQ print mode. Table 20 provides detailed
notes on print mode support for each character set.
Normally, these characters are either blank or control codes. The
implementation is that the control codes hide the non-italic international
characters, even in hex 00 through 1F, and DEL. DEL conceals the non-italic
slashed zero.

95
Chapter 3 Configuring The Epson FX-1050 Emulation With Control Codes

Configuring The Epson FX-1050 Emulation With Control

Codes
The remainder of this chapter describes the Epson printer control language
codes that may be sent from a host computer attached to the printer, in order
to invoke and configure numerous Epson emulation functions.

Format for Control Code Descriptions

The following information is listed for each control code (where applicable):
Name The title or function of the command.
ASCII The ASCII mnemonic for the command. Command
sequences are in 7-bit (ASCII) form.
Hex The code or command sequence in hexadecimal numbers.
Dec The code or command sequence in decimal numbers.
Purpose The function(s) of the control code.
Discussion A discussion of the uses of the code or command sequence,
including a description of exceptions or limitations to normal
use.
Example A sample output is provided when it is possible to illustrate
the effect of a control code or if a specific syntax is required.
† This symbol means the code produces non-Epson behavior
in your printer.

IMPORTANT If you specify any parameters for a control code other than the ones that
are defined in the control code description, unpredictable results may
occur.

Escape Sequences
An Epson control code consisting of more than one character is called an
escape sequence because the first character in the sequence is always the
ASCII ESCape character. ESC alerts the printer that a special function
command—not printable characters—follows.
The format for an Epson escape sequence is:
(ESC)(parameter 1)(parameter 2)...(parameter n)
For example, to select emphasized (offset) print, send the ESC character
immediately followed by the E character (do not add a space character):
ASCII: ESC E Hex: 1B 45 Dec: 27 69

96
 Set And Reset Codes

Set And Reset Codes

Set and reset are another way of saying turn on and turn off, select and
deselect, or enable and disable.
Some printer features are set and reset with an escape sequence and the
numbers 1 or 0. In such cases you can represent 1 and 0 as hexadecimal
codes 01 and 00, or as the ASCII codes for the numerals 1 and 0
(hexadecimal 31 and 30).

NUL Code
NUL (hex 00) is ignored by the printer and can be used as a fill character;
however, it can not be used to add blank spaces since it is not a space
character. NUL can also be used as a parameter terminator for the Set
Horizontal Tabs (page 119) or Set Vertical Tabs multibyte control code (page
140).
NOTE: Hex 80 in the 0437 PC Character Set and Hex 7F in the 0850 PC
Character Set are treated as a NUL; however, these two controls can
not be used as parameter terminators.

Print Modes Supported For Character Sets

Following is a summary of which print modes are supported for the Epson FX-
1050 emulation character sets. Additional information about character set
support is provided under the heading “Notes.” The code pages for the
character sets listed in Table 20 are shown in “Epson FX-1050 Emulation
Character Sets” on page 477.
NOTE: The print mode support for the languages shown in Table 20 (Epson
Set ASCII and following) is the same for the Epson expanded
character sets and the Epson 0437 PC character sets.

Table 20. Character Set Print Mode Support

Character Set NLQ(Serif)/DP/Draft Notes

OCR-A / OCR-B N/A OCR is 10 cpi only

0437 PC Character Set X

0737 Greek X

0813 Greek X

0819 ISO/ANSI Multilingual

0850 PC Multilingual X
0851 Greek Old X

0852 Latin 2/Roece X

0853 Latin 3 X

97
Chapter 3 Configuring The Epson FX-1050 Emulation With Control Codes

Table 20. Character Set Print Mode Support (continued)

Character Set NLQ(Serif)/DP/Draft Notes

0855 Cyrillic X

0857 Turkish X

0858 PC Euro Multilingual X

0860 Portuguese X

0861 Icelandic X

0862 Hebrew X

0863 French Canadian X

0864 Arabic X

0865 Danish/Norwegian X

0866 Cyrillic X

0869 Greek New X

0874 Thai X

0912 ISO Latin 2 PC X

0913 ISO Latin 3 X

0914 ISO Latin 4 X

0915 ISO Cyrillic PC X

0916 Hebrew X

0920 ISO Latin 5 Turkish X

0921 ISO Baltic Multilingual X

0922 Estonian X

0923 Latin 9 8859-15 X

1006 ISO Urdu X

1008 ISO Arabic X

1046 Arabic Extended X

1089 ISO Arabic X

1098 Farsi 1285 X

1116 Estonian X

1117 Latvian X

1118 Lithuanian X

98
 Print Modes Supported For Character Sets

Table 20. Character Set Print Mode Support (continued)

Character Set NLQ(Serif)/DP/Draft Notes

1129 Vietnamese X
1134 Hebrew Old X

Epson Set ASCII (USA) X

Epson Set French X

Epson Set German X

Epson Set English (UK) X

Epson Set Danish I X

Epson Set Swedish X

Epson Set Italian X

Epson Set Spanish I X

Epson Set Japanese X

Epson Set Norwegian X

Epson Set Danish II X

Epson Set Spanish II X

Epson Set Latin American I X

Epson Set French Canadian X

Epson Set Latin American II X

99
Chapter 3 Configuring The Epson FX-1050 Emulation With Control Codes

The Control Codes

The following index lists the control codes by function, ASCII mnemonic, and
page number. Some control code functions can also be selected at the
operator panel.
† = Produces non-Epson behavior in your printer.
FUNCTION ASCII CODE PAGE
Vertical Motion and Print Execution
Carriage Return CR 103
Form Feed FF 113
Line Feed LF 121
Line Feed n/216 Inch ESC J n 121
Line Spacing 1/6 Inch (6 lpi) ESC 2 122
Line Spacing 1/8 Inch (8 lpi) ESC 0 122
Line Spacing 7/72 Inch ESC 1 123
Line Spacing n/216 Inch ESC 3 n 123
† Line Spacing n/72 Inch ESC A n 124
† Paper Out Detection, Enable ESC 9 127
† Paper Out Detection, Disable ESC 8 128
Reverse Line Spacing n/216 Inch ESC j n 129
Select Vertical Tab Channel ESC / c 133
† Set Form Length by Lines ESC C n 135
Set Form Length in Inches ESC C NUL n 135
Set Vertical Tabs in Channels ESC b c n1 n2 n3 ... n16 NUL 136
Skip Over Perforation ESC N n 136
Skip Over Perforation, Cancel ESC O 137
Vertical Tab, Execute VT 140
Vertical Tab Set/Clear ESC B n1 n2 n3...nk NUL 140
Horizontal Motion
† Backspace BS 102
Carriage Return CR 103
Character Pitch 10 cpi ESC P 103
Character Pitch 12 cpi ESC M 104
Horizontal Tab Execute HT 119
Horizontal Tab Set/Release ESC D n1 ... nk NUL 119
Select/Deselect Proportional Spacing ESC p n 132
Set Absolute Horizontal
Print Position in 1/60” ESC $ n1 n2 133
Set Relative Horizontal
Print Position in 1/120” ESC \ n1 n2 133
Set Intercharacter Spacing in 1/120” ESC SP n 134
Set Margin, Left ESC l n 134
Set Margin, Right ESC Q n 134

100
 The Control Codes

FUNCTION ASCII CODE PAGE

Emphasis
† Condensed Print SI (or ESC SI) 106
Condensed Print Reset DC2 107
† Double High Print, Set/Reset ESC w n 108
Double Strike ESC G 109
Double Strike, Cancel ESC H 109
† Double Wide Print ESC W n 110
† Double Wide Print (1 Line) SO (or ESC SO) 111
Double Wide Print (1 Line), Cancel DC4 111
Emphasized Print ESC E 112
Emphasized Print, Cancel ESC F 112
Italic Printing ESC 4 120
Italic Printing, Cancel ESC 5 120
Superscript/Subscript Printing, Cancel ESC T 138
† Superscript/Subscript Printing ESC S n 137
Underline ESC – n 139
Print Quality Control
† Character Pitch 15 cpi ESC g 104
† Define a Download Character ESC & 107
† Master Print Select ESC ! n 127
† Remove Downloaded Characters ESC : NUL n NUL 129
† Select Print Quality ESC x n 131
† Select Serif or Sans Serif Font ESC k n 132
† Select User-Defined Font ESC % n 132
Character Set Manipulation
Character Set Select:
International Languages ESC R n 104
Enable Printing of Hex
Codes 00-1F and 80-9F ESC I n 113
Make Hex 80-9F Printable ESC 6 125
Make Hex 80-9F Control Codes ESC 7 124
Select Italic Character Set ESC t n 131
Data Manipulation
Cancel Line CAN 103
† Clear Bit 7 of Incoming Data Bytes to 0 ESC = 106
Delete Character DEL 108
Pass Bit 7 from Host ESC # 128
Set Bit 7 of Incoming Data Bytes to 1 ESC > 133
Graphics
Graphics, Standard Density ESC K n1 n2 115
Graphics, Double Density ESC L n1 n2 116
Graphics, Double Density
Double Speed ESC Y n1 n2 117
Graphics, Quadruple Density ESC Z n1 n2 118
Reassign Graphics Mode ESC ? s m 129
† Select Graphics Mode ESC * m n1 n2 130
Select 9-Pin Graphics Mode ESC ^ m n1 n2 d1 ... dk 131

101
Chapter 3 Configuring The Epson FX-1050 Emulation With Control Codes

FUNCTION ASCII CODE PAGE

Miscellaneous Printer Control
Bell BEL 103
† Cut-Sheet/Paper Feed Control ESC EM n 107
† Half-Speed Mode, On/Off ESC s n 118
Initialize Printer ESC @ 120
Printer Select DC1 128
Printer Deselect DC3 128
Super-Set Commands ESC | } ; 138
Unidirectional Printing, 1 Line ESC < 139
Unidirectional Printing, Set/Reset ESC U n 139

Backspace
ASCII BS
Hex 08
Dec 08
Purpose Moves the logical print head to the left one character space
toward the first character column.
Discussion Assures that the previous printable characters will be printed,
then moves the logical print head one character space to the
left at the current pitch setting (which includes double wide
and ESC SP). If the logical print head bumps into the left
margin, it stops.
† When backspacing over proportionally spaced characters,
Epson printers move back the width of each proportional
character; this emulation moves back based on the current
cpi setting, as if proportional spacing is disabled.
† If one or more Backspace control codes follow directly after a
Bit Image Graphics command (ESC K, ESC L, ESC Y, or
ESC Z), the 6500-v printers will backspace into the graphic
pattern, the number of dots depending on the current cpi
setting. For an Epson FX-1050 printer, one Backspace will
send the logical printhead directly to the beginning of the
graphics pattern.
Example If you were to print five “T” characters, then two BS
commands, then two “=” characters, the output would look
like the sample below:

102
 Bell

Bell
ASCII BEL
Hex 07
Dec 07
Purpose Sounds the printer buzzer/beeper.
Discussion The BEL function will sound the buzzer/beeper for 0.2
seconds upon receipt of this command.

Cancel Line
ASCII CAN
Hex 18
Dec 24
Purpose Clears all unprinted data from a line, but does not affect
control codes.
Discussion You can use this control code to delete a line, but do so with
caution to avoid possible misprinting. This control code
cancels the double wide attribute set by SO. No other print
attributes are affected. The logical print head goes to the print
position it had after the last CR or paper motion command.

Carriage Return
ASCII CR
Hex 0D
Dec 13
Purpose Prints the data in the buffer, then returns the logical print
head to the left margin.
Discussion Subsequent data are emphasized. A line feed will be
appended if the printer is configured from the operator panel
for CR = CR + LF. When CR = CR + LF, this code cancels all
one-line-only emphasis and font controls: double-wide from
SO and ESC SO, and unidirectional printing from ESC <.

Character Pitch 10 CPI

ASCII ESC P
Hex 1B 50
Dec 27 80
Purpose Sets character pitch to 10 characters per inch (cpi).
Discussion This command is normally used to cancel 12 cpi.

103
Chapter 3 Configuring The Epson FX-1050 Emulation With Control Codes

Character Pitch 12 CPI

ASCII ESC M
Hex 1B 4D
Dec 27 77
Purpose Sets character pitch to 12 characters per inch (cpi).
Discussion This command is available in all print modes except OCR A
and OCR B.

Character Pitch 15 CPI

ASCII ESC g
Hex 1B 67
Dec 27 103
Purpose Sets character pitch to 15 characters per inch (cpi).
†Discussion This command is not defined in Epson FX printers. It is
included in this emulation for compatibility with the Okidata
KX-P1180 printer. This command is available in all print
modes except OCR A and OCR B.

Character Set Select: International Languages

ASCII ESC R n
Hex 1B 52 n
Dec 27 82 n
Purpose Specifies a language overlay that prints the characters shown
in Table 21 when the specified code is invoked.
Appendix F provides print samples for each character set,
shown in the NLQ print mode. Table 20 lists character sets
that are shown in “Epson FX-1050 Emulation Character Sets”
on page 477.
where n = hex 0 through E to determine the language
overlay shown in Table 21 below. Epson only
defines character sets through hex C.

104
 Character Set Select: International Languages

Table 21. Epson International Character Sets

(Hex) International
23 24 40 5B 5C 5D 5E 60 7B 7C 7D 7E
If n= Character Set is:
0 USA # $ @ [ \ ] ^ ‘ { | } ~
1 French # $ à ° ç § ^ ‘ é ù è ¨
2 German # $ § Ä Ö Ü ^ ‘ ä ö ü ß
3 English (UK) £ $ @ [ \ ] ^ ‘ { | } ~
4 Danish I # $ @ Æ Ø Å ^ ‘ æ ø å ~
5 Swedish # ¤ É Ä ö Å Ü é ä ö å ü
6 Italian # $ @ ° \ é ^ ù à ò è ì
7 Spanish I $ @ i Ñ ¿ ^ ‘ ¨ ñ } ~
8 Japanese # $ @ [ ¥ ] ^ ‘ { | } ~
9 Norwegian # ¤ É Æ Ø Å Ü é æ ø å ü
A Danish II # $ É Æ Ø Å Ü é æ ø å ü
B Spanish II # $ à i Ñ ¿ é ‘ í ñ ó ú
C Latin American I # $ à i Ñ ¿ é ü í ñ ó ú
D French Canadian # $ à â ç ê î ô é ù é û
E Latin American II # $ @ [ Ñ ] ú í ó á é ü

Discussion This control code setting overrides a character set selection

made at the operator panel.
Example The following example illustrates international character
selection using the IBM PC character set.

105
Chapter 3 Configuring The Epson FX-1050 Emulation With Control Codes

Clear Bit 7 Of Incoming Data Bytes To 0

ASCII ESC =
Hex 1B 3D
Dec 27 61
Purpose Sets the most significant bit (MSB) of all incoming data to 0.
Discussion The MSB is bit number 7. This command only affects text and
control code data. Graphics data pass through unchanged.
Some applications always set the MSB of print data to one
(1), which results in italic or graphics printing in Epson
printers. This command overcomes the problem.
NOTE: This command does not suppress hex FF from printing.

Condensed Print
ASCII SI ESC SI
Hex 0F 1B 0F
Dec 15 27 15
Purpose Condenses print pitch as close to 60% of the former
character width as possible (up to 20 characters per inch).
Discussion The condensed print command affects all subsequent
characters. After the printer receives code SI, all characters
are printed condensed (approximately 60 per cent of the
width of normal characters) until the printer is reset by ESC
M, ESC P, DC2, a printer reset, or a new print mode control
code. SI code (hex 0F) is equivalent to the ESC SI code. If
condensed print is not allowed in the current font, this code is
ignored. Proportionally spaced text cannot be condensed.
Proportional spacing overrides condensed printing.
When condensed print is selected, the following character
pitches go into effect:
• DP 10 cpi condenses to DP 17.1 cpi. NLQ 10, 12, and 15 cpi condense to
NLQ 17.1 cpi. Draft 10 cpi condenses to Draft 17.1 cpi.
• DP 12 and 15 cpi condense to DP 20. Draft 12 and 15 cpi condense to
Draft 20.
† This control code condenses character width but not inter-
character spacing. An actual Epson FX-1050 printer
condenses both character width and spacing.
If Condensed Print is combined with Double High (ESC w)
printing, only Double High printing will occur.

106
 Condensed Print Reset

Example The sample output below shows condensed character

printing and reset.

Condensed Print Reset

ASCII DC2
Hex 12
Dec 18
Purpose Cancels the condensed print mode set by SI, ESC SI, or the
operator panel.
Discussion This returns the printer to the font that was active before
condensed print occurred. Other print attributes are not
affected.
Example See the Condensed Print control code (page 106) for an
example of Condensed Print Reset.

Cut-Sheet / Paper Feed Control

ASCII ESC EM n
Hex 1B 19 n
Dec 27 25 n
Purpose This code controls the paper feed mechanism on Epson
printers.
†Discussion The printer ignores this command.

Define a Download Character

ASCII ESC &
Hex 1B 26
Dec 27 38
Purpose Defines a download character.
†Discussion The printer ignores this command and removes all
downloaded font data from the data stream.

107
Chapter 3 Configuring The Epson FX-1050 Emulation With Control Codes

Delete Character
ASCII DEL
Hex 7F
Dec 127
Purpose Deletes the previous character on a line.
Discussion This command is ignored if it occurs immediately after a CR
or a paper motion command. Characters truncated due to
line length restrictions are not affected by this code.

Double High Print, Set/Reset

ASCII ESC w n
Hex 1B 77 n
Dec 27 119 n
Purpose Turns double-high character printing on and off. Double-high
characters are standard width but twice as high.
where n = hex 1 or hex 31 turns double high printing on
n = hex 0 or hex 30 turns double high printing off
†Discussion The OCR A and OCR B fonts cannot be printed in double
high.
NOTE: It is recommended to use double Line Feeds and Carriage Returns
when double-high character printing is on (after an ESC w control
code has been sent), or else the printer will overstrike text that has
already printed.
† If Superscript/Subscript (ESC S) or Condensed Print (SI) is
combined with Double High printing, only Double High
printing will occur.
Example The following sample output illustrates double-high character
printing.

108
 Double Strike

Double Strike
ASCII ESC G
Hex 1B 47
Dec 27 71
Purpose Makes text bolder by double printing each dot twice.
†Discussion This command makes text bolder by printing each dot twice,
the second dot offset to the right of the first by a distance
equal to 1/2 the width of a dot, the same as with ESC E.
Example The following sample output illustrates double strike
character printing.

Double Strike, Cancel

ASCII ESC H
Hex 1B 48
Dec 27 72
Purpose Turns off the double strike printing set by ESC G or ESC !.
Discussion This control code resets only the double strike print attribute.
Other print attributes, such as double wide printing, are not
affected.

109
Chapter 3 Configuring The Epson FX-1050 Emulation With Control Codes

Double Wide Print

ASCII ESC W n
Hex 1B 57 n
Dec 27 87 n
Purpose Turns double wide print on and off.
where n = hex 1 or hex 31 turns double wide print on
n = hex 0 or hex 30 turns double wide print off
Discussion When ESC W is received, all characters are printed twice as
wide until reset. This command overrides SO, ESC SO, and
DC4. The OCR A and OCR B fonts cannot be printed in
double wide.
† This control code doubles character width, but does not
double inter-character spacing. unlike the Epson FX-1050.
The formulas for total character spacing are as follows:
Epson FX-1050 2(char + 1 dot + space)
6500-v Epson Emulation2(char + 1 dot) + space
Example The following sample output illustrates double wide character
printing.

110
 Double Wide Print (1 Line)

Double Wide Print (1 Line)

ASCII SO ESC SO
Hex 0E 1B 0E
Dec 14 27 14
Purpose Selects double wide print for one line only.
Discussion This control code is a line-by-line print attribute; when SO or
ESC SO is received, the characters on the current line print
twice as wide, then automatically reset.
† This control code is cancelled by the DC4 code or by a CR
code, as in the Epson FX-1050. It is also cancelled by a
paper motion control code (LF, VT, etc.), as in the IBM
Proprinter III XL.
† This control code doubles character width, but does not
double inter-character spacing. unlike the Epson FX-1050.
The formulas for total character spacing are as follows:
Epson FX-1050 2(char + 1 dot + space)
6500-v Epson Emulation 2(char + 1 dot) + space
Example The following sample output illustrates double wide print for
one line only.

Double Wide Print (1 Line), Cancel

ASCII DC4
Hex 14
Dec 20
Purpose Cancels the double wide print for one line only selected by
SO or ESC SO.
Discussion This command cancels the double wide print selected by SO
or ESC SO, but does not cancel double wide printing
selected by ESC W or ESC !.

111
Chapter 3 Configuring The Epson FX-1050 Emulation With Control Codes

Emphasized Print
ASCII ESC E
Hex 1B 45
Dec 27 69
Purpose Selects emphasized character print format.
Discussion Emphasized print makes text bolder by printing each dot
twice, the second dot offset to the right of the first by a
distance equal to 1/2 the width of a dot. This command is
available in both DP and NLQ modes.
Example The following sample output illustrates emphasized character
printing.

Emphasized Print, Cancel

ASCII ESC F
Hex 1B 46
Dec 27 70
Purpose Cancels emphasized character printing selected by ESC E or
ESC !.
Discussion This command is available in both DP and NLQ modes.

112
 Enable Printing Hex Codes 00-1F and 80-9F

Enable Printing Hex Codes 00-1F and 80-9F

ASCII ESC I n (uppercase “i”)
Hex 1B 49 n
Dec 27 73 n
Purpose Permits you to print hex codes 00-1F and 80-9F.
where n = 1 allows hex codes 00-1F and 80-9F to be
printable and to be used for user-defined
characters.
n = 0 returns hex 00-1F and 80-9F to control codes.
Discussion The printable characters that are included in hex codes 00
through 1F and 80 through 9F are usually not printable in the
default state on Epson printers. Sending ESC I 1 enables you
to print characters in this range. Sending ESC I 0 returns the
codes to non-printable status.
The printable codes for the Epson character set are shown in
Figure 3. Figure 3 shows the types of characters and their
addresses; it is not a sample of printer output.
Appendix F provides samples of the many character sets
available with the Epson emulation.

Form Feed
ASCII FF
Hex 0C
Dec 12
Purpose Prints the data in the buffer, if any, then moves the paper to
the top of the next form.
Discussion The logical print head moves to the left margin. This code
cancels all one-line-only emphasis and font controls: double-
wide from SO and ESC SO, and unidirectional printing from
ESC <.

113
Chapter 3 Configuring The Epson FX-1050 Emulation With Control Codes

BITS
B7
B6
B5
0
0
1 KEY
B4 B3 B2 B1
33 OCTAL
1 0 1 1 ESC 27 DECIMAL
1B HEX
CHARACTER

B8 0 0 B8 1 1
B7 0 0 B7 0 0
B6 0 0 B6 0 0
B5 0 1 B5 0 1
BITS COLUMN
BITS COLUMN
B4 B3 B2 B1 ROW 8 9
B4 B3 B2 B1 ROW 0 1
0 20 200 220
0 0 0 0 0 à 0
0 § 16
10
0 0 0 0 0 àà 128
80
§ 144
90
1 21 201 221
0 0 0 1 1 è 1 17 0 0 0 1 1 è 129
ß 145
1 ß 11 81 91
2 22 202 222
0 0 1 0
0 0 1 0 2 ù 2 DC2 18 2 ù 130 Æ 146
2 12 82 92

3 23 203 223
0 0 1 1 3 ò 3 DC3 19 0 0 1 1
3 ò 131 æ 147
3 13 83 93
4 24 204 224
0 1 0 0 4 4 DC4 20 0 1 0 0 4 ì 132 Ø 148
ì 4 14 84 94

0 1 0 1 5
5
5
ø
25
21
0 1 0 1
5
205
133 ø
225
149
5 15 85 95
6 26 206 226
0 1 1 0
0 1 1 0 6 £ 6 ¨ 22 6 £ 134
¨ 150
6 16 86 96
7 27 207 227
0 1 1 1 7 BEL 7 Ä 23
0 1 1 1
7 ¡ 135 Ä 151
7 17 87 97
10 30 210 230
1 0 0 0
1 0 0 0 8 BS 8 CAN 24 8 ¿ 136 Ö 152
8 18 88 98
11 31 211 231
1 0 0 1
1 0 0 1 9 HT 9
Ü 25 9 Ñ 137 Ü 153
9 19 89 99

12 32 212 232
1 0 1 0
1 0 1 0 10 LF 10 ä 26 10 ñ 138 ä 154
0A 1A 8A 9A
13 33 213 233
1 0 1 1
1 0 1 1 11 VT ESC 11 139
ö 155
11
0B
27
1B
¤ 8B 9B
14 34 214 234
1 1 0 0
1 1 0 0 12 FF 12
ü 28 12 140 ü 156
0C 1C 8C 9C
15 35 215 235
1 1 0 1
1 1 0 1 13 CR 13 Å 141 É 157
13
0D
É 29
1D 8D 9D
16 36 216 236
1 1 1 0 14 SO 14 é 30
1 1 1 0 14 å 142 é 158
0E 1E 8E 9E
17 37 217 237
1 1 1 1 15 SI 15
¥ 31
1 1 1 1
15 ç 143 ¥ 159
0F 1F 8F 9F

Figure 3. Epson Printable Codes (Hex 00-1F and 80-9F)

114
 Graphics, Standard Density

Graphics, Standard Density

ASCII ESC K n1 n2
Hex 1B 4B n1 n2
Dec 27 75 n1 n2
Purpose Selects normal density bit image graphics of 60 dots per inch
horizontally and 72 dots per inch vertically.
where (n1 + 256n2) defines the number of data bytes to
follow.
DATA = ASCII characters for the dot pattern bytes.
NOTE: “DATA” consist of 8-bit dot columns, with the MSB at the top, and “1”
bits producing dots. For more information, refer to Chapter 8.
Discussion You can change graphics density with the ESC ? command.
Example The following example produces a pattern of standard
density bit image graphics. The 9 data-bit pattern is repeated
27 times. Compare this example to the double density and
quadruple density examples.

115
Chapter 3 Configuring The Epson FX-1050 Emulation With Control Codes

Graphics, Double Density

ASCII ESC L n1 n2
Hex 1B 4C n1 n2
Dec 27 76 n1 n2
Purpose Selects double density bit image graphics of 120 dots per
inch horizontally and 72 dots per inch vertically.
where (n1 + 256n2) defines the number of data bytes to
follow.
DATA = ASCII characters for the dot pattern bytes.
NOTE: “DATA” consist of 8-bit dot columns, with the MSB at the top, and “1”
bits producing dots. For more information, refer to Chapter 8.
Discussion Double density printing reduces print speed to half that of
normal density printing. You can change graphics density
with the ESC ? command.
Example The following example produces double density bit-image
graphics of the pattern used in the standard density bit-image
mode example. The amount of data must be doubled for
double density (the data are used 54 times rather than 27).

116
 Graphics, Double Density Double Speed

Graphics, Double Density Double Speed

ASCII ESC Y n1 n2
Hex 1B 59 n1 n2
Dec 27 89 n1 n2
Purpose Selects double density, double speed bit-image graphics of
120 dpi horizontally and 72 dpi vertically.
where (n1 + 256n2) defines the number of data bytes to
follow.
DATA = ASCII characters for the dot pattern bytes.
NOTE: “DATA” consist of 8-bit dot columns, with the MSB at the top, and “1”
bits producing dots. For more information, refer to Chapter 8.
Discussion This mode prints double density with no adjacent dots. It is
similar to ESC L, except that if the graphics data contain
horizontally adjacent dots, the data may print incorrectly. This
feature is widely used to move the print head precisely, by
printing blank dot columns.
Example The following example produces a double density, double
speed graphic image of the pattern used in the standard
density example. The amount of data must be doubled for
double density (the data are used 54 times rather than 27).

117
Chapter 3 Configuring The Epson FX-1050 Emulation With Control Codes

Graphics, Quadruple Density

ASCII ESC Z n1 n2
Hex 1B 5A n1 n2
Dec 27 90 n1 n2
Purpose Selects Quadruple Density Bit Image graphics of 240 dpi
horizontally and 72 dpi vertically.
where (n1 + 256n2) defines the number of data bytes to
follow.
DATA = ASCII characters for the dot pattern bytes.
NOTE: “DATA” consist of 8-bit dot columns, with the MSB at the top, and “1”
bits producing dots. For more information, refer to Chapter 8.
Discussion This mode is similar to ESC L, except that four dot columns
are printed in the space normally taken by two columns. You
can change graphics density with the ESC ? command.
Example The following example produces quadruple density graphics
of the pattern used in the standard density example. The
amount of data must be quadrupled for quadruple density
(the data are used 108 times rather than 27).

Half Speed Mode, On/Off

ASCII ESC s n
Hex 1B 73 n
Dec 27 115 n
Purpose Reduces printer speed 50%
where n = hex 00 or 30 turns half speed mode off
n = hex 01 or 31 turns half speed mode on
†Discussion This is simulated in your printer by unidirectional printing.

118
 Horizontal Tab Execute

Horizontal Tab Execute

ASCII HT
Hex 09
Dec 09
Purpose Moves the logical print head to the next horizontal tab stop.
Discussion Power-on default horizontal tabs are set at every eighth
character at the current character spacing. Tab positions are
not affected by a change of font or character width. Blank
spaces between HT stops are underlined in underline mode.

Horizontal Tab Set/Release

ASCII ESC D n1 ... nk NUL
Hex 1B 44 n1 ... nk 00
Dec 27 68 n1 ... nk 0
Purpose Sets up to 32 horizontal tab positions.
where n1 through n32 specify the character column of the
tab positions. NUL is the sequence terminator. ESC
D NUL clears all tabs.
Discussion The values of n must be listed in ascending order or they are
ignored. Tabs greater than 32 or those positioned beyond the
right margin are ignored. The physical tab position is the
product of n and the current cell width (1/pitch), excluding
double wide.
After the tabs are set, HT moves the logical print head to the
next tab stop. Sending ESC @ initializes the printer and
resets the tabs to every eighth character column (which is the
default). In proportional mode, the size of 10 CPI characters
determines tab positions.
Example The following example illustrates how to set horizontal tabs.

119
Chapter 3 Configuring The Epson FX-1050 Emulation With Control Codes

Initialize Printer
ASCII ESC @
Hex 1B 40
Dec 27 64
Purpose Resets all print-related parameters to the power-up
configuration values.
Discussion Restores the power-up configuration values and the print
buffer is cleared of printable data on the line preceding the
command. Current position is set as top-of-form.
Font, international language selection, forms length, skip-
over perforation, and character pitch are reset to the power-
up configuration values. Other values are returned to default
values.
Character-by-character and line-by-line attributes are
canceled. All channels of the vertical format unit are cleared.
This command resets the horizontal tabs to every eighth
character column. Interface parameters and printer protocol
selection are not affected.

Italic Printing
ASCII ESC 4
Hex 1B 34
Dec 27 52
Purpose Turns on italic character printing.
Discussion Character graphics (IBM graphic set hex B0 through DF and
F0 through FE) cannot be italicized. Italic printing will reduce
throughput.

Italic Printing, Cancel

ASCII ESC 5
Hex 1B 35
Dec 27 53
Purpose Turns off italic character printing.

120
 Line Feed

Line Feed
ASCII LF
Hex 0A
Dec 10
Purpose Prints the data in the buffer (if any) and advances the vertical
character position a distance of one line at the current line
spacing.
Discussion The logical print head keeps the same distance from the
margin. The current line is printed and the logical printhead
moves down a distance equal to the current line spacing. If
there are no dots, paper moves and no printing occurs. When
possible, successive line feeds are accumulated and moved
at once.
This code cancels all one-line-only emphasis and font
selections: double-wide from SO and ESC SO, and
unidirectional printing from ESC <.

Line Feed n/216 Inch

ASCII ESC J n
Hex 1B 4A n
Dec 27 74 n
Purpose Immediately advances the paper n/216 inch.
where n = 0 through 255
Discussion n = 0 is ignored. Paper movement occurs in multiples of 3/
216 inch. This command produces an immediate line feed
but does not affect line spacing or produce a carriage return.
Any one-line-only print attributes in effect are canceled.
Small values of n may result in overlapping lines.
Overlapping lines may also occur if print attributes such as
double high, superscript, or subscript characters are used on
the same line.
Example The following example illustrates n/216-inch line spacing.

121
Chapter 3 Configuring The Epson FX-1050 Emulation With Control Codes

Line Spacing 1/6 Inch (6 lpi)

ASCII ESC 2
Hex 1B 32
Dec 27 50
Purpose Sets the line spacing to 1/6 inch (6 lpi) for subsequent line
feeds.
Discussion The 2 is ASCII character 2, not hex 2.
When ESC 2 is received, all lines are printed at 6 lpi until a
new line spacing is selected or the printer is reset. This
control code overrides line spacing set at the operator panel.
Example The following example illustrates 1/6-inch line spacing.

Line Spacing 1/8 Inch (8 lpi)

ASCII ESC 0
Hex 1B 30
Dec 27 48
Purpose Sets the line spacing to 1/8 inch (8 lpi) for subsequent line
feeds.
Discussion When ESC 0 is received, all lines are printed at 8 lpi until a
new line spacing is selected or the printer is reset. This
control code overrides line spacing set at the operator panel.
Example The following example illustrates 1/8-inch line spacing.

122
 Line Spacing 7/72 Inch

Line Spacing 7/72 Inch

ASCII ESC 1
Hex 1B 31
Dec 27 49
Purpose Sets the line spacing to 7/72 inch (10.3 lpi) for subsequent
line feeds.
Discussion All lines are printed at the 7/72-inch line spacing until a new
line spacing is selected or the printer is reset. This control
code overrides line spacing set at the operator panel.
Printing speed is reduced if printed lines overlap.
Example The following example illustrates 7/72-inch line spacing.

Line Spacing n/216 Inch

ASCII ESC 3 n
Hex 1B 33 n
Dec 27 51 n
Purpose Specifies the line spacing at n/216-inch increments.
where n = 0 through 255
Discussion All line feeds following receipt of this code are at n/216 inch
line spacing until a new line spacing is selected or the printer
is reset. Line spacing set by this control code overrides line
spacing set at the operator panel.
The vertical character position moves only in multiples of the
current dot row spacing. If the distance to move is other than
a multiple of the current dot row spacing, the remainder is
added to the next paper motion command.
Paper movement occurs in multiples of 3/216 only.
Use caution when combining this control code with other print
attributes such as Elongated (Double High), Superscript, or
Subscript; overlapping lines may occur. Print speed is
reduced if lines overlap.

123
Chapter 3 Configuring The Epson FX-1050 Emulation With Control Codes

Example The following example illustrates n/216-inch line spacing.

Line Spacing n/72 Inch

ASCII ESC A n
Hex 1B 41 n
Dec 27 65 n
Purpose Sets a line spacing of n/72 inch for subsequent line feeds.
where n = 0 through 255
Discussion When this control sequence is received, all subsequent line
feeds are n/72-inch until a new line spacing is selected or the
printer is reset. This setting overrides line spacing set at the
operator panel.
Small values of n may result in overlapping lines.
Overlapping lines may also occur if print attributes such as
Elongated (Double High), Superscript, or Subscript
characters are used on the same line. If lines overlap, printing
speed is reduced. Any values set by ESC 3 (line spacing n/
216 inch) are replaced.
Example The following example illustrates 20/72-inch line spacing.

Make Hex 80-9F Control Codes

ASCII ESC 7
Hex 1B 37
Dec 27 55
Purpose Selects hex codes 80-9F in the character sets as control
codes.
Discussion This is the default when the Epson character set is selected
as the default set at the operator panel.

124
 Make Hex 80-9F Printable

Make Hex 80-9F Printable

ASCII ESC 6
Hex 1B 36
Dec 27 54
Purpose Selects hex codes 80-9F in the character sets as printable
characters.
Discussion This is the default when the IBM PC character set (code page
0437) is selected as the default set at the operator panel.
Figure 4 shows the hex 80-9F printable characters for the
Epson character set, and for the IBM PC graphic character
set.

125
Chapter 3 Configuring The Epson FX-1050 Emulation With Control Codes

Figure 4. Epson Printable Codes (Hex 80-9F)

126
 Master Print Select

Master Print Select

ASCII ESC ! n
Hex 1B 21 n
Dec 27 33 n
Purpose Selects or changes print attributes in a single command.
where n = an 8-bit number with the bits set to specify print
attributes, as shown below.

Table 22. Master Print Select

Bit No. Bit = 0 Bit = 1

0 1 cpi † 12 cpi
1 Monospaced † Proportional
2 Normal Condensed
3 Normal Emphasized
4 Normal † Double Strike
5 Normal Double Wide
6 Normal Italic
7 Normal Underlined

†Discussion Emphasized is substituted for double strike. Graphics and

grey scale characters are not underlined. Proportional
spacing overrides condensed or 12 cpi printing if both are
selected.

Paper Out Detection, Enable

ASCII ESC 9
Hex 1B 39
Dec 27 57
Purpose Asserts a paper out condition immediately when the end of
the paper supply is sensed.
†Discussion The printer decodes and ignores this command.

127
Chapter 3 Configuring The Epson FX-1050 Emulation With Control Codes

Paper Out Detection, Disable

ASCII ESC 8
Hex 1B 38
Dec 27 56
Purpose Enable printing to the end of the paper supply when a paper
out condition is sensed.
†Discussion The printer decodes and ignores this command.

Pass Bit 7 From Host

ASCII ESC #
Hex 1B 23
Dec 27 35
Purpose Passes bit 7 (the eighth and most significant bit) whether it is
1 or 0, thereby cancelling ESC > and ESC =.
Discussion This command affects only text and control code data; bit 8 of
graphics data is always passed through.

Printer Select
ASCII DC1
Hex 11
Dec 17
Purpose Places printer in the selected state.
Discussion The configuration parameter Printer Select must be set to
Enable. Refer to the User’s Manual for information about this
menu option. This control code allows the printer to receive
and print data from the host if it was deselected by DC3. If the
printer was not deselected by DC3, this code is ignored.

Printer Deselect
ASCII DC3
Hex 13
Dec 19
Purpose Places printer in the deselected state.
Discussion The configuration parameter Printer Select must be set to
Enable. Refer to the User’s Manual for information about this
menu option. When the printer receives this command it
ignores data until a DC1 (Printer Select) command is
received.

128
 Reassign Graphics Mode

Reassign Graphics Mode

ASCII ESC ? s m
Hex 1B 3F s m
Dec 27 63 s m
Purpose Changes one graphics mode to another.
Discussion s is character K, L, Y, or Z, which is changed to mode m (0-7)
from Table 23 on page 130. Thereafter, sending data to the
bit image command makes the data print according to the
graphics mode you select with m.

Remove Downloaded Characters

ASCII ESC : NUL n NUL
Hex 1B 3A 00 n 00
Dec 27 58 0 n 0
Purpose Erases all downloaded characters.
†Discussion The printer ignores this command but removes all data sent.

Reverse Line Spacing n/216 Inch

ASCII ESC j n
Hex 1B 6A n
Dec 27 106 n
Purpose Specify the reverse line feed at n/256-inch increment
where n = 0 through 255
Discussion All reverse line feeds following receipt of this code are at n/
216 inch line spacing until a new line spacing is selected or
the printer is reset. Line spacing set by this control code
overrides line spacing set at the operator panel.
The vertical character position moves only in multiples of the
current dot row spacing. If the distance to move is other than
a multiple of the current dot row spacing, the remainder is
added to the next paper motion command.
Paper movement occurs in multiples of 3/216 only.
Use caution when combining this control code with other print
attributes such as Elongated (Double High), Superscript, or
Subscript; overlapping lines may occur. Print speed is
reduced if lines overlap.

129
Chapter 3 Configuring The Epson FX-1050 Emulation With Control Codes

Select Graphics Mode

ASCII ESC * m n1 n2
Hex 1B 2A m n1 n2
Dec 27 42 m n1 n2
Purpose Turns on 8-pin bit image graphics mode m. Table 23 charts
the graphics modes available.
Discussion The total number of columns = n1 + 256n2.
NOTE: This command does not suppress hexadecimal FF from printing.

Table 23. Epson Graphics Modes

Alternate Density* Resolution**

m Option
Code (dots per inch) (dots per inch)

0 Single density ESC K 60 120

1 Double density ESC L 120 1201

2 High-speed double density ESC Y 60 1202

3 Quadruple density ESC Z 120 2401,2,3

4 CRT I none 80 160

5 Plotter (1:1) none 72 144

6 CRT II none 90 180

7 Double density plotter none 144 1441

1
Prints at half speed.
2 Data can be sent incorrectly. In these modes, no dots can be closer horizontally than the current font dot
density. Sending incorrect data does not damage the printer.
3 240 dpi is simulated by combining the dots from two adjacent columns into one 120 dpi dot column.

* Number of horizontal dots per inch the printer can make.

** Number of dot columns available.

130
 Select Italic Character Set

Select Italic Character Set

ASCII ESC t n
Hex 1B 74 n
Dec 27 116 n
Purpose Selects the italics characters from hex 80 through hex FF, or
selects the graphics characters from hex 80 through hex FF.
where n = hex 1 selects the graphics character set
n = hex 0 selects the italics character set
Discussion The graphics character set is the IBM Graphics Code Page
437.

Select 9-Pin Graphics Mode

ASCII ESC ^ m n1 n2 d1 ... dk
Hex 1B 5E m n1 n2 d1 ... dk
Dec 27 94 m n1 n2 d1 ... dk
Purpose Turns on 9-pin bit image graphics mode.
Discussion m defines the plot density as shown in Table 23 on page 130.
n1 + 256n2 = The total number of columns.
This mode requires two bytes of graphic data for every
column of print. Each column is sent as a pair: d1, d3, ... d(k-
1) set the top 8 bits of a normal dot column, just like ESC K;
d2, d4, ... dk set the ninth dot in the column (the most
significant bit) just below the bottom-most dot of columns d1,
d3, ... d(k-1).

Select Print Quality

ASCII ESC x n
Hex 1B 78 n
Dec 27 120 n
Purpose Selects print quality.
where n may be in the range from 0 through 4. Values in the
range 5-255 are invalid.
n = hex 0 or hex 30 selects DP print quality
n = hex 1 or hex 31 selects Near Letter Quality (NLQ)
n = hex 2 or hex 32 selects Draft print quality
n = hex 3 or hex 33 selects OCR A print quality
n = hex 4 or hex 34 selects OCR B print quality

131
Chapter 3 Configuring The Epson FX-1050 Emulation With Control Codes

Discussion This command overrides operator panel print quality

selections.
NOTE: Some print attributes (such as condensed, double-wide, etc.) may not
return to their previous setting when changing from OCR-A or OCR-B
back to another Print Quality. For guaranteed results, all print
attributes should be set after the Print Quality is selected.
† Selecting an OCR print quality overrides any character
attributes set, such as condensed, double-wide, etc. Setting
character attributes when OCR is set may cause unexpected
results.
† Draft, OCR A, and OCR B print qualities (n = 2, 3, or 4) are
not defined in Epson-FX printers.

Select/Deselect Proportional Spacing

ASCII ESC p n
Hex 1B 70 n
Dec 27 112 n
where n = 0 = Off; n = 1 = On
Purpose Turns proportional mode on and off.

Select Serif Or Sans Serif Font

ASCII ESC k n
Hex 1B 6B n
Dec 27 107 n
Purpose Selects an NLQ font.
† where if n = 0, 2, 4 .. (any even value), the font selected is
a serif NLQ font (Courier, instead of standard
Epson Roman).
if n = 1, 3, 5 . (any odd value), the font selected is a
sans serif NLQ font.

Select User-Defined Font

ASCII ESC % n
Hex 1B 25 n
Dec 27 37 n
Purpose Selects a user-defined font.
†Discussion The printer ignores this command and removes all font data
sent from the data stream.

132
 Select Vertical Tab Channel

Select Vertical Tab Channel

ASCII ESC / c
Hex 1B 2F c
Dec 27 47 c
Purpose Selects a vertical tab channel set by ESC b.
where c = 0 through 7.
Discussion Subsequent VT (hex 0B) commands use tab table specified
by c. If no tab table is selected, channel 0 is used.

Set Absolute Horizontal Print Position In 1/60 Inch

ASCII ESC $ n1 n2
Hex 1B 24 n1 n2
Dec 27 36 n1 n2
Purpose Moves the logical print head to an absolute horizontal print
position, using 1/60 inch increments.
where (n1 + 256n2) = the unsigned distance in inches
60 from the left margin.
Discussion If the distance goes beyond right margin, the sequence is
ignored.

Set Bit 7 Of Incoming Data Bytes To 1

ASCII ESC >
Hex 1B 3E
Dec 27 62
Purpose Sets the most significant bit (MSB) of all incoming data to 1.
Discussion The MSB is bit number 7. This command only affects text and
control code data. Graphics data pass through unchanged.

Set Relative Horizontal Print Position in 1/120 Inch

ASCII ESC \ n1 n2
Hex 1B 5C n1 n2
Dec 27 92 n1 n2
Purpose Moves the logical print head to a relative horizontal print
position, using 1/120 inch increments.
Discussion Adds (n1 + 256n2)/120 inches to the horizontal position of the
logical print head. The number sent is two’s complement,
with negative numbers moving to the left. The command is
ignored if it would move the logical print head beyond the
page margins.

133
Chapter 3 Configuring The Epson FX-1050 Emulation With Control Codes

Set Intercharacter Spacing In 1/120 Inch

ASCII ESC SP n
Hex 1B 20 n
Dec 27 32 n
Purpose Permits character spacing adjustments in 1/120 inch
increments.
where n = 0 through 127.

Set Margin, Left

ASCII ESC l n
Hex 1B 6C n
Dec 27 108 n
where n = number of columns from the left edge of the
physical page to the beginning of the print line;
n = 1 through 232 (hex 00 through E8).
Purpose Sets the left margin to n columns in the current font.
Discussion Be sure to use the alphabetic lowercase “l” (as in left) rather
than the numeral “1” (one) for this command. The number of
inches of margin does not vary if the font, character width, or
horizontal dot density changes. This command automatically
clears and resets horizontal tabs to every eight characters.
The smallest possible space between the left and right
margins is the width of one double-wide, 10 cpi character. If a
margin control code violates this minimum distance, it is
ignored. Settings in proportional mode are treated as 10 CPI.

Set Margin, Right

ASCII ESC Q n
Hex 1B 51 n
Dec 27 81 n
where n = number of columns from the left edge of the
physical page to the end of the print line;
n = 1 through 232 (hex 00 through E8).
Purpose Sets the right margin to n columns at the current character
width.
Discussion The number of inches of margin does not vary if the font,
character width, or horizontal dot density changes. This
command automatically clears and resets horizontal tabs to
every eight characters. The smallest possible space between
the left and right margins is the width of one-double wide, 10
cpi character. If a margin control code violates this minimum
distance, it is ignored. Settings in proportional mode are
treated as 10 CPI.

134
 Set Forms Length By Lines

Set Forms Length By Lines

ASCII ESC C n
Hex 1B 43 n
Dec 27 67 n
Purpose Sets the form length by lines.
where n = 1 through 192 (hex 01 through C0) to specify
the number of lines per form at the current line
spacing.
Discussion The forms length is set to the number of lines defined by the
quotient of n divided by the current lines per inch so that the
units are in inches.
The current line becomes the first line of the form. The forms
length is always defined in inches; therefore, changing the lpi
after this control code has been issued does not change the
forms length.
If the calculated forms length in lines is not an exact multiple
of the target machine dot size, the forms length value will be
adjusted down to the next possible multiple.
When forms length is set by an ESC C sequence, the skip-
over perforation set by ESC N is cancelled.

Set Form Length In Inches

ASCII ESC C NUL n
Hex 1B 43 00 n
Dec 27 67 0 n
Purpose Sets form length to n inches.
where n = 1 through 24 (hex 01 through 18) to specify the
number of inches on a form.
Discussion Upon receipt of this code, the current line becomes the first
line of the form, and the form length set becomes the current
forms length. Vertical tab positions set below the bottom of
the form are ignored. Forms length is defined in inches;
therefore, subsequent line spacing changes do not affect the
result of this command.
Values of n greater than 24 are ignored.
When forms length is set by an ESC C NUL sequence, the
skip-over perforation set by ESC N is cancelled.
This control code overrides forms length set at the operator
panel.

135
Chapter 3 Configuring The Epson FX-1050 Emulation With Control Codes

Set Vertical Tabs In Channels

ASCII ESC b c n1 n2 n3 ... n16 NUL
Hex 1B 62 c n1 n2 n3 ... n16 00
Dec 27 98 c n1 n2 n3 ... n16 0
Purpose Assigns vertical tabs to channels selected by ESC / (see
page 133).
where c = 0 through 7
n = 0 through 255
n1 through nk specify the line number for the
vertical tab(s), up to a maximum of 16 tab positions.
NUL must end the sequence.
Discussion Channels are selected by ESC /. The distance of each tab
stop from TOF is the current line spacing times the number of
lines given in n.
If paper movement is commanded to a value of n greater
than the page length, the paper movement command is
ignored. The values of n must be in ascending order. If they
are not, the sequence up to and including the out of
sequence number is ignored. The rest of the load is
processed. Skip over perforation is ignored.
You can clear any channel by sending ESC b c NUL, where c
is the channel number.

Skip Over Perforation

ASCII ESC N n
Hex 1B 4E n
Dec 27 78 n
Purpose Selects the number of lines (at the current line spacing) for
the paper to skip at the bottom of the page.
where n = 1 through 127 (hex 01 through 7F)
Discussion n is the number of lines skipped between the last line printed
on one page and the first line on the next page. The actual
distance set is the product of n and the current line spacing. If
the value of n exceeds the current form length, the skip is set
to one line smaller than the form length or to 0, whichever is
greater.
Skip over perforation set by this command overrides operator
panel settings. This feature is canceled by ESC O, ESC C,
ESC C 0.

136
 Skip Over Perforation, Cancel

Skip Over Perforation, Cancel

ASCII ESC O
Hex 1B 4F
Dec 27 79
Purpose Cancels the skip over perforation set by ESC N and resets
the bottom margin to zero.
Discussion O is ASCII uppercase o, not zero (0).

Superscript/Subscript Printing
ASCII ESC S n
Hex 1B 53 n
Dec 27 83 n
Purpose Selects superscript or subscript printing.
where n = NUL (hex 00) or 0 (hex 30) to enable
superscript printing
n = SOH (hex 01) or 1 (hex 31) to enable subscript
printing
†Discussion Superscript prints full-sized characters with a baseline higher
than the normal characters. Subscript prints full-sized
characters with a baseline lower than the normal characters.
When the control code is received, all characters are
superscript or subscript until reset by ESC T or printer reset.
(This differs from the Epson standard, which utilizes half-size
characters for superscript and subscript printing.)
You can print both superscript and subscript characters in the
same character column by using the Backspace (BS) control
code, but these characters will not print when double high
printing is in effect.
If Superscript/Subscript is combined with Double High (ESC
w) printing, only Double High printing will occur.
Example The following sample output illustrates superscript and
subscript printing.

137
Chapter 3 Configuring The Epson FX-1050 Emulation With Control Codes

Superscript/Subscript Printing, Cancel

ASCII ESC T
Hex 1B 54
Dec 27 84
Purpose Cancels superscript and/or subscript printing as set by ESC
S n.

Super-Set Commands
ASCII ESC | } ;
HEX 1B 7C 7D 3B
Dec 27 124 125 59
Purpose Control code sequence used to introduce the super-set
commands.
Discussion The “|” in the command string is the pipe symbol.
Comment Super-set commands affect the LinePrinter Plus emulation as
a whole regardless of the printer protocol currently active.
The commands are sent through the host in the input data
stream, and enact the following features:
•Select a printer protocol
•Bar codes
•Set variable character spacing
•Set variable line spacing
Refer to Chapter 7, “Super-Set Programming,” for further
information regarding the super-set commands.

138
 Underline

Underline
ASCII ESC – n
Hex 1B 2D n
Dec 27 45 n
Purpose Turns automatic underlining on and off.
where n = NUL or 0 (hex 00 or 30) to turn off underlining
n = SOH or 1 (hex 01 or 31) to turn on underlining
Discussion Spaces are underlined, but graphics and grey scale
characters are not.
Example The following sample output illustrates underlining.

Unidirectional Printing, 1 Line

ASCII ESC <
Hex 1B 3C
Dec 27 60
Purpose Causes printing to occur from left to right for one line only.
Discussion Printing normally occurs in both directions of shuttle
movement. This command causes the printer to print from left
to right for one line. The command is cancelled by a CR.

Unidirectional Printing, Set/Reset

ASCII ESC U n
Hex 1B 55 n
Dec 27 85 n
Purpose Causes printing to occur in only one direction of shuttle
movement (left to right).
where n = NUL or 0 (hex 00 or 30) turns unidirectional
mode off
n = SOH or 1 (hex 01 or 31) turns unidirectional
mode on
Discussion Printing normally occurs in both directions of shuttle
movement. Unidirectional printing slows the printer down
approximately 50%, but is sometimes used when very
accurate dot placement is desired in graphics.

139
Chapter 3 Configuring The Epson FX-1050 Emulation With Control Codes

Vertical Tab, Execute

ASCII VT
Hex 0B
Dec 11
Purpose Advances the logical print head to the next vertical tab
position selected by ESC /.
Discussion If no vertical channel was selected, channel 0 is used. If no
vertical tabs were set, the paper advances one line.
The logical print head moves to the left margin. If a tab
position is on the current line, the paper is moved to the next
tab position. If there are no tab positions between the current
line and the end of the form, the paper is moved to the top of
the next form.
This code cancels all one-line-only emphasis and font
controls: double-wide from SO and ESC SO, and
unidirectional printing from ESC <.

Vertical Tab, Set/Clear

ASCII ESC B n1 n2 n3...nk NUL
Hex 1B 42 n1 n2 n3...nk 00
Dec 27 66 n1 n2 n3...nk 0
Purpose Sets up to 16 vertical tab positions.
where n = 1 through 255
k = 1 through 16
n1 through nk specify the line numbers for the
vertical tab(s), up to a maximum of 16 tab positions.
NUL must end the sequence.

To clear the tab settings, send ESC B NUL

(hex 1B 42 00).
Discussion The values of n range from 1 through 255 and must be in
ascending order. The distance of each tab stop from TOF is
the current line spacing times the number of lines given in n.
If the value of n exceeds the form length, commands to move
to that tab position are ignored.
If values of n are not in ascending order, the sequence up to
and including the out-of-sequence number is ignored, and the
rest of the load is processed. Skip over perforation is ignored.
This command always sets channel 0. You can clear channel
0 by sending ESC B NUL. (See also the channel selection
command, ESC /, and the channel loading command,
ESC b.)

140
 4 P-Series Printer Emulation

Overview
This chapter describes the P-Series emulation host control codes that are
supported for the IBM 6500-v ASCII printers. Emulation refers to the ability of
a printer to execute the commands of a particular printer control language. A
printer control language is the coding system used to convey, manipulate, and
print data. Carriage Return, print quality, character attributes such as bold and
underline, margins, and tabs are typical functions selected by printer control
language codes. In this manual, the terms emulation, printer protocol, and
printer control language are synonymous.
In P-Series emulation mode, the 6500-v can print files coded for the P-Series
printer control language. To select the P-Series emulation mode as the active
printer configuration, refer to the ASCII Emulation Selection menu in Chapter
4 of the IBM Infoprint 6500 Line Matrix Printer User’s Manual.
The P-Series emulation provides many configurable parameters. The default
parameter values for this emulation are shown in Table 24. You can modify
the emulation parameter values in two ways:
• The P-Series host control codes. An extensive set of P-Series control
code commands can be sent to the printer from an attached host
computer via the host data stream. Most of this chapter is devoted to
describing the P-Series control code commands.
• The printer configuration menus. You can modify a subset of the P-
Series emulation parameters using the operator panel switches and LCD
display, as described in the User’s Manual.
Control codes sent from a host system generally override previous settings
that result from the configuration menus. However, any configuration settings
from host control codes will be gone once the printer is powered off (or reset
to the default values), unless you have saved them to NVRAM using the
configuration menus. The User’s Manual describes the Save Custom Sets
option for saving changes to your printer NVRAM.
The emulation’s response to several of the control codes depends on the
configuration. For example, upon receipt of the carriage return control code,
the emulation will perform either a carriage return function only, or a carriage
return and line feed, based on the configuration of the CR function.

141
Chapter 4 Overview

P-Series Default Values And States

Your printer memory stores a set of typical operating states and conditions for
the P-Series emulation. When you power on the printer and select this
emulation, the default settings in Table 24 are automatically invoked.

Table 24. P-Series Default Settings

Characteristic Default Setting

Character Sets IBM PC

Print Language ASCII (USA)

IBM PC

Select Subset Primary ASCII (USA)

Select Subset Extended 0437 PC Character Set

Multinational ASCII (USA)

ECMA Latin 1

Select Subset Primary ASCII (USA)

Select Subset Extended Multinational

DEC Multinational ASCII (USA)

Control Code 06 8.0 LPI

Control Code 08 Elongated

Define CR Code CR = CR

Auto LF Disable

Overstrike Enable

Define LF Code LF = CR + LF

Select SFCC 1
EVFU Selected Enable

Alternate Set 80-9F Control Code

142
 P-Series Default Values And States

Table 25 lists several additional default settings for parameters that are
provided by the Print Format menus (described in Chapter 4 of the User’s
Manual). Many of the settings shown in Table 25 can be overridden by P-
Series host control codes for the same parameter.

Table 25. Print Format Default Settings

Characteristic Default Settings

CPI 10.0
LPI 6.0

Forms Width 13.6 inches

345.4 millimeters
136 characters

Forms Length 11.0 inches

279 millimeters
66 lines

Print Quality DP Quality

Proportional Spacing Disable

Italic Print Disable

Slashed Zero Disable

Left Margin 0 columns

Right Margin 0 columns

Bottom Margin 0 lines

Perforation Skip Disable

143
Chapter 4 Configuring The P-Series Emulation With Control Codes

Configuring The P-Series Emulation With Control Codes

The remainder of this chapter describes the P-Series printer control language
codes that may be sent from a host computer attached to the printer, in order
to invoke and configure numerous P-Series emulation functions.

Format For Control Code Descriptions

The following information is listed for each code function (where applicable).
Name The title or function of the command.
ASCII The ASCII mnemonic for the command is shown for the IBM
6500-v ASCII printers, and the P–Series protocol. Command
sequences are in 7–bit (ASCII) form.
Hex The code or command sequence in hexadecimal numbers.
Dec The code or command sequence in decimal numbers.
Purpose The function(s) of the control code.
Discussion A discussion of the uses of the code or command sequence,
including exceptions or limitations to its use.
Example A sample output is provided for some control codes when it is
possible to illustrate the effect of a control code, or if a
specific syntax is required to complete the program statement
(i.e. Horizontal Tab set, Vertical Tab set/clear).

IMPORTANT If you specify any parameters for a control code other than those
defined in the control code description, unpredictable results may
occur.

Special Function Control Code (SFCC) Header

A Special Function Control Code (SFCC) is used to extend the control code
protocol. The SFCC is the control code introducer (or header); it is the first
input in the sequence of parameters. The general control code sequence is:
(SFCC)(parameter 1)(parameter 2)...(parameter n)
The P-Series SFCC can be configured to be any of the following decimal
values: 1, 3, 9, and 16 through 127 (hex 01, hex 03, hex 09, and hex 10
through hex 7F). For example, bold print could be configured to be enabled in
the P-Series protocol using any of the control code introducers listed in
Table 26.

144
 Special Function Control Code (SFCC) Header

Table 26. SFCC Example (Bold Print)

ASCII Hex Decimal

SOH G 01 47 1 71
ETX G 03 47 3 71
ESC G 1B 47 27 71
^G 5E 47 94 71
~G 7E 47 126 71

NOTE: The SFCC has been set to ESC for all examples.
You must select the SFCC by changing the value of the “Select SFCC”
paramter in the P-Series emulation menu on the printer front panel. The
default value is 1. See your User’s Manual for details.

SFCC Command Line

Print format, print mode, or international language selection can be controlled
by a longer sequence known as a command line. Command lines are string
type commands placed between complete lines of text and affect the text
which follows. The protocol has six command lines: PMODE, OSET, PSET,
LPI, LINES, and INCHES. Each of these command lines is discussed in this
chapter under the appropriate Control Code function.
For example, the forms length (in inches) can be set using the following
command line:
SFCC INCHES;n.f
where: n is the whole number of inches, and f is the fractional
increment in 0.5 inch increments.
When using the SFCC in a command line, the SFCC must be the first non-
blank symbol in the line (space, hex 20, is a blank symbol). In addition,
characters following spaces (other than a valid line terminator) in a command
line are ignored so that user comments can be included on the command line.
The valid line terminators are Form Feed (FF), Line Feed (LF), and Carriage
Return (CR); however, when used in the command line, these line terminators
do not cause any paper motion. If a command line contains an error, the
command will not be executed.

Attribute Set and Reset Codes

Certain print attributes are set and reset (turned on or off) by using the
appropriate SFCC code sequence and the numbers 1 or 0. These may be
either the hexadecimal code 01 and 00, or the ASCII code for the printable
symbols of decimal 1 and 0 (hexadecimal code 31 and 30, respectively).
Expanded Print, Super/Subscript Print, and Underline are attributes that are
set/reset this way.

145
Chapter 4 Configuring The P-Series Emulation With Control Codes

NUL Code
NUL (Hex 00) is ignored by the printer and can be used as a fill character;
however, it can not be used to add blank spaces since it is not a space
character.
NOTE: Hex 80 in the 0437 PC Character Set and Hex 7F in the 0850 PC
Character Set are treated as a NUL; however, these two controls can
not be used as parameter terminators.

Print Modes Supported for Character Sets

Table 27 presents a summary of which print modes are supported for the P-
Series emulation character sets. Additional information about character set
support is provided under the heading “Notes.” P-Series code pages for each
character set are provided in Appendix G.

Table 27. Character Set Print Mode Support

Character Set NLQ(Serif)/DP/Draft Notes

IBM PC, Primary Subset X The print mode support is

ASCII (USA) the same for all of the IBM
French PC Primary Subset
German languages.
English (UK)
Danish
Swedish
Italian
Spanish
Japanese
French Canadian
Latin American
Danish II
Spanish II
Latin American II

IBM PC, Extended Subset The print mode support is

0437 IBM PC the same for both
0850 PC Multilingual Extended character sets

Multinational ASCII (USA) X

Multinational EBCDIC X

146
 Special Function Control Code (SFCC) Header

Table 27. Character Set Print Mode Support (continued)

Character Set NLQ(Serif)/DP/Draft Notes

ECMA Latin I, Primary Subset X The print mode support is

ASCII (USA) the same for all of the
German ECMA Latin I Primary
Swedish Subset languages.
Danish
Norwegian
Finnish
English (UK)
Dutch
French
Spanish
Italian
Turkish
Japanese

ECMA Latin I, Extended Subset X

Multinational
Barcode 10 CPI
Multinational NLQ 10 CPI
Greek NLQ 10 CPI
Graphic NLQ 10 CPI
Scientific NLQ 10 CPI

DEC Multinational X
ASCII (USA)
French
German
English (UK)
Norwegian/Danish
Swedish
Italian
Spanish
Japanese
French Canadian
Dutch
Finnish
Swiss

147
Chapter 4 Configuring The P-Series Emulation With Control Codes

Table 27. Character Set Print Mode Support (continued)

Character Set NLQ(Serif)/DP/Draft Notes

ECMA Latin I, Extended Subset N/A These character sets are

Barcode 10 CPI guaranteed readable only
Multinational DP 10 CPI in the Print Quality and
Multinational DP 12 CPI Print Density specified.
Multinational NLQ 10 CPI
Greek DP 10 CPI
Greek DP 12 CPI
Greek NLQ 10 CPI
Graphic DP 10 CPI
Graphic NLQ 10 CPI
Scientific DP 10 CPI
Scientific DP 12 CPI
Scientific NLQ 10 CPI

DEC Multinational X The print mode support is

French the same for all of the
German DEC Multinational
English (UK) languages.
Norwegian / Danish
Swedish
Italian
Spanish
Japanese
French Canadian
Dutch
Finnish
Swiss

OCR-A / OCR-B N/A Only 10 cpi OCR is

supported.

The Control Codes

This index lists each printer command by function, ASCII mnemonic, and the
page where the command is explained in detail. “N/A” means not applicable.
The rest of this chapter defines the control code functions for P-Series
Emulation mode. The commands are listed in alphabetical order.
NOTE: Some control code functions can be accomplished using another
control code sequence or via operator panel selection.
FUNCTION ASCII CODE PAGE
Paper Motion
Form Feed FF 165
Line Feed LF 168
Reverse SFCC } ; n 176
Vertical Tab VT 180

148
 The Control Codes

Page Format
Backspace BS 151
Carriage Return CR 152
Forms Length Set (Inches) SFCC INCHES; n.f 166
Forms Length Set (Lines) SFCC LINES; n 166
Form Margins, Set SFCC v n1 n2 n3 n4 167
Line Spacing 1/6 Inch (6 lpi) SFCC 2 168
SFCC LPI; n
Line Spacing 1/8 Inch (8 lpi) SFCC 0 169
SFCC LPI; n
Line Spacing 8 or 10.3 LPI ACK 169
(1 line only) SFCC f
Line Spacing 7/72 Inch SFCC 1 170
Line Spacing n/72 Inch SFCC A n 171
Line Spacing n/216 Inch SFCC 3 n 171
VFU Commands (P-Series) N/A 180
Print Attributes
Bold Print SFCC G 151
Bold Print (1 line only) SFCC j
Bold Print Reset SFCC H 152
Elongated (Double High) Print, SFCC h 160
1 Line Only
Elongated (Double High) Print, SFCC w n 161
Set/Reset
Emphasized Print SFCC E 162
Emphasized Print Reset SFCC F 162
Expanded Print (Double Wide) SFCC W n 163
Expanded Print (Double Wide) SFCC k 164
1 line only
Overscoring SFCC _ n 172
Print Mode/Pitch Selection SFCC X m n 173
SFCC PMODE; n
SFCC [ n q

149
Chapter 4 Configuring The P-Series Emulation With Control Codes

FUNCTION ASCII CODE PAGE

Print Attributes (continued)
Superscript/Subscript Printing SFCC S n 178
Superscript/Subscript Printing Reset SFCC T 179
Underline SFCC – n 180
Graphics
Plot, Even Dot (High Density) EOT 173
SFCC d
Plot, Odd Dot (Normal Density) ENQ 173
SFCC e
Other Functions
Bell BEL 151
Character Set Select SFCC l xyz 153
Characters 80-9F (Control Codes) SFCC 7 155
Characters 80-9F (Printable Symbols) SFCC 6 155
Character Set Select: SFCC OSET; n 156
ECMA 94 Latin 1 Extended
Character Set Select: SFCC R n 157
International Languages SFCC PSET; n
Downloading a Character Set Overlay SFCC V 158
Extended Character Set SO 164
SFCC SO
SFCC n
SFCC 4
Extended Character Set Cancel SI 165
(Primary Set Select) SFCC SI
SFCC o
SFCC 5
Emulation Reset SFCC @ 163
Select Attribute ESC [ @ n1 NUL NUL NUL
n2 n3 177
Super-Set Commands SFCC | } ; 179

150
 Backspace

Backspace
ASCII BS
Hex 08
Dec 08
Purpose Moves the logical print head to the left one character space
toward the first character column.
Discussion When configured from the operator panel for backspace, BS
moves the character position indicator (the logical print head
position) one character space to the left at the current
character pitch setting. The code is ignored if the logical print
head is positioned at the first character column.
Example If you were to print five “T” characters, then two BS
commands, then two “=” characters, the output would look
like the sample below:

Bell
ASCII BEL
Hex 07
Dec 07
Purpose Sounds the printer buzzer/beeper.
Discussion The BEL function will sound the buzzer/beeper for 0.2
seconds upon receipt of this command.

Bold Print
ASCII SFCC GSFCC j
Hex SFCC 47SFCC 6A
Dec SFCC 71SFCC 106
Purpose Selects bold character printing.
Discussion When the bold character printing control code is received, all
characters are printed in bold until reset by the bold print
reset control code or printer reset. Bold Print is the same as
printing double strike.
When SFCC j is used, bold printing is selected for one line
only and reset by the bold print reset control code, emulation
reset, or a paper motion command.

151
Chapter 4 Configuring The P-Series Emulation With Control Codes

Example The following sample output illustrates bold character

printing.

Bold Print Reset

ASCII SFCC H
Hex SFCC 48
Dec SFCC 72
Purpose Resets bold character printing.
Discussion The Bold Print Reset control code only resets the bold print
character attribute. Other print attributes such as double wide
printing are not affected.
Example Refer to the Bold Print control code for a sample output of
bold character print set and reset.

Carriage Return
ASCII CR
Hex 0D
Dec 13
Purpose Returns the logical print head to the first character column
(resets the pointer to the first character position).
Discussion The CR code may or may not cause printing or paper motion,
depending on the Define CR Code value defined in the
configuration menus. If the Define CR Code submenu
displays:
Define CR Code
CR = CR
The characters following the CR are printed over the previous
characters on the line. If identical characters are placed in the
same position on the line, those characters will be printed in
bold (double strike) print when the Overstrike mode is
enabled from the operator panel.
The CR=CR configuration causes subsequent printable data
to overprint previous data at half speed if Overstrike is
enabled from the operator panel (and prints somewhat faster
if Overstrike is disabled), unless an intervening paper motion
command is received.

152
 Character Set Select

If the Define CR Code submenu displays:

Define CR code
CR = CR+LF
Control code CR is converted to perform a carriage return
and line feed function.

Character Set Select

ASCII SFCC l xyz (lowercase L)
Hex SFCC 6C xyz
Dec SFCC 108 xyz
Purpose Selects the character set, extended character set, and the
international language for a specific character set.
where: x is the character set (Table 28);
y is the international language for the selected
character set (Table 29);
z is the extended character set for the selected
character set (Table 30);
Discussion An asterisk (*) (hex 2A) may be substituted for x, y, or z. If the
asterisk (*) is the value selected for x, the character set will
not change. If * is the value selected for y or z, the previously
selected international language and/or extended character
set for the selected character set will be used.
If “x” is the value selected for y, the primary language will
access the downloaded character substitution table defined
by SFCC V for the selected character set.
The character set, international language and extended
character set can also be selected from the printer operator
panel, via the Character Set and Print Language options;
however, the control code setting will override the operator
panel selection. Except for the asterisk and X values
discussed above, values other than those shown in the tables
will result in the control sequence being terminated.
Appendix G provides print samples for each character set,
shown in NLQ and Draft print modes. Table 27 on page 146
provides detailed notes on print mode support for each
character set.

153
Chapter 4 Configuring The P-Series Emulation With Control Codes

Table 28. Character Set Select

x Character Set

0(03) IBM PC

1(31) Multinational

2(32) ECMA 94 Latin 1

3(33) DEC Multinational

Table 29. International Language Select (y)

x = 0 (hex 30) x = 1 (hex 31) x = 2 (hex 32) x = 3 (hex 33)

y
IBM PC Multinational ECMA Latin 1 DEC Multinational
0 (hex 30) ASCII (USA) ASCII (USA) ASCII (USA) ASCII (USA)
1 (hex 31) French EBCDIC German French
2 (hex 32) German Swedish German
3 (hex 33) English (UK) Danish English (UK)
4 (hex 34) Danish Norwegian Norwegian/Danish
5 (hex 35) Swedish Finnish Swedish
6 (hex 36) Italian English (UK) Italian
7 (hex 37) Spanish Dutch Spanish
8 (hex 38) Japanese French Japanese
9 (hex 39) French Canadian Spanish French Canadian
10 (hex 3A) Latin American Italian Dutch
11 (hex 3B) Norwegian Turkish Finnish
12 (hex 3C) Danish-II Japanese Swiss
13 (hex 3D) Spanish-II
14 (hex 3E) Latin American-II

154
 Characters 80-9F (Control Codes)

Table 30. International Language Select (z)

x = 0 (hex 30) x = 1 (hex 31) x = 2 (hex 32) x = 3 (hex 33)

z
IBM PC Multinational ECMA Latin 1 DEC Multinational
0 (hex 30) IBM PC (0437) Mult. Extended Set Barcode 10 cpi DEC Mult. Ext. Set
1 (hex 31) IBM PC (0850) Mult. DP 10 cpi
2 (hex 32) Mult. DP 12 cpi
3 (hex 33) Mult. NLQ 10 cpi
4 (hex 34) Greek DP 10 cpi
5 (hex 35) Greek DP 12 cpi
6 (hex 36) Greek NLQ 10 cpi
7 (hex 37) Graphics DP 10 cpi
8 (hex 38) Graphics NLQ 10 cpi
9 (hex 39) Scientific DP 10 cpi
10 (hex 3A) Scientific DP 12 cpi
11 (hex 3B) Scientific NLQ 10 cpi
12 (hex 3C) Multinational (at Primary set mode and pitch)

Characters 80-9F (Control Codes)

ASCII SFCC 7
Hex SFCC 37
Dec SFCC 55
Purpose Selects hex codes 80 through 9F in the character sets as
control codes. Cancels the command SFCC 6.
Discussion This control code overrides the operator panel setting
(described in Chapter 4 of the User’s Manual).

Characters 80-9F (Printable Symbols)

ASCII SFCC 6
Hex SFCC 36
Dec SFCC 54
Purpose Selects hex codes 80 through 9F in the character sets as
printable symbols. Cancels the command SFCC 7.
Discussion This control code overrides the operator panel setting
(described in Chapter 4 of the User’s Manual).
Appendix G shows the printable symbols for columns 80
through 9F.

155
Chapter 4 Configuring The P-Series Emulation With Control Codes

Character Set Select: ECMA 94 Latin 1 Extended

ASCII SFCC OSET; n
Purpose Selects the print mode and pitch at which the extended
characters will print. Valid only if the ECMA 94 Latin 1
Extended Character Set is selected; otherwise, this
command is ignored.
Discussion n ranges from 0 through 12 to select the print mode/pitch
combinations available from Table 31. All other values will
result in an error message.
Extended characters will print at the print mode and pitch
selected by the OSET command, even if that mode and pitch
differs from the currently selected print mode and pitch. If the
print mode differs between the extended and primary
characters, the first character in the data stream selects the
print mode at which that line will print. Different pitches can
be printed on the same line.

Table 31. Print Modes/Pitches Available Using P-Series OSET

(ECMA Latin 1, Extended Character Set Only)

n Print Mode/Pitch Select

0 Barcode DP 10 cpi

1 Multinational DP 10 cpi

2 Multinational DP 12 cpi

3 Multinational NLQ 10 cpi

4 Greek DP 10 cpi

5 Greek DP 12 cpi

6 Greek NLQ 10 cpi

7 Graphics DP 10 cpi

8 Graphics NLQ 10 cpi

9 Scientific DP 10 cpi

10 Scientific DP 12 cpi

11 Scientific NLQ 10 cpi

12 Multinational at Primary Character Set Mode and
Pitch

156
 Character Set Select: International Languages

Character Set Select: International Languages

ASCII SFCC PSET;n SFCC R n
Hex SFCC 52 n
Dec SFCC 82 n
Purpose Specifies the international language set identified by n in the
basic character set selected from the operator panel (ECMA-
94 Latin 1, IBM PC, Multinational, and DEC Multinational).
Refer to Appendix G for individual character set charts.
where: n specifies a language, as shown in Table 32.

Table 32. International Character Sets

n Character Set Selected

SFCC R IBM PC DEC

PSET ECMA Latin 1 Multinational
(hex) (0437 or 0850) Multinational
0 (30) 0 ASCII (USA) ASCII (USA) ASCII (USA) ASCII (USA)
1 (31) 1 German French EBCDIC French
2 (32) 2 Swedish German German
3 (33) 3 Danish English (UK) English (UK)
4 (34) 4 Norwegian Danish Norw./Danish
5 (35) 5 Finnish Swedish Swedish
6 (36) 6 English (UK) Italian Italian
7 (37) 7 Dutch Spanish Spanish
8 (38) 8 French Japanese Japanese
9 (39) 9 Spanish French Canadian French Canadian
0A (3A) 10 Italian Latin American Dutch
0B (3B) 11 Turkish Danish-II Finnish
0C (3C) 12 Japanese Spanish-II Swiss
0D (3D) 13 Latin American-II
0E (3E) 14 (currently undefined)
0F (3F) 15
10 (40) 16
11 (41) 17
12 (42) 18
13 (43) 19
14 (44) 20
15 (45) 21

157
Chapter 4 Configuring The P-Series Emulation With Control Codes

Discussion The international character set can also be selected from the
operator panel via the Print Language option; however, the
control code setting will override the operator panel character
set selection. Values other than those selectable from Table
32 will be ignored.
Appendix G provides print samples for each character set,
shown in the NLQ print mode. Table 27 provides information
on print mode support for each character set.
Example The following example illustrates international character
selection using the IBM PC character set.

Download A Character Set Overlay

ASCII Code SFCC V
Hex Code SFCC 56
Dec Code SFCC 86
Purpose To define and download a character set overlay (substitution
table) that can be placed within the 224 printable symbol code
points.
Expression SFCC V is followed by ASCII characters:
{QQQ}E{AAA}E{SSSSS}E (Each parameter is separated by
paired brace symbols for clarity in distinguishing parameters. Do
not put the braces in the command sequence). Multiple sets of
characters can follow one SFCC V.
where E is the terminator following each numeric field for overlay using
the Printronix number. {QQQ} represents a decimal value
between 0 and 255, which identifies the number of entries in the
substitution table. No leading zeros are required for entries of
one and two digits. Each entry consists of:
{AAA} representing the decimal value between 0 and 255. These
digits identify the address code that causes the substituted
character to print. No leading zeros are required for entries of
one and two digits.
{SSSSS} representing the decimal value between 0 and 65535.
These digits identify the symbol code point in the Multinational
Character Set. No leading zeros are required for entries
containing less than five digits. Any symbol in the Character
Library in Appendix C (including downloaded characters) can be
substituted into any printable symbol code print.

158
 Download A Character Set Overlay

Comment The character set overlay is valid only for the current base
character set. You must reload the character set overlay after a
new character set is selected. After switching from NON-OCR
typeface to OCR typeface or vice versa, you must reload the
character set overlay to print the correct characters. Any symbol
in the Character Library in Appendix C (including downloaded
characters) can be substituted into any printable symbol code
point.
If {AAA} is the same value as a control character, the control
character takes precedence, and printing of that value does not
occur. If the Space (hex 20) is substituted, unexpected results
may occur, including decreased print speed.
Once defined and downloaded by this control code, the table
created by this control code can be saved into the printer power-
up configuration and selected from the host interface or the
control panel. The table does not take effect until requested; to
activate the table from the host, use the sequence SFCC RX.
The substitution table starts with the currently active character
set and overlays characters on top of it. The table is deactivated
by the command sequence SFCC RO or when the character set
is changed. When the table is selected via the control panel, the
message “DOWNLOADED” displays.
Example The following sample illustrates Downloading a Character Set
Overlay using a Printronix number.

SOH V{2}E{65}E{224}E{66}E{225}E
SOH V Special Function Control Code (SFCC) header introducing the
Download a Character Set Overlay command.
{2} The quantity of entries (characters) in the substitution table (in
this example, the letters A and B).
{E} The numeric field terminator for overlay using a Printronix
number (required after each numeric field).
{65} The (decimal) address code for the first character in the current
character set that causes the substituted character to be printed
(uppercase A/alpha).
{224} The (decimal) symbol point in the Character Library in Appendix
C representing the substituted character selected (lowercase
a/alpha).

159
Chapter 4 Configuring The P-Series Emulation With Control Codes

{66} The (decimal) address code for the second character in the
current character set that causes the substituted character to be
printed (uppercase B/beta).
{225} The (decimal) symbol point in the Character Library (Appendix
C) representing the substituted character selected (lowercase
b/beta).
NOTE: Not all fonts have all characters. Characters are included only to
support predefined character sets. In general, DP 10 and NLQ 10
have the widest coverage, High Speed and OCR fonts have the least
coverage.

Elongated (Double High) Print, 1 Line Only

ASCII SFCC h BS
Hex SFCC 68 08
Dec SFCC 104 08
Purpose Selects elongated (double high) character printing for one
line only. Elongated characters are approximately double
height but standard width.
Discussion The elongated character control code is a line-by-line print
attribute; when the control code is received, one entire line of
elongated characters is printed and then automatically reset.
When configured for double high print, the P-Series control
code BS (Hex 08) also selects elongated character printing
for a single line.
When using this feature with relative line slewing, the paper
will be moved n + 1 lines rather than n lines. Refer to Chapter
9 for more information on relative line slewing. When using
small line spacing and the lines overlap, an unexpected print
format may result.
Example The following sample output illustrates elongated character
printing.

160
 Elongated (Double High) Print, Set/Reset

Elongated (Double High) Print, Set/Reset

ASCII Code SFCC w n
Hex Code SFCC 77 n
Dec Code SFCC 119 n
Purpose Turns double-high character printing on and off. Double-high
characters are standard width but twice as high.
where n = 1 or 49 (hex 01 or hex 31) turns double high printing on
n = 0 or 48 (hex 00 or hex 30) turns double high printing off
Discussion The OCR A and OCR B fonts cannot be printed in double
high.
NOTE: It is recommended to use double Line Feeds and Carriage Returns
when double-high character printing is on (after an SFCC w control
code has been sent), or else the printer will overstrike text that has
already printed.
If Superscript/Subscript (SFCC S) is combined with Double
High printing, only Double High printing will occur.
Example The following output illustrates double-high character
printing.

161
Chapter 4 Configuring The P-Series Emulation With Control Codes

Emphasized Print
ASCII SFCC E
Hex SFCC 45
Dec SFCC 69
Purpose Selects emphasized character print format.
Discussion When the emphasized print control code is received, all
characters will be printed in emphasized print until reset by
the emphasized print reset control code or printer reset. The
emphasized print attribute is implemented by horizontal
“shadow” printing.
Emphasized print is ignored during superscript or subscript
printing, and when 15-20 cpi characters have been selected.
Example The following sample output illustrates emphasized character
printing.

Emphasized Print Reset

ASCII SFCC F
Hex SFCC 46
Dec SFCC 70
Purpose Resets emphasized character printing.
Discussion The emphasized print reset control code only resets the
emphasized print character attribute.
Example See the Emphasized Print control code example for an
example of Emphasized Print Reset.

162
 Emulation Reset

Emulation Reset
ASCII SFCC @
Hex SFCC 40
Dec SFCC 64
Purpose Initializes all print mode related parameters to the factory
default or power-up configuration values.
Discussion Print mode, line spacing, international language selection,
margins, form length, skip-over perforation, and character
pitch are reset to the selected power-up configuration.
Character-by-character and line-by-line attributes are
canceled. The vertical format unit is cleared. The current line
is set to the top-of-form position. Interface parameters and
printer protocol selection are not affected.
If the menu option “Reset Cmd CFG Ld” is disabled, the
factory default configuration is loaded. If it is enabled, the
power-up configuration is used. The default is the factory
default.

Expanded Print (Double Wide)

ASCII SFCC W n
Hex SFCC 57 n
Dec SFCC 87 n
Purpose Selects or resets expanded (double wide) print.
where: n = 1 selects expanded print (hex 01 or hex 31)
n = 0 resets expanded print (hex 00 or hex 30)
Discussion When expanded print using SFCC W is received, all
characters will be printed double wide until reset by the
expanded print reset control code or a printer reset.
Example The following sample output illustrates expanded character
printing and expanded character printing reset.

163
Chapter 4 Configuring The P-Series Emulation With Control Codes

Expanded Print (Double Wide), 1 Line Only

ASCII SFCC k
Hex SFCC 6B
Dec SFCC 107
Purpose Selects expanded (double wide) print for one line only.
Discussion This expanded print control code is a line-by-line print
attribute; when the SFCC k control code is received, the
current line is printed double wide and then automatically
reset.
This control code can be reset by a paper motion control
code (LF, VT, CR, etc.), SFCC @ (printer reset), CAN or
SFCC W (double wide print).
Example The following sample output illustrates Expanded Print for
one line only. Another example of expanded printing is shown
for Expanded (Double Wide) Print, SFCC W on page 163.

Extended Character Set

ASCII SO SFCC SO SFCC n SFCC 4
Hex 0E SFCC 0E SFCC 6E SFCC 34
Dec 14 SFCC 14 SFCC 110SFCC 52
Purpose Accesses the extended character set in the range hex A0
through FF using codes hex 20 through 7F.
Discussion Used in 7-bit systems as if data bit 8 was set to 1. For
example, sending code hex 20 accesses the symbol at code
point hex A0. If a printable symbol is not available at the code
point, a space is printed.
SFCC 4 is not cancelled by the next paper motion command;
SO, SFCC SO, SFCC n are cancelled by paper motion. Refer
to the character set charts in Appendix G.
Example The following sample output illustrates the Extended
Character Set and Extended Character Set Cancel (see page
165) control codes.

164
 Extended Character Set Cancel (Primary Set Select)

Extended Character Set Cancel (Primary Set Select)

ASCII SI SFCC SI SFCC o SFCC 5
Hex 0F SFCC 0F SFCC 6F SFCC 35
Dec 15 SFCC 15 SFCC 111 SFCC 53
Purpose Cancels Extended Character Set as selected by SO, SFCC
SO, SFCC n, and SFCC 4, and selects the Primary Character
Set.
Discussion Used in 7-bit systems. If data bit 8 is disabled, this control
code selects the range as if data bit 8 is set to 0, and data is
printed as characters from hex 20 through 7F.
Example Refer to the Extended Character Set example on the
previous page.

Form Feed
ASCII FF
Hex 0C
Dec 12
Purpose Prints the data in the buffer, advances the paper position to
the next top-of-form and moves the character position to the
first character column.
Discussion The default forms length is determined by the printer
configuration. Forms length is set by using the operator panel
or forms length control codes. Code FF cancels all single-line
only print attributes.
The default form length is 11 inches. The Form Feed
command will react differently when the VFU is active. Refer
to Chapter 9.

165
Chapter 4 Configuring The P-Series Emulation With Control Codes

Forms Length Set (Inches)

ASCII SFCC INCHES; n.f
Purpose Sets the length of forms (paper) in inches.
where: n = whole numbers from 1 through 24 (hex 01
through hex 18) to specify the number of inches on
a page.
f = fractional number in .5-inch increments
(minimum forms length is .5 inches).
Discussion Upon receipt of this code, the current line becomes the first
line of the form, and the form length set becomes the current
forms length. Vertical tab positions set below the bottom of
the form are cleared.
Forms length is defined in inches; therefore, subsequent line
spacing changes do not affect the result of this command.
Increments of .5-inch can be specified; for example, sending
the following command will result in a form length setting of 7-
1/2 inches: SFCC INCHES; 7.5
The maximum forms length is 24 inches. All other values are
ignored. In INCHES mode, incorrect values will produce an
error message.
Forms length can also be set by the operator panel. The
control code forms length setting from the host computer will
override the operator panel setting. However, if the VFU is
enabled and loaded, this command is ignored.

Forms Length Set (Lines)

ASCII SFCC LINES; n
Purpose Sets the length of a form (paper) in lines.
where: n = 1 through 192 (hex 01 through hex C0) to
specify the number of lines per page at the current
line spacing.
Discussion The forms length is set to the number of lines defined by the
quotient of n and the current line spacing so that the units are
in inches. In LINES mode, the maximum form length is 24
inches, and n values in excess of 24 inches will cause an
error message.
If the calculated forms length in lines is not an exact multiple
of the target machine dot size, the forms length value will be
adjusted down to the next possible multiple.
If the VFU is enabled and loaded, this command is ignored.

166
 Form Margins, Set

Form Margins, Set

ASCII SFCC v n1 n2 n3 n4
Hex SFCC 76 n1 n2 n3 n4
Dec SFCC 118 n1 n2 n3 n4
Purpose Selects left (n1), right (n2), top (n3), and bottom (n4) form
margins.
where: n1 = The width of the left margin (hex value) in
character columns at the current cpi. If the
requested margin is larger than the current (form
width-right margin), the value is ignored.

n2 = The width of the right margin (hex value) in

character columns at the current cpi. If the
requested margin is larger than the current (form
width-left margin), the value is ignored.

n3 = The length of the top margin (hex value) in

character lines at the current lpi. If the requested
margin is larger than the current (form length-
bottom margin), the value is ignored.

n4 = The length of the bottom margin (hex value) in

character lines at the current lpi. If the requested
margin is larger than the current (form length-top
margin), the value is ignored.
Discussion A hex value of FF for n1, n2, n3, or n4 indicates that the
margin remains unaffected.
When set, the right and bottom margins take effect
immediately; the left margin takes effect for the current line
only if no horizontal motion has occurred for the line,
otherwise it takes effect on the next line. The top margin
always takes effect on the next form.
Vertical tabs defined within the top and bottom margins are
ignored. Horizontal tabs are offset by the left margin and
ignored within the right margin.

167
Chapter 4 Configuring The P-Series Emulation With Control Codes

Line Feed
ASCII LF
Hex 0A
Dec 10
Purpose Prints the data in the buffer (if any) and advances the vertical
character position one line at the current line space setting.
Discussion If configured for LF equals new line (LF=CR+LF), the logical
print head is positioned at character column 1 of the new line.
Otherwise, the logical print head does not move when
configured for LF function only (LF=LF ONLY). The LF
function cancels all single line print attributes such as double
high (elongated) and double wide (expanded) characters.
This code is always configured for LF=CR+LF in the P-Series
protocol.
In the P-Series Even Dot Plot mode (high density graphics),
the LF code does not cause paper position motion; the data
in the buffer is plotted and the logical print head is positioned
at character column 1 in anticipation of the Odd Dot Plot
control code to complete high density graphic plotting.
In the P-Series Odd Dot Plot mode (normal density graphics),
the LF code plots the data in the buffer, advances the paper
position a single dot row at the current vertical dot density,
and positions the logical print head at character column 1.

Line Spacing 1/6 Inch (6 lpi)

ASCII SFCC LPI;n
SFCC 2
Hex SFCC 32
Dec SFCC 50
Purpose Sets line spacing to 6 lpi or as set by SFCC A.
Discussion For SFCC LPI;n, the value of n can be 6 or 8 only. If n = 6,
this command sets line spacing to 1/6 inch. Values of n other
than 6 or 8 will cause an error message.
SFCC 2 asserts n/72-inch line spacing as set by SFCC A
(page 171). If no distance has been set by SFCC A, the
distance is 1/6 inch.
The control code line spacing selection will override the
operator panel line spacing setting.
Example The following example illustrates 1/6-inch line spacing and
assumes that a distance has not been set by SFCC A.

168
 Line Spacing 1/8 Inch (8 lpi)

Line Spacing 1/8 Inch (8 lpi)

ASCII SFCC 0 SFCC LPI;n
Hex SFCC 30
Dec SFCC 48
Purpose Specifies continuous line spacing at 1/8-inch increments (8
lpi).
Discussion When the 1/8-inch line spacing control code is received, all
lines will be printed at 8 lpi until a new line spacing is selected
or the printer is reset. The control code line spacing selection
will override the operator panel line spacing setting.
For SFCC LPI;n, the value of n can be 6 or 8 only. If n = 8,
this command sets line spacing to 1/8 inch. Values of n other
than 6 or 8 will cause an error message.
Example The following example illustrates 1/8-inch line spacing.

Line Spacing 8 or 10.3 lpi (1 Line Only)

ASCII ACK SFCC f
Hex 06 SFCC 66
Dec 06 SFCC 102
Purpose Selects line spacing of 8 or 10.3 lpi for the current line only.
Discussion The default line spacing is reselected automatically after one
line. Line spacing may be selected either through the
operator panel or by line spacing control codes. The control
code setting will override the operator panel line spacing
setting.
If the alternate line spacing selected from the operator panel
is 8 lpi, the ACK control code will set the line spacing to 8 lpi.
If 10.3 lpi was selected from the operator panel, the ACK
control code will set the line spacing to 10.3 lpi (7/72 inch).

169
Chapter 4 Configuring The P-Series Emulation With Control Codes

Example The following example illustrates printing a single line of text

at 8 lpi.

Line Spacing 7/72 Inch

ASCII SFCC 1
Hex SFCC 31
Dec SFCC 49
Purpose Specifies the line spacing at 7/72-inch (10.3 lpi) increments.
Discussion When the 7/72-inch line spacing control code is received, all
lines will be printed at the 7/72-inch line spacing until a new
line spacing is selected or the printer is reset. The control
code line spacing selection will override the operator panel
line spacing setting, and the message display will reflect the
line spacing as 10.3 lines per inch.
Caution should be used when combining this control code
with other print attributes such as Elongated (Double High),
Superscript, or Subscript; overlapping lines may occur.
Printing at different horizontal and vertical densities will not
overlap.
Example The following example illustrates 7/72-inch line spacing.

170
 Line Spacing n/72 Inch

Line Spacing n/72 Inch

ASCII SFCC A n
Hex SFCC 41 n
Dec SFCC 65 n
Purpose Stores a line spacing of n/72-inch increments.
where: n = 1 through 85 (hex 01 through hex 55) All others
are ignored.
Discussion When the SFCC A control sequence is received, all line feed
commands following an SFCC 2 sequence* will be at n/72-
inch line spacing until a new line spacing is selected or the
printer is reset. The control code line spacing selection will
override the operator panel line spacing setting.
*The SFCC 2 sequence (page 168) asserts the line spacing
which was stored by the preceding SFCC A sequence.
Small values of n may result in overlapping lines.
Overlapping lines may also occur if print attributes such as
Elongated (Double High), Superscript, or Subscript
characters are used on the same line. Printing at different
horizontal and vertical densities will not overlap.
Example The following example illustrates 20/72-inch line spacing.

Line Spacing n/216 Inch

ASCII SFCC 3 n
Hex SFCC 33 n
Dec SFCC 51 n
Purpose Specifies the line spacing at n/216-inch increments.
where: n = 1 through 255 (hex 01 through hex FF)
Discussion When the n/216-inch line spacing control code is received, all
line feeds following will be at n/216-inch line spacing until a
new line spacing is selected or the printer is reset. The
control code line spacing selection will override the operator
panel line spacing setting.
The vertical character position moves only in multiples of the
current dot row spacing. If the distance to move is other than
a multiple of the current dot row spacing, the remainder is
added to the next paper motion command.

171
Chapter 4 Configuring The P-Series Emulation With Control Codes

Caution should be used when combining this control code

with other print attributes such as Elongated (Double High),
Superscript, or Subscript; overlapping lines may occur.
Printing at different horizontal and vertical densities will not
overlap.
Example The following example illustrates n/216-inch line spacing.

Overscoring
ASCII SFCC _ n
Hex SFCC 5F n
Dec SFCC 95 n
Purpose Enables or disables automatic overscoring of all characters.
where: n = 0 to disable automatic overscoring (hex 00 or
hex 30)
n = 1 to enable automatic overscoring (hex 01 or
hex 31)
Discussion When automatic overscore is enabled, all characters,
including spaces, will be overscored until disabled.
Example The following sample output illustrates automatic overscoring
and overscoring reset.

172
 Plot, Even Dot (P-Series High Density Graphics)

Plot, Even Dot (P-Series High Density Graphics)

ASCII EOT SFCC d
Hex 04 SFCC 64
Dec 04 SFCC 100
Purpose Prints dots at the even numbered dot columns.
Discussion The even dot plot code is used for programming high density
graphics and must be used in conjunction with the Odd Dot
Plot code (hex 05). Refer to the P-Series Compatible Plot
mode section in Chapter 8 for detailed plot mode information.

Plot, Odd Dot (P-Series Normal Density Graphics)

ASCII ENQ SFCC e
Hex 05 SFCC 65
Dec 05 SFCC 101
Purpose Prints dots at the odd numbered dot columns.
Discussion This is the P-Series programming normal density graphics
control code. The ENQ code should occur before any
printable data in the data stream. For high density graphics,
the Even Dot Plot code (hex 04) must be used in conjunction
with (and precede) the Odd Dot Plot code. Refer to the P-
Series Compatible Plot mode section in the Chapter 8 for
detailed plot mode information.

Print Mode/Pitch Selection

ASCII SFCC PMODE; n SFCC X mn SFCC [ n q
Hex SFCC 58 mn SFCC 5B n 71
Dec SFCC 88 mn SFCC 91 n 113
Purpose Selects the print mode and character pitch in characters per
inch (cpi).
where: In SFCC PMODE; n
n ranges from 0 through 11 to select the print
mode/pitch combinations available from Table 33.
All other values will result in an error message.
where: In SFCC [ n q
n = Print Mode/Pitch code (values other than those
shown in Table 34 are ignored.)
q = Command sequence terminator

173
Chapter 4 Configuring The P-Series Emulation With Control Codes

where: In SFCC X mn
m = Print Mode code n = Pitch (cpi)
An asterisk (*) (hex 2A) may be substituted for m or n.
Whenever the asterisk replaces m or n, its current value will
not change. Values other than those shown in Table 35 and
Table 36 are ignored.
NOTE: The print mode must be changed before the first printable symbol of a
print line or the command sequence is deferred until the next line.
Discussion P-Series PMODE switches to the Primary Character Set and
selects print mode and pitch.
Print mode and pitch can also be selected from the operator
panel. The print mode/pitch select control code from the host
computer will override the operator panel print mode setting
and the print mode and pitch selection will be reflected on the
message display.
A complete set of tables identifying print mode, pitch, and dot
densities for all print modes follows.

Table 33. Print Mode and Pitch - (SFCC PMODE;n)

n Print Mode and Pitch

0 DP 10 cpi

1 DP 12 cpi

2 DP 15 cpi

3 NLQ 10 cpi

4 Draft 10 cpi

5 OCR-A 10 cpi

6 OCR-B 10 cpi

7 DP 10 cpi upside down

8 DP 12 cpi upside down

9 DP 13 cpi upside down

10 DP 15 cpi upside down

11 DP 17 cpi upside down

174
 Print Mode/Pitch Selection

Table 34. Print Mode and Pitch - (SFCC [ n q)

n Print Mode and Pitch

1(31) NLQ 10 cpi

2(32) DP 12 cpi
3(33) Draft 12 cpi

4(34) DP 12 cpi

5(35) DP 13 cpi

Table 35. Horizontal and Vertical Dot Density - (SFCC X mn)

Horizontal Density Vertical

m (Hex)* Discussion
Resolution Density

0(30) 120 dpi 72 dpi DP

1(31) 180 dpi 96 dpi NLQ

2(32) 120 dpi 48 dpi Draft

3(33) 120 dpi 48 dpi Draft

4(34) 120 dpi 48 dpi Draft

5(35) 120 dpi 144 dpi OCR-A

6(36) 120 dpi 144 dpi OCR-B

7(37) 120 dpi 72 dpi DP

8(38) 120 dpi 72 dpi DP

* The hex values shown (i.e., 0 and 30) are equal. Either value can be used
in you program expression.

175
Chapter 4 Configuring The P-Series Emulation With Control Codes

Table 36. Print Mode and Character Pitches (SFCC X mn)

Characters per inch

value
of n:
value of m:
Print
DP NLQ DRAFT DRAFT DRAFT OCR-A OCR-B DP DP
Mode*
0(30) 1(31) 2(32) 3(33) 4(34) 5(35) 6(36) 7(37) 8(38)

0(30) 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10

1(31) 12 12 12 12 12 - - - -

2(32) 13 13 13 13 13 - - - -

3(33) 15 15 15 15 15 - - - -

4(34) 17 17 17 17 17 - - - -

* The hex values shown (i.e., 0 and 30) are equal. Either value can be used in your program
expression. The value of m is represented by the font choice line.

NOTE: When using the Multinational character set in OCR-A or OCR-B print
mode, a unique character set is used. Refer to the Multinational
Character Sets section for more information.
Example Any of the BASIC expressions listed below will select the DP
print mode at 17 cpi.
where: m (print mode) = 0 or 30 for DP; and
n (pitch) = 4 or 34 for 17 cpi.
CHR$(1);“X”;CHR$(0);CHR$(4);
CHR$(1);“X”;CHR$(30);CHR$(34);
CHR$(1);“X04”;

Reverse
ASCII Code SFCC } ; n
Hex Code SFCC 7D 3B n
Dec Code SFCC 125 59 n
Purpose Moves the logical print head up.
Discussion If n is “L,” the print head moves up one line. (Reverse line
feed.)
If n is “P,” the print head moves up to the previous top of
form. (Reverse form feed.)

176
 Select Attributes

Select Attributes
ASCII Code ESC [ @ n1 NUL NUL NUL n2 n3
Hex Code 1B 5B 40 n1 00 00 00 n2 n3
Dec Code 27 91 64 n1 0 0 0 n2 n3
Purpose Selects double height and double width attributes as well as
either single or double height line spacing.
where: n1 can take on the following characteristics:

Table 37. Select Attributes n1 Values

n1 (Hex) Function

03 Set character height and line feed settings according to

the value of n2. (If n1 = 03, there is no n3).

04 Set character height, line feed, and character settings

according to the values of n2 and n3.

where: n2 can take on the following characteristics:

Table 38. Select Attributes n2 Values

n2 (Hex) Function

00 No change

01 Set single height characters

02 Set double height characters

10 Set single line spacing

11 Set single height characters and single line spacing

12 Set double height characters and single line spacing

20 Set double line spacing

21 Set single height characters and double line spacing

22 Set double height characters and double line spacing

where: n3 can take on the following characteristics:

177
Chapter 4 Configuring The P-Series Emulation With Control Codes

Table 39. Select Attributes n3 Values

n3 (Hex) Function

00 No change

01 Set single width characters

02 Set double width characters

Comment All other values of n1, n2, and n3 are ignored.

Example

Superscript/Subscript Printing
ASCII SFCC S n
Hex SFCC 53 n
Dec SFCC 83 n
Purpose Selects superscript or subscript printing.
Discussion An SFCC S code can be set for superscript or subscript
printing, as follows:
where: n = 0 to enable superscript printing (hex 00 or hex
30)
n = 1 to enable subscript printing (hex 01 or hex 31)
When this control code is received, all characters will be
superscript or subscript until reset by the super/subscript
printing reset control code (SFCC T) or printer reset. Use
caution when combining this command with other print
attributes; arbitrary combinations might yield unexpected
results.
NOTE: Superscript and subscript characters print at the same size as the
current font. They are shifted up or down one half of a line.

178
 Superscript/Subscript Printing Reset

Example The following sample output illustrates superscript/subscript

printing.

Superscript/Subscript Printing Reset

ASCII SFCC T
Hex SFCC 54
Dec SFCC 84
Purpose Resets superscript and subscript printing.

Super-Set Commands
ASCII Code SFCC | } ;
Hex Code SFCC 7C 7D 3B
Dec Code 27 124 125 59
Purpose Control code sequence used to introduce the super-set
commands.
Discussion The “|” in the command string is the pipe symbol.
Comment Super-set commands affect the LinePrinter Plus emulation as
a whole regardless of the printer protocol currently active.
The commands are sent through the host in the input data
stream, and enact the following features:
•Select a printer protocol
•Select a character set
•Change character spacing
•Change line spacing
•Select a barcode
Refer to Chapter 7, “Super-Set Programming,” for further
information regarding the Super-Set commands.

179
Chapter 4 Configuring The P-Series Emulation With Control Codes

Underline
ASCII SFCC – n
Hex SFCC 2D n
Dec SFCC 45 n
Purpose Enables or disables automatic underlining of all characters.
where: n = 0 to disable automatic underlining (hex 00 or
hex 30)
n = 1 to enable automatic underlining (hex 01 or
hex 31)
Discussion When automatic underline is enabled, all characters,
including spaces, will be underlined until disabled.
Example The following sample output illustrates automatic underlining.

VFU Commands (P-Series)

ASCII Refer to the P-Series EVFU section in Chapter 9.
NOTE: If the SFCC being used is ESC, the PI line must be set high when
using the EVFU.
Purpose Load and execute the VFU.
Discussion Refer to Chapter 9 for detailed information.

Vertical Tab
ASCII VT
Hex 0B
Dec 11
Purpose Prints the data in the buffer and advances the paper to the
next vertical tab position.
Discussion If a vertical tab format is defined in the EVFU (channel 12)
and the VFU is enabled, the paper is moved to the next
vertical tab position.
If a vertical tab format is not defined, the paper is advanced to
the next line at the current line spacing. More information on
Vertical Tabs is provided in the EVFU section of Chapter 9.

180
 5 Serial Matrix Printer
Emulation

Overview
This chapter describes the Serial Matrix emulation host control codes that are
supported for IBM 6500-v ASCII printers. Emulation refers to the ability of a
printer to execute the commands of a particular printer control language. A
printer control language is the coding system used to convey, manipulate, and
print data. Carriage Return, print quality, character attributes such as bold and
underline, margins, and tabs are typical functions selected by printer control
language codes. In this manual, the terms emulation, printer protocol, and
printer control language are synonymous.
The Serial Matrix emulation is very similar to the code system used by an IBM
Graphics Printer, but contains more features. This emulation enables a
6500-v line matrix printer to print files coded for a serial matrix printer. To
select the Serial Matrix emulation mode as the active printer configuration,
refer to the ASCII Emulation Selection menu in Chapter 4 of the Infoprint 6500
Line Matrix Printer User’s Manual.
The Serial Matrix emulation provides many configurable parameters. The
default parameter values for this emulation are shown in Table 40. You can
modify the emulation parameter values in two ways:
• The Serial Matrix host control codes. An extensive set of Serial Matrix
control code commands can be sent to the printer from an attached host
computer via the host data stream. Most of this chapter is devoted to
describing the Serial Matrix control codes.
• The printer configuration menus. You can modify a subset of the Serial
Matrix emulation parameters using the operator panel keys and LCD
display, as described in the User’s Manual.
Control codes sent from a host system generally override previous settings
that result from the configuration menus. However, any configuration settings
from host control codes will be gone once the printer is powered off (or reset
to the default values), unless you have saved them to NVRAM using the
configuration menus. The User’s Manual describes the Save Custom Sets
option for saving changes to your printer NVRAM.
The emulation’s response to several of the control codes depends on the
configuration. For example, upon receipt of the carriage return control code,
the emulation will perform either a carriage return function only, or a carriage
return and line feed, based on the configuration for the CR function.

181
Chapter 5 Overview

Serial Matrix Default Values And States

Your printer memory stores a set of typical operating states and conditions for
the P-Series emulation. When you power on the printer and select this
emulation, the default settings in Table 40 are automatically invoked.

Table 40. Serial Matrix Default Settings

Characteristic Default Setting

Character Sets IBM PC

Print Language

IBM PC

Select Subset Primary ASCII (USA)

Select Subset Extended 0437 IBM PC

Multinational ASCII (USA)

ECMA Latin 1

Select Subset Primary ASCII (USA)

Select Subset Extended Multinational

DEC Multinational ASCII (USA)

Control Code 06 8.0 LPI

Define CR Code CR = CR
Auto LF Enable

Overstrike Enable

Define LF Code LF = LF

Printer Select 1

Alternate Set 80-9F Control Code

Esc d command Even dot plot

182
 Serial Matrix Default Values And States

Table 41 lists several additional default settings for parameters that are
provided by the Print Format menus (described in Chapter 4 of the User’s
Manual). Many of the settings shown in Table 41 can be overridden by host
control codes for the same parameter.

Table 41. Print Format Default Settings

Characteristic Default Settings

CPI 10.0
LPI 6.0

Forms Width 13.6 inches

345.4 millimeters
136 characters

Forms Length 11.0 inches

279 millimeters
66 lines

Print Quality DP Quality

Proportional Spacing Disable

Italic Print Disable

Slashed Zero Disable

Left Margin 0 columns

Right Margin 0 columns

Bottom Margin 0 lines

Perforation Skip Disable

183
Chapter 5 Configuring The Serial Matrix Emulation With Control Codes

Configuring The Serial Matrix Emulation With

Control Codes
The remainder of this chapter describes the Serial Matrix printer control
language codes that may be sent from a host computer attached to the
printer, in order to configure and invoke numerous printer functions.

Format For Control Code Descriptions

The following information is listed for each code function (where applicable
and possible).
Name The title or function of the command.
ASCII The standard ASCII name for the control code.
Hex The code’s numeric equivalent in hexadecimal.
Dec The code’s numeric equivalent in decimal.
Purpose The function(s) of the control code.
Discussion A description of exceptions or limitations to normal use.
Example A sample output is provided for some control codes when it is
possible to illustrate the effect of a control code, or if a
specific syntax is required to complete the program statement
(i.e. Horizontal Tab set, Vertical Tab set/clear).

IMPORTANT If you specify any parameters for a control code other than those
defined in the control code description, unpredictable results may
occur.

Special Function Control Code (SFCC)

When a printer control code consists of more than one character, it is called a
command sequence. Every printer protocol uses a Special Function Control
Code (SFCC) as the first character of a command sequence. The SFCC
alerts the printer that a command sequence—not printable characters—
follows.
The ASCII ESC character is always the SFCC in this emulation mode.
The general format for a command sequence is:
(ESC)(parameter 1)(parameter 2)...(parameter n)
For example, to enable bold print use the ESC character and the bold print
control code character G:
ASCII: ESC G Hex: 1B 47 Dec: 27 71

184
 Attribute Set And Reset Codes

Attribute Set And Reset Codes

Certain print attributes are set or reset (turned on or off) by using the
appropriate ESC code sequence and the numbers 1 or 0. These may be
either the hexadecimal code 01 and 00, or the ASCII code for the printable
symbols of decimal 1 and 0 (hexadecimal code 31 and 30, respectively).
Expanded Print, Super/Subscript Print, and Underline are attributes which are
set/reset in this fashion.

NUL Code
NUL (Hex 00) is ignored by the printer and can be used as a fill character;
however, it can not be used to add blank spaces since it is not a space
character. NUL can also be used as a parameter terminator for the Set
Horizontal Tabs (page 210) or Set Vertical Tabs multibyte control code (page
223).
NOTE: Hex 80 in PC Character Set 1 and Hex 7F in PC Character Set 2 are
treated as a NUL; however, these two controls can not be used as
parameter terminators.

Print Modes Supported For Character Sets

Following is a summary of which print modes are supported for the P-Series/
Serial Matrix emulation character sets. Additional information about character
set support is provided under the heading “Notes.” P-Series/Serial Matrix
code pages are provided in “P–Series And Serial Matrix Character Sets” on
page 535.

Table 42. Character Set Print Mode Support

Character Set NLQ(Serif)/DP/Draft Notes

IBM PC, Primary Subset X The print mode support is

ASCII (USA) the same for all of the IBM
French PC Primary Subset
German languages.
English (UK)
Danish
Swedish
Italian
Spanish
Japanese
French Canadian
Latin American
Danish II
Spanish II
Latin American II

185
Chapter 5 Configuring The Serial Matrix Emulation With Control Codes

Table 42. Character Set Print Mode Support (continued)

Character Set NLQ(Serif)/DP/Draft Notes

IBM PC, Extended Subset The print mode support is

0437 IBM PC the same for both
0850 PC Multilingual Extended character sets
Multinational ASCII (USA) X
Multinational EBCDIC X
ECMA Latin I, Primary Subset X The print mode support is
ASCII (USA) the same for all of the
German ECMA Latin I Primary
Swedish Subset languages.
Danish
Norwegian
Finnish
English (UK)
Dutch
French
Spanish
Italian
Turkish
Japanese

ECMA Latin I, Extended Subset X

Multinational
Barcode 10 CPI
Multinational NLQ 10 CPI
Greek NLQ 10 CPI
Graphic NLQ 10 CPI
Scientific NLQ 10 CPI

DEC Multinational X
ASCII (USA)
French
German
English (UK)
Norwegian/Danish
Swedish
Italian
Spanish
Japanese
French Canadian
Dutch
Finnish
Swiss

186
 Print Modes Supported For Character Sets

Table 42. Character Set Print Mode Support (continued)

Character Set NLQ(Serif)/DP/Draft Notes

ECMA Latin I, Extended Subset N/A These character sets are

Barcode 10 CPI guaranteed readable only
Multinational DP 10 CPI in the Print Quality and
Multinational DP 12 CPI Print Density specified.
Multinational NLQ 10 CPI
Greek DP 10 CPI
Greek DP 12 CPI
Greek NLQ 10 CPI
Graphic DP 10 CPI
Graphic NLQ 10 CPI
Scientific DP 10 CPI
Scientific DP 12 CPI
Scientific NLQ 10 CPI

DEC Multinational X The print mode support is

French the same for all of the
German DEC Multinational
English (UK) languages.
Norwegian / Danish
Swedish
Italian
Spanish
Japanese
French Canadian
Dutch
Finnish
Swiss

OCR-A / OCR-B N/A Only 10 cpi OCR is

supported.

187
Chapter 5 Configuring The Serial Matrix Emulation With Control Codes

The Control Codes

This index lists each printer command by function, ASCII mnemonic, and the
page where the command is explained in detail. “N/A” means not applicable.
The rest of this chapter defines the control code functions for Serial Matrix
Emulation mode. The commands are listed in alphabetical order.
FUNCTION ASCII CODE PAGE
Paper Motion
Form Feed FF 206
Line Feed LF 210
Line Feed n/216 Inch (One line only) ESC J n 211
Vertical Tab VT 222
Page Format
Backspace BS 190
Cancel CAN 194
Carriage Return CR 194
Delete DEL 201
Forms Length Set (Inches) ESC C NUL n 207
Forms Length Set (Lines) ESC C n 208
Form Margins, Set ESC v n1 n2 n3 n4 208
Horizontal Tab HT 209
Horizontal Tab Set ESC D n1 ... nk NUL 210
Line Spacing 1/6 Inch (6 lpi) ESC 2 212
Line Spacing 1/8 Inch (8 lpi) ESC 0 212
Line Spacing 7/72 Inch ESC 1 213
Line Spacing n/72 Inch ESC A n 214
Line Spacing n/216 Inch ESC 3 n 215
Skip-Over Perforation ESC N n 219
Skip-Over Perforation Cancel ESC O 219
Vertical Tab Set/Clear ESC B n1 n2 n3...nk NUL 223
Print Attributes
Bold Print ESC G 193
Bold Print Reset ESC H 193
Character Pitch 10 cpi ESC P 195
Character Pitch 12 cpi ESC M 195
ESC :
Condensed Print SI 200
ESC SI
Condensed Print Reset DC2 200
Elongated (Double High) Print, ESC h 201
One line only
Elongated (Double High) Print, ESC w n 202
Set/Reset
Emphasized Print ESC E 202
Emphasized Print Reset ESC F 203
Expanded (Double Wide) Print,
Set/Reset ESC W n 204
DC4

188
 The Control Codes

FUNCTION ASCII CODE PAGE

Print Attributes (continued)
Expanded (Double Wide) Print,
One line only SO 204
ESC SO
Overscoring ESC _ n 215
Print Mode/Pitch Selection ESC X mn 216
ESC [ n q
Superscript/Subscript Printing ESC S n 220
Superscript/Subscript Printing Reset ESC T 220
Underline ESC – n 221
Graphics
Bit Image Mode, Single Density ESC K n1 n2 191
Bit Image Mode, Double Density ESC L n1 n2 191
Bit Image Mode, Double Density/Speed ESC Y n1 n2 192
Bit Image Mode, Quadruple Density ESC Z n1 n2 192
Character Set Control
Character Set Select ESC l xyz 195
Characters 80-9F (Control Codes) ESC 7 197
Characters 80-9F (Printable Symbols) ESC 6 197
Characters 80-9F (Printable Symbols) ESC u 198
Character Set Select: ESC R n 198
International Languages
Extended Character Set ESC 4 205
Extended Character Set Cancel ESC 5 206
(Primary Character Set Select)
Other Functions
Bell BEL 190
Emulation Reset ESC @ 203
Printer Select DC1 218
Printer Deselect DC3 218
Reverse ESC } ; n 219
Super-Set Commands ESC | } ; 221

189
Chapter 5 Configuring The Serial Matrix Emulation With Control Codes

Backspace
ASCII BS
Hex 08
Dec 08
Purpose Moves the logical print head to the left one character space
toward the first character column.
Discussion Moves the character position indicator one character space
to the left at the current character pitch setting. The code is
ignored if the logical print head is positioned at the first
character column.
Example If you were to print five “T” characters, then two BS
commands, then two “=” characters, the output would look
like the sample below:

Bell
ASCII BEL
Hex 07
Dec 07
Purpose Sounds the printer buzzer/beeper.
Discussion The BEL function will sound the buzzer/beeper for 0.2
seconds upon receipt of this command.

190
 Bit Image Mode, Single Density

Bit Image Mode, Single Density

ASCII ESC K n1 n2
Hex 1B 4B n1 n2
Dec 27 75 n1 n2
Purpose Selects Single (Normal) Density Bit Image graphics.
where n1 + 256n2 define the number of data bytes to
follow.
DATA = ASCII characters for the dot pattern bytes.
Discussion For detailed information, refer to the Bit Image section in
Chapter 8.
Example The following example produces a pattern of Single Density
Bit Image graphics. The 9 data bit pattern is repeated 27
times. Compare this example to the double density and
quadruple density examples.

Bit Image Mode, Double Density

ASCII ESC L n1 n2
Hex 1B 4C n1 n2
Dec 27 76 n1 n2
Purpose Selects Double Density Bit Image graphics.
where n1 + 256n2 define the number of data bytes to
follow.
DATA = ASCII characters for the dot pattern bytes.
Discussion Double Density printing may reduce print speed. For detailed
information, refer to the Bit Image section in Chapter 8.
Example The following example produces Double Density Bit Image
graphics of the pattern used in the Single Density Bit Image
Mode example. Note that the amount of data must be
doubled for double density (the data is used 54 times rather
than 27).

191
Chapter 5 Configuring The Serial Matrix Emulation With Control Codes

Bit Image Mode, Double Density Double Speed

ASCII ESC Y n1 n2
Hex 1B 59 n1 n2
Dec 27 89 n1 n2
Purpose Prints graphics faster than Double Density (same speed as
Single Density) by ignoring adjacent dots.
where n1 + 256n2 define the number of data bytes to
follow.
DATA = ASCII characters for the dot pattern bytes.
Discussion For detailed information, refer to the Bit Image section in
Chapter 8.
Example The following example produces Double Density Double
Speed Bit Image graphics of the pattern used in the Single
Density Bit Image Mode example. Note that the amount of
data must be doubled for double density (the data is used 54
times rather than 27).

Bit Image Mode, Quadruple Density

ASCII ESC Z n1 n2
Hex 1B 5A n1 n2
Dec 27 90 n1 n2
Purpose Selects Quadruple Density Bit Image graphics.
where n1 + 256n2 define the number of data bytes to
follow.
DATA = ASCII characters for the dot pattern bytes.
Discussion Quadruple Density printing may reduce print speed. For
detailed information, refer to the Bit Image section in Chapter
8. The printed density in this mode is 240 dpi horizontal and
72 dpi vertical if selected when the DP (Data Processing) font
is active.
Example The following example produces quadruple density graphics
of the pattern used in the Single Density Bit Image Mode
example. Note that the amount of data must be quadrupled
for quadruple density (the data is used 108 times rather than
27).

192
 Bold Print Set

Bold Print Set

ASCII ESC G
Hex 1B 47
Dec 27 71
Purpose Selects bold character printing.
Discussion When the bold character printing control code is received, all
characters are printed in bold until reset by the bold print
reset control code or printer reset. Bold Print is the same as
printing double strike.
Example The following sample program illustrates bold character
printing.

Bold Print Reset

ASCII ESC H
Hex 1B 48
Dec 27 72
Purpose Resets bold character printing.
Discussion The bold print reset control code only resets the bold print
character attribute. Other print attributes such as double wide
printing are not affected.
Example Refer to the Bold Print control code for a sample program of
bold character print set and reset.

193
Chapter 5 Configuring The Serial Matrix Emulation With Control Codes

Cancel
ASCII CAN
Hex 18
Dec 24
Purpose Clears the print buffer of all printable symbols since the last
paper motion command was received.
Discussion This control code may be used as a delete line function but
should be used with extreme care to avoid possible
misprinting. This control code will cancel the double wide
attribute set by SO if active. No other print attributes are
affected.

Carriage Return
ASCII CR
Hex 0D
Dec 13
Purpose Returns the logical print head to the first character column
(resets the pointer to the first character position).
Discussion The CR code may or may not cause printing or paper motion,
depending on the DEFINE CR CODE configuration
parameter value. If the DEFINE CR CODE submenu displays
the following, the characters following the CR are printed
over the previous characters on the line:
DEFINE CR CODE
CR=CR
If identical characters are placed in the same position on the
line, those characters will be printed in bold (double strike)
print when the Overstrike Mode is enabled from the operator
panel.
The CR=CR configuration causes subsequent printable data
to overprint previous data at half speed if Overstrike is
enabled from the operator panel (and prints somewhat faster
if Overstrike is disabled), unless an intervening paper motion
command is received. If the DEFINE CR CODE submenu
displays the following, the control code CR is converted to
perform a carriage return and line feed function:
DEFINE CR CODE
CR=CR+LF
The CR code in Serial Matrix printer protocol cancels
expanded (double wide) print when set by code SO and ESC
SO (single line printing attribute).

194
 Character Pitch 10 CPI

Character Pitch 10 CPI

ASCII ESC P
Hex 1B 50
Dec 27 80
Purpose Sets character pitch to 10 cpi.
Discussion Control Code ESC X can also be used to select a character
pitch of 10 cpi. Refer to Print Mode/Pitch Selection on page
216.

Character Pitch 12 CPI

ASCII ESC M ESC :
Hex 1B 4D 1B 3A
Dec 27 77 27 58
Purpose Sets character pitch to 12 cpi.
Discussion Control Code ESC X can also be used to select a character
pitch of 12 cpi. Refer to Print Mode/Pitch Selection on page
216.

Character Set Select

ASCII ESC l xyz(lowercase L)
Hex 1B 6C xyz
Dec 27 108 xyz
Purpose Selects the character set, extended character set, and the
international language for a specific character set. Refer to
Appendix G for individual character set charts.
where x is the character set (Table 43);
y is the international language for the selected
character set (Table 44);
z is the extended character set for the selected
character set (Table 45);

Table 43. Character Set Select (x)

x Character Set

0 (hex 30) IBM PC

1 (hex 31) Multinational

2 (hex 32) ECMA Latin 1

3 (hex 33) DEC Multinational

195
Chapter 5 Configuring The Serial Matrix Emulation With Control Codes

Table 44. International Language Select (y)

x = 0 (hex 30) x = 1 (hex 31) x = 2 (hex 32) x = 3 (hex 33)

y
IBM PC Multinational ECMA Latin 1 DEC Multinational
0 (hex 30) ASCII (USA) ASCII (USA) ASCII (USA) ASCII (USA)
1 (hex 31) French EBCDIC German French
2 (hex 32) German Swedish German
3 (hex 33) English (UK) Danish English (UK)
4 (hex 34) Danish Norwegian Norwegian/Danish
5 (hex 35) Swedish Finnish Swedish
6 (hex 36) Italian English (UK) Italian
7 (hex 37) Spanish Dutch Spanish
8 (hex 38) Japanese French Japanese
9 (hex 39) French Canadian Spanish French Canadian
10 (hex 3A) Latin American Italian Dutch
11 (hex 3B) Norwegian Turkish Finnish
12 (hex 3C) Danish-II Japanese Swiss
13 (hex 3D) Spanish-II
14 (hex 3E) Latin American-II

Table 45. International Language Select (z)

x = 0 (hex 30) x = 1 (hex 31) x = 2 (hex 32) x = 3 (hex 33)

z
IBM PC Multinational ECMA Latin 1 DEC Multinational
0 (hex 30) IBM PC (0437) Mult. Extended Set Barcode 10 cpi DEC Mult. Ext. Set
1 (hex 31) IBM PC (0850) Mult. DP 10 cpi
2 (hex 32) Mult. DP 12 cpi
3 (hex 33) Mult. NLQ 10 cpi
4 (hex 34) Greek DP 10 cpi
5 (hex 35) Greek DP 12 cpi
6 (hex 36) Greek NLQ 10 cpi
7 (hex 37) Graphics DP 10 cpi
8 (hex 38) Graphics NLQ 10 cpi
9 (hex 39) Scientific DP 10 cpi
10 (hex 3A) Scientific DP 12 cpi
11 (hex 3B) Scientific NLQ 10 cpi
12 (hex 3C) Multinational (at Primary set mode and pitch)

196
 Characters 80-9F (Control Codes)

Discussion An asterisk (*) (hex 2A) may be substituted for x, y, or z. If the

asterisk (*) is the value selected for x, the character set will
not change. If * is the value selected for y or z, the previously
selected international language and/or extended character
set for the selected character set will be used.
The character set, international language and extended
character set can also be selected from the operator panel.
The control code setting will override the operator panel
selection. Values other than those shown in the tables will
result in the control sequence being terminated.
“P–Series And Serial Matrix Character Sets” on page 535
provides print samples for each character set. Table 42
provides detailed notes on print mode support for each
character set.

Characters 80-9F (Control Codes)

ASCII ESC 7
Hex 1B 37
Dec 27 55
Purpose Selects the character set wherein hex codes 80 through 9F
are control codes. Also includes hex codes 03 through 06
and 15 in the Serial Matrix printer protocol. Cancels
Character Set Select activated by ESC 6 or ESC u.
Discussion This feature can also be selected from the operator panel
(Alternate Set 80-9F Serial Matrix menu option).

Characters 80-9F (Printable Symbols)

ASCII ESC 6
Hex 1B 36
Dec 27 54
Purpose Selects the character set wherein hex codes 80 through 9F
are printable symbols. Also includes hex codes 03 through 06
and 15 in the Serial Matrix printer protocol. Cancels
Character Set Select activated by ESC 7 or ESC u.
Discussion Hex codes 80-9F can also be configured as printable from
the operator panel (Alternate Set 80-9F Serial Matrix menu
option).

197
Chapter 5 Configuring The Serial Matrix Emulation With Control Codes

Characters 80-9F (Printable Symbols)

ASCII ESC u
Hex 1B 75
Dec 27 117
Purpose Selects the character set wherein hex codes 80 through 9F
are printable symbols. Hex codes 03 through 06 and 15 are
treated like control codes. Cancels Character Set Select
activated by ESC 6 or ESC 7.
Discussion Hex codes 80-9F can also be configured as printable from
the operator panel (Alternate Set 80-9F Serial Matrix menu
option).

Character Set Select: International Languages

ASCII ESC R n
Hex 1B 52 n
Dec 27 82 n
Purpose Specifies the international language set identified by n in the
basic character set selected from the operator panel (ECMA
94 Latin 1, IBM PC, Multinational, and DEC Multinational).
Refer to Appendix G for individual character set charts.
where n corresponds to the language shown in Table 46.

198
 Character Set Select: International Languages

Table 46. International Character Sets

n Character Set Selected

ESC R IBM PC (0437 or DEC
ECMA Latin 1 Multinational
(hex) 0850) Multinational
0 (30) ASCII (USA) ASCII (USA) ASCII (USA) ASCII (USA)
1 (31) German French EBCDIC French
2 (32) Swedish German German
3 (33) Danish English (UK) English (UK)
4 (34) Norwegian Danish Norw./Danish
5 (35) Finnish Swedish Swedish
6 (36) English (UK) Italian Italian
7 (37) Dutch Spanish Spanish
8 (38) French Japanese Japanese
9 (39) Spanish French Canadian French Canadian
0A (3A) Italian Latin American Dutch
0B (3B) Turkish Danish-II Finnish
0C (3C) Japanese Spanish-II Swiss
0D (3D) Latin American-II
0E - 15 (currently undefined)
(3E - 45)

Discussion The international character set can also be selected from the
operator panel. The control code setting will override the
operator panel character set selection. Values other than
those selectable from Table 46 will be ignored.
Example The following example illustrates international character
selection using the IBM PC character set.

199
Chapter 5 Configuring The Serial Matrix Emulation With Control Codes

Condensed Print
ASCII SI ESC SI
Hex 0F 1B 0F
Dec 15 27 15
Purpose Selects 17 characters per inch (cpi) condensed print format.
Discussion Condensed print can be selected using control code ESC X.
Refer to Print Mode/Pitch Selection on page 216.
The Serial Matrix condensed print control code SI affects all
subsequent characters. After receiving code SI, all
characters will be printed in condensed print until reset by
ESC M, ESC P, the condensed print reset control code DC2,
printer reset, or a new print mode control code. The Serial
Matrix SI code (hex 0F) is equivalent to the ESC SI code. If
condensed print is not allowed in the current print mode, the
code is ignored.
Example The following sample program illustrates condensed
character printing and reset.

Condensed Print Reset

ASCII DC2
Hex 12
Dec 18
Purpose Resets condensed character printing to 10 cpi.
Discussion The condensed print reset control code selects 10 cpi
character pitch. Other print attributes are not affected. Other
control code sequences which will cancel condensed print
are ESC M, ESC P, ESC @, or a new print mode control
code.
Example See the Condensed Print control code subsection for an
example of Condensed Print Reset.

200
 Delete

Delete
ASCII DEL
Hex 7F
Dec 127
Purpose Deletes the previously received character on a line.
Discussion Characters that have been truncated due to line length
restrictions are not affected by this code.

Elongated (Double High) Print (One Line Only)

ASCII ESC h
Hex 1B 68
Dec 27 104
Purpose Selects elongated (double high) character printing for one
line only. Elongated characters are approximately double
height but standard width.
Discussion The elongated character control code is a line-by-line print
attribute; when the control code is received, all printable
characters after the code will be printed double high and then
automatically reset. When using this feature with relative line
slewing, the paper position will be moved n+1 lines rather
than n lines. Refer to Chapter 9 for more information on
relative line slewing. When using small line spacing and the
lines overlap, an unexpected print format may result.
Example The following sample program illustrates elongated character
printing.

201
Chapter 5 Configuring The Serial Matrix Emulation With Control Codes

Elongated (Double High) Print, Set/Reset

ASCII ESC w n
Hex 1B 77 n
Dec 27 119 n
Purpose Turns double-high character printing on and off. Double-high
characters are standard width but twice as high.
where n = 1 or 49 (hex 01 or hex 31) turns double high
printing on
n = 0 or 48 (hex 00 or hex 30) turns double high
printing off
Discussion The OCR A and OCR B fonts cannot be printed in double
high.
NOTE: It is recommended to use double Line Feeds and Carriage Returns
when double-high character printing is on (after an ESC w control
code has been sent), or else the printer will overstrike text that has
already printed.
If Superscript/Subscript (ESC S) or Condensed Print (SI) is
combined with Double High printing, only Double High
printing will occur.
Example The following program illustrates double-high character
printing.

Emphasized Print
ASCII ESC E
Hex 1B 45
Dec 27 69
Purpose Selects emphasized character print format.
Discussion When the emphasized print control code is received, all
characters will be printed in emphasized print until reset by
the emphasized print reset control code or printer reset. The
emphasized print attribute is implemented by horizontal
shadow printing.
Emphasized print is ignored during superscript or subscript
printing, and when 15-20 cpi characters have been selected.

202
 Emphasized Print Reset

Example The following sample program illustrates emphasized

character printing.

Emphasized Print Reset

ASCII ESC F
Hex 1B 46
Dec 27 70
Purpose Resets emphasized character printing.
Discussion The emphasized print reset control code only resets the
emphasized print character attribute.
Example See the Emphasized Print control code subsection for an
example of Emphasized Print Reset.

Emulation Reset
ASCII ESC @
Hex 1B 40
Dec 27 64
Purpose Initializes all print mode related parameters to the power-up
configuration value.
Discussion Print mode, line spacing, international language selection,
margins, form length, skip-over perforation, and character
pitch are reset to the power-up configuration value.
Character-by-character and line-by-line attributes are
canceled. The vertical format unit is cleared. The current line
is set to the top-of-form position. Interface parameters and
printer protocol selection are not affected.
This command will reset the horizontal tabs to every eighth
character column.

203
Chapter 5 Configuring The Serial Matrix Emulation With Control Codes

Expanded (Double Wide) Print

ASCII ESC W n DC4
Hex 1B 57 n 14
Dec 27 87 n 20
Purpose Selects or resets expanded (double wide) print.
where n = 1 selects expanded print (hex 01 or hex 31)
n = 0 resets expanded print (hex 00 or hex 30)
Discussion When expanded print using ESC W is received, all
characters will be printed double wide until reset by the
Expanded Print Reset control code, Emulation Reset, or
DC4.
Also refer to control code SO and ESC SO, Expanded
(Double Wide) Print for one line only.
Example The following sample program illustrates expanded character
printing and expanded character printing reset.

Expanded (Double Wide) Print (One Line Only)

ASCII SO ESC SO
Hex 0E 1B 0E
Dec 14 27 14
Purpose Selects expanded (double wide) print for one line only.
Discussion This expanded print control code is a line-by-line print
attribute; when the SO or ESC SO control code is received,
all printable characters after the will be printed double wide
and then automatically reset.
This control code can be reset by a paper motion control
code (LF, VT, CR, etc.), by the DC4 (double wide cancel)
code, ESC @ (Emulation Reset), CAN or ESC W (double
wide print). When set by SO, double wide print is not
cancelled by the Autowrap feature.

204
 Extended Character Set

Example The following sample program illustrates Expanded Print for

one line only. Another example of expanded printing is shown
for Expanded (Double Wide) Print, ESC W on page 204.

Extended Character Set

ASCII ESC 4
Hex 1B 34
Dec 27 52
Purpose Accesses the extended character set in the range hex A0
through FF using codes hex 20 through 7F.
Discussion This code is used in 7-bit systems as if data bit 8 was set to 1.
For example, sending code hex 20 accesses the symbol at
code point hex A0. If a printable symbol is not available at the
code point, a space is printed.
ESC 4 is not cancelled by the next paper motion command.
Example The following sample program illustrates Extended Character
Set.

205
Chapter 5 Configuring The Serial Matrix Emulation With Control Codes

Extended Character Set Cancel

(Primary Character Set Select)
ASCII ESC 5
Hex 1B 35
Dec 27 53
Purpose Cancels Extended Character Set as selected by ESC 4, and
selects the Primary Character Set.
Discussion This code is used in 7-bit systems as if data bit 8 was set to 0,
and data is printed as characters from hex 20 through hex
7F.
Example Refer to the Extended Character Set example above.

Form Feed
ASCII FF
Hex 0C
Dec 12
Purpose Prints the data in the buffer, advances the paper position to
the next top-of-form, and moves the character position to the
first character column.
Discussion The default forms length is determined by the configuration in
nonvolatile memory. Forms length is set by using the
operator panel or forms length control codes. Code FF
cancels all single-line only print attributes.
The Form Feed command will react differently when the VFU
is active (refer to Chapter 9).

206
 Forms Length Set (Inches)

Forms Length Set (Inches)

ASCII ESC C NUL n
Hex 1B 43 00 n
Dec 27 67 0 n
Purpose Sets the length of forms (paper) in inches.
where n = whole numbers from 1 through 24 (hex 01
through hex 18) to specify the number of inches on
a page.
Discussion Upon receipt of this code, the current line becomes the first
line of the form, and the form length set becomes the current
forms length. Vertical tab positions set below the bottom of
the form are ignored. Forms length is defined in inches;
therefore, subsequent line spacing changes do not affect the
result of this command.
The maximum forms length is 24 inches. All other values are
ignored.
When forms length is set by the ESC C sequence, the skip-
over perforation is set to zero.
Forms length can also be set through the operator panel. The
control code forms length setting from the host computer will
override the operator panel setting.

207
Chapter 5 Configuring The Serial Matrix Emulation With Control Codes

Forms Length Set (Lines)

ASCII ESC C n
Hex 1B 43 n
Dec 27 67 n
Purpose Sets the length of a form (paper) in lines.
where n = 1 through 192 (hex 01 through hex C0) to
specify the number of lines per page at the current
line spacing.
Discussion The forms length set becomes the current forms length. The
forms length units are always defined in inches; therefore,
subsequent line spacing changes do not affect the result of
this command. Changing lpi does not change the forms
length.
The forms length is set to the number of lines defined by the
quotient of n and the current line spacing so that the units are
in inches.
If the calculated forms length in lines is not an exact multiple
of the target machine dot size, the forms length value will be
adjusted down to the next possible multiple.
When forms length is set by the ESC C sequence, the skip-
over perforation is set to zero.
Forms length can also be set through the operator panel. The
control code forms length setting from the host computer will
override the operator panel setting.

Form Margins, Set

ASCII ESC v n1 n2 n3 n4
Hex 1B 76 n1 n2 n3 n4
Dec 27 118 n1 n2 n3 n4
Purpose Selects left (n1), right (n2), top (n3), and bottom (n4) form
margins.
where n1 = The width of the left margin (hex value) in
character columns at the current cpi. If the
requested margin is larger than the current (form
width-right margin), the value is ignored.

n2 = The width of the right margin (hex value) in

character columns at the current cpi. If the
requested margin is larger than the current (form
width-left margin), the value is ignored.

n3 = The length of the top margin (hex value) in

character lines at the current lpi. If the requested
margin is larger than the current (form length-
bottom margin), the value is ignored.

208
 Horizontal Tab

n4 = The length of the bottom margin (hex value) in

character lines at the current lpi. If the requested
margin is larger than the current (form length-top
margin), the value is ignored.
Discussion A hex value of FF for n1, n2, n3, or n4 indicates that the
margin remains unaffected.
When set, the right and bottom margins take effect
immediately; the left margin takes effect for the current line
only if no horizontal motion has occurred for the line,
otherwise it takes effect on the next line. The top margin
always takes effect on the next form.
Vertical tabs defined within the top and bottom margins are
ignored. Horizontal tabs are offset by the left margin and
ignored within the right margin.

Horizontal Tab
ASCII HT
Hex 09
Dec 09
Purpose Moves the logical printhead right to the next horizontal tab
stop.
Discussion Power-on default horizontal tabs are set at every eighth
character in the Serial Matrix printer protocol. If there are no
horizontal tabs set or the logical printhead is located at the
last character column, the code is ignored and no movement
occurs.
Horizontal tabs are stored as a relative position; therefore,
character pitch changes will change horizontal tab positions.
See “Horizontal Tab Set” on page 210, to set new tab
positions.

209
Chapter 5 Configuring The Serial Matrix Emulation With Control Codes

Horizontal Tab Set

ASCII ESC D n1 .... nk NUL
Hex 1B 44 n1 .... nk 00
Dec 27 68 n1 .... nk 0
Purpose Sets up to 32 horizontal tab positions.
where n1 through n32 specify the character column of the
tab positions. NUL is the sequence terminator.
ESC D NUL clears all tabs.
Discussion Up to 32 different tab positions may be set. The values must
be listed in ascending order or they are ignored. The physical
tab position is the product of n and the current cell width (1/
pitch), excluding double wide. Tabs in excess of 32 or those
positioned beyond the paper’s right margin are also ignored.
Tab positions may be cleared by sending the ESC D NUL
sequence. Powering the printer on/off will initialize the tabs to
every eighth character column. Horizontal tabs are accessed
by control code HT.
Example The following example illustrates horizontal tab setting and
accessing.

Line Feed
ASCII LF
Hex 0A
Dec 10
Purpose Prints the data in the buffer (if any) and advances the vertical
character position one line at the current line space setting.
Discussion If configured for LF equals newline (LF=CR+LF), the logical
print head is positioned at character column 1 of the new line.
Otherwise, the logical print head does not move when
configured for LF function only (LF=LF ONLY). The LF
function cancels all single line print attributes such as double
high (elongated) and double wide (expanded) characters.

210
 Line Feed n/216 Inch (One Line Only)

Line Feed n/216 Inch (One Line Only)

ASCII ESC J n
Hex 1B 4A n
Dec 27 74 n
Purpose Advances the vertical character position n/216 inch for one
line only.
where n = 1 through 255 (hex 01 through hex FF)
Discussion The n/216-inch line feed control code is effective for one line
only. All single-line-only print attributes are canceled.
If the protocol is configured for LF equals newline
(LF=CR+LF), the paper advances one line at the current line
space setting and the logical print head is positioned at
character column 1.
The paper position moves only in multiples of the current dot
row spacing. If the distance to move is other than a multiple
of the current dot row spacing, the remainder is added to the
next paper motion command.
Small values of n may result in overlapping lines.
Overlapping lines may also occur if print attributes such as
Elongated (Double High), Superscript, or Subscript
characters are used on the same line. Printing at different
horizontal and vertical densities will not overlap.
Example The following example illustrates n/216-inch line spacing.

211
Chapter 5 Configuring The Serial Matrix Emulation With Control Codes

Line Spacing 1/6 Inch (6 lpi)

ASCII ESC 2 ESC A n
Hex 1B 32 1B 41
Hex 27 50 27 65
Purpose ESC 2 sets line spacing to 6 lpi, or as set by ESC A.
Discussion The value of n should be 12 if using ESC A n.
ESC 2 asserts n/72-inch line spacing as set by ESC A (page
214). If no distance has been set by ESC A, the distance is 1/
6 inch.
The control code line spacing selection will override the
operator panel line spacing setting.
Example The following example illustrates 1/6-inch line spacing and
assumes that a distance has not been set by ESC A.

Line Spacing 1/8 Inch (8 lpi)

ASCII ESC 0 ESC A n
Hex 1B 30 1B 41
Dec 27 48 27 65
Purpose Specifies continuous line spacing at 1/8-inch increments (8
lpi).
Discussion When the 1/8-inch line spacing control code, ESC 0, is
received, all lines will be printed at 8 lpi until a new line
spacing is selected or the printer is reset. The control code
line spacing selection will override the operator panel line
spacing setting.
The value of n should be 9 if using ESC A n.
Example The following example illustrates 1/8-inch line spacing.

212
 Line Spacing 7/72 Inch

Line Spacing 7/72 Inch

ASCII ESC 1
Hex 1B 31
Dec 27 49
Purpose Specifies the line spacing at 7/72-inch (10.3 lpi) increments.
Discussion When the 7/72-inch line spacing control code is received, all
lines will be printed at the 7/72-inch line spacing until a new
line spacing is selected or the printer is reset. The control
code line spacing selection will override the operator panel
line spacing setting, and the message display will reflect the
line spacing as 10.3 lines per inch.
NOTE: Caution should be used when combining this control code with other
print attributes such as Elongated (Double High), Superscript, or
Subscript; overlapping lines may occur. Printing at different horizontal
and vertical densities will not overlap.
Example The following example illustrates 7/72-inch line spacing.

213
Chapter 5 Configuring The Serial Matrix Emulation With Control Codes

Line Spacing n/72 Inch

ASCII ESC A n
Hex 1B 41 n
Dec 27 65 n
Purpose Stores a line spacing of n/72-inch increments.
where n = 1 through 85 (hex 01 through hex 55). All others
are ignored.
Discussion When the ESC A control sequence is received, all line feed
commands following an ESC 2 sequence* will be at n/72-inch
line spacing until a new line spacing is selected or the printer
is reset. The control code line spacing selection will override
the operator panel line spacing setting.
*The ESC 2 sequence (page 212) asserts the line spacing
which was stored by the preceding ESC A sequence.
Small values of n may result in overlapping lines.
Overlapping lines may also occur if print attributes such as
Elongated (Double High), Superscript, or Subscript
characters are used on the same line. Printing at different
horizontal and vertical densities will not overlap.
Example The following example illustrates 20/72-inch line spacing.

214
 Line Spacing n/216 Inch

Line Spacing n/216 Inch

ASCII ESC 3 n
Hex 1B 33 n
Dec 27 51 n
Purpose Specifies the line spacing at n/216-inch increments.
where n = 1 through 255 (hex 01 through FF)
Discussion When the n/216-inch line spacing control code is received, all
line feeds following will be at n/216-inch line spacing until a
new line spacing is selected or the printer is reset. The
control code line spacing selection will override the operator
panel line spacing setting.
The vertical character position moves only in multiples of the
current dot row spacing. If the distance to move is other than
a multiple of the current dot row spacing, the remainder is
added to the next paper motion command.
NOTE: Caution should be used when combining this control code with other
print attributes such as Elongated (Double High), Superscript, or
Subscript; overlapping lines may occur. Printing at different horizontal
and vertical densities will not overlap.
Example The following example illustrates n/216-inch line spacing.

Overscoring
ASCII ESC _ n
Hex 1B 5F n
Dec 27 95 n
Purpose Enables or disables automatic overscoring of all characters.
where n = 0 to disable automatic overscoring (hex 00 or
hex 30)
n = 1 to enable automatic overscoring (hex 01 or
hex 31)
Discussion When automatic overscore is enabled, all characters,
including spaces, will be overscored until disabled.

215
Chapter 5 Configuring The Serial Matrix Emulation With Control Codes

Example The following sample program illustrates automatic

overscoring and overscoring reset.

Print Mode/Pitch Selection

ASCII ESC X mn ESC [ n q
Hex 1B 58 mn 1B 5B n 71
Dec 27 88 mn 27 91 n 113
Purpose Selects the print mode (DP, NLQ, DRAFT, or OCR) and
character pitch in characters per inch (cpi).
where For ESC[ nq:
n = Print Mode/Pitch code (values other than those
shown in Table 47 are ignored); q = Command
sequence terminator.
where For ESC X mn:
m = Print Mode code; n = Pitch (cpi).
An asterisk (*) (hex 2A) may be substituted for m or
n. Whenever the asterisk replaces m or n, then its
current value will not change. Values other than
those shown in Table 48 and Table 49 are ignored.
NOTE: The print mode must be changed before the first printable symbol of a
print line or the command sequence is deferred until the next line.
Discussion Print mode and pitch can also be selected from the operator
panel. The print mode/pitch select control code from the host
computer will override the operator panel print mode setting
and the print mode and pitch selection will be reflected on the
message display.
A complete set of tables identifying print modes, pitch, and
dot densities for all print modes follows.

Table 47. Print Mode and Pitch (ESC[nq)

n Print Mode and Pitch

1 (31) NLQ 10 cpi

2 (32) DP 10 cpi
3 (33) HS 12 cpi

4 (34) DP 12 cpi

5 (35) DP 13 cpi

216
 Print Mode/Pitch Selection

Table 48. Horizontal and Vertical Dot Density (ESC X)

Horiz. Density
m (Hex*) Vertical Density Print Mode
Resolution

0 (30) 120 dpi 72 dpi DP

1 (31) 180 dpi 96 dpi NLQ

2 (32) 120 dpi 48 dpi HS

3 (33) 120 dpi 48 dpi HS

4 (34) 120 dpi 48 dpi HS

5 (35) 120 dpi 144 dpi OCR-A

6 (36) 120 dpi 144 dpi OCR-B

7 (37) 120 dpi 72 dpi DP

8 (38) 120 dpi 72 dpi DP

*The hex values shown (i.e., 0 and 30) are equal. Either value can be used
in your program expression.

Table 49. Print Mode and Character Pitches (ESC Xmn)

Characters Per Inch

value of n: value of m:

DP NLQ HS HS HS OCR-A OCR-B NLQ2 NLQ2

Print Mode*
0 (30) 1 (31) 2 (32) 3 (33) 4 (34) 5 (35) 6 (36) 7 (37) 8 (38)

0 (30) 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10

1 (31) 12 12 12 12 12 – – 12 12

2 (32) 13 13 13 13 13 – – 13 13
3 (33) 15 15 15 15 15 – – 15 15

4 (34) 17 17 17 17 17 – – 17 17

5 (35) 20 20 20 20 20 – – 20 20
*The hex values shown (i.e., 0 and 30) are equal. Either value can be used in your program expression.
The value of m is represented by the font choice line.

NOTE: When using the Multinational character set in OCR-A or OCR-B print
mode, a unique character set is used.

217
Chapter 5 Configuring The Serial Matrix Emulation With Control Codes

Example Any of the BASIC expressions listed below will select the
Data Processing print mode at 17.1 cpi.
where m (print mode) = 0 or 30 for Data Processing; and
n (pitch) = 4 or 34 for 17.1 cpi.
CHR$(27);“X”;CHR$(0);CHR$(4);
CHR$(27);“X”;CHR$(30);CHR$(34);
CHR$(27);“X04”;

Printer Select
ASCII DC1
Hex 11
Dec 17
Purpose Places printer in the selected state.
Discussion When the configuration parameter PRINTER SELECT is
enabled, this control code will allow the printer to receive and
print data from the host.
Printer Deselect (code DC3) disables the printer from
receiving data.

Printer Deselect
ASCII DC3
Hex 13
Dec 19
Purpose Places printer in the deselected state.
Discussion When the configuration parameter PRINTER SELECT is
enabled, this control code will disable the printer from
receiving and printing data from the host. Until a DC1 (Printer
Select) command is received, all subsequent data to the
printer is ignored.
NOTE: When the configuration parameter PRINTER SELECT is enabled and
saved in the configuration, the printer will power up in the deselected
state.

218
 Reverse

Reverse
ASCII ESC } ; n
Hex ESC 7D 3B n
Dec ESC 125 59 n
Purpose Moves the logical print head up.
Discussion If n is “L”, the print head moves up one line. (Reverse line
feed.)
If n is “P”, the print head moves up to the previous top of
form. (Reverse form feed.)

Skip-Over Perforation
ASCII ESC N n
Hex 1B 4E n
Dec 27 78 n
Purpose Selects the number of lines (at the current line spacing) for
the paper to skip at the bottom of the perforated page.
where n = 1 through 127 (hex 01 through hex 7F) to select
the number of lines to skip. If the value of n
exceeds the current form’s length, it is ignored.
Discussion The actual distance set is the product of n and the current line
spacing. Factory default value disables bottom margin. The
current default value may be set by the operator. Setting a
new forms length (ESC C) resets bottom margin to zero.
This feature is disabled whenever vertical tabs are set.
The bottom margin can also be selected from the operator
panel; however, vertical tabs within the bottom margin zone,
as set by the operator panel, are ignored. The control code
bottom margin setting from the host computer will override
the operator panel setting.

Skip-Over Perforation Cancel

ASCII ESC O (alpha O)
Hex 1B 4F
Dec 27 79
Purpose Resets bottom margin to zero.

219
Chapter 5 Configuring The Serial Matrix Emulation With Control Codes

Superscript/Subscript Printing
ASCII ESC S n
Hex 1B 53 n
Dec 27 83 n
Purpose Selects superscript or subscript printing.
where n = 0 to enable superscript printing (hex 00 or hex
30)
n = 1 to enable subscript printing (hex 01 or hex 31)
Discussion Superscript and subscript characters print at the same size
as the current font. They are shifted up or down one half of a
line. When the super/subscript control code is received, all
characters will be superscript or subscript until reset by the
super/subscript reset control code or printer reset.
Emphasized print is ignored in the super/subscript print
mode.
Both superscript and subscript characters can be printed in
the same character column using the Backspace (BS) control
code (page 190).
NOTE: Caution should be used when combining Superscript or Subscript
printing with other print attributes such as Elongated (Double High),
or small line spacing; overlapping lines may occur. Characters with
different horizontal or vertical dot densities will not overlap.
Example The following sample program illustrates superscript/
subscript printing.

Superscript/Subscript Printing Reset

ASCII ESC T
Hex 1B 54
Dec 27 84
Purpose Resets superscript and subscript printing as set by ESC S.

220
 Super-Set Commands

Super-Set Commands
ASCII ESC | } ;
Hex 1B 7C 7D 3B
Dec 27 124 125 59
Purpose Control code sequence used to introduce the super-set
commands.
Discussion The “|” in the command string is the pipe symbol.
Comment Super-set commands affect the LinePrinter Plus emulation as
a whole regardless of the printer protocol currently active.
The commands are sent through the host in the input data
stream, and enact the following features:
•Select a printer protocol
•Choose character sets
•Specify character spacing
•Specify line spacing
•Choose barcode formats
Refer to Chapter 7, “Super-Set Programming,” for further
information.

Underline
ASCII ESC – n
Hex 1B 2D n
Dec 27 45 n
Purpose Enables or disables automatic underlining of all characters.
where n = 0 to disable automatic underlining (hex 00 or
hex 30)
n = 1 to enable automatic underlining (hex 01 or
hex 31)
Discussion When automatic underline is enabled, all characters,
including spaces, will be underlined until disabled.
Example The following sample program illustrates automatic
underlining and underlining reset.

221
Chapter 5 Configuring The Serial Matrix Emulation With Control Codes

Vertical Tab
ASCII VT
Hex 0B
Dec 11
Purpose Prints the data in the buffer and advances the paper to the
next vertical tab position.
Discussion Vertical tab positions are set by control code ESC B and
executed by control code VT. In this mode, if vertical tabs are
loaded, the paper position moves to the next vertical tab
position.
If a vertical tab format is not defined, the paper position is
advanced to the next line at the current line spacing. If a
vertical tab format is defined but no vertical tab positions are
set between the current print position and the end of the form,
the paper position is advanced to the top of the next form.
The VT code resets all single line print attributes. More
information on vertical tabs is provided in Chapter 9.

222
 Vertical Tab, Set/Clear

Vertical Tab, Set/Clear

ASCII ESC B n1 n2 n3...nk NUL
Hex 1B 42 n1 n2 n3...nk 00
Dec 27 66 n1 n2 n3...nk 0
Purpose Sets vertical tab positions.
where n1 through nk specify the line number for the
vertical tab(s), for a maximum of 16 tab positions.
NUL must be used as the sequence terminator.
Discussion The physical position on the paper is the product of n and the
current line spacing. Subsequent line spacing changes do not
change the tab position. If the value of n defines a tab stop
that exceeds the forms length, that tab position is ignored.
In the Serial Matrix printer protocol, vertical tab positions are
set by control code ESC B and executed by control code VT.
The tab positions must be in ascending order or the
sequence will terminate. More information regarding Serial
Matrix vertical tab setting is provided in Chapter 9. If the ESC
B command is followed immediately by NUL, the vertical tab
positions are cleared.
Example The following sample program illustrates Vertical Tab Setting.

223
Chapter 5 Configuring The Serial Matrix Emulation With Control Codes

224
 6 P-Series XQ Variant
Printer Emulation

Overview
This chapter describes the P-Series XQ Variant emulation host control codes
that are supported for IBM 6500-v ASCII printers. Emulation refers to the
ability of a printer to execute the commands of a particular printer control
language. A printer control language is the coding system used to convey,
manipulate, and print data. Carriage Return, print quality, character attributes
such as bold and underline, margins, and tabs are typical functions selected
by printer control language codes. In this manual, the terms emulation, printer
protocol, and printer control language are synonymous.
The P-Series XQ Variant emulation was devised for a series of Printronix line
matrix printers manufactured between 1974 and 1991, but no longer
available. This emulation enables a 6500-v printer to emulate Printronix P300
and P600 printers with A7/B10 boards. To select the P-Series XQ Variant
emulation mode as the active printer configuration, refer to the ASCII
Emulation Selection menu in Chapter 4 of the IBM Infoprint 6500 Line Matrix
Printer User’s Manual.
The P-Series XQ Variant emulation provides many configurable parameters.
The default parameter values for this emulation are shown in Table 50. You
can modify the emulation parameter values in two ways:
• The P-Series XQ Variant host control codes. An extensive set of P-
Series XQ Variant control code commands can be sent to the printer from
an attached host computer via the host data stream. Most of this chapter
is devoted to describing the P-Series XQ Variant control codes.
• The printer configuration menus. You can modify a subset of the P-
Series XQ Variant emulation parameters using the operator panel keys
and LCD display, as described in the User’s Manual.
Control codes sent from a host system generally override previous settings
that result from the configuration menus. However, any configuration settings
from host control codes will be gone once the printer is powered off (or reset
to the default values), unless you have saved them to NVRAM using the
configuration menus. The User’s Manual describes the Save Custom Sets
option for saving changes to your printer NVRAM.
The emulation’s response to several of the control codes depends on the
configuration. For example, upon receipt of the carriage return control code,
the emulation will either perform a carriage return function only, or a carriage
return and line feed, based on the configuration for the CR function.

225
Chapter 6 Overview

P-Series XQ Variant Default Values And States

Your printer memory stores a set of typical operating states and conditions for
the P-Series XQ Variant emulation. When you power on the printer and select
this emulation, the default settings in Table 50 are automatically invoked.

Table 50. P-Series XQ Default Settings

Characteristic Default Setting

Control Code 06 8.0 LPI

Define CR Code CR = CR
Auto LF Disable

Define LF Code LF = CR + LF

Compressed Print Char 01 SOH

Elong./Alt Font ELNG=BS FONT=SO

High Speed (Draft) Print Mode Char 02 STX

EVFU Selected Enable

Uppercase Select Disable

Slew Relative 1-16 Lines

226
 P-Series XQ Variant Default Values And States

Table 51 lists several additional default settings for parameters that are
provided by the Print Format menus (described in Chapter 4 of the User’s
Manual). Many of the settings shown in Table 51 can be overridden by host
control codes for the same parameter.

Table 51. Print Format Default Settings

Characteristic Default Settings

CPI 10.0

LPI 6.0

Forms Width 13.6 inches

345.4 millimeters
136 characters

Forms Length 11.0 inches

279 millimeters
66 lines

Print Quality DP Quality

Proportional Spacing Disable

Italic Print Disable

Slashed Zero Disable

Left Margin 0 columns

Right Margin 0 columns

Bottom Margin 0 lines

Perforation Skip Disable

227
Chapter 6 Configuring The XQ Variant Emulation With Control Codes

Configuring The XQ Variant Emulation With Control Codes

The remainder of this chapter describes the P-Series XQ Variant printer
control language codes that may be sent from a host computer attached to
the printer, in order to configure and invoke numerous printer functions.

Format For Control Code Descriptions

The following information is listed for each code function (where applicable
and possible).
Name The title or function of the command.
ASCII The standard ASCII name for the control code.
Hex The code’s numeric equivalent in hexadecimal.
Dec The code’s numeric equivalent in decimal.
Purpose The function(s) of the control code.
Discussion A description of exceptions or limitations to normal use.
Example A sample output is provided for some control codes when it is
possible to illustrate the effect of a control code, or if a
specific syntax is required to complete the program statement
(i.e. Horizontal Tab set, Vertical Tab set/clear).

IMPORTANT If you specify any parameters for a control code other than those
defined in the control code description, unpredictable results may
occur.

228
 Edit Mode

Edit Mode
NOTE: To use Edit mode in the XQ emulation, you must configure the printer
for a carriage return only (CR = CR). If the printer is configured for a
carriage return with a line feed (CR = CR + LF), the contents of the
buffer print immediately after execution of the CR code, disabling the
CR editing function.
Any printable character in the data stream can replace printable characters or
spaces already loaded in the print buffer. The space character (hex 20) is
used to skip characters in the print buffer that are not to be replaced and,
similar to underlining or deleting, the new characters are inserted in the
appropriate positions.
Table 52 illustrates the edit mode. Note that the editing function replaces
characters; it cannot be used to print the same character twice (double strike)
in the same location. Use the DEL code (hex 7F) to make a character blank.

Table 52. CR Edit Mode Example

Enter in Print Buffer Printed Result

Example 1 AAABBBCCC(CR) AAABDBCCB

SSSSDSSSB(LF)
Example 2 ABCDEF(CR) ABCDEF
______(CR)
Key: S = Space (hex 20);
LF = Line Feed (hex 0A);
CR = Carriage Return (hex 0D)

NUL Code
NUL (hex 00) is ignored by the printer and can be used as a fill character;
however, it can not be used to add blank spaces since it is not a space
character.

229
Chapter 6 Configuring The XQ Variant Emulation With Control Codes

The Control Codes

This index lists each printer command by function, ASCII mnemonic, and the
page where the command is explained in detail. “N/A” means not applicable.
The rest of this chapter defines the control code functions for P-Series XQ
Emulation mode. The commands are listed in alphabetical order.
FUNCTION ASCII CODE PAGE
Vertical Motion
Electronic Vertical Format Unit (EVFU) DLE - US 234
NOTE: Channel codes 10 through 1F hex are used when the PI line is
disabled. See Chapter 9 for applicable PI enable channel codes.
Form Feed FF 236
Line Feed LF 236
Line Spacing (8 or 10.3 LPI) ACK 237
Vertical Tab VT 240
Horizontal Motion
Carriage Return CR 232
Space SP 239
Emphasis
Underline _ 240
Space SP 239
Font Control
Compressed Print SOH, ETX, HT 233
Elongated Characters (Double High) BS, SO 235
Select Draft Print STX, ETX, HT 239
NOTE: The Compressed Print, Elongated Characters, and Shift Out
parameters can be configured at the operator panel (see User’s
Manual).
Character Set Control
Alternate Character SI 231
Set Deselect (Shift In)
Alternate Character SO 231
Set Select (Shift Out) BS
Data Manipulation
Delete DEL 234
Space SP 239
Graphics
Plot, Even Dot EOT 238
Plot, Odd Dot ENQ 238

230
 Alternate Character Set Deselect (Shift In)

Alternate Character Set Deselect (Shift In)

ASCII SI
Hex 0F
Dec 15
Purpose This code selects the primary character set.
Discussion The alternate character set select and deselect codes can be
used to mix primary and alternate characters on a single line.
The main character set is also automatically selected when a
line terminator code is received.
Example

Alternate Character Set Select (Shift Out)

ASCII SO BS
Hex 0E 08
Dec 14 08
Purpose Accesses the extended character set in the range of hex A0
through FF using codes hex 20 through 7F.
NOTE: An alternate hex code of 08 (ASCII code BS) can be assigned as the
Alternate Character Set Select control code through printer
configuration.
Discussion These codes are used in 7-bit systems as if data bit 8 were
set to 1. For example, sending code hex 20 accesses the
symbol at code point hex A0. If a printable symbol is not
available at the code point, a space is printed. Both
commands are cancelled by a paper motion command.
Example

231
Chapter 6 Configuring The XQ Variant Emulation With Control Codes

Carriage Return
ASCII CR
Hex 0D
Dec 13
Purpose Positions the logical print head at the left margin (resets the
memory pointer to the first character position).
Discussion The printer can be configured to perform a carriage return
only (CR = CR only), or a carriage return plus a line feed
function
(CR = CR + LF).
A CR = CR configuration enables underline, add, delete, and
edit functions, but the host computer must send a separate
line feed code to print the data and change the vertical
position. The character position indicator is positioned at
character column one. Subsequent printable data preceding
a paper motion command replaces previous printable data
(including underlines). Two exceptions apply:
•Subsequent underlined characters (hex 5F) overlay the
previous data.
•Subsequent space characters (hex 20) only index the
character position indicator to the right.
This code can occur at any place in the data stream and is
acted upon immediately. Note that this code can reduce the
current print speed by up to one-fourth.
With CR = CR + LF, the underline, add, delete and edit
functions are disabled, and the code is processed as a line
feed. Refer to the Line Feed command description on page
236 for more information.

232
 Compressed Print

Compressed Print
ASCII SOHETX HT
Hex 01 03 09
Dec 1 3 9
Purpose Selects compressed character printing.
NOTE: Either SOH, ETX, or HT is defined at the operator panel as the code
used to select Compressed Print (the default is SOH). (Refer to the
configuration chapter of the User’s Manual.)
Discussion Use the code defined at the operator panel to select 17.1 cpi.
These commands can occur anywhere in the data stream
and are acted upon immediately, affecting the entire current
print line. Line spacing may be selected either through the
operator panel or by line spacing control codes. The control
code setting overrides the operator panel line spacing setting.
ETX and HT can also be configured to select Draft font at 10
cpi (see page 239).
Example:

233
Chapter 6 Configuring The XQ Variant Emulation With Control Codes

Delete
ASCII DEL
Hex 7F
Dec 127
Purpose Delete character puts a blank space at the corresponding
character position.
Discussion DEL deletes the corresponding character in the print buffer.
In Table 53 below, four delete control codes are used to
delete DATE from the print line.
NOTE: The printer must be configured for carriage return only. If the printer is
configured for a carriage return and line feed, the contents of the
buffer are printed on receipt of the CR code.

Table 53. Delete Example

Enter in Print Buffer Printed Result

INVOICE DATE(CR) INVOICE

SSSSSSSSDDDD(LF)
Key: S = Space (hex 20);
LF = Line Feed (hex 0A);
CR = Carriage Return (hex 0D)
D = Delete (hex 7F)

Electronic Vertical Format Unit (EVFU)

ASCII DLE through US
Hex 10 through 1F
Dec 16 through 31
Purpose Load and execute the EVFU.
NOTE: PI line is disabled in the above description. ASCII and corresponding
codes for EVFU functions differ when the PI line is enabled,
according to the printer interface being used.
Discussion Information about the EVFU is provided in Chapter 9.

234
 Elongated Characters (Double High Print)

Elongated Characters (Double High Print)

ASCII BSSO
Hex 080E
Dec 814
NOTE: Either BS or SO is defined at the operator panel as the code used to
select Elongated Characters (Double High Print). The default is SO.
Refer to the configuration chapter of the User’s Manual.
Purpose Selects elongated (double high) character printing for one
line.
Discussion The Elongated Character control code can be placed
anywhere in the data line before the line terminator.
Following the line terminator, the printer automatically selects
the default font. Consequently, the Elongated Character
control code must be sent for each line of elongated
characters. Elongated characters cannot be mixed with
standard characters on the same print line.
The current line spacing is doubled for one line.
This code can occur anywhere in the data stream and is
acted upon immediately. It is cancelled by a SI code or a
paper motion command.
Example

235
Chapter 6 Configuring The XQ Variant Emulation With Control Codes

Form Feed
ASCII FF
Hex 0C
Dec 12
Purpose Prints the data in the buffer, advances the paper position to
the next top-of-form and moves the logical printhead to the
first character column.
Discussion The default forms length is determined by the configuration in
nonvolatile memory. Forms length is set by using the
operator panel or VFU. Code FF cancels all single-line only
print attributes.
The default form length is eleven inches. The Form Feed
command reacts differently when the VFU is active. More
information on VFU is provided in Chapter 9.

Line Feed
ASCII LF
Hex 0A
Dec 10
Purpose Prints the data in the buffer (if any) and advances the vertical
character position one line at the current line space setting.
Discussion The logical print head is positioned at character column 1 of
the new line. The LF function cancels all single line print
attributes such as double high (elongated) and double wide
(expanded) characters.
In the P-Series XQ Even Dot Plot mode (high density
graphics), the LF code does not cause paper position motion;
the data in the buffer is plotted and the logical print head is
positioned at character column 1 in anticipation of the Odd
Dot Plot control code to complete high density graphic
plotting.
In the P-Series XQ Odd Dot Plot mode (normal density
graphics), the LF code plots the data in the buffer, advances
the paper position a single dot row at the current vertical dot
density, and positions the logical print head at character
column 1.

236
 Line Spacing (8 or 10.3 LPI)

Line Spacing (8 or 10.3 LPI)

ASCII ACK
Hex 06
Dec 6
Purpose Selects line spacing of 1/8” or 7/72” for current line only.
NOTE: The specific line spacing value is selected at the operator panel with
the control code 06 parameter. See the User’s Manual for more
information.
Discussion The line spacing control code can be placed anywhere in the
data stream before the line terminator code; however, it is
recommended that you place the line spacing code at the
start or end of the data line.
After the line is printed at the new line spacing, the default
line spacing is automatically reselected.
Example

237
Chapter 6 Configuring The XQ Variant Emulation With Control Codes

Plot, Even Dot (P-Series XQ High Density Graphics)

ASCII EOT
Hex 04
Dec 4
Purpose Selects even dot plot mode to print dots in even numbered
dot columns to produce high density plotting.
Discussion This control code can occur anywhere in the data line before
the line terminator, but for best performance it should be
placed at the beginning of the line. This command is acted
upon immediately, affecting the entire current print line. It
defines certain data between the next and last paper motion
commands as even dot plot data. These data are plotted at
60 by 72 dots per inch.
When this mode is exited, the print mode and attributes last
selected remain active. A detailed description of plotting can
be found in Chapter 8.

Plot, Odd Dot (P-Series XQ Normal Density Graphics)

ASCII ENQ
Hex 05
Dec 5
Purpose Selects odd dot plot mode to print dots in odd numbered dot
columns for normal density plotting.
Discussion This control code can occur anywhere in the data line before
the line terminator, but for best performance it should be
placed at the beginning of the line. This command is acted
upon immediately, affecting the entire current print line. It
defines certain data between the next and last paper motion
commands as odd dot plot data. These data are plotted at 60
by 72 dots per inch.
When you exit this mode, the font and attributes last selected
remain active. Plotting is described in Chapter 8.

238
 Select Draft Print

Select Draft Print

ASCII STXETXHT
Hex 020309
Dec 239
Purpose Selects Draft 10 cpi as the font.
NOTE: Either STX, ETX, or HT is selected at the operator panel as the code
that selects High Speed (Draft) Print Mode; the default is STX. (See
the Configuration chapter in the User’s Manual.)
Discussion Once the control code for High Speed (Draft) Print Mode has
been defined from the operator panel, that code can then
select Draft 10 cpi.
These commands can occur anywhere in the data stream
and are acted upon immediately, affecting the entire current
print line.
ETX and HT can also be configured to select Compressed
Print (17.1 cpi) if you configure the printer from the operator
panel. (See page 233.)
Example

Space
ASCII SP
Hex 20
Dec 32
Purpose Produces a blank space; no character is printed.
Discussion It is not necessary to pad the end of the print line with space
characters. The printer automatically fills the line after the line
terminator is received.
The Space character code is also used to skip characters for
editing and underlining. See “Edit Mode” on page 229.

239
Chapter 6 Configuring The XQ Variant Emulation With Control Codes

Underline
ASCII Underline key ( _ )
Hex 5F
Dec 95
Purpose Underlines specified character positions.
Discussion To underline characters, the print buffer is first loaded with
the character line; then the line must be terminated with a
Carriage Return code. Spaces are then loaded in the buffer
at positions not to be underlined, and the underline code is
inserted in the specific positions to be underlined. Table 54
illustrates underlining.

Table 54. Underline Example

Enter in Print Buffer Printed Result

THE 600 PRINTER(CR) THE 600 PRINTER

SSSS___(LF)

Key: S = Space (hex 20);

LF = Line Feed (hex 0A);
CR = Carriage Return (hex 0D)
_= Underline (hex 5F)

Vertical Tab
ASCII VT
Hex 0B
Dec 11
Purpose Acts as a line terminator when the EVFU is loaded, causing
the paper to advance to a specified programmed line.
Discussion Vertical Tab is primarily an EVFU line terminator code as
described in the Electronic Vertical Format Unit. If the EVFU
is not loaded and Vertical Tab control code is used, a single
line feed occurs.

240
 7 Super-Set Programming

Introduction
This chapter describes the super-set commands. Super-set commands affect
each of the protocols included in the LinePrinter Plus emulation regardless of
the printer protocol currently active, except for the P-Series XQ Variant
emulation. The commands are sent through the host in the input data stream,
and enact the features described in the following subsections.
NOTE: The super-set commands do not affect the P-Series XQ Variant
emulation.

Using the Super-Set Commands

Each printer protocol uses a unique control code sequence to introduce the
super-set commands, called the Super-Set Control Code (SSCC).

Table 55. Super-Set Control Codes

SSCC SSCC
Protocol
(ASCII Value) (Hex Value)

P-Series* SFCC | } ; SFCC 7C 7D 3B

P-Series XQ N/A N/A

Serial Matrix ESC | } ; ESC 7C 7D 3B

Epson FX ESC | } ; ESC 7C 7D 3B

Proprinter III XL ESC | } ; ESC 7C 7D 3B

*The SFCC in P-Series is the currently active Special Function Control Code.
NOTE: The super-set commands are briefly introduced in the chapters of this
book that describe the control codes for each of the emulations listed
above.
In the following subsections, the generic code sequence name, SSCC, is
placed before the control code to remind you to enter the correct sequence
depending on the printer protocol currently active.

241
Chapter 7 Using the Super-Set Commands

Character Sets
ASCII Code SSCC R n
Hex Code SSCC 52 n
Dec Code SSCC 82 n
Purpose Selects one of several character sets.
Comment The value of n must have three ASCII digits.

Table 56. Character Sets

n Character Set

Standard Sets (P-Series/Serial Matrix)

000 IBM PC

001 Multinational

002 EMCA Latin 1

003 DEC Multinational

004 OCR-A

005 OCR-B

Standard Sets (Proprinter)

000 Code Page 437

001 Code Page 850

002 OCR-A

003 OCR-B

004 Multinational

Standard Sets (Epson)

000 Epson Set

001 OCR-A
002 OCR-B

003 Multinational

004 Code Page 850

005 IBM PC

Arabic Sets

100 ASMO 449

101 ASMO 449+

242
 Character Sets

Table 56. Character Sets

n Character Set

102 ASMO 708

103 ASMO 708+

104 MS DOS CP710

105 MS DOS CP720

106 Sakr CP714

107 Aptec CP715

108 CP 786

109 Arabic CP 864

110 Arabic CP 1046

111 Arabic Lam One

112 Arabic Lam Two

Cyrillic Sets

200 Cyrillic 866

201 Cyrillic CP 437

202 Cyrillic 113

203 Cyrillic 8859-5

204 ISO 915

205 Code Page 855

206 7-bit Cyrillic

European Sets
300 8859-2 Latin 2

301 Latin 2 852

302 Mozovia
303 Kamenicky

304 Roman 8

305 Slovenian 437

306 Slovenian 1250

307 Code Page 865

308 Code Page 860

243
Chapter 7 Using the Super-Set Commands

Table 56. Character Sets

n Character Set

309 Latin 1 8859-1

310 Latin 5 8859-9

311 Latin 0 8859-15

Greek Sets

400 DEC 256 Greek

401 ELOT 928 Greek

402 Greek 3

403 ABY Greek

404 ABG Greek

405 ELOT 927 Greek

406 Greek 851

407 Greek 437

408 Greek 8859-7

Hebrew Sets

500 Hebrew Old

501 Hebrew New

502 Hebrew DEC

503 Latin-1 Hebrew

Turkish Sets

600 Data Gen. Turk

601 DEC Turkish

602 IBM Turkish

603 Siemens Turkish

604 PTT Turkish

605 IBC Turkish

606 Bull Turkish

607 AS400 Turkish

608 Unisys Turkish

609 NCR Turkish

244
 Character Spacing n/240 Inch

Table 56. Character Sets

n Character Set

610 PST Turkish

611 UNIS-1 Turkish

612 Code Page 853

Misc. Sets
700 Block-set 10 cpi

701 Italics Set

Character Spacing n/240 Inch

ASCII Code SSCC I n (uppercase “i”)
Hex Code SSCC 49 n
Dec Code SSCC 73 n
Purpose Specifies the character spacing in n/240-inch increments.
where n = 001 through 999 (three ASCII digits)
Comment When the n/240-inch character spacing command is
received, all character printing will be at n/240-inch horizontal
spacing until a new character spacing is selected.

Line Spacing n/288 Inch

ASCII Code SSCC L n
Hex Code SSCC 4C n
Dec Code SSCC 76 n
Purpose Specifies the line spacing in n/288-inch increments.
where n = 0001 through 9999 (four ASCII digits)
Comment When the n/288-inch line spacing command is received, all
character printing will be at n/288-inch vertical spacing until a
new line spacing is selected.

245
Chapter 7 Using the Super-Set Commands

Printer Protocol Select

ASCII Code SSCC P n
Hex Code SSCC 50 n
Dec Code SSCC 80 n
Purpose Selects (changes) printer protocol.
Comment When the emulation receives this command, a software reset
is performed as if the emulation were powered-up in the
corresponding protocol.

Table 57. Printer Protocol Select

n (hex) Protocol

00 or 30 P-Series
01 or 31 P-Series XQ

02 or 32 Serial Matrix

03 or 33 Proprinter III XL
04 or 34 Epson FX

The printer protocol may also be selected from the control panel.
NOTE: If P-Series XQ is selected, then you cannot use this command to exit
the protocol.

246
 Printer Protocol Select

Bar Codes
A bar code is a graphic representation of alphanumeric characters. The
LinePrinter Plus bar codes are listed below, with detailed bar code information
and examples provided on the referenced pages. All parameters must be
separated by a semicolon (;) unless noted otherwise. Throughout this
chapter, actual commands required for input are shown exactly as they must
be entered, while all parameters associated with that command are shown in
italics. Optional parameters are enclosed in brackets.
Spaces are used only to visually separate the command parameters, but do
not enter these spaces in your command.

Table 58. Available Bar Codes

Page
Bar Code Mnemonic Symbol Length Code Set
Number

Codabar SSCC c B Variable Alphanumeric 252

Code 39 SSCC c C Variable Alphanumeric 257

Code 93 SSCC c 9 Variable Alphanumeric 259

Code 128 SSCC c D Variable Alphanumeric 265

EAN 8 SSCC c 8 7 digits Numeric 270

EAN 13 1 SSCC c 1 12 digits Numeric 271

FIM SSCC c F Variable Numeric 272

German I-2/5 SSCC c G 11 or 13 digits Numeric 274

Interleaved 2/5 2 SSCC c I Variable Numeric 280

MSI SSCC c M 13 or 14 digits Numeric 281

PDF 417 SSCC c 4 Variable Alphanumeric 286

PostBar 3 SSCC c O Variable 0-3 292

POSTNET SSCC c P 5, 9 or 11 digits Numeric 296

Royal Mail SSCC c R Variable Alphanumeric 298

Telepen SSCC c T Variable Alphanumeric 299

UCC/EAN-128 SSCC c V Variable Numeric 305

UPC-A SSCC c A 11 digits Numeric 317

UPC-E SSCC c E 11 digits Numeric 318

UPC Shipping SSCC c S 13 digits Numeric 321

UPS 11 SSCC c U 10 digits Alphanumeric 322

247
Chapter 7 Bar Codes

NOTE: 1 The barcode type is the numeral one, “1.”

2 The “I” in the Interleaved 2/5 mnemonic is the uppercase “i” ASCII
character.
3 The barcode type is the uppercase letter “O.”

Bar Code Format

ASCII Code SSCC c t ; d data d [; N n ; xxxx ; yyyy ] [; X mmmm ] [; P p ]
[; C ] [; H hh ] [; D]
Hex Code SSCC 63 t ; d data d [; 4E n ; xxxx ; yyyy ] [; 58 mmmm ] [; 50
p ] [; 43 ] [; 48 hh ] [; 44]
Dec Code SSCC 99 t ; d data d [; 78 n ; xxxx ; yyyy ] [; 88 mmmm ] [; 80
p ] [; 67 ] [; 72 hh ] [; 68]
Purpose Invokes bar codes.
Comment The brackets indicate optional parameters in the command
string. Do not include the brackets in your command. Only
one parameter may be used per command.
These bar codes cannot be rotated or scaled.
If there is a printable data field in the bar code specification, it
will print in the DP font; except for UPC-A and UPC-E which
print in OCR B.
Bar codes cannot be positioned beyond the bottom or right
end of the currently defined logical form. The command
syntax prevents positioning the cursor above the current
position or to the left of the form. Drawing a bar code causes
the printer to automatically switch to DP print mode.
The DP print mode is active until the bottom of the bar code
has been printed. After this, you can change the print mode.
You can change the print mode to OCR A, OCR B or back to
DP between the current cursor location and the bottom of the
bar code position. Print mode changes to NLQ or HS will be
ignored in this region.
wheret = type of bar code (see Table 59).

248
 Bar Code Format

Table 59. Bar Code Selection Values

t (ASCII) t (hex) Selects Bar Code

P 50 POSTNET

F 46 FIM
C 43 Code 3/9

A 41 UPC-A

E 45 UPC-E

8 38 EAN-8
1 31 EAN-13

I 49 Interleaved 2/5

R 52 Royal Mail

NOTE: For all of the following parameters, the digits are ASCII values.
where d = the bar code delimiter, which can be any
character
where data = variable length printable data field
The following parameters are optional:
where N = activates the offset
where n = the x and y coordinate unit system (see Table 60)

Table 60. Offset Unit Select

n (ASCII) Selects Value

0 use current cpi and lpi values

1 use 1/4 inch value

2 use 1/2 centimeter value: 1/(2.54 x 2)

3 use 1 millimeter value: 1/(25.4)

4 use DP dot value (hor.1/120” x vert. 1/72”)

where xxxx = four-digit upper left corner x (horizontal axis)

where yyyy = four-digit upper left corner y (vertical axis)
where X = activates magnification
where mmmm = magnification value. Valid values are X1,
X1.5, X1A, X1B, X2, X2A, X3 and X4.

249
Chapter 7 Bar Codes

where P = activates printable data field variable

where p = location of printable data field (see Table 61)

Table 61. Printable Data Field Location

p (ASCII) p (hex) Selects Location

A 41 above

B 42 below (default)

N 4E none

where C = calculate and plot check digit (if available as an

option)
The default is no check digit if the check digit is allowed to be
optional.
where H = activates the height variable
where hh = two-digit bar code height in 1/10”. The
default is as specified in the individual bar code
specifications.
where D = activates dark bar code
Comment The x and y values are added to the current cursor position.
You cannot specify the upper left corner to be above the
current print position.
If xxxx = 0000 and yyyy = 0000 and there are no line feeds,
any text following the bar code command will print next to the
bar code. Notice that the x horizontal cursor position is
automatically updated. See Figure 5.

New Cursor
Original Position
Cursor
Position
TEXT

Figure 5. Bar Code Example 1

250
 Bar Code Format

However, if the values are other than 0000, the original

cursor position remains intact, despite the printing of the bar
code. See Figure 6, which shows xxxx = 10 and yyyy = 5.

Original
Cursor
Position
TEXT
5

10

Figure 6. Bar Code Example 2

To place the text below the bar code, you must insert line
feed commands. See Figure 7.

Original
Cursor
Position
5

10

Line Feeds

Figure 7. Bar Code Example 3

251
Chapter 7 Bar Codes

Codabar
The Codabar structure is shown in Figure 8 and described on the following
pages.

SR, SC QUIET QUIET

SR, SC
POSITION ZONE POSITION ZONE

STOP START
CODE CODE

OPTIONAL
CHECK
DIGIT
CCW CW

DATA DATA
FIELD OPTIONAL FIELD
READABLE
DATA
FIELD

OPTIONAL
CHECK
DIGIT
START STOP UPPER
UPPER LOWER LOWER
CODE CODE GUARD
GUARD GUARD GUARD
BAND BAND BAND BAND
QUIET QUIET
ZONE ZONE

HEIGHT HEIGHT

OPTIONAL
CHECK DIGIT
SR, SC
POSITION
UPPER GUARD BAND

QUIET START STOP QUIET

Normal ZONE CODE
DATA FIELD
CODE ZONE HEIGHT

LOWER GUARD BAND

OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD

SR, SC
POSITION
OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD

LOWER GUARD BAND

HEIGHT
QUIET STOP START QUIET
INV ZONE CODE
DATA FIELD
CODE ZONE

UPPER GUARD BAND

OPTIONAL
CHECK DIGIT

Figure 8. Codabar Structure

252
 Codabar

Quiet Zone
Both ends of the bar code structure require blank quiet zones. The quiet
zones must be at least 0.25 inches wide and completely blank to ensure
accurate reading of the start/stop codes and to prevent adjacent bar codes
from overlapping. Be sure to provide sufficient space on the form for the quiet
zones.

Start/Stop Codes
The start/stop code is a unique character identifying the leading and trailing
end of the bar code. The start/stop code is automatically produced with each
bar code. The start/stop code structure permits bidirectional bar code
scanning.

Data Field
The bar code symbol uses a series of wide and narrow bars and spaces to
represent standard alphanumeric characters. Each wide or narrow bar or
space is one element; each character in the data field has nine elements. The
structure is three wide elements (bars or spaces) out of the nine total
elements which compose one character.

Readable Data
The optional readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the bar
code data. It can be printed above or below the bar code symbol.

Check Digit
The optional modulo-43 check digit can be inserted into the bar code to verify
accurate scanning.

Codabar Command Format

BARCODE
CODABAR [CD];[DIR;] [MAG;] [Hn[.m];] [BFn;L;] [DARK;] SR;SC
(D) [data field] (D)
[PDF [;LOC] [;FONT]]
STOP
BARCODE The Bar Code command; enter BARCODE.
CODABAR CD
Designates bar code type Codabar; enter
CODABAR. To calculate and plot the optional
modulo-43 check digit with the bar code symbol
automatically, enter CD.
DIR Optional parameter to orient the bar code structure
vertically. Enter CW for clockwise rotation. Enter
CCW or VSCAN for counter-clockwise rotation.
Enter INV for inverted rotation. If DIR is not
entered, the barcode is horizontally oriented.

253
Chapter 7 Bar Codes

MAG Optional parameter to magnify (horizontally

expand) the bar code symbol. The magnification
default value is X1. As required for scanning, enter
a magnification value to increase the magnification.
Increasing the magnification adjusts printed
character density. You can also use XR or XRD.
Hn[.m] Optional parameter to adjust the overall height
(vertical expansion) of the bar code symbol
(including the upper and lower 0.1-inch guard
bands and any human readable data). Height
adjustments are made in 0.1-inch increments; enter
H and a value from 3 through 99 to select height
adjustments from 0.3 through 9.9 inches. The
default value is 0.9 inch.
[.m] is an additional number of dots for the bar code
height. (Dots are in the current dot scale.)
NOTE: If 0.3 inches is the selected height, the PDF cannot be included.
BFn;L Optional parameters for assigning a dynamic bar
code data field location on a form and for
designating the length of the data field. With these
parameters, the actual data for the bar code data
field is dynamically provided during the Execute
Form Mode; the data is not specified during the
Create Form Mode. To use this field, perform the
following steps:
a. Enter BF.
b. Replace n with a number ranging from 0
through 512 to identify the bar code field. The
SR and SC parameters specify the exact
location of the bar code field identified by n.
c. Replace L with a number equaling the total
number of characters in the field. (The actual
data provided dynamically during the Execute
Form Mode can be less than L.)
d. The information for the data field is entered
dynamically during the Execute Form Mode.
Do not use the data field parameter to enter
data when the BFn;L parameters are used.
However, refer to the data field description for
available characters.
DARK Optional parameter to produce darker looking bar
codes. Enter DARK. Refer to the IGP
Programmer’s Reference Manual for more
information.

254
 Codabar

SR Defines the starting row for the bar code. Enter a

value ranging from row 1 to one less than the
length of the form. Character row or dot row is
specified based on the Scale command (refer to the
IGP Programmer’s Reference Manual), or use the
CP.DP format (refer to the IGP Programmer’s
Reference Manual).
SC Defines the starting column of the bar code. Enter a
value ranging from column 1 to one less than the
width of the form. Character column or dot column
is specified based on the Scale command (refer to
the IGP Programmer’s Reference Manual), or use
the CP.DP format (refer to the IGP Programmer’s
Reference Manual).
(D) The printable character (delimiter) identifying the
start and finish of the data field. Enter any printable
character other than a slash (/), the SFCC, or a
character used within the data. The same character
must be used at both ends of the data field, but it is
not printed with the data.
data field Contains the bar code characters. A null data field
(no characters) is permitted. The data field can
contain any of the characters listed in Table 62
except the SFCC, and the first character and the
last character in the data field must be either A, B,
C, or D. The length of the data field is variable;
however, the maximum length is usually limited to
32 characters to minimize potential reading errors.
PDF Optional parameter to enable printing of the human
readable data field. Enter PDF to print the data
field. If the parameter is not used, the human
readable data will not print. This parameter is not
allowed if a null data field is specified.
LOC Optional parameter to identify the location of the
printable data field. The default value is B, locating
the human readable data below the bar code. A
locates the printable data field above bar code. To
compensate for printing the 0.1-inch high data, the
height of the bar code body is reduced 0.1 inch.
FONT Optional parameter to select the font for the human
readable data field. Enter O to select OCR-A font;
enter X to select OCR-B font; enter N to select 10
cpi; enter P to select 12 cpi; enter Q to select 13
cpi; enter R to select 15 cpi; enter T to select 17 cpi;
enter V to select 20 cpi.
STOP Ends the Bar Code command while the IGP
continues in the Create Form Mode. Enter STOP. If
STOP is not entered, an error message results.

255
Chapter 7 Bar Codes

Table 62. Codabar Character Set

Character Hex Character Hex

0 30 - 2D

1 31 $ 24

2 32 : 3A

3 33 / 2F

4 34 . 2E

5 35 + 2B
6 36 A 41

7 37 B 42

8 38 C 43

9 39 D 44

Codabar Example
~CREATE;TEST;288 (Enter Create Form mode)
BARCODE (Bar code command)
CODABAR;VSCAN;X1;H7;5;20 (Vertical Codabar bar code, MAG 1,
SR 5, SC 20)
*A12345B* (Data Field)
PDF;B;N (Printable data field)
STOP (Ends bar code command)
END (Terminates Create Form mode)
~EXECUTE;TEST

~NORMAL

SC 20

SR 5

256
 Code 39

Code 39
The Code 39 structure is shown in Figure 9 and described below.

OPTIONAL
CHECK DIGIT
x, y
POSITION
UPPER GUARD BAND

QUIET START DATA FIELD STOP QUIET

ZONE CODE CODE ZONE HEIGHT

LOWER GUARD BAND

OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD

Figure 9. Code 39 Structure

Quiet Zone
Both ends of the bar code structure require blank quiet zones. The quiet
zones must be at least 0.25 inches wide and completely blank to ensure
accurate reading of the start/stop codes and to prevent adjacent bar codes
from overlapping. Be sure to provide sufficient space on the form for the quiet
zones.

Start/Stop Codes
The start/stop code is a unique character identifying the leading and trailing
end of the bar code. The start/stop code is automatically produced with each
bar code. The start/stop code structure permits bidirectional bar code
scanning.

Data Field
The bar code symbol uses a series of varying width bars and spaces to
represent standard alphanumeric characters. Each wide or narrow bar or
space is one element; each character in the data field has nine elements. The
structure is three wide elements (bars or spaces) out of the nine total
elements which compose one character.

Readable Data
The optional readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the bar
code data. It can be printed above or below the bar code symbol.

Check Digit
The optional modulo-43 check digit can be inserted into the bar code to verify
accurate scanning.

257
Chapter 7 Bar Codes

Table 63. Code 39 Character Set

ASCII CODE 39 ASCII CODE 39 ASCII CODE 39 ASCII CODE 39

NUL %U SP Space @ %V ` %W
SOH $A ! /A A A a +A
STX $B " /B B B b +B
ETX $C # /C C C c +C
EOT $D $ /D D D d +D
ENQ $E % /E E E e +E
ACK $F & /F F F f +F
BEL $G ' /G G G g +G
BS $H ( /H H H h +H
HT $I ) /I I I i +I
LF $J * /J J J j +J
VT $K + /K K K k +K
FF $L , /L L L l +L
CR $M — — M M m +M
SO $N . . N N n +N
SI $O / /O O O o +O
DLE $P 0 0 P P p +P
DC1 $Q 1 1 Q Q q +Q
DC2 $R 2 2 R R r +R
DC3 $S 3 3 S S s +S
DC4 $T 4 4 T T t +T
NAK $U 5 5 U U u +U
SYN $V 6 6 V V v +V
ETB $W 7 7 W W w +W
CAN $X 8 8 X X x +X
EM $Y 9 9 Y Y y +Y
SUB $Z : /Z Z Z z +Z
ESC %A ; %F [ %K { %P
FS %B < %G \ %L | %Q
GS %C = %H ] %M } %R
RS %D > %I ^ %N ~ %S
US %E ? %J __ %O DEL %T %X
%Y %Z

NOTE: Character pairs /M, /N, and /P through /Y are reserved for future
control character pairs.

258
 Code 93

Code 93
The Code 93 structure is shown in Figure 10 and described on the following
pages.

SR, SC QUIET QUIET

SR, SC
POSITION ZONE POSITION ZONE

STOP START
CODE CODE

OPTIONAL
CHECK
DIGIT
CCW CW

DATA DATA
FIELD OPTIONAL FIELD
READABLE
DATA
FIELD

OPTIONAL
CHECK
DIGIT
START STOP UPPER
UPPER LOWER LOWER
CODE CODE GUARD
GUARD GUARD GUARD
BAND BAND BAND BAND
QUIET QUIET
ZONE ZONE

HEIGHT HEIGHT

OPTIONAL
CHECK DIGIT
SR, SC
POSITION
UPPER GUARD BAND

QUIET START STOP QUIET

Normal ZONE CODE
DATA FIELD
CODE ZONE HEIGHT

LOWER GUARD BAND

OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD

SR, SC
POSITION
OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD

LOWER GUARD BAND

HEIGHT
QUIET STOP START QUIET
INV ZONE CODE
DATA FIELD
CODE ZONE

UPPER GUARD BAND

OPTIONAL
CHECK DIGIT

Figure 10. Code 93 Structure

259
Chapter 7 Bar Codes

Quiet Zone
Both ends of the bar code structure require blank quiet zones. The quiet
zones must be at least 0.25 inches wide and completely blank to ensure
accurate reading of the start/stop codes and to prevent adjacent bar codes
from overlapping. Be sure to provide sufficient space on the form for the quiet
zones.

Start/Stop Codes
The start/stop code is a unique character identifying the leading and trailing
end of the bar code. The start/stop code is automatically produced with each
bar code. The start/stop code structure permits bidirectional bar code
scanning.

Data Field
The bar code symbol uses a series of varying width bars and spaces to
represent an extensive character set. The bars and spaces vary in width from
one through four modules. Each character consists of three bars and three
spaces that total 11 modules.

Readable Data
The optional readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the bar
code data. It can be printed above or below the bar code symbol.

Check Digit
Two modulo-47 check digits are automatically calculated and inserted in the
bar code symbol. The check digit verifies accurate scanning. The start code is
included in the check digit algorithm.

Code 93 Command Format

BARCODE
CODE93; [DIR;] [MAG;] [Hn[.m];] [BFn;L;][DARK;] SR;SC
(D) [data field] (D)
[PDF [;LOC] [;FONT]]
STOP
BARCODE The Bar Code command; enter BARCODE.
CODE93 Designates bar code type Code 93; enter CODE93.
DIR Optional parameter that allows for rotating a
barcode. Enter CW for clockwise rotation. Enter
CCW or VSCAN for counter-clockwise rotation.
Enter INV for inverted rotation. If DIR is not
entered, the barcode is horizontally oriented.
MAG Optional parameter to magnify (horizontally
expand) the bar code symbol. The magnification
default value is X1. Increasing the magnification
adjusts printed character density. You can also use
XR or XRD. (You must specify 8 digits for MAG for
variable ratio.)

260
 Code 93

Hn[.m] Optional parameter to adjust the overall height

(vertical expansion) of the bar code symbol
(including the upper and lower 0.1-inch guard
bands and any human readable data). Height
adjustments are made in 0.1-inch increments; enter
H and a value from 3 through 99 to select height
adjustments from 0.3 through 9.9 inches. The
default value is 0.9 inch.
[.m] is an additional number of dots for the bar code
height. (Dots are in the current dot scale.)
NOTE: If 0.3 inches is the selected height, the PDF cannot be included.
BFn;L Optional parameters for assigning a dynamic bar
code data field location on a form and for
designating the length of the data field. With these
parameters, the actual data for the bar code data
field is dynamically provided during the Execute
Form Mode; the data is not specified during the
Create Form Mode. To use this field, perform the
following steps:
a. Enter BF.
b. Replace n with a number ranging from 0
through 512 to identify the bar code field. The
SR and SC parameters specify the exact
location of the bar code field identified by n.
c. Replace L with a number equaling the total
number of characters in the field. (The actual
data provided dynamically during the Execute
Form Mode can be less than L.)
d. The information for the data field is entered
dynamically during the Execute Form Mode.
(Refer to the IGP Programmer’s Reference
Manual.) Do not use the data field parameter
to enter data when the BFn;L parameters are
used. However, refer to the data field
description for available characters.
DARK Optional parameter to produce darker looking bar
codes. Enter DARK. Refer to the IGP
Programmer’s Reference Manual for more
information.
SR Defines the starting row for the bar code. Enter a
value ranging from row 1 to one less than the
length of the form. Character row or dot row is
specified based on the Scale command (refer to the
IGP Programmer’s Reference Manual), or use the
CP.DP format (refer to the IGP Programmer’s
Reference Manual).

261
Chapter 7 Bar Codes

SC Defines the starting column of the bar code. Enter a

value ranging from column 1 to one less than the
width of the form. Character column or dot column
is specified based on the Scale command (refer to
the IGP Programmer’s Reference Manual), or use
the CP.DP format (refer to the IGP Programmer’s
Reference Manual).
(D) The printable character (delimiter) identifying the
start and finish of the data field. Enter any printable
character other than a slash (/), the SFCC, or a
character used within the data. The same character
must be used at both ends of the data field, but it
will not print with the data.
data field Enter the data for the bar code. A null data field (no
characters) is permitted. The length of the data field
is variable; however, the maximum length is usually
limited to 32 characters to minimize potential
reading errors. The data field can contain any of the
characters listed in Table 64, except the system
SFCC.
PDF Optional parameter to enable printing of the human
readable data field. Enter PDF to print the data
field. If the parameter is not used, the human
readable data will not print. This parameter is not
allowed if a null data field was specified.
LOC Optional parameter to identify the location of the
printable data field. The default value is B, locating
the human readable data below the bar code. A
locates the printable data field above bar code. To
compensate for printing the 0.1-inch high data, the
height of the bar code body is reduced 0.1 inch.
FONT Optional parameter to select the font for the human
readable data field. Enter O to select OCR-A font;
enter X to select OCR-B font; enter N to select 10
cpi; enter P to select 12 cpi; enter Q to select 13
cpi; enter R to select 15 cpi; enter T to select 17 cpi;
enter V to select 20 cpi.
STOP Ends the Bar Code command while the IGP
continues in the Create Form Mode. Enter STOP. If
STOP is not entered, an error message results.

262
 Code 93

Table 64. Code 93 Character Set

Character Hex Character Hex

0 30 P 50
1 31 Q 51
2 32 R 52
3 33 S 53
4 34 T 54
5 35 U 55
6 36 V 56
7 37 W 57
8 38 X 58
9 39 Y 59
A 41 Z 5A
B 42 — 2D
C 43 . 2E
D 44 SPACE 20
E 45 $ 3F
F 46 / 2F
G 47 + 2B
H 48 % 25
I 49 S1 N/A
J 4A S2 N/A
K 4B S3 N/A
L 4C S4 NA
M 4D Start N/A
N 4E Stop N/A
O 4F

263
Chapter 7 Bar Codes

Code 93 Example
The illustration below shows a horizontal Code 93 bar code generated by the
following program:
~CREATE;TEST;288 (Enters Create Form mode)
BARCODE (Bar code command)
CODE93;X1;H7;10;20 (Code 93 bar code, MAG 1,
H 0.7 inches, SR 10, SC 20)
*ABCD5678* (Data Field)
PDF;B;N (Printable data field, 10 cpi font)
STOP (Ends bar code command)
END (Terminates Create Form mode)
~EXECUTE;TEST (Prints form)

~NORMAL

SC 20

SR 10

264
 Code 128

Code 128
The Code 128 structure is shown in Figure 11 and described below.

OPTIONAL
CHECK DIGIT
SR, SC
POSITION
UPPER GUARD BAND

QUIET START DATA FIELD STOP QUIET

ZONE CODE CODE ZONE HEIGHT

LOWER GUARD BAND

OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD

Figure 11. Code 128 Structure

Quiet Zone
Both ends of the bar code structure require blank quiet zones. The quiet
zones must be at least 0.25 inches wide and completely blank to ensure
accurate reading of the start/stop codes and to prevent adjacent bar codes
from overlapping. Be sure to provide sufficient space on the form for the quiet
zones.

Start/Stop Codes
The start/stop codes identify the leading and trailing end of the bar code. Each
of the Code 128 subsets uses a unique start code and a common stop code,
both automatically provided by the ASCII Emulation.

Code 128A Data Field

Subset A operates in the manual mode only. Subset A data characters
include mostly normal printable ASCII characters which require no subset
switching and can be entered directly.

Code 128B Data Field

The bar code symbol uses a series of varying width bars and spaces to
represent an extensive character set (96 ASCII characters and seven control
characters). The bars and spaces vary in width from one through four
modules. Each character consists of three bars and three spaces that total 11
modules.

265
Chapter 7 Bar Codes

Code 128C Data Field

The bar code symbol uses a series of varying width bars and spaces to
represent 100 pairs of numeric digits (00 through 99) and 3 control
characters. The bars and spaces vary in width from 1 through 4 modules.
Each character consists of three bars and three spaces that total 11 modules.

Readable Data
The optional readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the bar
code data. It can be printed above or below the bar code symbol.

Check Digit
The modulo-103 check digit is automatically calculated and inserted in the bar
code symbol. The check digit verifies accurate scanning. The start code is
included in the check digit algorithm.
NOTE: Access for the alternate set of control function characters is by using
SO (Shift Out, hex 0E). The SO control code identifies the next
character as the control function character, and must be inserted
before each alternate character required. The SO character is
selectable from the printer's front panel (refer to your User’s Manual).

266
 Code 128

Table 65. Code 128A Character Set

Character Hex Character Hex Character Hex Character Hex

NUL 00 SUB 1A 4 34 N 4E

SOH 01 ESC 1B 5 35 O 4F

STX 02 FS 1C 6 36 P 50

ETX 03 GS 1D 7 37 Q 51

EOT 04 RS 1E 8 38 R 52

ENQ 05 US 1F 9 39 S 53
ACK 06 SP 20 : 3A T 54

BEL 07 ! 21 ; 3B U 55

BS 08 “ 22 < 3C V 56

HT 09 # 23 = 3D W 57

LF 0A $ 24 > 3E X 58

VT 0B % 25 ? 3F Y 59

FF 0C & 26 @ 40 Z 5A

CR 0D ' 27 A 41 [ 5B

SO 0E ( 28 B 42 \ 5C

SI 0F ) 29 C 43 ] 5D

DLE 10 * 2A D 44 5E

DC1 11 + 2B E 45 ^ 5F

DC2 12 ’ 2C F 46 FNC 3 23 See NOTE

DC3 13 - 2D G 47 FNC 2 22 See NOTE

DC4 14 . 2E H 48 SHIFT 28 See NOTE

NAK 15 / 2F I 49 CODE C 27 See NOTE

SYN 16 0 30 J 4A FUNC 4 24 See NOTE

ETB 17 1 31 K 4B CODE B 26 See NOTE

CAN 18 2 32 L 4C FNC 1 21 See NOTE

EM 19 3 33 M 4D START A (N/A)

STOP (N/A)

267
Chapter 7 Bar Codes

Table 66. Code 128B Character Set

Character Hex Character Hex Character Hex Character Hex

SP 20 : 3A T 54 n 6E

! 21 ; 3B U 55 o 6F
“ 22 < 3C V 56 p 70

# 23 = 3D W 57 q 71

$ 24 > 3E X 58 r 72

% 25 ? 3F Y 59 s 73
& 26 @ 40 Z 5A t 74

' 27 A 41 [ 5B u 75

( 28 B 42 \ 5C v 76

) 29 C 43 ] 5D w 77

* 2A D 44 5E x 78

+ 2B E 45 - 5F y 79

’ 2C F 46 ` 60 z 7A

- 2D G 47 a 61 { 7B

. 2E H 48 b 62 | 7C

/ 2F I 49 c 63 } 7D

0 30 J 4A d 64 ~ 7E

1 31 K 4B e 65 7F
2 32 L 4C f 66 FNC 3 23 See NOTE

3 33 M 4D g 67 FNC 2 22 See NOTE

4 34 N 4E h 68 SHIFT 28 See NOTE

5 35 O 4F i 69 CODE C 27 See NOTE

6 36 P 50 j 6A FUNC 4 24 See NOTE

7 37 Q 51 k 6B CODE A 25 See NOTE

8 38 R 52 l 6C FNC 1 21 See NOTE

9 39 S 53 m 6D START B (N/A)

STOP (N/A)

268
 Code 128

Table 67. Code 128C Character Set

Character Hex Character Hex Character Hex Character Hex

00 30 30 27 32 37 54 35 34 81 38 31

01 30 31 28 32 38 55 35 35 82 38 32

02 30 32 29 32 39 56 35 36 83 38 33

03 30 33 30 33 30 57 35 37 84 38 34

04 30 34 31 33 31 58 35 38 85 38 35

05 30 35 32 33 32 59 35 39 86 38 36

06 30 36 33 33 33 60 36 30 87 38 37

07 30 37 34 33 34 61 36 31 88 38 38

08 30 38 35 33 35 62 36 32 89 38 39

09 30 39 36 33 36 63 36 33 90 39 30

10 31 30 37 33 37 64 36 34 91 39 31

11 31 31 38 33 38 65 36 35 92 39 32

12 31 32 39 33 39 66 36 36 93 39 33

13 31 33 40 34 30 67 36 37 94 39 34

14 31 34 41 34 31 68 36 38 95 39 35

15 31 35 42 34 32 69 36 39 96 39 36

16 31 36 43 34 33 70 37 30 97 39 37

17 31 37 44 34 34 71 37 31 98 39 38

18 31 38 45 34 35 72 37 32 99 39 39

19 31 39 46 34 36 73 37 33 CODE B 26 See NOTE

20 32 30 47 34 37 74 37 34 CODE A 25 See NOTE

21 32 31 48 34 38 75 37 35 FNC 1 21 See NOTE

22 32 32 49 34 39 76 37 36 START C (N/A)
23 32 33 50 35 30 77 37 37 STOP (N/A)

24 32 34 51 35 31 78 37 38

25 32 35 52 35 32 79 37 39

26 32 36 53 35 33 80 38 30

269
Chapter 7 Bar Codes

EAN 8
The EAN 8 bar code structure is shown in Figure 12 and described below.

x, y START CODE CENTER CODE STOP CODE

POSITION

QUIET LEFT DATA RIGHT DATA QUIET

ZONE FIELD FIELD ZONE HEIGHT

OPTIONAL READABLE CHECK DIGIT FIELD

DATA FIELD

Figure 12. EAN 8 Structure

Quiet Zone
Both ends of the bar code structure have blank quiet zones. The quiet zones
must be at least 0.25 inches wide and completely blank to ensure accurate
reading of the start/stop codes and to prevent adjacent bar codes from
overlapping. You must provide sufficient space on the form for the quiet
zones.

Start/Center/Stop Codes
The start/center/stop codes are special character codes marking those
portions of the bar code. These codes are automatically provided.

Data Field
The bar code symbol uses a series of varying width bars and spaces to
represent a limited character set (numbers 0-9 and Special Characters Start,
Center, and Stop). The bars and spaces vary in width from one through four
modules. Each character consists of two bars and two spaces that total seven
modules. The symbol coding of the left data field is different from the right
data field to permit read direction sensing.

Readable Data
The human readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the bar
code data. It can either be suppressed or printed above or below the bar code
symbol.

Check Digit
The modulo-10 check digit is automatically calculated and inserted in the bar
code symbol. The check digit verifies accurate scanning.

270
 EAN 13

EAN 13
The EAN 13 bar code structure is shown in Figure 13 and described below.

x, y START CODE CENTER CODE STOP CODE

POSITION

QUIET LEFT DATA RIGHT DATA QUIET

ZONE FIELD FIELD ZONE HEIGHT

NUMBER
SYSTEM N
CHARACTER

OPTIONAL READABLE CHECK DIGIT FIELD

DATA FIELD

Figure 13. EAN 13 Structure

Quiet Zone
Quiet zones extend on both ends of the bar code to permit the scan to begin
and end in a blank area. You are responsible for providing sufficient space
(minimum of seven modules) on the form for the quiet zones. The number
system character is also printed automatically in the left quiet zone.

Start/Center/Stop Codes
The start/center/stop codes are special character codes marking those
portions of the bar code. These codes are automatically provided.

Number System Character

The number system character field allows you to provide a code to a class or
type of item. The first character in the data field is used as the number system
character.

Data Field
The bar code symbol uses a series of varying width bars and spaces to
represent a limited character set (numbers 0-9 and Special Characters Start,
Center, and Stop). The bars and spaces vary in width from one through four
modules. The symbol coding of the left data field is different from the right
data field to permit read direction sensing.

Readable Data
The human readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the bar
code data. It can be either suppressed or printed above or below the bar code
symbol.

Check Digit
The modulo-10 check digit is automatically calculated and inserted in the bar
code symbol. The check digit verifies accurate scanning. The number system
character is included in the check digit algorithm.

271
Chapter 7 Bar Codes

FIM
The FIM (Facing Identification Mark) bar code structure is shown below and
described on the following pages. The left boundary must begin 3 inches from
the right edge of the mail piece. The right-most bar must be 2 inches + 1/8-
inch from the right edge of the mail piece. Bars are 5/8-inch + 1/8-inch tall; the
top of the bars must be no lower than 1/8-inch from the top edge of the mail
piece (and may touch the top edge of the mail piece). The bar code baseline
must be within 1/8-inch from the bottom edge of the quiet zone.

xxxx,yyyy 3"
NOTE: Illustration is not to scale 2"- 1-7/8"
1-1/4" 1-3/4"

1/8"
Return Address Area
5/8" Quiet
Zone

(Optional Line) NON-ADDRESS DATA

(Top Line) NAME OF RECIPIENT
(Optional Line) INFORMATION/ATTENTION LINE
(Line Above Last) DELIVERY ADDRESS
(Last Line) POST OFFICE STATE ZIP

Figure 14. FIM Structure

NOTE: Additional information regarding FIM bar code requirements can be
obtained from the U.S. Postal Service's Publication 25: A Guide to
Business Mail Preparation.

Quiet Zone
The bar code structure requires a completely blank, 1/4-inch wide, 5/8-inch
tall quiet zone, reserved for only the appropriate FIM pattern. You must
provide sufficient space for this zone.

272
 FIM

Start/Stop Code
The start/stop code is a unique character identifying the leading and trailing
end of the bar code. The start/stop code is automatically produced with each
bar code. The start/stop code structure permits bidirectional bar code
scanning.

Data Field
The bar code symbol uses a nine-position bar/no-bar pattern of tall (full) bars
of uniform height. Use the letters “A,” “B,” “C,” or “D” to specify the type of
FIM.
Figure 15 illustrates how to generate a horizontal FIMC bar code and a
POSTNET bar code.
ESC | };cF; xCx;N0;0065;0001;H01
ESC | };cP; x481701892x;N0;0050;0020;H09

y = 0001

x = 0065

ACME MOTOR COMPANY

17500 Cartwright Road
Irvine, CA 92623

y = 0020

x = 0050

NOTE: Illustration not to scale.

Figure 15. Sample FIMC Bar Code

273
Chapter 7 Bar Codes

Interleaved 2/5 (I-2/5), German I-2/5, and ITF-14

The structure for the I-2/5, German I-2/5 and ITF-14 bar codes is shown in
Figure 16 and described on the following pages.

SR, SC QUIET QUIET

SR, SC
POSITION ZONE POSITION ZONE

STOP START
CODE CODE

OPTIONAL
CHECK
DIGIT
CCW CW

DATA DATA
FIELD OPTIONAL FIELD
READABLE
DATA
FIELD

OPTIONAL
CHECK
DIGIT
START STOP UPPER
UPPER LOWER LOWER
CODE CODE GUARD
GUARD GUARD GUARD
BAND BAND BAND BAND
QUIET QUIET
ZONE ZONE

HEIGHT HEIGHT

OPTIONAL
CHECK DIGIT
SR, SC
POSITION
UPPER GUARD BAND

QUIET START STOP QUIET

Normal ZONE CODE
DATA FIELD
CODE ZONE HEIGHT

LOWER GUARD BAND

OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD

SR, SC
POSITION
OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD

LOWER GUARD BAND

HEIGHT
QUIET STOP START QUIET
INV ZONE CODE
DATA FIELD
CODE ZONE

UPPER GUARD BAND

OPTIONAL
CHECK DIGIT

Figure 16. I-2/5, German I-2/5 and ITF-14 Structure

274
 Interleaved 2/5 (I-2/5), German I-2/5, and ITF-14

Quiet Zone
Both ends of the bar code structure have blank quiet zones. The quiet zones
must be at least 0.25 inches wide and completely blank to ensure accurate
reading of the start/stop codes and to prevent adjacent bar codes from
overlapping. You must provide sufficient space on the form for the quiet
zones.

Start/Stop Codes
Unique start and stop codes permit bidirectional scanning. Both start and stop
codes contain bars and spaces. They are automatically produced.

Data Field
The bar code symbol uses a series of wide and narrow bars and spaces to
represent numeric characters. The structure is 2 wide elements (bars or
spaces) and 3 narrow elements. In the bar code, two characters are
interleaved (paired); bars are used to represent the first character in the pair
and spaces are used to represent the second character in the pair.
German I-2/5 and ITF-14 are special cases of Interleaved 2/5 bar codes.
While Interleaved 2/5 has a variable data field, German I-2/5 is restricted to 11
or 13 digits, and ITF-14 is restricted to 13 digits.

Readable Data
The optional readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the bar
code data. It can be printed above or below the bar code symbol.

Check Digit
The modulo-10 check digit can be inserted into the bar code to verify accurate
scanning.
Interleaved 2/5 can be printed with or without a check digit, but German I-2/5
and ITF-14 have the check digit automatically included.

I-2/5, German I-2/5, and ITF-14 Command Format

BARCODE
I-2/5 [CD]; or
I25GERMAN; or
ITF14; [DIR;] [MAG;] [Hn[.m];] [BFn;L;] [DARK;] SR; SC
(D)data field(D)
[PDF [;LOC] [;FONT]]
STOP
BARCODE The Bar Code command; enter BARCODE.
I-2/5 CD Designates bar code type Interleaved 2/5; enter
I-2/5. To calculate and plot the optional modulo-10
check digit with the bar code symbol automatically,
enter CD.

275
Chapter 7 Bar Codes

I25GERMAN Designates German Interleaved 2/5; enter

I25GERMAN. The mod-10 check digit is
automatically included.
ITF14 Designates ITF-14; enter ITF14. The mod-10 check
digit is automatically included.
DIR Optional parameter that allows for rotating a
barcode. Enter CW for clockwise rotation. Enter
CCW or VSCAN for counter-clockwise rotation.
Enter INV for inverted rotation. If DIR is not
entered, the barcode is horizontally oriented.
MAG Optional parameter to magnify (horizontally
expand) the bar code symbol. The magnification
default value is X1. As required for scanning, enter
a magnification value to increase the magnification.
Increasing the magnification adjusts printed
character density. You can also use XR or XRD.
Hn[.m] Optional parameter to adjust the overall height
(vertical expansion) of the bar code symbol
(including the upper and lower 0.1-inch guard
bands and any human readable data). Height
adjustments are made in 0.1-inch increments; enter
H and a value from 3 through 99 to select height
adjustments from 0.3 through 9.9 inches. The
default value is 0.9-inch.
[.m] is an additional number of dots for the bar code
height. (Dots are in the current dot scale.)
NOTE: If 0.3 inches is the selected height, the PDF cannot be included.

276
 Interleaved 2/5 (I-2/5), German I-2/5, and ITF-14

BFn;L Optional parameters for assigning a dynamic bar

code data field location on a form and for
designating the length of the data field. With these
parameters, the actual data for the bar code data
field is dynamically provided during the Execute
Form Mode; the data is not specified during the
Create Form Mode. To use this field, perform the
following steps:
a. Enter BF.
b. Replace n with a number ranging from 0
through 512 to identify the bar code field. The
SR and SC parameters specify the exact
location of the bar code field identified by n.
c. Replace L with a number equaling the total
number of characters in the field. (The actual
data provided dynamically during the Execute
Form Mode can be less than L.)
d. The information for the data field is entered
dynamically during the Execute Form Mode.
(Refer to the IGP Programmer’s Reference
Manual.) Do not use the data field parameter
to enter data when the BFn;L parameters are
used. However, refer to the data field
description for available characters.
DARK Optional parameter to produce darker looking bar
codes. Enter DARK. Refer to the IGP
Programmer’s Reference Manual for more
information.
SR Defines the starting row for the bar code. Enter a
value ranging from row 1 to one less than the
length of the form. Character row or dot row is
specified based on the Scale command (refer to the
IGP Programmer’s Reference Manual), or use the
CP.DP format (refer to the IGP Programmer’s
Reference Manual).
SC Defines the starting column of the bar code. Enter a
value ranging from column 1 to one less than the
width of the form. Character column or dot column
is specified based on the Scale command (refer to
the IGP Programmer’s Reference Manual), or use
the CP.DP format (refer to the IGP Programmer’s
Reference Manual).
(D) The printable character (delimiter) identifying the
start and finish of the data field. Enter any printable
character other than a slash (/), the SFCC, or a
character used within the data. The same character
must be used at both ends of the data field, but it
will not print with the data.

277
Chapter 7 Bar Codes

data field Interleaved 2/5: Enter the characters for the bar
code data. A null data field (no characters) is
permitted. The length of the data field is variable;
however, the maximum length is usually limited to
32 characters to minimize potential reading errors.
An even number of characters are required for the
interleaving process. Consequently, if an odd
number of characters are entered in the data field,
a leading zero is added automatically. The
characters available for the data field are 0 through
9 (hex 30 through 39).
German I-2/5: The data field must be 11 or 13
digits exactly.
ITF-14: The data field must be 13 digits exactly.
PDF Optional parameter to enable printing of the human
readable data field. Enter PDF to print the data
field. If the parameter is not used, the human
readable data is not printed. This parameter is not
allowed if a null data field was specified. For
German I-2/5, fields of the data are separated by
dots and spaces.
LOC Optional parameter to identify the location of the
printable data field. The default value is B, locating
the human readable data below the bar code. A
locates the printable data field above bar code. To
compensate for printing the 0.1-inch high data, the
height of the bar code body is reduced 0.1-inch.
FONT Optional parameter to select the font for the human
readable data field. Enter O to select OCR-A font;
enter X to select OCR-B font; enter N to select 10
cpi; enter P to select 12 cpi; enter Q to select 13
cpi; enter R to select 15 cpi; enter T to select 17 cpi;
enter V to select 20 cpi.
STOP Ends the Bar Code command while the IGP
continues in the Create Form Mode. Enter STOP. If
STOP is not entered, an error message results.

278
 Interleaved 2/5 (I-2/5), German I-2/5, and ITF-14

I-2/5 Example
Figure 17 illustrates a horizontal and vertical I-2/5 bar code generated by the
following program:
~CREATE;I25 (Enter Create Form Mode)
BARCODE (Bar Code command)
I-2/5;DARK;49;27 (Dark Code I-2/5, at SR 49, SC 27)
*24688642* (Data Field)
PDF;A (Upper Printable Data Field)
STOP (Ends Bar Code command)
BARCODE (New Bar Code command)
I-2/5;VSCAN;H12;DARK;44;52
(Vertical Dark I-2/5, H 1.2 at
SR 44, SC 52)
*24688642* (Data Field)
PDF (Printable Data Field)
STOP (Ends Bar Code command)
END (Terminates Create Form Mode)
~EXECUTE;I25;1 (Execute the form, form count of 1)

~NORMAL

SC 52

SR 44

SC 27

SR 49

Figure 17. Sample I-2/5 Bar Codes

279
Chapter 7 Bar Codes

Interleaved 2/5 (I-2/5)

The I-2/5 bar code structure is shown in Figure 18 and described below.
OPTIONAL
CHECK DIGIT
x, y
POSITION
UPPER GUARD BAND

QUIET START DATA FIELD STOP QUIET

ZONE CODE CODE ZONE HEIGHT

LOWER GUARD BAND

OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD

Figure 18. I-2/5 Structure

Quiet Zone
Both ends of the bar code structure have blank quiet zones. The quiet zones
must be at least 0.25 inches wide and completely blank to ensure accurate
reading of the start/stop codes and to prevent adjacent bar codes from
overlapping. You must provide sufficient space on the form for the quiet
zones.

Start/Stop Codes
Unique start and stop codes permit bidirectional scanning. Both start and stop
codes contain bars and spaces. They are automatically produced.

Data Field
The bar code symbol uses a series of wide and narrow bars and spaces to
represent numeric characters. The structure is 2 wide elements (bars or
spaces) and 3 narrow elements. In the bar code, two characters are
interleaved (paired); bars are used to represent the first character in the pair
and spaces are used to represent the second character in the pair.

Readable Data
The optional readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the bar
code data. It can be printed above or below the bar code symbol.

Check Digit
The modulo-10 check digit can be inserted into the bar code to verify accurate
scanning.

280
 MSI

MSI
The MSI bar code structure is shown in Figure 19 and described on the
following pages.

SR, SC QUIET QUIET

SR, SC
POSITION ZONE POSITION ZONE

STOP START
CODE CODE

OPTIONAL
CHECK
DIGIT
CCW CW

DATA DATA
FIELD OPTIONAL FIELD
READABLE
DATA
FIELD

OPTIONAL
CHECK
DIGIT
START STOP UPPER
UPPER LOWER LOWER
CODE CODE GUARD
GUARD GUARD GUARD
BAND BAND BAND BAND
QUIET QUIET
ZONE ZONE

HEIGHT HEIGHT

OPTIONAL
CHECK DIGIT
SR, SC
POSITION
UPPER GUARD BAND

QUIET START STOP QUIET

Normal ZONE CODE
DATA FIELD
CODE ZONE HEIGHT

LOWER GUARD BAND

OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD

SR, SC
POSITION
OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD

LOWER GUARD BAND

HEIGHT
QUIET STOP START QUIET
INV ZONE CODE
DATA FIELD
CODE ZONE

UPPER GUARD BAND

OPTIONAL
CHECK DIGIT

Figure 19. MSI Structure

281
Chapter 7 Bar Codes

Quiet Zone
Both ends of the bar code structure require blank quiet zones. The quiet
zones must be at least 0.25-inches wide and completely blank to ensure
accurate reading of the start/stop codes and to prevent adjacent bar codes
from overlapping. You must provide sufficient space on the form for the quiet
zones.

Start/Stop Code
Unique start and stop codes permit bidirectional scanning. Both start and stop
codes contain bars and spaces. They are automatically produced.

Data Field
The bar code symbol uses a series of wide and narrow bars and spaces to
represent each numeric character. The structure is four wide elements (bars
or spaces) and four narrow elements. Each character contains four data bits,
with each 0-bit made up of a narrow bar/wide space arrangement and each 1-
bit made up of a wide bar/narrow space arrangement.

Readable Data
The optional readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the bar
code data. It can be printed above or below the bar code symbol.

Check Digit
If specified, the modulo-10 or modulo-11 (or both) check digit is automatically
calculated and inserted in the bar code symbol. The check digit verifies
accurate scanning.

MSI Command Format

BARCODE
MSI n; [DIR;] [MAG;] [Hn[.m];] [BFn;L;] [DARK;] SR; SC
(D) [data field] (D)
[PDF [;LOC] [;FONT]]
STOP
BARCODE The Bar Code command; enter BARCODE.
MSI Designates bar code type MSI; enter MSI.
n Designates the type of check digit combinations for
the bar code. Replace n with one of the following
codes to specify the check digit.
A single-digit modulo-10 followed by a second
modulo-10 digit
B single-digit modulo-11 followed by a single
modulo-10 digit
C single-digit modulo-10
D single-digit modulo-11

282
 MSI

DIR Optional parameter that allows for rotating a

barcode. Enter CW for clockwise rotation. Enter
CCW or VSCAN for counter-clockwise rotation.
Enter INV for inverted rotation. If DIR is not
entered, the barcode is horizontally oriented.
MAG Optional parameter to magnify (horizontally
expand) the bar code symbol. The magnification
default value is X1. As required for scanning, enter
a magnification value to increase the magnification.
Increasing the magnification adjusts printed
character density. You can also use XR or XRD.
Hn[.m] Optional parameter to adjust the overall height
(vertical expansion) of the bar code symbol
(including the upper and lower 0.1-inch guard
bands and any human readable data). Height
adjustments are made in 0.1-inch increments; enter
H and a value from 3 through 99 to select height
adjustments from 0.3 through 9.9 inches. The
default value is 0.9-inch.
[.m] is an additional number of dots for the bar code
height. (Dots are in the current dot scale.)
NOTE: If 0.3 inches is the selected height, the PDF cannot be included.
BFn;L Optional parameters for assigning a dynamic bar
code data field location on a form and for
designating the length of the data field. With these
parameters, the actual data for the bar code data
field is dynamically provided during the Execute
Form Mode; the data is not specified during the
Create Form Mode. To use this field:
a. Enter BF.
b. Replace n with a number ranging from 0
through 512 to identify the bar code field. The
SR and SC parameters specify the exact
location of the bar code field identified by n.
c. Replace L with a number equaling the total
number of characters in the field. (The actual
data provided dynamically during the Execute
Form Mode can be less than L.)
d. The information for the data field is entered
dynamically during the Execute Form Mode.
(Refer to the IGP Programmer’s Reference
Manual.) Do not use the data field parameter
to enter data when the BFn;L parameters are
used. However, refer to the data field
description for available characters.
DARK Optional parameter to produce darker looking bar
codes. Enter DARK. Refer to refer to the IGP
Programmer’s Reference Manual for more
information.

283
Chapter 7 Bar Codes

SR Defines the starting row for the bar code. Enter a

value ranging from row 1 to one less than the
length of the form. Character row or dot row is
specified based on the Scale command (refer to the
IGP Programmer’s Reference Manual), or use the
CP.DP format (refer to the IGP Programmer’s
Reference Manual).
SC Defines the starting column of the bar code. Enter a
value ranging from column 1 to one less than the
width of the form. Character column or dot column
is specified based on the Scale command (refer to
the IGP Programmer’s Reference Manual), or use
the CP.DP format (refer to the IGP Programmer’s
Reference Manual).
(D) The printable character (delimiter) identifying the
start and finish of the data field. Enter any printable
character other than a slash (/), the SFCC, or a
character used within the data. The same character
must be used at both ends of the data field, but it
will not print with the data.
data field Enter the characters for the bar code data. A null
data field (no characters) is permitted. The length of
the data field is variable; however, a maximum of
14 data characters are allowed if a one-character
check digit field is specified; a maximum of 13 data
characters are allowed if a two-character check
digit field is specified. The characters available for
the data field are 0 through 9 (hex 30 through 39).
PDF Optional parameter to enable printing of the human
readable data field. Enter PDF to print the data
field. If the parameter is not used, the human
readable data will not print.
LOC Optional parameter to identify the location of the
printable data field. The default value is B, locating
the human readable data below the bar code. A
locates the printable data field above the bar code.
To compensate for printing the 0.1-inch high data,
the height of the bar code body is reduced 0.1-inch.
FONT Optional parameter to select the font for the human
readable data field. Enter O to select OCR-A font;
enter X to select OCR-B font; enter N to select 10
cpi; enter P to select 12 cpi; enter Q to select 13
cpi; enter R to select 15 cpi; enter T to select 17 cpi;
enter V to select 20 cpi.
STOP Ends the Bar Code command while the IGP
continues in the Create Form Mode. Enter STOP. If
STOP is not entered, an error message results.

284
 MSI

MSI Example
Figure 20 illustrates a horizontal and vertical MSI bar code generated by the
following program:
~CREATE;MSI (Enter Create Form Mode)
BARCODE (Bar Code command)
MSIA;DARK;32;27 (Dark Bar Code MSIA at SR 32, SC 27)
*24688642* (Data Field)
PDF;X (Printable Data Field, OCR-B)
STOP (Ends Bar Code command)
BARCODE (New Bar Code command)
MSIB;VSCAN;X2;H12;DARK;32;54
(Vertical Dark MSIB, Mag 2, H 1.2 at
SR 32, SC 54)
*24688642* (Data Field)
PDF;A (Upper Data Field)
STOP (Ends Bar Code command)
END (Terminates Create Form Mode)
~EXECUTE;MSI;1 (Execute the form, form count of 1)

~NORMAL

SC 27 SC 54

SR 32 SR 32

Figure 20. Sample MSI Bar Codes

285
Chapter 7 Bar Codes

PDF417
The PDF417 structure is shown in Figure 21 and described on the following
pages.

QUIET QUIET
SR, SC ZONE SR, SC ZONE
POSITION POSITION
STOP START
CODE CODE

CCW CW
DATA DATA
FIELD FIELD

UPPER START LOWER LOWER STOP UPPER

GUARD CODE GUARD GUARD CODE GUARD
BAND BAND BAND BAND
QUIET QUIET
ZONE ZONE

SR, SC
POSITION UPPER GUARD BAND

QUIET START DATA FIELD STOP QUIET

Normal ZONE CODE CODE ZONE

LOWER GUARD BAND

SR, SC
POSITION LOWER GUARD BAND

INV QUIET
ZONE
STOP
CODE
START
CODE
QUIET
ZONE

UPPER GUARD BAND

Figure 21. PDF417 Structure

286
 PDF417

Quiet Zone
Both ends of the bar code structure require blank quiet zones. The quiet
zones must be at least 0.25 inches wide and completely blank to ensure
accurate reading of the start/stop codes and to prevent adjacent bar codes
from overlapping. Be sure to provide sufficient space on the form for the quiet
zones.

Start/Stop Codes
The start/stop codes identify the leading and trailing end of the bar code.

Data Field
PDF417 provides twelve modes to encode data. The first three are pre-
established (the remaining nine are user modes, which can be defined by
users or industry associations according to specific applications):
1. Extended Alphanumeric Compaction mode (EXC). Comprised of four
sub-modes, this mode offers encodation of all printable ASCII characters.
This is the default mode; the IGP uses shift or latch characters to enable
other modes.
2. Binary/ASCII Plus mode. This offers encodation for all ASCII characters,
printable or not, and binary values.
3. Numeric Compaction mode. This offers encodation for numeric values to
a density of almost 3 digits per code word.
4. The IGP will automatically switch between modes to provide the smallest
encodation for the data.

Security Level
PDF417 can detect and correct errors. Each label has 2 code words of error
detection. You can select the error correction capacity based on application
needs. Specify a security level in the range of 0 - 8, at the time of printing.
PDF417 can also recover from omissions and misdecodes of code words.
Since it requires two code words to recover from a misdecode, one to detect
the error and one to correct for it, a given security level can support half the
number of misdecodes that it can of undecoded words.

PDF
Print Data Field is not offered due to the large amount of data that can be
encoded.

287
Chapter 7 Bar Codes

PDF417 Command Format

BARCODE
PDF417; [DIR;] [X[D]n;] [Y[D]n;] [(Hn)| (Wn);] [ASPECT;h:w;]
[(Rn)| (Cn);] [Sn;][BFn;L;] [DARK;] SR; SC
(D)data field(D)
STOP
BARCODE The Bar Code command; enter BARCODE.
PDF417 Designates bar code type PDF417; enter PDF417.
DIR Optional parameter that allows for rotating a
barcode. Enter CW for clockwise rotation. Enter
CCW or VSCAN for counter-clockwise rotation.
Enter INV for inverted rotation. If DIR is not
entered, the barcode is horizontally oriented.
X[D]n Optional parameter to designate the width of the
narrow element in either the default 60 X 72 dots
per inch or, if the D is given, in target dots. The
default size is 1/60th of an inch.
Y[D]n Optional parameter to designate the height of the
bar code in either the default 60 X 72 dots per inch
or, if the D is given, in target dots. The default size
is 2/72nd of an inch.
Hn Optional parameter to adjust the overall height of
the bar code symbol (including human readable
data). Height adjustments are made in 0.1-inch
increments; enter H and a value from 4 through 99
to select height adjustments from 0.4 through 9.9
inches. Parameters Wn, Rn, Cn or ASPECT cannot
be entered if this parameter is used.
Wn Optional parameter to adjust the maximum width of
the symbol based on the narrow element width.
Enter Wn; where n is the overall width in tenths of
an inch. Parameters Hn, Rn, Cn or ASPECT cannot
be entered if this parameter is used.
ASPECT;h:w Optional parameter for specifying the symbol
height-to-width ratio where h is the height and w is
the width, both expressed as integers. The default
is 1:2. Parameters Hn, Wn, Rn, or Cn cannot be
entered if this parameter is used.
Rn Optional parameter that specifies the number of
rows the symbol will have. Enter R followed by the
number of rows in the range of 3 through 90 in
multiples of 3. Parameters Hn, Wn, Cn or ASPECT
cannot be entered if this parameter is used.
Cn Optional parameter that specifies the number of
columns the symbol will have. Enter C followed by
the number of columns in the range of 1 through
90. Parameters Hn, Wn, Rn or ASPECT cannot be
entered if this parameter is used.

288
 PDF417

Sn Optional parameter that specifies the security level.

Enter S followed by the security level in the range
of 0 through 8. The default is 2.
BFn;L Optional parameters for assigning a dynamic bar
code data field location on a form and for
designating the length of the data field. With these
parameters, the actual data for the bar code data
field is dynamically provided during the Execute
Form Mode; the data is not specified during the
Create Form Mode. To use this field, perform the
following steps:
a. Enter BF.
b. Replace n with a number ranging from 0
through 512 to identify the bar code field. The
SR and SC parameters specify the exact
location of the bar code field identified by n.
c. Replace L with a number equaling the total
number of characters in the field. (The actual
data provided dynamically during the Execute
Form Mode can be less than L.)
d. The information for the data field is entered
dynamically during the Execute Form Mode.
(Refer to the IGP Programmer’s Reference
Manual.) Do not use the data field parameter
to enter data when the BFn;L parameters are
used. However, refer to the data field
description for available characters.
DARK Optional parameter to produce darker looking bar
codes. Enter DARK. Refer to the IGP
Programmer’s Reference Manual for more
information.
SR Defines the starting row for the bar code. Enter a
value ranging from row 1 to one less than the
length of the form. Character row or dot row is
specified based on the Scale command (refer to the
IGP Programmer’s Reference Manual), or use the
CP.DP format (refer to the IGP Programmer’s
Reference Manual).
SC Defines the starting column of the bar code. Enter a
value ranging from column 1 to one less than the
width of the form. Character column or dot column
is specified based on the Scale command (refer to
the IGP Programmer’s Reference Manual), or use
the CP.DP format (refer to the IGP Programmer’s
Reference Manual).

289
Chapter 7 Bar Codes

(D) The printable character (delimiter) identifying the

start and finish of the data field. Enter any printable
character other than a slash (/), the SFCC, or a
character used within the data. The same character
must be used at both ends of the data field, but it
will not print with the data.

290
 PDF417

data field Enter the data for the bar code. A null data field (no
characters) is not permitted. The data field can
contain any character including carriage returns
and line feeds. The length of the data field is
variable; however, the maximum length is usually
limited to 1024 bytes to minimize potential reading
errors.
NOTE: New lines (i.e. carriage returns/line feeds) are allowed in the PDF417
data field and as PDF417 dynamic data field input.
STOP Ends the Bar Code command while the IGP
continues in the Create Form Mode. Enter STOP. If
STOP is not entered, an error message results.

PDF417 Example
Figure 22 illustrates a horizontal PDF417 bar code generated by the following
program:
~CREATE;PDF417 (Enter Create Form Mode)
BARCODE (Bar Code command)
PDF417;XD3;YD9;S0;37;21 (PDF417; width; height, security
level, SR 37, SC 21)
*ACME MOTOR SUPPORTS PRINTING OF PDF417 TWO-DIMENSIONAL BAR
CODE SYMBOLOGY 123456789012345678901234567890123456789*
STOP (Ends Bar Code command)
END (Terminate Create Form Mode)
~EXECUTE;PDF;1 (Execute the form)

~NORMAL

SC 21

SR 37

Figure 22. Sample PDF417 Bar Code

291
Chapter 7 Bar Codes

PostBar and Royal Mail (KIX)

PostBar and Royal Mail bar codes, like POSTNET, are used for mailing
applications. However, these bar codes can encode full addresses on labels.
These bar codes are similar to POSTNET in terms of bar space and width, but
have four different types of bars (Full Height, Ascender, Descender, and
Tracker), whereas POSTNET only has two bar types (Tall and Short).
The Royal Mail symbology converts alphanumeric characters into patterns of
four bars, using combinations of Full Height, Ascender, Descender, and
Trackers. It also adds start and stop bar codes as well as a check digit, except
with the KIX format (see below).
PostBar allows you complete flexibility to specify the individual bar types that
comprise the bar code. For PostBar, you are responsible for encoding the
address, adding the start and stop codes, and supplying the appropriate
check digit.

Quiet Zone
The bar code structure requires a completely blank quiet zone which is a 2mm
border on each side of the bar code.

Start/Stop Code
The start and stop bars identify the orientation of the bar code.

Data Field
For PostBar, a variable length data field of digits “0” through “3” are allowed to
represent the bars: Full Height (0), Ascender (1), Descender (2), and Tracker
(3). For Royal Mail, the data is restricted to alphanumeric characters “A”
through “Z” and “0” through “9”. If using the KIX format for Royal Mail,
lowercase characters “a” through “z” are also valid.
Each bar width is equal, and must be .020-inch ± .005-inch. Horizontal
spacing between bars (pitch) must be 22 bars ± 2 bars per inch over any 0.50-
inch portion of the bar code. The height of the bars (Full Height) has a
maximum of 0.230 inches and a minimum of 0.165 inches.

Check Digit
For PostBar, you are responsible for encoding and check digit. For Royal
Mail, a modulo-6 check digit is inserted at the end of the data field.

KIX Format
The KIX format for Royal Mail does not include the start/stop code or the
check digit.

292
 PostBar and Royal Mail (KIX)

PostBar And Royal Mail Command Format

BARCODE
POSTBAR or ROYALBAR; [KIX;][MAG;][BFn;L;][DARK;] SR; SC
(D)data field(D)
STOP
BARCODE The Bar Code command; enter BARCODE.
POSTBAR or ROYALBAR
Designates bar code type PostBar or Royal Mail;
enter POSTBAR or ROYALBAR.
KIX Optional parameter to specify the KIX format for
Royal Mail bar codes only; enter KIX.
MAG Optional parameter to magnify (horizontally
expand) the bar code symbol. The magnification
default value is X1. As required for scanning, enter
a magnification value to increase the magnification.
Increasing the magnification adjusts printed
character density. X1A uses shorter bars to reach
the minimum height specification that allows it to fit
on a 6 LPI line.
BFn;L Optional parameters for assigning a dynamic bar
code data field location on a form and for
designating the length of the data field. With these
parameters, the actual data for the bar code data
field is provided dynamically during the Execute
Form mode; the data is not specified during the
Create Form mode. To use this field, perform the
following steps:
a. Enter BF.
b. Replace n with a number ranging from 0
through 512 to identify the bar code field. The
SR and SC parameters specify the exact
location of the bar code field identified by n.
c. Replace L with a number equaling the total
number of characters in the field. (The actual
data provided dynamically during the Execute
Form Mode can be less than L.)
d. The information for the data field is entered
dynamically during the Execute Form mode.
(Refer to the IGP Programmer’s Reference
Manual.) Do not use the data field parameter
to enter data when the BFn;L parameters are
used. However, refer to the data field
description for available characters.
DARK Optional parameter to produce darker looking bar
codes. Enter DARK. Refer to refer to the IGP
Programmer’s Reference Manual for more
information.

293
Chapter 7 Bar Codes

SR Defines the starting row for the bar code. Character

row or dot row is specified based on the Scale
command (refer to the IGP Programmer’s
Reference Manual), or use the CP.DP format (refer
to the IGP Programmer’s Reference Manual).
SC Defines the starting column of the bar code.
Character column or dot column is specified based
on the Scale command (refer to the IGP
Programmer’s Reference Manual), or use the
CP.DP format (refer to the IGP Programmer’s
Reference Manual).
(D) The printable character (delimiter) identifying the
start and finish of the data field. Enter any printable
character other than a slash (/) the SFCC, or a
character used within the data. The same character
must be used at both ends of the data field but it will
not print with the data.
data field The bar code data. For PostBar, enter values 0
through 3 to represent the four different types of
bars. For Royal Mail, enter alphanumeric data (A
through Z and 0 through 9). If using the KIX format
for Royal Mail, lowercase characters a through z
are also valid.
STOP Ends the Bar Code command while the IGP
continues in the Create Form Mode. Enter STOP. If
STOP is not entered, an error message will result.

PostBar and Royal Mail Examples

Figure 23 illustrates a horizontal Royal Mail bar code generated by the
following program:
~CREATE;ROYALBAR (Enter Create Form Mode)
BARCODE (Bar Code command)
ROYALBAR;X1A;10;40 (Royal Mail bar code at SR 10, SC 40
with MAG 1A)
*SN34RD1A* (Data Field)
STOP (Ends Bar Code command)
END (Terminates Create Form Mode)
~EXECUTE;ROYALBAR;1 (Execute the form, with form count of 1)
~NORMAL

SC 40

SR 10

Figure 23. Sample Royal Mail bar code (X1A Magnification)

294
 PostBar and Royal Mail (KIX)

Figure 24 illustrates a horizontal PostBar bar code generated by the following

program:
~CREATE;POSTBAR (Enter Create Form Mode)
BARCODE (Bar Code command)
POSTBAR;10;40 (PostBar bar code at SR 10, SC 40
with default MAG 1)
*10303023123102301031230123210212112210* (Data Field)
STOP (Ends Bar Code command)
END (Terminates Create Form Mode)
~EXECUTE;POSTBAR;1 (Execute the form, with form count of 1)
~NORMAL

SC 40

SR 10

Figure 24. Sample PostBar bar code (X1 Magnification)

295
Chapter 7 Bar Codes

POSTNET
The POSTNET bar code structure is illustrated in Figure 25 and described on
the following pages. The POSTNET code can be a part of the address block
and appear anywhere within a vertical 4-inch area across the length of the
mail piece.

Return Address Area Postage Area

ADDRESS BLOCK BAR CODE READ AREA

1/2" 1/2"
4"

SR, SC
POSITION

QUIET ZONE

QUIET START STOP QUIET

ZONE BAR CODE DATA FIELD ZONE
CODE CODE

QUIET ZONE

CHECK DIGIT

NOTE: Illustration is not to scale

Figure 25. POSTNET Structure

NOTE: Additional information regarding POSTNET bar code requirements
can be obtained from the U.S. Postal Service's Publication 25: A
Guide to Business Mail Preparation.

Quiet Zone
The bar code structure requires a completely blank quiet zone which extends
4.75 inches from the right edge of the mail piece. In addition, a minimum quiet
zone of 0.040-inch above and below the bar code data must also be provided.
You must provide sufficient space for this zone.

296
 POSTNET

Start/Stop Code
The start and stop codes are referred to as “framing bars” in POSTNET. The
start and stop codes are each one tall bar, one identifying the leading and
trailing end of the bar code. The start/stop code is automatically produced
with each bar code. The start/stop code structure permits bar code scanning
in a left-to-right direction only.

Data Field
The bar code data produces a single field of 30 bars for a 5-digit field, 50 bars
for a 9-digit data field, or 60 bars for an 11-digit data field. The bars are
grouped in sets of five. Each set of five bars (comprised of two tall bars and
three short bars) represents one of the five digits of the zip code, plus the
four-digit zip code extension. If the Advanced Bar Code is used, an additional
two-digit code is also added to make an 11-digit data field.

Check Digit
The sixth, tenth or twelfth digit represents the automatic check digit character
for the 5, 9 or 11-digit data field, respectively. The check digit is added
automatically to verify accurate scanning.

297
Chapter 7 Bar Codes

Royal Mail
The Royal Mail bar code structure is shown in Figure 26 and described below.

SR, SC
POSITION

QUIET ZONE

QUIET START STOP QUIET

ZONE BAR CODE DATA FIELD ZONE
CODE CODE

QUIET ZONE

CHECK DIGIT

Figure 26. Royal Mail Structure

Royal Mail bar codes, like POSTNET, are used for mailing applications.
However, these bar codes can encode full addresses on labels. These bar
codes are similar to POSTNET in terms of bar space and width, but have four
different types of bars (Full Height, Ascender, Descender, and Tracker),
whereas POSTNET only has two bar types (Tall and Short).
The Royal Mail symbology converts alphanumeric characters into patterns of
four bars, using combinations Full Height, Ascender, Descender, and
Trackers. It also adds start and stop bar codes as well as a check digit when
this option is activated. This bar code does not have a human-readable field,
and dark printing is not allowed.

Quiet Zone
The bar code structure requires a completely blank quiet zone which is a 2mm
border on each side of the bar code.

Start/Stop Code
The start and stop bars identify the orientation of the bar code.

Data Field
The data is restricted to alphanumeric characters “A” through “Z” and “0”
through “9”.
Each bar width is equal, and must be .020-inch ± .005-inch. Horizontal
spacing between bars (pitch) must be 22 bars ± 2 bars per inch over any
0.50-inch portion of the bar code. The height of the bars (Full Height) has a
maximum of 0.230 inches and a minimum of 0.165 inches.

Check Digit
A modulo-6 check digit is inserted at the end of the data field.

298
 Telepen

Telepen
The Telepen structure is shown in Figure 27 and described on the following
pages.

SR, SC QUIET QUIET

SR, SC
POSITION ZONE POSITION ZONE

STOP START
CODE CODE

OPTIONAL
CHECK
DIGIT
CCW CW

DATA DATA
FIELD OPTIONAL FIELD
READABLE
DATA
FIELD

OPTIONAL
CHECK
DIGIT
START STOP UPPER
UPPER LOWER LOWER
CODE CODE GUARD
GUARD GUARD GUARD
BAND BAND BAND BAND
QUIET QUIET
ZONE ZONE

HEIGHT HEIGHT

OPTIONAL
CHECK DIGIT
SR, SC
POSITION
UPPER GUARD BAND

QUIET START STOP QUIET

Normal ZONE CODE
DATA FIELD
CODE ZONE HEIGHT

LOWER GUARD BAND

OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD

SR, SC
POSITION
OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD

LOWER GUARD BAND

HEIGHT
QUIET STOP START QUIET
INV ZONE CODE
DATA FIELD
CODE ZONE

UPPER GUARD BAND

OPTIONAL
CHECK DIGIT

Figure 27. Telepen Structure

299
Chapter 7 Bar Codes

Quiet Zone
Both ends of the bar code structure require blank quiet zones. The quiet
zones must be at least 0.25 inches wide and completely blank to ensure
accurate reading of the start/stop codes and to prevent adjacent bar codes
from overlapping. Be sure to provide sufficient space on the form for the quiet
zones.

Start/Stop Codes
The start/stop code is a unique character identifying the leading and trailing
end of the bar code. The start/stop code is automatically produced with each
bar code. The start/stop code structure permits bidirectional bar code
scanning.

Data Field
The bar code symbol uses a series of wide and narrow bars and spaces to
represent standard alphanumeric characters. Each character is represented
by a different series of bars and spaces, both wide and narrow, but is always
16 units in width (for a wide to narrow ratio of 3). Each character starts with a
bar and ends with a space.

Readable Data
The optional readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the bar
code data. It can be printed above or below the bar code symbol.

Check Digit
A mandatory modulo-127 check digit is inserted into the bar code to verify
accurate scanning.

Telepen Command Format

BARCODE
TELEPEN; [DIR;] [MAG;] [Hn[.m];] [BFn;L;] [DARK;] SR; SC
(D) [data field] (D)
[PDF [;LOC] [;FONT]]
STOP
BARCODE The Bar Code command; enter BARCODE.
TELEPEN Designates bar code type Telepen; enter
TELEPEN.
DIR Optional parameter that allows for rotating a
barcode. Enter CW for clockwise rotation. Enter
CCW or VSCAN for counter-clockwise rotation.
Enter INV for inverted rotation. If DIR is not
entered, the barcode is horizontally oriented.

300
 Telepen

MAG Optional parameter to magnify (horizontally

expand) the bar code symbol. The magnification
default value is X1. As required for scanning, enter
a magnification value to increase the magnification.
Increasing the magnification adjusts printed
character density. You can also use XR or XRD.
Hn[.m] Optional parameter to adjust the overall height
(vertical expansion) of the bar code symbol
(including the upper and lower 0.1-inch guard
bands and any human readable data). Height
adjustments are made in 0.1-inch increments plus
dots; enter H and a value from 3 through 99 to
select height adjustments from 0.3 through 9.9
inches. The default value is 0.9 inch. [.m] is an
additional number of dots for the bar code height.
(Dots are in the current dot scale.)
NOTE: If 0.3 inches is the selected height, the PDF cannot be included.
BFn;L Optional parameters for assigning a dynamic bar
code data field location on a form and for
designating the length of the data field. With these
parameters, the actual data for the bar code data
field is dynamically provided during the Execute
Form Mode; the data is not specified during the
Create Form Mode. To use this field, perform the
following steps:
a. Enter BF.
b. Replace n with a number ranging from 0
through 512 to identify the bar code field. The
SR and SC parameters specify the exact
location of the bar code field identified by n.
c. Replace L with a number equaling the total
number of characters in the field. (The actual
data provided dynamically during the Execute
Form Mode can be less than L.)
d. The information for the data field is entered
dynamically during the Execute Form Mode.
(Refer to the IGP Programmer’s Reference
Manual.) Do not use the data field parameter
to enter data when the BFn;L parameters are
used. However, refer to the data field
description for available characters.
DARK Optional parameter to produce darker looking bar
codes. Enter DARK. Refer to the IGP
Programmer’s Reference Manual for more
information.

301
Chapter 7 Bar Codes

SR Defines the starting row for the bar code. Enter a

value ranging from row 1 to one less than the
length of the form. Character row or dot row is
specified based on the Scale command (refer to the
IGP Programmer’s Reference Manual), or use the
CP.DP format (refer to the IGP Programmer’s
Reference Manual).
SC Defines the starting column of the bar code. Enter a
value ranging from column 1 to one less than the
width of the form. Character column or dot column
is specified based on the Scale command (refer to
the IGP Programmer’s Reference Manual), or use
the CP.DP format (refer to the IGP Programmer’s
Reference Manual).
(D) The printable character (delimiter) identifying the
start and finish of the data field. Enter any printable
character other than a slash (/), the SFCC, or a
character used within the data. The same character
must be used at both ends of the data field, but it is
not printed with the data.
data field Contains the bar code characters. A null data field
(no characters) is permitted. The data field can
contain any of the characters listed in Table 68
except the SFCC. The length of the data field is
variable; however, the maximum length is usually
limited to 32 characters to minimize potential
reading errors.
PDF Optional parameter to enable printing of the human
readable data field. Enter PDF to print the data
field. If the parameter is not used, the human
readable data will not print. This parameter is not
allowed if a null data field is specified.
LOC Optional parameter to identify the location of the
printable data field. The default value is B, locating
the human readable data below the bar code. A
locates the printable data field above bar code. To
compensate for printing the 0.1-inch high data, the
height of the bar code body is reduced 0.1 inch.
FONT Optional parameter to select the font for the human
readable data field. Enter O to select OCR-A font;
enter X to select OCR-B font; enter N to select 10
cpi; enter P to select 12 cpi; enter Q to select 13
cpi; enter R to select 15 cpi; enter T to select 17 cpi;
enter V to select 20 cpi.
STOP Ends the Bar Code command while the IGP
continues in the Create Form Mode. Enter STOP. If
STOP is not entered, an error message results.

302
 Telepen

Table 68. Telepen Character Set

ASCII Telepen ASCII Telepen ASCII Telepen ASCII Telepen

NUL %U SP Space @ %V ` %W
SOH $A ! /A A A a +A
STX $B " /B B B b +B
ETX $C # /C C C c +C
EOT $D $ /D D D d +D
ENQ $E % /E E E e +E
ACK $F & /F F F f +F
BEL $G ' /G G G g +G
BS $H ( /H H H h +H
HT $I ) /I I I i +I
LF $J * /J J J j +J
VT $K + /K K K k +K
FF $L , /L L L l +L
CR $M — — M M m +M
SO $N . . N N n +N
SI $O / /O O O o +O
DLE $P 0 0 P P p +P
DC1 $Q 1 1 Q Q q +Q
DC2 $R 2 2 R R r +R
DC3 $S 3 3 S S s +S
DC4 $T 4 4 T T t +T
NAK $U 5 5 U U u +U
SYN $V 6 6 V V v +V
ETB $W 7 7 W W w +W
CAN $X 8 8 X X x +X
EM $Y 9 9 Y Y y +Y
SUB $Z : /Z Z Z z +Z
ESC %A ; %F [ %K { %P
FS %B < %G \ %L | %Q
GS %C = %H ] %M } %R
RS %D > %I ^ %N ~ %S
US %E ? %J __ %O DEL %T %X
%Y %Z

NOTE: Character pairs /M, /N, and /P through /Y are reserved for future
control character pairs.

303
Chapter 7 Bar Codes

Telepen Example
Figure 28 illustrates a horizontal and vertical Telepen bar code generated by
the following program:
~CREATE;TELEPEN (Enter Create Form Mode)
BARCODE (Bar Code Command)
TELEPEN;5;5 (Telepen barcode at SR 5, SC 5)
"SAMPLE#1" (Data Field)
PDF;B (Printable Data Field)
STOP (Ends Bar Code Command)
BARCODE (New Bar Code Command)
TELEPEN;VSCAN;10;5 (Vertical Telepen barcode at SR 10, SC 5)
"AB12&%*" (Data Field)
PDF;B (Printable Data Field)
STOP (Ends Bar Code Command)
END (Terminates Create Form Mode)
~EXECUTE;TELEPEN;1 (Execute the form, form count of 1)

~NORMAL

SC 5

SR 5

SR 10

Figure 28. Sample Telepen Bar Codes

304
 UCC/EAN-128

UCC/EAN-128

SR, SC QUIET QUIET

SR, SC
POSITION ZONE POSITION ZONE

STOP START
CODE CODE

OPTIONAL
CHECK
DIGIT
CCW CW

DATA DATA
FIELD OPTIONAL FIELD
READABLE
DATA
FIELD

OPTIONAL
CHECK
DIGIT
START STOP UPPER
UPPER LOWER LOWER
CODE CODE GUARD
GUARD GUARD GUARD
BAND BAND BAND BAND
QUIET QUIET
ZONE ZONE

HEIGHT HEIGHT

OPTIONAL
CHECK DIGIT
SR, SC
POSITION
UPPER GUARD BAND

QUIET START STOP QUIET

Normal ZONE CODE
DATA FIELD
CODE ZONE HEIGHT

LOWER GUARD BAND

OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD

SR, SC
POSITION
OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD

LOWER GUARD BAND

HEIGHT
QUIET STOP START QUIET
INV ZONE CODE
DATA FIELD
CODE ZONE

UPPER GUARD BAND

OPTIONAL
CHECK DIGIT

Figure 29. UCC/EAN-128 Structure

305
Chapter 7 Bar Codes

UCC/EAN-128 uses the same bar code and character set as Code 128.
However, in UCC/EAN-128, the Function 1 character FNC1 immediately
follows the start code. The FNC1 character has been reserved exclusively for
UCC/EAN-128.
The UCC/EAN-128 data structure requires an Application Identifier (AI) at the
beginning of bar code data. Each AI determines the format and length of the
data which follows. Refer to Table 69 for more detail.

Table 69. UCC/EAN-128 Application Identifiers

Application
Content Format
Identifier (AI)
00 Serial Shipping Container Code n2+n18
02 Item Num. of Goods Within Another Unit n2+n14
10 Batch or Lot Number n2+an..20
11 (*) Production Date (YYMMDD) n2+n6
13 (*) Packaging Date (YYMMDD) n2+n6
15 (*) Sell By Date (Quality) (YYMMDD) n2+n6
17 (*) Expiration Date (Safety) (YYMMDD) n2+n6
20 Product Variant n2+n2
21 Serial Number n2+an..20
22 HIBCC = Quantity, Date, Batch and Link n2+an..29
23 (**) Lot Number (Transitional Use) n3+n..19
240 Additional Product ID Assigned By Manufacturer n3+an..30
250 Secondary Serial Number n3+an..30
30 Quantity n2+n..8
310 (***) Net Weight, Kilograms n4+n6
311 (***) Length or 1st Dimension, Meters n4+n6
312 (***) Width, Diameter or 2nd Dimension, Meters n4+n6
313 (***) Depth, Thickness, Height or 3rd Dimension, Meters n4+n6
314 (***) Area, Square Meters n4+n6
315 (***) Volume, Liters n4+n6
316 (***) Volume, Cubic Meters n4+n6
320 (***) Net Weight, Pounds n4+n6
321 (***) Length Or 1st Dimension, Inches n4+n6
322 (***) Length Or 1st Dimension, Feet n4+n6
323 (***) Length Or 1st Dimension, Yards n4+n6
324 (***) Width, Diameter, or 2nd Dimension, Inches n4+n6
325 (***) Width, Diameter, or 2nd Dimension, Feet n4+n6

306
 UCC/EAN-128

Table 69. UCC/EAN-128 Application Identifiers (continued)

Application
Content Format
Identifier (AI)
326 (***) Width, Diameter, or 2nd Dimension, Yards n4+n6
327 (***) Depth, Thickness, Height, or 3rd Dimension, Inches n4+n6
328 (***) Depth, Thickness, Height, or 3rd Dimension, Feet n4+n6
329 (***) Depth, Thickness, Height, or 3rd Dimension, Yards n4+n6
330 (***) Gross Weight-Kilograms n4+n6
331 (***) Length or 1st Dimension, Logistics n4+n6
332(***) Width, Diameter, or 2nd Dimension, Meters, Logistics n4+n6
333 (***) Depth, Thickness, Height or 3rd Dimension, Meters, n4+n6
Logistics
334 (***) Area, Square Meters, Logistics n4+n6
335 (***) Gross Volume, Liters n4+n6
336 (***) Gross Volume, Cubic Meters n4+n6
337 (***) Kilograms Per Square Meter n4+n6
340 (***) Gross Weight, Pounds n4+n6
341 (***) Length Or 1st Dimension, Inches, Logistics n4+n6
342 (***) Length Or 1st Dimension, Feet, Logistics n4+n6
343 (***) Length Or 1st Dimension, Yards, Logistics n4+n6
344 (***) Width, Diameter, or 2nd Dimension, Inches, Logistics n4+n6
345 (***) Width, Diameter, or 2nd Dimension, Feet, Logistics n4+n6
346 (***) Width, Diameter, or 2nd Dimension, Yards, Logistics n4+n6
347 (***) Depth, Thickness, Height or 3rd Dimension, Inches, n4+n6
Logistics
348 (***) Depth, Thickness, Height or 3rd Dimension, Feet, Logistics n4+n6
349 (***) Depth, Thickness, Height or 3rd Dimension, Yards, Logistics n4+n6
350 (***) Area, Square Inches n4+n6
351 (***) Area, Square Feet n4+n6
352 (***) Area, Square Yards n4+n6
353 (***) Area, Square Inches, Logistics n4+n6
354 (***) Area, Square Feet, Logistics n4+n6
355 (***) Area, Square Yards, Logistics n4+n6
356 (***) Net Weight, Troy Ounce n4+n6
357 (***) Net Volume, Ounces n4+n6
360 (***) Volume, Quarts n4+n6
361 (***) Volume, Gallons n4+n6
362 (***) Gross Volume, Quarts n4+n6

307
Chapter 7 Bar Codes

Table 69. UCC/EAN-128 Application Identifiers (continued)

Application
Content Format
Identifier (AI)
363 (***) Gross Volume, Gallons n4+n6
364 (***) Volume, Cubic Inches n4+n6
365 (***) Volume, Cubic Feet n4+n6
366 (***) Volume, Cubic Yards n4+n6
367 (***) Gross Volume, Cubic Inches n4+n6
368 (***) Gross Volume, Cubic Inches n4+n6
369 (***) Gross Volume, Cubic Inches n4+n6
37 Quantity of Units Contained (For Use With AI 02 Only) n2+n..8
400 Customer's Purchase Order Number n3+an..30
401 Consignment Number n3+an..30
410 Ship To (Deliver To) Location Code Using EAN-13 n3+n13
411 Bill To (Invoice To) Location Code Using EAN-13 n3+n13
412 Purchase From (Location Code of Party From Whom Goods n3+n13
Are Purchased)
413 Ship For UCC/EAN Location Code n3+n13
414 EAN Location Code For Physical Identification n3+n13
420 Ship To (Deliver To) Postal Code Within a Single Postal n3+an..20
Authority
421 Ship To (Deliver To) Postal Code With 3-Digit ISO Country n3+n3+an..9
Code Prefix
8001 Roll Products-Width, Length, Core Diameter, Direction and n4+n14
Splices
8003 UPC/EAN Number and Serial Number Or Returnable Asset n4+n14+an..16
8004 UCC/EAN Serial Identification n4+an..30
8005 Identifies the Price Per Unit of Measure n4+n6
8006 Component of an Article n4+n14+n2+n2
8018 Service Relation Number n4+n18
8100 Coupon Extended Code-Number System Character and n4+n1+n5
Offer
8101 Coupon Extended Code-Number System Character, Offer n4+n1+n5+n4
and End of Offer
8102 Coupon Extended Code-Number System Character n4+n1+n1
Preceded by Zero
90 Mutually Agreed, Between Trading Partners n2+an..30
91 Intra-Company (Internal) n2+an..30
92 Intra-Company (Internal) n2+an..30

308
 UCC/EAN-128

Table 69. UCC/EAN-128 Application Identifiers (continued)

Application
Content Format
Identifier (AI)
93 Intra-Company (Internal) n2+an..30
94 Intra-Company (Internal) n2+an..30
95 Internal-Carriers n2+an..30
96 Internal-Carriers n2+an..30
97 Intra-Company (Internal) n2+an..30
98 Intra-Company (Internal) n2+an..30
99 Internal n2+an..30

(*) To indicate only year and month, DD must be filled with “00”
(**) Plus one digit for length indication
(***) Plus one digit for decimal point indication
Data Value Representation:
a - alphabetic charactersn - numeric characters
an - alpha-numeric charactersn3 - 3 numeric characters, fixed length
an..3 - up to 3 alpha-numeric charactersn..3 - up to 3 numeric characters

Quiet Zone
Both ends of the bar code structure require blank quiet zones. The quiet
zones must be at least 0.25 inches wide and completely blank to ensure
accurate reading of the start/stop codes and to prevent adjacent bar codes
from overlapping. You must provide sufficient space on the form for the quiet
zones.

Start/Stop Codes
The start and stop codes identify the leading and trailing ends of the bar code.
UCC/EAN-128 uses unique start codes for character subsets B and C, and a
stop code common to both. An automatic mode switching feature is used to
generate the correct start code based on the first four data field characters.

Data Field
UCC/EAN-128 bar codes require a special character called “Function 1”
(FNC1) to immediately follow the start code. IGP automatically supplies this
character, so it must not be included in the data field by the user.
A character is made up of three bars and three spaces, each varying in width
from 1 through 4 modules, for a total of eleven modules. The number of
modules making up the bars is even. The stop code has four bars and is 13
modules wide.
The character set for UCC/EAN-128 is the same as the character set for Code
128. Every character is interpreted according to the currently active character
subset. UCC/EAN-128 uses subset B and subset C only. Subset B, shown in
Table 66 (page 268), includes all standard alphanumeric keyboard
characters, lowercase alphabetical characters, and special characters.

309
Chapter 7 Bar Codes

Subset C interprets the characters as pairs of numbers 00 through 99, along

with some special characters, as shown in Table 67 (page 269). The start
code or subset switch code determines whether a particular bar code
character is decoded as one character or as a pair of numbers.

Readable Data
The optional printed data field (PDF) provides a human-readable
interpretation of the bar code data. When the printed data field is enabled by
use of the “PDF” parameter, the overall height of the bars is reduced to make
room for a guard band and the human-readable characters. The printed data
field will be formatted with spaces or parentheses denoting particular data
fields such as the application identifier. Special characters such as start, stop,
subset switch, modulo-103 check digit, and FNC1 do not appear in the
human-readable data.
The readable data is oriented along the bar code from start code to stop code.
It may be positioned above or below a bar code, and the bar code may be
horizontal, vertical, or inverted.

Modulo-103 Check Digit

A modulo-103 check digit is automatically calculated and inserted in the bar
code symbol immediately in front of the stop code, in the same manner as the
Code 128 bar code. The check digit verifies accurate scanning. The start
code is included in the check digit algorithm. The modulo-103 check digit is
not displayed in the readable data field.

Modulo-10 Data Field Check Digit for SSCC-18 and SCC-14

AI 00 (called the Serial Shipping Container Code, or SSCC-18) takes
eighteen additional numerical data bytes. The last data byte is a modulo-10
check digit on the preceding seventeen data bytes. Counting the two zeros of
the application identifier, the modulo-10 check digit is the twentieth byte in the
data field.
AI 01 (called the Shipping Container Code, or SCC-14) takes fourteen
additional numerical data bytes. The last data byte is a modulo-10 check digit
on the preceding thirteen data bytes. Counting the zero and the one of the
application identifier, the modulo-10 check digit is the sixteenth byte in the
data field.
The modulo-10 data field check digit for both SSCC-18 and SCC-14 is printed
in the bar code as the second half of the last number pair using subset C. It is
displayed in the human-readable data field as the twentieth byte for SSCC-18
or the sixteenth byte for SCC-14.
IGP automatically calculates the modulo-10 check digit for SSCC-18 if only 17
data digits are provided following the application identifier of 00. This is also
true for SSCC-14 if only 15 digits are supplied. For concatenated barcodes,
an FUC1 must be inserted for the checkdigit character so that PGL will
calculate it.

310
 UCC/EAN-128

UCC/EAN-128 Command Format

BARCODE
UCC-128; [DIR;] [MAG;] [Hn[.m];] [BFn;L;] [DARK;] SR;SC
(D)data field(D)
[PDF [;LOC] [;FONT]]
STOP
BARCODE The Bar Code command; enter BARCODE.
UCC-128 Designates bar code type Code UCC-128; enter
UCC-128.
DIR Optional parameter that allows for rotating a
barcode. Enter CW for clockwise rotation. Enter
CCW or VSCAN for counter-clockwise rotation.
Enter INV for inverted rotation. If DIR is not
entered, the barcode is horizontally oriented.
MAG Optional parameter to magnify the bar code symbol
by increasing the width of the bars and spaces. The
magnification default value is X1. Increasing the
magnification adjusts printed character density.
You can also use XR or XRD. You must specify
eight digits for variable ratio. They stand for the
widths of alternating bars and spaces from the
narrowest to the widest. Note that a valid UCC/
EAN-128 bar code can be no larger than
165 mm (6.5 inches) wide.
Hn[.m] Optional parameter to adjust the overall height of
the bar code symbol (including the upper and lower
0.1 inch guard bands and any human-readable
data). Height adjustments are made in 0.1 inch
increments; enter H and a value from 3 through 99
to select height adjustments from 0.3 through 9.9
inches. The default value is 0.9 inch. [.m] is an
additional number of dots for the bar code height.
(Dots are in the current scale).
NOTE: If 0.3 inches is the selected height, the PDF cannot be included.
BFn;L Optional parameters for assigning a dynamic bar
code data field location on a form and for
designating the length of the data field. With these
parameters, the actual data for the bar code data
field is dynamically provided during the Execute
Form Mode; the data is not specified during the
Create Form Mode. To use this field, perform the
following steps:
a. Enter BF.
b. Replace n with a number ranging from 0
through 512 to identify the bar code field. The
SR and SC parameters specify the exact
location of the bar code field identified by n.

311
Chapter 7 Bar Codes

c. Replace L with the maximum number of

characters in the field. The actual data
provided dynamically during the Execute Form
Mode can be less than L. It is permitted to
supply no data at all.
d. The information for the data field is entered
dynamically during the Execute Form Mode.
(Refer to the IGP Programmer’s Reference
Manual.) Do not use the data field parameter
to enter data when the BFn;L parameters are
used. However, refer to the data field
description for available characters to use
during Execute Form Mode.
DARK Optional parameter to produce darker looking bar
codes. Enter DARK. Refer to the IGP
Programmer’s Reference Manual for more
information.
SR Defines the starting row for the bar code. Enter a
value ranging from row 1 to one less than the
length of the form. Character row or dot row is
specified based on the Scale command, or use the
CP.DP format.
SC Defines the starting column of the bar code. Enter a
value ranging from column 1 to one less than the
width of the form. Character column or dot column
is specified based on the Scale command, or use
the CP.DP format.
(D) The printable character (delimiter) identifying the
start and finish of the data field. Enter any printable
character other than a slash (/), the SFCC, or a
character used within the data. The same character
must be used on both ends of the data field. It will
not print with the data.
data field The bar code data. The data field for UCC/EAN-
128 consists of an “application identifier” (AI) of two
to four numbers, followed by data of appropriate
length (variable or fixed) and type (numeric or
alphanumeric). See Table 69 for a list of application
identifiers and their associated data fields.
The FNC1 character is required as the first
character after the start code for UCC/EAN-128 bar
codes, and IGP will always generate it
automatically. It will appear in the bar code but not
in the human-readable field. Do not supply FNC1 in
the data field.

312
 UCC/EAN-128

The start code and subset switching is done

automatically by IGP based on the data field
contents so that the bar code length is minimized.
Subset C encodes each pair of numbers as a single
bar code character, providing a higher character
density. If the first four data digits are numbers, the
bar code starts in subset C; otherwise it starts in
subset B. The subset will switch from B to C at any
point in the data field if the next four characters are
numbers, and will switch from C to B if the next two
characters are not numbers or only one character
remains.
The data field can contain any of the characters
listed in Table 69 except the system SFCC and the
character used as a delimiter.
PDF Optional parameter to enable printing of the human
readable data field. Enter PDF to print the data
field. If this parameter is not used, the human
readable data will not print.
LOC Optional parameter to identify the location of the
printable data field. The default value is B, locating
the human readable data below the bar code. A
locates the printable data field above the bar code.
The height of the bar code body is reduced to
compensate for the human readable field and the
guard bands.
FONT Optional parameter to identify the font of the
printable data field. Enter O to select OCR-A font;
enter X to select OCR-B font; enter N to select 10
cpi; enter P to select 12 cpi; enter Q to select 13
cpi; enter R to select 15 cpi; enter T to select 17 cpi;
enter V to select 20 cpi.
STOP Ends the bar code command while the IGP
continues in the Create Form Mode. Enter STOP. If
STOP is not encountered, an error message
results.

313
Chapter 7 Bar Codes

Code UCC/EAN-128 Examples

The following example generates the SSCC-18 variant of a UCC/EAN-128
bar code in horizontal orientation at the default ratio, and vertically at a user
defined ratio of double normal size.
NOTE: The fields of AI=00 are seen here separated by spaces. By default,
the AI is separated from the rest of the data by parenthesis. This is
controlled by the front panel option “AI 00 Spaces” in the IGP menu
(see your User's Manual).
~CREATE;UCCTEST
/ Horizontal bar code is dark, nominal width, start row 35,
start column 15.
/ Human-readable field is below the bar code in OCR-B font.
BARCODE
UCC-128;DARK;35;15
*0034567890123456789*
PDF;X
STOP
/ Vertical bar code is dark, double width, start row 35, start
column 50.
/ Human-readable data field is above the bar code in normal 10
cpi font.
BARCODE
UCC-128;VSCAN;XR2:2:4:4:6:6:8:8;H12;DARK;35;50
*0034567890123456789*
PDF;A
STOP
END
~EXECUTE;UCCTEST

~NORMAL

Figure 30. UCC/EAN-128 Example 1

314
 UCC/EAN-128

The program below illustrates incremental UCC/EAN-128 barcodes.

Incremental UCC/EAN-128 barcode syntax for non-impact printers requires
that the STARTMASK be exactly as wide as the data field.
~CREATE;UCCINC;140
BARCODE
UCC-128;I;DARK;3;20
+XXXXXXXXX00001;*400P0119600001*
PDF;B
STOP
ALPHA
DARK;1;20;0;0;*PURCHASE ORDER NUMBER*
STOP
END
~EXECUTE;UCCINC;3

~NORMAL

Figure 31. UCC/EAN-128 Example 2

315
Chapter 7 Bar Codes

The following example shows the use of dynamic data. The ship-to-postal
code, AI 420, is used to encode 5 digit ZIP Codes.
~CREATE;UCCDYN;140
BARCODE
UCC-128;BF1;8;3;20
PDF;X
STOP
ALPHA
DARK;1;20;0;0;*SHIP TO POSTAL*
STOP
END
~EXECUTE;UCCDYN
~BF1;*42092614*

~NORMAL
~EXECUTE;UCCDYN
~BF1;*42090210*

~NORMAL
~EXECUTE;UCCDYN
~BF1;*42090028*
~NORMAL

Figure 32. UCC/EAN-128 Example 3

316
 UPC-A

UPC-A
The UPC-A bar code structure is shown in Figure 33 and described below.

x, y START CODE CENTER CODE STOP CODE

POSITION

QUIET LEFT DATA RIGHT DATA QUIET

ZONE FIELD FIELD ZONE HEIGHT

NUMBER
SYSTEM N C
CHARACTER

CHECK DIGIT FIELD CHECK DIGIT

NUMBER SYSTEM OPTIONAL READABLE CHARACTER
CHARACTER FIELD DATA FIELD

Figure 33. UPC-A Structure

Quiet Zone
Quiet zones extend on both ends of the bar code to permit the scan to begin
and end in a blank area. The number system character is also printed
automatically in the left quiet zone.

Start/Center/Stop Codes
The start/center/stop codes are special character codes marking those
portions of the bar code. These codes are automatically provided.

Number System Character

The number system character field allows you to provide a code to a class or
type of item. The first character in the data field is used as the number system
character.

Data Field
The bar code symbol uses a series of varying width bars and spaces to
represent a limited character set (numbers 0-9 and Special Characters Start,
Center, and Stop). The bars and spaces vary in width from one through four
modules. Each character consists of two bars and two spaces that total seven
modules. The symbol coding of the left data field is different from the right
data field to permit read direction sensing.

Readable Data
The human readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the bar
code data. It can either be suppressed or printed above or below the bar code
symbol.

Check Digit
The modulo-10 check digit is automatically calculated and inserted in the bar
code symbol. The check digit verifies accurate scanning. The number system
character is included in the check digit algorithm.

317
Chapter 7 Bar Codes

UPC-E
The UPC-E bar code structure is shown in Figure 34 and described below.

START STOP
x, y CODE CODE
POSITION

QUIET DATA QUIET

FIELD CHECK
HEIGHT ZONE DIGIT ZONE

N C

NUMBER OPTIONAL CHECK

SYSTEM NUMBER SYSTEM READABLE DIGIT
CHARACTER FIELD DATA FIELD CHARACTER
CHARACTER

Figure 34. UPC-E Structure

Quiet Zone
Quiet zones extend on both ends of the bar code to permit the scan to begin
and end in a blank area. You must provide sufficient space (minimum of
seven modules) on the form for the quiet zones. The number system
character is also printed automatically in the left quiet zone.

Start/Stop Codes
The start/stop codes are special character codes marking those portions of
the bar code. These codes are automatically provided.

Number System Character

The number system character field for all UPC-E bar codes must be zero.

Data Field
The bar code symbol uses a series of varying width bars and spaces to
represent a limited character set (numbers 0-9 and Special Characters Start
and Stop). The bars and spaces vary in width from one through four modules.
For UPC-E, eleven digits are expected, which are compressed down to the
six encoded symbol characters.

Readable Data
The human readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the bar
code data. It can either be suppressed or printed above or below the bar code
symbol.

Check Digit
The modulo-10 check digit is automatically calculated and inserted in the bar
code symbol. The check digit verifies accurate scanning. The number system
character is included in the check digit algorithm.

318
 UPC-E

Table 70. Eleven-Digit Compression

1. Manufacturer’s Number Product Numbers that can be used 00000-00999

X X 0 0 0 ( ) ( ) ( )
X X 1 0 0 first 2 digits of last 3 digits of third digit of the
X X 2 0 0 manufacturer’s the product manufacturer’s
number number number, use 0
through 2 only

2. Manufacturer’s Number Product Numbers that can be used 00000-00999

X X 3 0 0 ( ) ( ) ( 3 )
X X 9 0 0 first 3 digits of last 2 digits of depends on how
manufacturer’s the product many digits
number number; use 00- appear in the
99 only manufacturer’s
number

3. Manufacturer’s Number Product Numbers that can be used 00000-00999

X X X X 0 ( ) ( ) ( 4 )
first 4 digits of last digit of depends on how
manufacturer’s product number, many digits
number use 0 through 9 appear in the
only manufacturer’s
number

4. Manufacturer’s Number Product Numbers that can be used 00000-00999

X X X X X ( ) ( )
all 5 digits of last digit of
manufacturer’s product number,
number use 5 through 9
only

319
Chapter 7 Bar Codes

Table 71. Six-Digit Zero Expansion

if the 6 digit number ends

then the MFPS number is: and the Product Number is:
with:

0 the first 2 digits (of the zero 00 plus the THIRD, FOURTH
Example: 124560 suppressed number) plus 000 and FIFTH digit (of the zero
12000 suppressed number)
00456

1 the first two digits plus 100 same as above

Example: 275831 27100 00583

2 the first two digits plus 200 same as above

Example: 412022 41200 00202

3 the first three digits plus 00 000 plus the FOURTH and
Example: 876543 87600 FIFTH digit
00054

4 the first four digits plus 0 0000 plus the FIFTH digit
Example: 753774 75370 00007

5, 6, 7, 8, 9 the first five digits of the zero 0000 plus the SIXTH digit
Examples: suppressed number
213756 21375 00006
517019 51701 00009

320
 UPC Shipping

UPC Shipping
The UPCSHIP bar code structure is shown in Figure 35 and described below.

OPTIONAL
CHECK DIGIT
SR, SC
POSITION
UPPER GUARD BAND

QUIET START DATA FIELD STOP QUIET

ZONE CODE CODE ZONE HEIGHT

LOWER GUARD BAND

OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD

Figure 35. UPCSHIP Structure

Quiet Zone
Both ends of the bar code structure have blank quiet zones. The quiet zones
should be at least 0.25 inches wide and completely blank to ensure accurate
reading of the start/stop codes and to prevent adjacent bar codes from
overlapping. You are responsible for providing sufficient space on the form for
the quiet zones.

Start/Stop Codes
Unique start and stop codes permit bidirectional scanning. Both start and stop
codes contain bars and spaces. They are automatically produced.

Data Field
The bar code symbol uses a series of wide and narrow bars and spaces to
represent numeric characters. The structure is 2 wide elements (bars or
spaces) and 3 narrow elements.

Readable Data
The optional readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the bar
code data. Bar code data is printed below the horizontal bar code symbol. The
lower guard band is provided when the readable data field is selected.

Check Digit
The modulo-10 check digit is automatically calculated and inserted in the bar
code symbol. The check digit provides the means to verify accurate scanning.

321
Chapter 7 Bar Codes

UPS 11
The UPS 11 structure is shown in Figure 36 and described on the following
pages.

SR, SC QUIET QUIET

SR, SC
POSITION ZONE POSITION ZONE

STOP START
CODE CODE

OPTIONAL
CHECK
DIGIT
CCW CW

DATA DATA
FIELD OPTIONAL FIELD
READABLE
DATA
FIELD

OPTIONAL
CHECK
DIGIT
START STOP UPPER
UPPER LOWER LOWER
CODE CODE GUARD
GUARD GUARD GUARD
BAND BAND BAND BAND
QUIET QUIET
ZONE ZONE

HEIGHT HEIGHT

OPTIONAL
CHECK DIGIT
SR, SC
POSITION
UPPER GUARD BAND

QUIET START STOP QUIET

Normal ZONE CODE
DATA FIELD
CODE ZONE HEIGHT

LOWER GUARD BAND

OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD

SR, SC
POSITION
OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD

LOWER GUARD BAND

HEIGHT
QUIET STOP START QUIET
INV ZONE CODE
DATA FIELD
CODE ZONE

UPPER GUARD BAND

OPTIONAL
CHECK DIGIT

Figure 36. UPS 11 Structure

322
 UPS 11

Quiet Zone
Both ends of the bar code structure require blank quiet zones. The quiet
zones must be at least 0.25 inches wide and completely blank to ensure
accurate reading of the start/stop codes and to prevent adjacent bar codes
from overlapping. Be sure to provide sufficient space on the form for the quiet
zones.

Start/Stop Codes
The start/stop codes identify the leading and trailing end of the bar code. Each
of the UPS 11 subsets uses a unique start code and a common stop code,
both automatically provided by the IGP.

Data Field
UPS 11 is a special case of Code 128 (page 265). This bar code is restricted
to 10 data characters. The first character must be 0 through 9 or A through Z.
The remaining nine digits must be 0 through 9.

Readable Data
The optional readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the bar
code data. It can be printed above or below the bar code symbol.

Check Digit
The modulo-103 check digit is automatically calculated and inserted in the bar
code symbol. The check digit verifies accurate scanning. The start code is
included in the check digit algorithm.

UPS 11 Command Format

BARCODE
UPS11; [DIR;] [MAG;] [Hn[.m];] [BFn;] [DARK;] SR; SC
(D)data field(D)
[PDF [;LOC] [;FONT]]
STOP
BARCODE The Bar Code command; enter BARCODE.
UPS11 Designates bar code type UPS 11; enter UPS11.
DIR Optional parameter that allows for rotating a
barcode. Enter CW for clockwise rotation. Enter
CCW or VSCAN for counter-clockwise rotation.
Enter INV for inverted rotation. If DIR is not
entered, the barcode is horizontally oriented.
MAG Optional parameter to magnify (horizontally
expand) the bar code symbol. The magnification
default value is X1. Increasing the magnification
adjusts printed character density. You can also use
XR or XRD. (You must specify 8 digits for MAG for
variable ratio.)

323
Chapter 7 Bar Codes

Hn[.m] Optional parameter to adjust the overall height

(vertical expansion) of the bar code symbol
(including the upper and lower 0.1-inch guard
bands and any human readable data). Height
adjustments are made in 0.1-inch increments; enter
H and a value from 3 through 99 to select height
adjustments from 0.3 through 9.9 inches. The
default value is 0.9 inch.
[.m] is an additional number of dots for the bar code
height. (Dots are in the current dot scale.)
NOTE: If 0.3 inches is the selected height, the PDF cannot be included.
BFn; Optional parameters for assigning a dynamic bar
code data field location on a form and for
designating the length of the data field. With these
parameters, the actual data for the bar code data
field is dynamically provided during the Execute
Form Mode; the data is not specified during the
Create Form Mode. To use this field, perform the
following steps.
a. Enter BF.
b. Replace n with a number ranging from 0
through 512 to identify the bar code field. The
SR and SC parameters specify the exact
location of the bar code field identified by n.
c. The length of the data field need not be
specified, since it is fixed at10 digits.
d. The information for the data field is entered
dynamically during the Execute Form Mode.
(Refer to the IGP Programmer’s Reference
Manual.) Do not use the data field parameter
to enter data when the BFn;L parameters are
used. However, refer to the data field
description for available characters.
DARK Optional parameter to produce darker looking bar
codes. Enter DARK. Refer to the IGP
Programmer’s Reference Manual for more
information.
SR Defines the starting row for the bar code. Enter a
value ranging from row 1 to one less than the
length of the form. Character row or dot row is
specified based on the Scale command (refer to the
IGP Programmer’s Reference Manual), or use the
CP.DP format (refer to the IGP Programmer’s
Reference Manual).

324
 UPS 11

SC Defines the starting column of the bar code. Enter a

value ranging from column 1 to one less than the
width of the form. Character column or dot column
is specified based on the Scale command (refer to
the IGP Programmer’s Reference Manual), or use
the CP.DP format (refer to the IGP Programmer’s
Reference Manual).
(D) The printable character (delimiter) identifying the
start and finish of the data field. Enter any printable
character other than a slash (/), the SFCC, or a
character used within the data. The same character
must be used at both ends of the data field, but it
will not print with the data.
data field Enter the data for the bar code. This bar code is
restricted to 10 data characters. The first character
must be 0 through 9 or A through Z. The remaining
nine digits must be 0 through 9.
PDF Optional parameter to enable printing of the human
readable data field. Enter PDF to print the data
field. If the parameter is not used, the human
readable data will not print. This parameter is not
allowed if a null data field was specified.
LOC Optional parameter to identify the location of the
printable data field. The default value is B, locating
the human readable data below the bar code. A
locates the printable data field above bar code. To
compensate for printing the 0.1-inch high data, the
height of the bar code body is reduced 0.1 inch.
FONT Optional parameter to select the font for the human
readable data field. Enter O to select OCR-A font;
enter X to select OCR-B font; enter N to select 10
cpi; enter P to select 12 cpi; enter Q to select 13
cpi; enter R to select 15 cpi; enter T to select 17 cpi;
enter V to select 20 cpi.
STOP Ends the Bar Code command while the IGP
continues in the Create Form Mode. Enter STOP. If
STOP is not entered, an error message results.

325
Chapter 7 Bar Codes

UPS 11 Example
Figure 37 illustrates a vertical UPS 11 bar code generated by the following
program:
~CREATE;UPS11
BARCODE
UPS11;VSCAN;H9;34;15
*01234567895*
PDF
STOP
END
~EXECUTE;UPS11;1

~NORMAL

Figure 37. Sample UPS Bar Code

326
 8 Graphics

Overview
This chapter explains how the printer produces graphic images.
The quickest way to produce graphic images is to use one of the many
graphics software applications available. Any graphics program that is
compatible with the Epson FX, Proprinter III XL, P–Series, Serial Matrix, or P–
Series XQ Variant emulation should provide excellent results.
You can also use the Intelligent Graphics Printing (IGP**) Printronix emulation
or the Code V** Printronix emulation. Both allow you to create and store
forms, generate logos, bar codes, expanded characters, and other graphics.
Printing text and characters is the default mode of operation. However, your
printer can print graphics.
• When the emulation is in the Proprinter III XL, Epson, or Serial Matrix
protocol mode, Bit Image graphics is used for graphics printing.
• When the emulation is in the P-Series or P-Series XQ Variant protocol
mode, Odd/Even dot plotting is used for graphics printing.
Each line of graphics data must include a graphics control code to enable the
emulation for the desired graphics mode of operation.

Bit Image Graphics

When the printer uses the IBM Proprinter III XL, Epson, or Serial Matrix
emulation, it creates graphics by accepting bit image graphics data.
NOTE: Text and graphics can be mixed on the same line when the printer
plots bit images in the Epson or Proprinter III XL emulation.
Bit image graphics are created by vertically printing the bit pattern of a series
of data bytes. For example, the bit pattern of the ASCII character A (hex 41,
decimal 65) is shown in Figure 38. If we rotate this data byte 90 degrees
clockwise, we have a vertical data byte with the most significant bit (MSB) at
the top. If we then print each 1 (true) bit as a dot, the result is a “bit image” plot
of the ASCII character A.

327
Chapter 8 Bit Image Graphics

ASCII character A = Hex 41 = Binary 01000001

MSB : Most Significant Bit 8 MSB

7
6
5
4
3
MSB 2
1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

Figure 38. Vertical Data Byte Pattern

The relationship between the ASCII character, its decimal value, and its bit
image plot is shown in Figure 39. All 8 bits of the data byte are used in all
fonts, but some fonts have taller and shorter characters. You may have to
adjust the line spacing in order to print without horizontal gaps. Data bytes are
identified by their binary, octal, hexadecimal, or decimal equivalents. These
numeric equivalents are combined in data streams to form graphic patterns
such as the one illustrated in Figure 40.

Binary Vertically Printed

ASCII Decimal Code to Rotated Data Bit Image
Character Value Equivalent Byte

128 MSB
64
32
16
A = 65 = 8 =
4
2
1

Figure 39. Bit Image Pattern from an ASCII Character

Bit Image plotting is not limited to printable ASCII characters. You can print Bit
Image patterns for any 8–bit data byte with decimal values ranging from 0
through 255. (The ASCII character set is charted in Appendix C.)

328
 Designing A Bit Image Pattern

Designing A Bit Image Pattern

A Bit Image pattern is produced in four steps:
1. On a quadrille pad or graph paper, lay out the graphic pattern you want to
print. (See Figure 40.)
2. Determine the decimal equivalent of each vertical data byte in your
pattern. (The sum of the decimal equivalent of each true bit in the vertical
data byte is the decimal equivalent of the data byte.)
3. Write a program to generate the pattern.
4. Enter and run the program on the host computer.

1st Bit Image Data Byte

2nd Bit Image Data Byte
Decimal
Weights 7th Bit Image Date Byte

MSB 128
64
32
16
8
4
2
LSB 1

73 36 36 73 Decimal
146 255 146 Equivalents

Figure 40. Bit Image Pattern Plan

Bit Image Density

You can print bit image graphics in different dot densities. Select dot densities
by sending a control code in the data stream:
NOTE: Every line of graphics data must include the necessary plot mode
command so the printer can perform the chosen graphics functions.

Single Density Mode: ESC K

Single density bit image graphics in a Data Processing (DP) print quality are
printed at 60 dots per inch (dpi) horizontally and 72 dpi vertically. For NLQ
print quality, the horizontal dot density is 90 dpi and vertical dot density is 96
dpi. For High Speed (HS) draft print quality, horizontal dot density is 60 dpi
and vertical dot density is 48 dpi.

329
Chapter 8 Bit Image Graphics

Double Density Mode: ESC L

Double density mode prints up to twice the number of dots per inch
horizontally in the same space used for single density. The vertical dot density
remains the same as in single density mode. Double horizontal density
requires twice the number of input data bytes to print the same length line as
single density. Printing double density reduces the printing speed by half.

Double Speed – Double Density Mode: ESC Y

When the double density – double speed control code is received, data bytes
print at double the current horizontal dot density, but adjacent dots are not
printed. Since double density graphics are printed at half speed, double speed
– double density graphics are printed at the same speed as single density
graphics. This mode is often used to position a simulated print head precisely
by sending blank dot columns.

Quadruple Density Mode: ESC Z

When printing quadruple density graphics, the printer combines adjacent
quadruple density bit image bytes. The compounded data are then printed in
double density mode.

Bit Image Programming Format

The bit image command format is:
ESC CC n1 n2 DATA
where:
ESC the serial matrix SFCC
CC K, L, Y or Z to select dot density
(K = single, L = double, Y = double density – double speed,
Z=quadruple density)
n1 (Number of DATA bytes) – 256(n2)
(remainder of division of number of DATA bytes by 256,
sometimes referred to as MOD 256)
n2 (Number of DATA bytes)/256
(quotient of division)
DATA the dot pattern bytes
The syntax of the bit image expression must be correct.
The number of data bytes and the n1, n2 definition must be equal.
Any characters following n1 and n2 are interpreted and plotted as data until
the n1, n2 definition is satisfied.
If n1 = n2 = 0, then control codes K, L, Y, or Z are ignored.

330
 Bit Image Density

The maximum number of data bytes that can be included in the DATA portion
of the program statement (when using 132 column paper) varies according to
the dot density:
At 60 dpi, single density = 792 bytes
double density = 1584 bytes
quadruple density = 3168 bytes
Data that go past the right margin are discarded if automatic line feed is
disabled. If automatic line feed is enabled, data that go past the right margin
trigger an automatic line feed (LF) and are printed on the next line.

Bit Image Sample Program

The program below, written in BASIC, produces the single density bit image
pattern shown in Figure 41. The 7–byte pattern is repeated 40 times.
Depending on the host computer system, it may be necessary to add a width
statement to the BASIC program.
10 WIDTH “lpt1:”, 255
20 LPRINT “Single Density Bit Image Graphics”
30 LPRINT CHR$(27);“K”;CHR$(24);CHR$(1);
40 FOR N=1 TO 40
50 RESTORE
60 FOR I=1 TO 7
70 READ R
80 LPRINT CHR$(R);
90 NEXT I
100 NEXT N
110 DATA 73, 146, 36, 255, 36, 146, 73
120 LPRINT

Figure 41. Sample Single–Density Bit Image Graphics

331
Chapter 8 Plot Mode

Plot Mode
Plot mode is available for the P-Series and P-Series XQ Variant protocols.
This subsection describes the P-Series compatible odd/even dot Plot mode of
operation. The P-Series plot has a rigid format wherein each line of data
contains a plot command code, the plot data, and an LF code (hex 0A).
The P-Series codes (hex 04 and 05, respectively) can be placed anywhere on
the command line.
The P-Series XQ codes (hex 04 and 05, respectively) can also be placed
anywhere on the command line without degrading plot speed.
When P-Series Plot mode is enabled by an EOT (hex 04) or ENQ (05) code,
all control codes except LF, CR, and FF, are ignored. Any control sequence
parameter prior to a plot code is acted upon immediately. Any control
sequence parameter following an EOT or ENQ code is treated as plot data.
If any combination of EOT (hex 04) or ENQ (05) code is received in a single
line, the priority of action is:
• EOT (hex 04) takes priority over ENQ (hex 05)
• ENQ has the same priority level and is acted upon in the order received
A printable symbol is defined as any character or command that might cause
the head of a serial printer to move away from character column one.

Plot Density
Plot density refers to the number of dots per inch (dpi) printed in a single dot
row. Two types of plot density are available with P-Series Plot mode graphics:
normal density and high density. The densities can be mixed within the
printed page on a dot row-by-row basis, but the two densities cannot be mixed
on the same dot row.

Normal Density Plot Mode

Normal density plotting is selected with the odd dot plot control code ENQ (05
hex). The odd-numbered dot columns are addressed to produce a horizontal
and vertical density that varies with the font selected:
• Data Processing (DP) = 60 dpi horizontal, 72 dpi vertical
• Near Letter Quality (NLQ) = 90 dpi horizontal, 96 dpi vertical
• High Speed Draft (HS) = 60 dpi horizontal, 48 dpi vertical
Figure 42 illustrates normal density dot plot.

Figure 42. Normal Density Plot

332
 Plot Data Byte Format

Double Density Plot Mode

High density plotting is selected with the even dot plot control code EOT (hex
04) in conjunction with the odd dot plot control code ENQ (hex 05). The odd
and even numbered dot columns are addressed to double the horizontal
density. The vertical density remains the same in normal and high density
plotting, though vertical density is based on the current print mode.
Figure 43 illustrates high density plotting.

Figure 43. High Density Plot

Plot Data Byte Format

In P-Series/P-Series XQ Variant Plot Mode, the format is as follows:
• Each data byte specifies six out of twelve plot dot columns.
• Using odd dot plot mode, bits 1 through 6 of the data byte address the
odd-numbered dot columns; using even dot plot mode, bits 1 through 6 of
the data byte address the even-numbered dot columns.
• Bit 6 and/or bit 7 of the data byte must be a “1” (or true) bit in Plot mode.
• Bit 8 of the data byte is not used in the Plot mode and may be 1 or 0.
• The binary equivalent of the plot data bytes must be known to accurately
address specific dot positions.
As shown in Figure 44, a dot is printed at the location addressed by each of
bits 1 through 6 in the data byte that is set (1 or true).

333
Chapter 8 Plot Mode

EVEN DOT PLOT DATA BYTE

LSB MSB
BIT 1 BIT 2 BIT 3 BIT 4 BIT 5 BIT 6 BIT 7 BIT 8

1 0 1 0 1 1 0 NOT
USED

NOTE: BIT 6
2 4 6 8 10 12
AND/OR BIT 7
MUST BE
1"
FOR PLOT MODE

~ ~~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ DOT COLUMN #1 OF
NEXT CHARACTER
COLUMN
DOT COLUMN

~ ~~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~
#12 OF PREVIOUS
CHARACTER
COLUMN

NOTE: IN ACTUAL
PRINTING, THESE
TWO ROWS MERGE
TO PRINT ON THE
SAME ROW.

1 3 5 7 9 11

1 1 1 0 1 1 1 NOT
USED
BIT 1 BIT 2 BIT 3 BIT 4 BIT 5 BIT 6 BIT 7 BIT 8
LSB MSB

ODD DOT PLOT DATA BYTE

Figure 44. P-Series/P-Series XQ Variant Plot Data Byte Format

Plot Data Line Format

A P-Series plot data line contains the following: (See Figure 45.)
• The plot mode control code: either hex 05 for normal density, or hex 04
(even dot plot) combined with hex 05 (odd dot plot) for double density
plotting.
• The data bytes to be plotted.
• The line terminator hex 0A or hex 0C\.
• With print width set to 13.2 inches, a plot data line may contain any
number of bytes up to a maximum of 132 for horizontal dot density of 60
dpi (DP font) or 198 bytes for a horizontal dot density of 90 dpi (NLQ font).

334
 Plot Data Line Format

• A plot data line may contain any number of data bytes up to the
maximum. If automatic line feed is disabled, any bytes over the maximum
are lost. If the maximum is exceeded and automatic line feed is enabled,
a line feed (LF) is forced and the remaining plot data are printed as text
on the next line.
• The plot mode command may occur anywhere in the line, but plot speed
may decrease if it is not at the beginning of the line.
•

Plot Mode Code 1st Char 2nd Char 3rd Char 132nd Char Line Terminator

001111 111111 110000 000011

hex 05 =
Normal hex 0A =
Density Plot Line Feed
or
A line of hex 04
followed by a line hex 0C =
of hex 05 = Form Feed
High Density Plot

Figure 45. Plot Data Line Format

Normal Density Plot Mode Format:

For normal density plot, the plot line contains: Control Code hex 05, plot data
bytes, and a Line Terminator (hex 0A or hex 0C). The control sequence for
sending the P-Series Normal Density Plot is as follows:
1. Send the plot command code ENQ (hex 05).
2. Send the plot data bytes.
3. Send a line terminator, either a Line Feed (LF, hex 0A) or a Form Feed
(FF, hex 0C). A Carriage Return (CR) may also be used instead of the LF
code, provided the Carriage Return has been configured for Carriage
Return = Carriage Return + Line Feed (CR = CR + LF).
a. A line feed (hex 0A) used as the line terminator plots the contents of
the buffer and advances the paper position a single dot row, based on
the vertical density of the current mode.
b. A form feed (hex 0C) used as the line terminator plots the contents of
the buffer and advances the paper to the next TOF.
4. Regardless of which line terminator code is sent, the emulation will
default to the previously selected print mode (font) unless further plot
control codes are provided with the data.

335
Chapter 8 Plot Mode

Double Density Plot Mode Format:

For double density plot, the plot line contains: Control Code hex 04, plot data
bytes, a Line Terminator (hex 0A or hex 0C), Control Code hex 05, plot data
bytes, and a Line Terminator. The control sequence for sending P-Series
Double Density Plot is as follows:
1. Send the even dot plot control code EOT (hex 04), followed by plot data
bytes.
2. Send a line terminator, which causes the printer to plot the data bytes; the
paper position is not advanced in double density plot; the printer now
waits for the second line of data.
3. Send the odd dot plot control code ENQ (hex 05) and a second line of
data, followed by a line terminator.
a. A line feed (hex 0A) used as the line terminator plots the contents of
the buffer and advances the paper position a single dot row, based on
the vertical density of the current mode. A CR (if CR = CR + LF is
configured) may also be used with the same result.
b. A form feed (hex 0C) used as the line terminator plots the data bytes
and advances the paper position to the next TOF.
4. Regardless of which line terminator code is sent, the emulation will
default to the previously selected print mode (font) unless further plot
control codes are provided with the data.

336
 Plotting The Data

Plotting The Data

P-Series Plot Mode plots the image from the horizontal bit pattern. Figure 46
duplicates the pattern shown in Figure 40 but is modified for Odd Dot Plot.
Eight dot rows are required, two characters per row, six columns per
character.

1st 2nd 1st 2nd

CHARACTER CHARACTER CHARACTER CHARACTER
ODD COLUMNS ODD COLUMNS ASCII DECIMAL ASCII DECIMAL
1 3 5 7 9 11 1 3 5 7 9 11

* 42 @ 64
1
| 73 A 65
2
\ 92 @ 64
3
* 42 @ 64
DOT 4
ROW | 73 A 65
5
\ 92 @ 64
6
* 42 @ 64
7
| 73 A 65
8

Figure 46. Odd Dot Plot Pattern Plan

The following program uses the Odd Dot Plot control code to produce the
image. The image is printed 25 times as shown in Figure 47. An entire dot row
is plotted in one printing pass. Consequently, the first row of all 25 images is
printed in one pass, followed by the second row, etc., until all rows have been
printed.
10 LPRINT “Odd Dot Plot”
20 FOR I=1 TO 8
30 READ R1
40 READ R2
50 LPRINT CHR$(5);
60 FOR N=1 TO 25
70 LPRINT CHR$(R1);CHR$(R2);
80 NEXT N
90 LPRINT
100 NEXT I
110 DATA 42, 64, 73, 65, 92, 64, 42, 64, 73, 65, 92, 64,
42, 64, 73, 65
120 LPRINT

Figure 47. Sample Odd Dot Plot

337
Chapter 8 Combining Graphics And Text

Exiting From P-Series/P-Series XQ Variant Plot Mode

When returning to the print mode from the P-Series Plot Mode, an extra line
feed should be included in the data stream to maintain proper print line
registration relative to the last line of plot graphics. If the extra line feed is not
included, the first character line after the graphics data may be truncated, as
shown in Figure 48.

plot data plot data

@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQR
@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQR
A text line follows plot data, preceded by a A text line follows plot data, but is preceded
single line terminator code. (Text characters by an additional line terminator or LF code.
may extend into the range of the previously (Characters are printed at full-height.)
printed plot line and appear truncated.)

Figure 48. Truncated Character Line

Combining Graphics And Text

You can combine graphics and characters (text) on the same page in two
ways:
• Use Bit Image graphics or Plot mode to produce characters as well as
graphics
• A combination of text (not plot) and graphics can be mixed on the same
page within all protocols.
Text and graphics can be mixed on the same line, however, only by using the
Bit Image graphics in the Serial Matrix, Epson, or Proprinter XL protocols.
Any character or symbol can be created in the Plot mode or with Bit Image
graphics simply by addressing and plotting the appropriate dot positions.
Either Bit Image or Plot mode graphics can be mixed with text within the page
on a line by line basis. Each line of graphics data must include a graphics
control code or the emulation will automatically default to the print mode.
Using Bit Image graphics, it is possible to use the print mode to produce text
on one print pass followed by a print pass to produce graphics on the same
line; however, text characters can be affected by the Bit Image data when
combined on the same line.
The illustration on the following page shows the plot data byte dot patterns
that are referenced in the description of P-Series plot mode on page 334.

338
 2 4 6 8 1012 2 4 6 8 1012 2 4 6 8 1012
BINARY OCT DEC HEX ASCII 1 3 5 7 9 11 BINARY OCT DEC HEX ASCII 1 3 5 7 9 11 BINARY OCT DEC HEX ASCII
1 3 5 7 9 11

0100000 040 32 20 Space 1000000 100 64 40 @ 1100000 140 96 60 `

0100001 041 33 21 ! 1000001 101 65 41 A 1100001 141 97 61 a
0100010 042 34 22 " 1000010 102 66 42 B 1100010 142 98 62 b
0100011 043 35 23 # 1000011 103 67 43 C 1100011 143 99 63 c
0100100 044 36 24 $ 1000100 104 68 44 D 1100100 144 100 64 d
0100101 045 37 25 % 1000101 105 69 45 E 1100101 145 101 65 e
0100110 046 38 26 & 1000110 106 70 46 F 1100110 146 102 66 f
0100111 047 39 27 ' 1000111 107 71 47 G 1100111 147 103 67 g
0101000 050 40 28 ( 1001000 110 72 48 H 1101000 150 104 68 h
0101001 051 41 29 ) 1001001 111 73 49 I 1101001 151 105 69 i
0101010 052 42 2A * 1001010 112 74 4A J 1101010 152 106 6A j
0101011 053 43 2B + 1001011 113 75 4B K 1101011 153 107 6B k
0101100 054 44 2C , 1001100 114 76 4C L 1101100 154 108 6C l
0101101 055 45 2D - 1001101 115 77 4D M 1101101 155 109 6D m
0101110 056 46 2E . 1001110 116 78 4E N 1101110 156 110 6E n
0101111 057 47 2F / 1001111 117 79 4F O 1101111 157 111 6F o
0110000 060 48 30 0 1010000 120 80 50 P 1110000 160 112 70 p
Plot Data Byte Dot Patterns

0110001 061 49 31 1 1010001 121 81 51 Q 1110001 161 113 71 q

0110010 062 50 32 2 1010010 122 82 52 R 1110010 162 114 72 r
0110011 063 51 33 3 1010011 123 83 53 S 1110011 163 115 73 s
0110100 064 52 34 4 1010100 124 84 54 T 1110100 164 116 74 t
0110101 065 53 35 5 1010101 125 85 55 U 1110101 165 117 75 u
0110110 066 54 36 6 1010110 126 86 56 V 1110110 166 118 76 v
0110111 067 55 37 7 1010111 127 87 57 W 1110111 167 119 77 w
0111000 070 56 38 8 1011000 130 88 58 X 1111000 170 120 78 x
0111001 071 57 39 9 1011001 131 89 59 Y 1111001 171 121 79 y
0111010 072 58 3A : 1011010 132 90 5A Z 1111010 172 122 7A z
0111011 073 59 3B ; 1011011 133 91 5B [ 1111011 173 123 7B {
0111100 074 60 3C < 1011100 134 92 5C \ 1111100 174 124 7C
0111101 075 61 3D = 1011101 135 93 5D ] 1111101 175 125 7D }
0111110 076 62 3E > 1011110 136 94 5E ^ 1111110 176 126 7E ~
__
0111111 077 63 3F ? 1011111 137 95 5F 1111111 177 127 7F Delete
Plot Data Byte Dot Patterns

339
Chapter 8 Combining Graphics And Text

340
 9 Vertical Page Formatting

Overview
Rapid vertical paper movement is called slewing. A vertical format unit (VFU)
is a program you load into the printer that enables it to slew paper to preset
locations on a page.
On your printer, LF commands and other commands that produce blank lines
are accumulated and moved in one efficient paper motion. The VFUs are
maintained for compatibility with earlier applications.
Following an introductory overview of how to plan a vertical page format, the
following three methods of vertical formatting are described in this chapter:
• Vertical tab table: The IBM Proprinter III XL, Epson FX, and Serial Matrix
emulations each contain a vertical tab table. It is a set of programmed
vertical tabs.
• Electronic Vertical Format Unit (EVFU): The P-Series and P-Series XQ
Variant emulations provide the EVFU capability.

Planning A Vertical Page Format

Vertical page formatting with a VFU such as the EVFU consists of four steps:
1. Select the type of vertical format you want to use. This is covered in the
next section.
2. Design the form, determining the spacing and channel assignments for
every line. Channel assignments are discussed in the VFU sections.
3. Determine the programming sequence. The format of the sequence
depends on the type of VFU you select and is discussed in each VFU
section of this chapter.
4. Send the programming sequence to the printer in the host data stream.
This loads the VFU program.
Some VFUs require the Paper Instruction (PI) line normally associated with
the Dataproducts parallel interface.

341
Chapter 9 Vertical Tab Table For Proprinter, Epson, And Serial Matrix

VFU Characteristics
Keep in mind the following information when programming and using a VFU:
Elongated Characters – You can use elongated (double high) characters in
VFU programs. The VFU automatically counts one line of elongated
characters as two character lines.
VFU Not Loaded – If the VFU is not loaded, the printer performs a single line
feed in response to VFU commands.
Paper Runaway Protection – If the VFU memory is loaded and a channel
code is sent that was not previously loaded, the printer moves the paper a
single line feed.
Line Spacing – The printer can use either 6 or 8 lines per inch (lpi) spacing.
These VFUs calculate the forms length by line density selected. The 6 and 8
lpi spacing may be mixed on the same form, but should be done carefully.
Form Feed – A form feed sent from the operator panel or a command from
the host moves the paper to the first channel 1, which is the top of form.
Vertical Tab – A VT command moves the paper to the next channel 12. If a
channel 12 is not loaded, a line feed will occur.

Vertical Tab Table For Proprinter, Epson, And Serial Matrix

The IBM Proprinter III XL, Epson FX, and Serial Matrix emulations each
contain a vertical tab table. It is a set of programmed vertical tabs. Various
lines of the form are assigned vertical tabs, which are then accessed by
control code for rapid paper advancement to the tab position.
Two control codes are used for vertical tabbing: ESC B sets single channel
vertical tabs, and VT executes a vertical tab. These codes are described in
Chapters 2, 3, and 5, which cover the Proprinter, Epson, and Serial Matrix
emulations, respectively. The Epson emulation also has ESC / to select one
of eight tab channels and ESC b to set the tabs in a particular channel.

Executing Vertical Tabs

The vertical tab execute code is VT. It prints the contents of the print buffer (if
data are in the buffer) and causes paper movement to the next predefined
vertical tab position. If a tab position is not defined, the paper is moved to the
next line at the current line spacing. If a tab position is at the current line, the
paper is moved to the next tab position. If no tab positions are defined
between the current line and the end of the form, the paper moves to the next
TOF.

342
 Vertical Tab Positions

Vertical Tab Positions

Vertical tab positions are set by line number. A maximum of 16 vertical tab
positions can be set on the form. A sample format is shown in Figure 49.
The first vertical tab is set at line 6 for part number data, a second tab is set at
line 8 for part name data, and a third tab is set at line 14 for quantity data. The
ESC B code assigns the vertical tabs to the lines of the form. Once the tab
positions are set, sending the vertical tab execute code (VT) causes the paper
(currently at the top–of–form position) to advance to the first tab position for
PART NUMBER data. Sending another VT moves the paper to the second
tab position for PART NAME, followed by a third VT to access the third tab
position for QUANTITY data.

Form Data Form Line Number Vertical Tab

1 Top of Form

PART NUMBER 6 Tab 1

PART NAME 8 Tab 2

9
10

11

12
13

QUANTITY 14 Tab 3

15

20

Figure 49. Example of Vertical Tab Positions

343
Chapter 9 EVFU For P-Series And P-Series XQ Variant Emulations

EVFU For P-Series And P-Series XQ Variant Emulations

The EVFU may be selected in P-Series or the P-Series XQ Variant protocol.
The EVFU provides 14 or 16 channels to identify up to 192 lines depending
on the state of the paper instruction line. The programming sequence is 1)
start load code; 2) line identification code; and 3) end load code.

Start Load Code - Hex 1E or 6E

The start load code clears and initializes the EVFU memory for the memory
load program. The start load code is hex 1E when the PI line is disabled (low)
or hex 6E when the PI line is enabled (high).

Channel Assignment
The EVFU memory has the capacity for 192-line forms. The first line
identification code (channel code) in the memory load program defines the
first line on the form; the second line identification code defines the second
line on the form, etc. Each line must have a line identification code. Filler
channel codes are used for lines that will not be accessed by the print
program. Any channel code can be used as a filler except channel code 1,
which is reserved for the top-of-form, and channel code 12, which is reserved
as the vertical tab channel. The same filler channel code can be repeated as
necessary for any number of lines.
Channel 1 - The top-of-form code, reserved as the first line on the form or the
first line printed (top-of-form position). The operating program sends the
channel 1 code to advance to the top of the next form. After the memory is
loaded, a Form Feed code (FF, hex 0C) will move the paper to the next
channel 1 (top-of-form).
Channels 2 through 11, 13 and 14 - Used as general channel codes (line
identification codes) or filler channels. Each line on the form must be identified
by a channel code. When the operating program sends the channel code, the
paper advances to the line identified by the channel code. Lines not used by
the operating program must be identified by filler channels (unused channel
codes).
Channel 12 - Reserved as the Vertical Tab channel. The Vertical Tab code
(VT, hex 0B) prints any data in the print buffer and rapidly slews the paper to
the next line identified by the channel 12 code. If channel 12 is not loaded in
the EVFU memory, a single line feed will be executed when a VT code is sent.
Channel 15 and 16 - Used as general channel codes or filler channels only
when the VFU is accessed by the PI line. In an EVFU form that does not use
the PI line, the codes for Channels 15 and 16 function as the Start Load and
End Load codes.

344
 End Load - Hex 1F Or 6F

End Load - Hex 1F Or 6F

The end load code terminates the memory load program. The end load code
is hex 1F when the PI line is disabled (low) or hex 6F when the PI line is high.
Channel codes in excess of 192 channels received prior to the end load code
are discarded.

Using The EVFU

Once the EVFU program has been enabled and loaded, sending the
appropriate channel code to the printer will cause any data in the buffer to
print and will position the paper to the next line on the form having the
specified channel number assigned in EVFU memory.
For a data byte to be recognized as an EVFU instruction, the following criteria
must be met:
1. PI line must be enabled and set high; and
2. Data bit 5 must be 0 (not set).
OR:
1. PI line must be disabled or low; and
2. Data bit 5 must be 1 (set).
Given these conditions, the lower four bits of a byte will specify the EVFU
channel number. Table 72 lists the EVFU channels and their equivalent data
bytes with the PI line enabled; Table 73 lists the EVFU channel and their
equivalent data bytes with the PI line disabled.

345
Chapter 9 EVFU For P-Series And P-Series XQ Variant Emulations

Table 72. P-Series EVFU Codes - PI Line Enabled

ASCII Data Bits

Channel
Hex Dec. Code PI 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

00 0 NUL 1 X X X 0 0 0 0 0 1 (TOF)

01 1 SOH 1 X X X 0 0 0 0 1 2
02 2 STX 1 X X X 0 0 0 1 0 3

03 3 ETX 1 X X X 0 0 0 1 1 4

04 4 EOT 1 X X X 0 0 1 0 0 5

05 5 ENQ 1 X X X 0 0 1 0 1 6

06 6 ACK 1 X X X 0 0 1 1 0 7

07 7 BEL 1 X X X 0 0 1 1 1 8

08 8 BS 1 X X X 0 1 0 0 0 9

09 9 HT 1 X X X 0 1 0 0 1 10

0A 10 LF 1 X X X 0 1 0 1 0 11

0B 11 VT 1 X X X 0 1 0 1 1 12 (VT)
0C 12 FF 1 X X X 0 1 1 0 0 13

0D 13 CR 1 X X X 0 1 1 0 1 14

0E 14 SO 1 X 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 15

0F 15 SI 1 X 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 16

6E 110 n 1 X 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 Start Load

6F 111 o 1 X 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 End Load

(X = Undefined, 0, or 1) (1 = High) (0 = Low)

346
 Clearing the EVFU Memory

Table 73. P-Series EVFU Codes - PI Line Disabled or Not Used

ASCII Data Bits

Channel
Hex Dec. Code 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

10 16 DLE 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 (TOF)

11 17 DC1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 2
12 18 DC2 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 3

13 19 DC3 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 4

14 20 DC4 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 5

15 21 NAK 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 6
16 22 SYN 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 7

17 23 ETB 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 8

18 24 CAN 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 9

19 25 EM 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 10

1A 26 SUB 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 11

1B 27 ESC 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 12 (VT)

1C 28 FS 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 13

1D 29 GS 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 14

1E 30 RS 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 Start Load

1F 31 US 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 End Load

(X = Undefined, 0, or 1) (1 = High) (0 = Low)

Clearing the EVFU Memory

The following actions will reset (clear) the EVFU memory:
1. Sending only the start load code.
2. Sending a start load code followed immediately by an end load code.
3. A second start load code is received, resulting in reinitialization of the
EVFU. (This allows the host data to be restarted.)
When the EVFU memory is cleared, the forms length returns to the previously
set value and the current print position becomes the top-of-form (TOF).

347
Chapter 9 EVFU For P-Series And P-Series XQ Variant Emulations

Relative Line Slewing

Another method of moving paper using the PI line results in vertical slews of a
specified number of lines within the form relative to the current print line
(rather than slewing to a specific line). For this to occur, three criteria must be
met:
1. The PI line must be enabled and set high;
2. Data bit 5 must be 1 (set); and
3. The EVFU must be the selected Vertical Format Unit.
The Slew Relative configuration and the status of data bits 1-4 determine the
number of lines slewed as described in Table 74.
NOTE: The state of data bit 5 is the difference between line slewing and
using the interface lines as EVFU channel codes.
As long as the EVFU is selected, this type of vertical paper motion will occur
regardless of whether the EVFU memory is loaded or not.
If the Double High for One Line attribute is active, n+1 lines will be slewed
rather than n lines.

348
 Relative Line Slewing

Table 74. P-Series EVFU Line Slewing

ASCII Data Bits

Lines Slewed
Hex Dec. Code PI 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

10 16 DLE 1 X X X 1 0 0 0 0 1

11 17 DC1 1 X X X 1 0 0 0 1 2
12 18 DC2 1 X X X 1 0 0 1 0 3

13 19 DC3 1 X X X 1 0 0 1 1 4

14 20 DC4 1 X X X 1 0 1 0 0 5

15 21 NAK 1 X X X 1 0 1 0 1 6
16 22 SYN 1 X X X 1 0 1 1 0 7

17 23 ETB 1 X X X 1 0 1 1 1 8

18 24 CAN 1 X X X 1 1 0 0 0 9
19 25 EM 1 X X X 1 1 0 0 1 10

1A 26 SUB 1 X X X 1 1 0 1 0 11

1B 27 ESC 1 X X X 1 1 0 1 1 12

1C 28 FS 1 X X X 1 1 1 0 0 13

1D 29 GS 1 X X X 1 1 1 0 1 14

1E 30 RS 1 X 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 15

1F 31 US 1 X 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 16

(X = Undefined, 0, or 1) (1 = High) (0 = Low)

349
Chapter 9 EVFU For P-Series And P-Series XQ Variant Emulations

350
 A Migration To The IBM
6500-v Printer

Overview
Most of the information you will need to install and configure an IBM 6500-v
printer is provided in Chapters 2, 3, and 4 of the IBM Infoprint 6500 Line
Matrix Printer User’s Manual. This appendix provides assistance for the
process of configuring the IBM 6500-v printer at a site where previous
Printronix ASCII line matrix printers are or have been in use. The goal of this
appendix is to make your migration from a previous Printronix ASCII printer to
the IBM 6500-v as simple and trouble free as possible, with the minimum
amount of modifications required to your host configuration and application
software.
NOTE: Please familiarize yourself with all sections of this Appendix. In the
section on “Printer–Specific Migration Information,” you need to read
only the information describing the Printronix printer models at your
site.
Information is provided on migrating from the following Printronix printers to
the IBM 6500-v:
• P4280/P9212–Series ASCII Printers
• P9012 ASCII Printers
• P3000–Series ASCII printers including the P3040 and P3240
• P6000–Series ASCII printers including the P6040, P6080, P6240, and
P6280
• MVP–Series printers including the MVP–150, MVP–150B, MVP–L150,
and MVP–L150B
• P300/P600–Series Printers

351
Appendix A Migration Checklist

Documentation Related To Migration

The IBM Infoprint 6500 Line Matrix Printer User’s Manual provides complete
unpacking and first–time installation information. In addition, a tutorial on
using the configuration menus and detailed information on each part of the
configuration menus for the 6500-v printer are provided.
If you have the Intelligent Graphics Processor (IGP) Printronix Graphics
Language (PGL) installed on your previous printer, information to help you in
migrating from a previous IGP/PGL to the 6500-v IGP/PGL is provided in the
IBM Infoprint 6500 IGP** Programmer’s Reference Manual.
If you have the Intelligent Graphics Processor Code V Graphics Language
(IGP Code V or VGL) installed on your previous printer, information to help
you in migrating from a previous IGP Code V or VGL to the 6500-v IGP/VGL
is provided in the IBM Infoprint 6500 Code V** Programmer’s Manual.
If you are migrating from a Coax/Twinax printer to the 6500-v, information to
help you in migrating from these platforms is provided in the IBM Infoprint
6500 Coax/Twinax Programmer’s Reference Manual.

Migration Checklist
Before you remove the previous Printronix printer from your site in order to
install the IBM 6500-v, it is important for you to obtain the current
configuration of that printer, so that you can replicate it for the 6500-v.
Guidelines and special utility software for that purpose are described in this
appendix.
Once you know the configuration of the previous printer, you can use the
conversion tables in this appendix to create a configuration for the 6500-v that
is as close as possible to that of your previous printer.
Information on host interface selection and cabling is also provided.
Additional assistance may be needed in some situations, such as when the
previous printer and its configuration information have already been removed
before the 6500-v is installed. For situations such as these, guidelines for
contacting an IBM Customer Service engineer are provided at the end of this
appendix.
The migration process is briefly summarized in the following checklist:
1. Determine the configuration of the Printronix printer previously in use at
your site, either from a configuration printout, checking your printer switch
settings, or by printing the test file provided (for the P300/P600 only). The
method recommended for your printer is described within the topic
“Printer–Specific Migration Information.”
2. Plan a configuration for the 6500-v that is most similar to the previous
configuration. Use the equivalence tables provided for each printer type to
pinpoint which 6500-v menu options correspond to the configuration
printout you obtained in Step 1. You may wish to make a copy of the
equivalence table for your printer, and note exactly which 6500-v menu
option values you plan to select.

352
 Documentation Related To Migration

3. Choose a communications interface and the correct cabling between the

6500-v printer and the host system, as described in the section “Selecting
a Communications Interface and Cables.”
4. Install the IBM 6500-v at your site, following the instructions in Chapter
Two of the IBM Infoprint 6500 Line Matrix Printer User’s Manual.
Configure the 6500-v to match the configuration you planned in Step 2.
Instructions for using the operator panel and LCD message display to
configure the IBM 6500-v are provided in Chapters 3 and 4 of the User’s
Manual. Save the new 6500-v configuration once you have finished
modifying it, and define it as the power–on configuration custom set.
5. Troubleshoot problems with your installation if necessary, especially for
those situations in which your previous Printronix printer has already been
removed from the site before the 6500-v is installed. Refer to the
“Troubleshooting” section.
6. If you are experiencing difficulty with installation of the IBM 6500-v printer
in order to replace a previous printer, please contact your authorized IBM
service representative for assistance.

Printer–Specific Migration Information

This subsection provides equivalency tables for the configuration of each
previous printer that you may have at your site. These tables list a particular
configuration menu option for the previous printer, and provide the equivalent
menu option for the IBM 6500-v. The complete set of menus and the values
you may select for each menu option are described in detail in Chapter 4 of
the IBM Infoprint 6500 Line Matrix Printer User’s Manual.
NOTE: The operator panels and configuration menus for Printronix printers
have been revised periodically to add new features and functionality.
Your particular printer may vary slightly from what is shown.
The equivalency tables for each migration section are divided into two
columns. The left-hand column of each table shows the menu options that
were provided with a previous printer. The right-hand column lists the
equivalent option that is provided with the IBM 6500-v ASCII printer, and the
path through the menus to reach that option. Where several menu items are
shown at the same level of indent in the right-hand column, this indicates that
any of these items is a possible path to the menu option.

353
Appendix A Printer–Specific Migration Information

A sample row from an equivalency table is shown below.

P4280 / P9212 Menu Option IBM 6500-v Menu Option

Auto Line Feed Emulation Configuration

Printer Emulation Configuration

Proprinter III XL Emulation

Epson Emulation

P–Series Emulation

P–Series XQ Emulation

Serial Matrix Emulation

Auto LF

In the example shown above, the ASCII P4280/P9212 menu option for
selecting Auto Line Feed is shown in the left-hand column. In the right-hand
column, the equivalent menu option for the IBM 6500-v printer, Auto LF, is
shown. The path through the IBM 6500-v menus to reach the Auto LF option
traverses from the main menu item Emulation Configuration to Printer
Emulation Configuration through any of the ASCII emulations to Auto LF.
The IBM 6500-v main configuration menu is shown in Figure 50. The
complete set of configuration menus referenced in the equivalency tables is
provided in Chapter 4 of the IBM Infoprint 6500 Line Matrix Printer User’s
Manual.

354
 Documentation Related To Migration

Quick Setup Printer Configuration Twinax Coax

Control Management Interface 1 Interface 1

Interface Selection Interface Selection Recall Custom Set Print Language Print Language
Twinax Printer Emulation Display Language Save Current Values Print Character Table 7 Print Character Table
Adapter Address Print Direction Delete Custom Set Active Print Language Active Print Language
Ethernet Address Hex Print Mode Change Power On Set Twinax Printer Emulation PA1
Wireless Address Power On State Protect Custom Sets Printer Address PA2
ASCII Printer Emulation Paper Jam Detection Print Custom Set Values World Trade Buffer Reprint
P-Series SFCC Forms Speed Config Key Default Cancel Buffers Printer Emulation 9
Characters Per Inch Set Platen at BOF Name Custom Sets Early Print Complete 2 Early Print Complete
Lines Per Inch Shuttle Timeout Reset Custom Set Names Hex Transparent Control SCS Buffer Control
Forms Width Energy Saver Timer Undefined Char Report Cancel Buffers
Forms Length OCR Font Density Undefined Char Sub Hex Transparent Control
Print Quality Eject/Restore Load Alt Char Option Mono/Dual Case
Active Graphic Emulation PTR Setup Option LAC Approximation Undefined Char Sub
Margins 11 File System Print Text Direction Print Text Direction
Form Length 11 Power Stacker 6 Override Host Intervention Required
Form Width 11 Auto Elevator 6 Format Control Compatibility Options
IGP SFCC Printer Management Port Maximum Printable Translate Table
Save Current Values Top Exit Tear Distance Width Override Host
Change Power On Set Ribbon End Point Hex Print Mode Format Control
Ribbon Action C/T Hotport 8 C/T Hotport 8
Maximum Printable
Width
Hex Print Mode

NOTE: 1The Twinax and Coax interface menus only appear in the menus if the IBM Coax/
Twinax feature is installed.
2 The Early Print Complete option appears in the Twinax menu only if the IPDS feature is
installed.
3
IPDS, Code V Emulation, and IGP Emulation options appear in the menus only if these
features are installed.
4 Ethernet information only appears when the ethernet feature is installed.
5Ether the Ethernet Interface menu or the Parallel Interface menu will display. They
cannot display at the same time.
6 If installed.
7 Not if 4234-12 is running IPDS code.
8 Only if Autoswitching is enabled.
9 Only if Coax Emulation is enabled.
10 The 5250 and 3270 Interface menu only appear in the menus if the TN5250/3270
feature is installed.
11
Only if ANSI is selected.

Figure 50. The Configuration Main Menu

355
Appendix A Printer–Specific Migration Information

5250 3270 Network Parallel

Interface 10 Interface 10 Setup6 Interface 5

Print Language Print Language Adapter Address Interface Type

Print Character Table Print Character Table Adapter Parameters PC Parallel
Active Print Language Active Print Language Ethernet Address Dataproducts
Hex Transparent Control Early Print Complete Ethernet Parameters IEEE 1284
Undefined Char Report Hex Transparent Control Wireless Address Parallel Hotport
Undefined Char Sub Mono/Dual Case Wireless Parameters
Print Text Direction Undefined Char Sub Wireless Kerberos
Override Host Print Text Direction Wireless LEAP
Format Control Intervention Required
Maximum Printable Width Compatibility Options
C/T Hotport Override Host
Format Control
C/T Hotport
Maximum Printable Width

Serial Emulation Operator Printer

Interface Configuration Print Tests Information

Interface Type IPDS 3 Printer Demonstration* Installed Memory

Data Protocol Active Graphic Emulation Print Error Log Power On Time
Baud Rate ANSI 6 Print Ribbon Log Printing Time
Data Bits IGP Emulation 3 Ripple Print Print Strokes
Stop Bits Code V Emulation 3 All E’s 11 Inch Pages
Parity ASCII Printer All H’s
Data Terminal Ready Emulation All E’s + FF
Request To Send Printer Emul Config Underlines
Buffer Size In Kbytes Print Format Adapter Test Page 4
Poll Character Ethernet Test Page 4
One Char Enquiry Clear Error Log
Serial Hotport
Framing Errors

356
 Migrating From P4280 And P9212 ASCII Printers

Migrating From P4280 And P9212 ASCII Printers

The Printronix P4280 and P9212 ASCII printers provide a configuration menu
option that generates a configuration printout of the current configuration. You
may have a current configuration printout stored with the printer. If not, the
User’s Manual or the Quick Start Guide for your printer provides a procedure
for printing the current printer configuration as well as the factory default
configuration.
Table 75 lists P4280 and P9212 ASCII menu options and provides the
corresponding menu options for the IBM 6500-v. You may wish to make a
copy of this table, and pencil in the option values from your previous printer
configuration printout. Then you can configure equivalent option values for the
6500-v once it is installed and ready to be configured.

Table 75. P4280/P9212 to 6500-v Conversion Table

P4280 / P9212 Menu Option IBM 6500-v Menu Options

RIBBON LIFE

Job Rate N/A

Ribbon Size N/A

When Worn Action N/A

Enable/Disable N/A

FONT

Font Emulation Configuration

Print Format

Print Quality

CHARACTER SET

Select Set Emulation Configuration

Printer Emulation Configuration

P–Series / Serial Matrix Emulation

Character Sets

Select Subset Emulation Configuration

Printer Emulation Configuration

P–Series / Serial Matrix Emulation

Print Language

Select Subset Primary

357
Appendix A Printer–Specific Migration Information

Table 75. P4280/P9212 to 6500-v Conversion Table (continued)

P4280 / P9212 Menu Option IBM 6500-v Menu Options

Select Subset Extended

Select Language Emulation Configuration

Printer Emulation Configuration

P–Series / Serial Matrix Emulation

Print Language
Multinational

APPLICATION COMPATIBILITY

Printer Protocol Emulation Configuration

ASCII Printer Emulation

Buffer Size N/A

Uppercase Select Emulation Configuration

Printer Emulation Configuration

P–Series XQ Emulation

Upper Case Select

Printer Select Emulation Configuration

Printer Emulation Configuration

Epson Emulation

Serial Matrix Emulation

Printer Select

Paper Advance Switch N/A

Power On State Printer Control

Power On State

Alarm On Fault Printer Control

Alarm Control

Shuttle Timeout Printer Control

Shuttle Timeout

Unidirectional Printer Control

Print Direction

358
 Migrating From P4280 And P9212 ASCII Printers

Table 75. P4280/P9212 to 6500-v Conversion Table (continued)

P4280 / P9212 Menu Option IBM 6500-v Menu Options

Select SFCC Emulation Configuration

Printer Emulation Configuration

Select SFCC (cont.) P-Series Emulation

Select SFCC
80-9F Hex Emulation Configuration

Printer Emulation Configuration

P-Series / Serial Matrix Emulation

Alternate Set 80-9F

Control Code 06 Emulation Configuration

Printer Emulation Configuration

P–Series Emulation

P–Series XQ Emulation

Serial Matrix Emulation

Control Code 06

Control Code 08 Emulation Configuration

Printer Emulation Configuration

P–Series Emulation

Control Code 08

Overstrike Emulation Configuration

Printer Emulation Configuration

P–Series / Serial Matrix Emulation

Overstrike

Compress Print Emulation Configuration

Printer Emulation Configuration

P–Series XQ Emulation

Compressed Print
Draft Print Emulation Configuration

Printer Emulation Configuration

P–Series XQ Emulation

359
Appendix A Printer–Specific Migration Information

Table 75. P4280/P9212 to 6500-v Conversion Table (continued)

P4280 / P9212 Menu Option IBM 6500-v Menu Options

High Speed Print Mode

Font Select / Elongated Emulation Configuration

Font Select / Elongated (cont) Printer Emulation Configuration

P–Series XQ Emulation

Elong / Alt. Font

View N/A

Display Language Printer Control

Display Language
PAPER FORMAT

Line Spacing Emulation Configuration

Print Format
Lines Per Inch

Form Length Set Emulation Configuration

Print Format
Forms Length

Auto Line Feed Emulation Configuration

Printer Emulation Configuration

Proprinter III XL Emulation

Epson Emulation

P–Series Emulation

P–Series XQ Emulation

Serial Matrix Emulation

Auto LF
Define CR Code Emulation Configuration

Printer Emulation Configuration

Proprinter III XL Emulation

Epson Emulation

P–Series Emulation

P–Series XQ Emulation

360
 Migrating From P4280 And P9212 ASCII Printers

Table 75. P4280/P9212 to 6500-v Conversion Table (continued)

P4280 / P9212 Menu Option IBM 6500-v Menu Options

Serial Matrix Emulation

Define CR Code

Define LF Code Emulation Configuration

Printer Emulation Configuration

Proprinter III XL Emulation

Epson Emulation

P–Series Emulation

P–Series XQ Emulation
Serial Matrix Emulation

Define LF Code

VFU Select Emulation Configuration

Printer Emulation Configuration

P–Series Emulation

P–Series XQ Emulation

EVFU Selected

Perforation Skip Emulation Configuration

Print Format

Perforation Skip

Paper Out N/A

Paperout Adjust See the IBM Infoprint 6500 Maintenance Information Manual
for instructions on setting the “End of Forms Adjust” value.
PMD Fault Printer Control

Paper Jam Detection

Slew Relative Emulation Configuration

Printer Emulation Configuration

P–Series XQ Emulation

Slew Relative
Emulation Configuration

Print Format

Forms Width

361
Appendix A Printer–Specific Migration Information

Table 75. P4280/P9212 to 6500-v Conversion Table (continued)

P4280 / P9212 Menu Option IBM 6500-v Menu Options

HOST INTERFACE – Parallel Printer Control

Interface Selection

Parallel Interface

Interface Type

Data Bit 8 Parallel Interface

PC Parallel / Dataproducts

Data Bit 8

PI Line Parallel Interface

Dataproducts

PI Ignored

Data Polarity Parallel Interface

PC Parallel / Dataproducts

Data Polarity

Resp. Polarity Parallel Interface

PC Parallel

Response Polarity

Dataproducts
Data Request Polarity

Fast Busy Parallel Interface

PC Parallel

Busy On Strobe

Strobe Polarity Parallel Interface

PC Parallel / Dataproducts
Strobe Polarity

Latch Data On Parallel Interface

PC Parallel

Latch Data On

362
 Migrating From P4280 And P9212 ASCII Printers

Table 75. P4280/P9212 to 6500-v Conversion Table (continued)

P4280 / P9212 Menu Option IBM 6500-v Menu Options

HOST INTERFACE – Serial

Printer Control

Interface Selection

Serial Interface
Interface Type

Data Protocol Serial Interface

Data Protocol

Data Rate Serial Interface

Baud Rate

Word Length Serial Interface

Data Bits

Stop Bit Serial Interface

Stop Bit

Parity Serial Interface

Parity

Bit 8 Function N/A

Data Term Ready Serial Interface

Data Terminal Ready

Request To Send Serial Interface

Request To Send

Reverse Channel N/A

363
Appendix A Printer–Specific Migration Information

Migrating from P9012 ASCII Printers

The Printronix P9012 ASCII printers provide a configuration menu option on
the Diagnostics menu that generates a configuration printout of the current
configuration. You may have a current configuration printout stored with the
printer. If not, the User Manual for your printer provides a procedure for
printing the current printer configuration as well as the factory default
configuration.
Table 76 lists P9012 ASCII menu options, and provides the corresponding
menu options for the IBM 6500-v. You may wish to make a copy of this table,
and pencil in the option values from your previous printer configuration
printout. Then you can configure equivalent option values for the 6500-v once
it is installed and ready to be configured.

Table 76. P9012 to 6500-v Conversion Table

P9012 Menu Option IBM 6500-v Menu Option

PRINT STATISTICS

Power On Time N/A

Print Time N/A

Shuttle Strokes N/A

Print Lines N/A

Print Pages N/A

CONFIGURATION
Form Length Set Emulation Configuration

Print Format

Forms Length

Line Spacing Emulation Configuration

Print Format

Lines Per Inch

Print Mode Emulation Configuration

Print Format

Print Quality
RIBBON LIFE

Job Rate N/A

Ribbon Size N/A

When Worn Action N/A

364
 Migrating from P9012 ASCII Printers

Table 76. P9012 to 6500-v Conversion Table (continued)

P9012 Menu Option IBM 6500-v Menu Option

Enable / Disable N/A

CHARACTER SET

Select Set Emulation Configuration

Printer Emulation Configuration

P–Series / Serial Matrix Emulation

Character Sets

Select Subset Emulation Configuration

Printer Emulation Configuration

P–Series / Serial Matrix Emulation

Print Language

Select Subset Primary

Select Subset Extended

Select Language Emulation Configuration

Printer Emulation Configuration

P–Series / Serial Matrix Emulation

Print Language

Multinational

APPLICATION COMPATIBILITY

Printer Protocol Emulation Configuration

ASCII Printer Emulation

Buffer Size Parallel Interface

PC Parallel

Buffer Size in Kilobytes

Serial Interface

Buffer Size in Kilobytes

Power On State Printer Control

Power On State

Alarm On Fault Printer Control

Alarm Control

365
Appendix A Printer–Specific Migration Information

Table 76. P9012 to 6500-v Conversion Table (continued)

P9012 Menu Option IBM 6500-v Menu Option

Shuttle Timeout Printer Control

Shuttle Timeout

Unidirectional Printer Control

Print Direction

Select SFCC Emulation Configuration

Printer Emulation Configuration

P–Series Emulation

Select SFCC
80–9F Hex Emulation Configuration

Printer Emulation Configuration

P–Series / Serial Matrix Emulation

Alternate Set 80–9F

Control Code 06 Emulation Configuration

Printer Emulation Configuration

P–Series Emulation

P–Series XQ Emulation

Serial Matrix Emulation

Control Code 06

Control Code 08 Emulation Configuration

Printer Emulation Configuration

P–Series Emulation

Control Code 08

Overstrike Emulation Configuration

Printer Emulation Configuration

P–Series / Serial Matrix Emulation

Overstrike

Display Language Printer Control

Display Language

366
 Migrating from P9012 ASCII Printers

Table 76. P9012 to 6500-v Conversion Table (continued)

P9012 Menu Option IBM 6500-v Menu Option

PAPER FORMAT
Auto Line Feed Emulation Configuration

Printer Emulation Configuration

Proprinter III XL Emulation

Epson Emulation

P–Series Emulation

P–Series XQ Emulation

Serial Matrix Emulation

Auto LF

Define CR Code Emulation Configuration

Printer Emulation Configuration

Proprinter III XL Emulation

Epson Emulation

P–Series Emulation

P–Series XQ Emulation

Serial Matrix Emulation

Define CR Code

VFU Select Emulation Configuration

Printer Emulation Configuration

P–Series Emulation

P–Series XQ Emulation

EVFU Selected

Perforation Skip Emulation Configuration

Print Format

Perforation Skip

Paper Out N/A

PMD Fault Printer Control

Paper Jam Detection

367
Appendix A Printer–Specific Migration Information

Table 76. P9012 to 6500-v Conversion Table (continued)

P9012 Menu Option IBM 6500-v Menu Option

Print Width Emulation Configuration

Print Format

Forms Width

HOST INTERFACE – Parallel

Printer Control

Interface Selection

Parallel Interface

Interface Type
Data Bit 8 Parallel Interface

PC Parallel / Dataproducts

Data Bit 8

PI Line Parallel Interface

Dataproducts

PI Ignored

Data Polarity Parallel Interface

PC Parallel / Dataproducts

Data Polarity
Resp. Polarity Parallel Interface

PC Parallel

Response Polarity

Dataproducts

Data Request Polarity

Fast Busy Parallel Interface

PC Parallel

Busy On Strobe

Strobe Polarity Parallel Interface

PC Parallel / Dataproducts

Strobe Polarity

368
 Migrating from P9012 ASCII Printers

Table 76. P9012 to 6500-v Conversion Table (continued)

P9012 Menu Option IBM 6500-v Menu Option

Latch Data On Parallel Interface

PC Parallel

Latch Data On

HOST INTERFACE – SERIAL

Printer Control

Interface Selection

Serial Interface

Interface Type
Data Protocol Serial Interface

Data Protocol

Data Rate Serial Interface

Baud Rate

Word Length Serial Interface

Data Bits

Stop Bit Serial Interface

Stop Bits

Parity Serial Interface

Parity

Bit 8 Function N/A

CD and DSR N/A

CTS and DSR N/A

Data Term Ready Serial Interface

Data Terminal Ready

Request To Send Serial Interface

Request To Send

Reverse Channel N/A

369
Appendix A Printer–Specific Migration Information

Migrating From P3000 ASCII Printers

The Printronix P3000–Series ASCII printers (including the P3040 and P3240)
provide an option on the Diagnostics menu that generates a configuration
printout of the current configuration. You may have a current configuration
printout stored with the printer. If not, the User Manual for your printer
provides a procedure for printing the current (or default) printer configuration.
Table 77 lists the P3000 ASCII menu options, and provides the corresponding
menu options for the IBM 6500-v. You may wish to make a copy of this table,
and pencil in the option values from your P3000 printer configuration printout.
Then you can configure equivalent option values for the 6500-v once it is
installed and ready to be configured.

Table 77. P3000 to 6500-v Conversion Table

P3000 Menu Option IBM 6500-v Menu Option

Forms Length Set Emulation Configuration

Print Format

Forms Length

Line Spacing Emulation Configuration

Print Format

Lines Per Inch

Print Mode Emulation Configuration

Print Format

Print Quality

Select Set Emulation Configuration

Printer Emulation Configuration

P–Series / Serial Matrix Emulation

Character Sets
Select Subset Emulation Configuration

Printer Emulation Configuration

P–Series / Serial Matrix Emulation

Print Language

Select Subset Primary

Select Subset Extended

370
 Migrating From P3000 ASCII Printers

Table 77. P3000 to 6500-v Conversion Table (continued)

P3000 Menu Option IBM 6500-v Menu Option

Select Language Emulation Configuration

Printer Emulation Configuration

P–Series / Serial Matrix Emulation

Print Language
APPLICATION COMPATIBILITY

Printer Protocol Emulation Configuration

ASCII Printer Emulation

Printer Select Emulation Configuration

Printer Emulation Configuration

Epson Emulation

Serial Matrix Emulation

Printer Select

Paper Advance Switch N/A

Power On State Printer Control

Power On State

Alarm On Fault Printer Control

Alarm Control

Unidirectional Printer Control

Print Direction

Select SFCC Emulation Configuration

Printer Emulation Configuration

P–Series Emulation

Select SFCC
80–9F Hex Emulation Configuration

Printer Emulation Configuration

P–Series / Serial Matrix Emulation

Alternate Set 80–9F

Control Code 08 Emulation Configuration

Printer Emulation Configuration

371
Appendix A Printer–Specific Migration Information

Table 77. P3000 to 6500-v Conversion Table (continued)

P3000 Menu Option IBM 6500-v Menu Option

P–Series Emulation

Control Code 08

Overstrike Emulation Configuration

Printer Emulation Configuration

P–Series / Serial Matrix Emulation

Overstrike

Control Code 06 Emulation Configuration

Printer Emulation Configuration

P–Series Emulation

P–Series XQ Emulation

Serial Matrix Emulation

Control Code 06

PAPER FORMAT

Auto Line Feed Emulation Configuration

Printer Emulation Configuration

Proprinter III XL Emulation

Epson Emulation

P–Series Emulation

P–Series XQ Emulation

Serial Matrix Emulation

Auto LF

Define CR Code Emulation Configuration

Printer Emulation Configuration

Proprinter III XL Emulation

Epson Emulation

P–Series Emulation

P–Series XQ Emulation

Serial Matrix Emulation

Define CR Code

372
 Migrating From P3000 ASCII Printers

Table 77. P3000 to 6500-v Conversion Table (continued)

P3000 Menu Option IBM 6500-v Menu Option

Define LF Code Emulation Configuration

Printer Emulation Configuration

Proprinter III XL Emulation

Epson Emulation
P–Series Emulation

P–Series XQ Emulation

Serial Matrix Emulation

Define LF Code
VFU Select Emulation Configuration

Printer Emulation Configuration

P–Series Emulation

P–Series XQ Emulation

EVFU Selected

Perforation Skip Emulation Configuration

Print Format

Perforation Skip

Paper Out N/A

PMD Fault Printer Control

Paper Jam Detection

Print Width Emulation Configuration

Print Format

Forms Width

HOST INTERFACE – Parallel

Printer Control

Interface Selection

Parallel Interface

Interface Type

Data Bit 8 Parallel Interface

PC Parallel / Dataproducts

373
Appendix A Printer–Specific Migration Information

Table 77. P3000 to 6500-v Conversion Table (continued)

P3000 Menu Option IBM 6500-v Menu Option

Data Bit 8

Data Polarity Parallel Interface

PC Parallel / Dataproducts

Data Polarity

Resp Polarity Parallel Interface

PC Parallel

Response Polarity

Dataproducts
Data Request Polarity

PI Line Parallel Interface

Dataproducts

PI Ignored

Strobe Polarity Parallel Interface

PC Parallel / Dataproducts

Strobe Polarity

Latch Data On Parallel Interface

PC Parallel
Latch Data On

HOST INTERFACE – Serial

Printer Control

Interface Selection

Serial Interface

Interface Type
Data Protocol Serial Interface

Data Protocol

Data Rate Serial Interface

Baud Rate

Word Length Serial Interface

Data Bits

374
 Migrating From P6000 ASCII Printers

Table 77. P3000 to 6500-v Conversion Table (continued)

P3000 Menu Option IBM 6500-v Menu Option

Stop Bit Serial Interface

Stop Bits

Parity Serial Interface

Parity
Bit 8 Function N/A

CD and CTS N/A

DSR N/A

Data Term Ready Serial Interface

Data Terminal Ready

Request To Send Serial Interface

Request To Send

Reverse Channel N/A

Migrating From P6000 ASCII Printers

The Printronix P6000–Series ASCII printers (including the P6040, P6080,
P6240, and P6280) provide an option on the Diagnostics menu for generating
a configuration printout. You may have a current configuration printout stored
with the printer. If not, the printer User’s Manual provides a procedure for
printing the current (or factory default) configuration.
Table 78 lists only the P6x40 and 6x80 Level One Firmware menu options,
and provides corresponding options for the IBM 6500-v. Table 79 lists P6x40,
and P6x80 ASCII Level 2 Firmware menu options, and provides the
corresponding menu options for the IBM 6500-v. You may wish to make a
copy of the table for your printer, and pencil in the option values from your
configuration printout. Then you can configure equivalent option values for the
6500-v once it is installed and ready to be configured.

375
Appendix A Printer–Specific Migration Information

Table 78. P6x40/P6x80 (Level One Firmware) to 6500-v Conversion Table

P6x40x6x80 Level One

IBM 6500-v Menu Option
Menu Option

APPLICATION PARAMETERS

Forms Length Set Emulation Configuration

Print Format

Forms Length

Print Mode Emulation Configuration

Print Format

Print Quality

Line Spacing Emulation Configuration

Print Format

Lines Per Inch

Character Set Emulation Configuration

Printer Emulation Configuration

P–Series / Serial Matrix Emulation

Character Sets

Auto Line Feed Emulation Configuration

Printer Emulation Configuration

Proprinter III XL Emulation

Epson Emulation
P–Series Emulation

P–Series XQ Emulation

Serial Matrix Emulation

Auto LF

No Paper Motion Emulation Configuration

Printer Emulation Configuration

Proprinter III XL Emulation

Epson Emulation

P–Series Emulation

P–Series XQ Emulation

376
 Migrating From P6000 ASCII Printers

Table 78. P6x40/P6x80 (Level One Firmware) to 6500-v Conversion Table (continued)

P6x40x6x80 Level One

IBM 6500-v Menu Option
Menu Option

Serial Matrix Emulation

Define CR Code

Linefeed / Newline Emulation Configuration

Printer Emulation Configuration

Proprinter III XL Emulation

Epson Emulation

P–Series Emulation

P–Series XQ Emulation
Serial Matrix Emulation

Define LF Code

Uppercase Emulation Configuration

Printer Emulation Configuration

P–Series XQ Emulation

Upper Case Select

VFU Select Emulation Configuration

Printer Emulation Configuration

P–Series Emulation
P–Series XQ Emulation

EVFU Selected

Paper Motion Printer Control

Paper Jam Detection

Power–Up Printer Control

Power On State

Underline N/A

Mod Plot N/A

Perforation Skip Emulation Configuration

Print Format

Perforation Skip

Paper Fault N/A

377
Appendix A Printer–Specific Migration Information

Table 78. P6x40/P6x80 (Level One Firmware) to 6500-v Conversion Table (continued)

P6x40x6x80 Level One

IBM 6500-v Menu Option
Menu Option

INTERFACE PARAMETERS
Printer Emulation Configuration

ASCII Printer Emulation

Special Function Emulation Configuration

Printer Emulation Configuration

P–Series Emulation

Select SFCC

Data Line 8 Parallel Interface

PC Parallel / Dataproducts

Data Bit 8

PI Line Parallel Interface

Dataproducts

PI Ignored

Fast Busy Parallel Interface

PC Parallel

Busy On Strobe

Buffer Size Parallel Interface

PC Parallel

Buffer Size in Kilobytes

Serial Interface
Buffer Size in Kilobytes

Parallel Printer Control

Interface Selection

Parallel Interface

Interface Type

PARALLEL INTERFACE HARDWARE JUMPER CONFIGURATION

E14–E15 Dataproducts Parallel Interface
Strobe Polarity

Dataproducts

378
 Migrating From P6000 ASCII Printers

Table 78. P6x40/P6x80 (Level One Firmware) to 6500-v Conversion Table (continued)

P6x40x6x80 Level One

IBM 6500-v Menu Option
Menu Option

Strobe Polarity
E49–E50 Data Latch Edge Parallel Interface
Select

E50–E51 Data Latch Edge PC Parallel

Select

E52–E53 ACK Edge Select Latch Data On

HOST INTERFACE – Serial

Data Protocol Serial Interface

Data Protocol

Data Rate Serial Interface

Baud Rate

Word Length Serial Interface

Data Bits

Parity

Request To Send Serial Interface

Request To Send

Reverse Channel N/A

Data Term Ready Serial Interface

Data Terminal Ready

Stop Bit Serial Interface

Stop Bits

XON or ACK Character N/A

Assignment
XOFF or NAK Character N/A
Assignment

Serial Printer Control

Interface Selection

Serial Interface

Interface Type

379
Appendix A Printer–Specific Migration Information

Table 79. P6x40/P6x80 (Level Two Firmware) to 6500-v Conversion Table

P6x40/P6x80 Level Two

IBM 6500-v Menu Option
Menu Option

Forms Length Set Emulation Configuration

Print Format
Forms Length

Line Spacing Emulation Configuration

Print Format

Lines Per Inch

Print Mode Emulation Configuration

Print Format

Print Quality

Character Set Emulation Configuration

Printer Emulation Configuration

P–Series / Serial Matrix Emulation

Character Sets

RIBBON LIFE

Ribbon Size N/A

Job Rate N/A

When Worn Action N/A

Enable/Disable N/A
PRINT STATISTICS

Power On Time N/A

Print Time N/A

Shuttle Strokes N/A

Print Lines N/A

Print Pages N/A

APPLICATION COMPATIBILITY

Printer Protocol Emulation Configuration

ASCII Printer Emulation

Buffer Size N/A

380
 Migrating From P6000 ASCII Printers

Table 79. P6x40/P6x80 (Level Two Firmware) to 6500-v Conversion Table (continued)

P6x40/P6x80 Level Two

IBM 6500-v Menu Option
Menu Option

Uppercase Select Emulation Configuration

Printer Emulation Configuration

P–Series XQ Emulation

Upper Case Select

Printer Select Emulation Configuration

Printer Emulation Configuration

Epson Emulation

Serial Matrix Emulation

Printer Select

Paper Advance Switch N/A

Power On State Printer Control

Power On State

Unidirectional Printer Control

Print Direction

PAPER FORMAT

Auto Line Feed Emulation Configuration

Printer Emulation Configuration

Proprinter III XL Emulation

Epson Emulation

P–Series Emulation

P–Series XQ Emulation

Serial Matrix Emulation

Auto LF
Define CR Code Emulation Configuration

Printer Emulation Configuration

Proprinter III XL Emulation

Epson Emulation

P–Series Emulation

P–Series XQ Emulation

381
Appendix A Printer–Specific Migration Information

Table 79. P6x40/P6x80 (Level Two Firmware) to 6500-v Conversion Table (continued)

P6x40/P6x80 Level Two

IBM 6500-v Menu Option
Menu Option

Serial Matrix Emulation

Define CR Code

Define LF Code Emulation Configuration

Printer Emulation Configuration

Proprinter III XL Emulation

Epson Emulation

P–Series Emulation

P–Series XQ Emulation

Serial Matrix Emulation

Define LF Code

VFU Select Emulation Configuration

Printer Emulation Configuration

P–Series Emulation

P–Series XQ Emulation

EVFU Selected

Perforation Skip Emulation Configuration

Print Format
Perforation Skip

PMD Fault Printer Control

Paper Jam Detection

Modified Plot N/A

Slew Relative Emulation Configuration

Printer Emulation Configuration

P–Series XQ Emulation

Slew Relative

HOST INTERFACE – Parallel

Printer Control

Interface Selection

Parallel Interface

382
 Migrating From P6000 ASCII Printers

Table 79. P6x40/P6x80 (Level Two Firmware) to 6500-v Conversion Table (continued)

P6x40/P6x80 Level Two

IBM 6500-v Menu Option
Menu Option

Interface Type
Data Bit 8 Parallel Interface

PC Parallel / Dataproducts

Data Bit 8
Data Polarity Parallel Interface

PC Parallel / Dataproducts

Data Polarity

Resp. Polarity Parallel Interface

PC Parallel

Response Polarity

Dataproducts

Data Request Polarity

Fast Busy Parallel Interface

PC Parallel
Busy On Strobe

PI Line Parallel Interface

Dataproducts

PI Ignored

HOST INTERFACE – Serial

Printer Control
Interface Selection

Serial Interface

Interface Type
Data Protocol Serial Interface

Data Protocol

Data Rate Serial Interface

Baud Rate

Word Length Serial Interface

Data Bits

383
Appendix A Printer–Specific Migration Information

Table 79. P6x40/P6x80 (Level Two Firmware) to 6500-v Conversion Table (continued)

P6x40/P6x80 Level Two

IBM 6500-v Menu Option
Menu Option

Stop Bit Serial Interface

Stop Bits

Parity Serial Interface

Parity

Bit 8 Function N/A

CD and DSR N/A

CTS and DSR N/A

Data Term Ready Serial Interface

Data Terminal Ready

Request To Send Serial Interface

Request To Send

Reverse Channel N/A

Migrating From MVP–Series ASCII Printers

The Printronix MVP–Series ASCII printers (including the MVP–150, MVP–
150B, MVP–L150, and MVP–L150B) provide the configuration self–test 00.1,
which prints the configuration settings of Configuration Options 20 through 99
and the part number of each PROM installed. You may have a current
configuration printout stored with the printer. If not, the printer User’s Manual
provides a procedure for printing the current (or factory default) configuration.
Table 80 lists MVP–150/MVP–L150 codes 20–99, the configuration option
represented by each code, and the corresponding menu options for the IBM
6500-v. Table 81 lists MVP–150B/MVP–L150B codes 20–99, the
configuration option represented by each code, and the corresponding menu
options for the IBM 6500-v. You may wish to make a copy of one of these
tables, and fill in the option values from your previous printer configuration
printout. This will help you to configure equivalent option values for the 6500-v
once it is installed and ready to be configured.

384
 Migrating From MVP–Series ASCII Printers

Table 80. MVP-150/MVP-L150 to 6500-v Conversion Table

MVP–150/MVP–L150
IBM 6500-v Menu Option
Menu Option

20.x–Host Mode Control Emulation Configuration

ASCII Printer Emulation

21.x–Vertical Dot Density N/A

22.x–Insert Auto L/F After Emulation Configuration

Max Character Position Printer Emulation Configuration

Proprinter III XL Emulation

Epson Emulation

P–Series Emulation

P–Series XQ Emulation
Serial Matrix Emulation

Auto LF

23.x–Auto L/F On C/R Emulation Configuration

Printer Emulation Configuration

Proprinter III XL Emulation

Epson Emulation
P–Series Emulation

P–Series XQ Emulation

Serial Matrix Emulation

Define CR Code

24.x–Inhibit Underlines & N/A

Uppercase Printing Emulation Configuration

Printer Emulation Configuration

P–Series XQ Emulation

Upper Case Select

25.x–PI Line Paper Slew Emulation Configuration
Using Binary Count
Printer Emulation Configuration

P–Series XQ Emulation
Slew Relative

385
Appendix A Printer–Specific Migration Information

Table 80. MVP-150/MVP-L150 to 6500-v Conversion Table (continued)

MVP–150/MVP–L150
IBM 6500-v Menu Option
Menu Option

26.x–On–line Condition Printer Control

At Power Up Power On State

27.x–Paper Out Delay N/A

28.x–Enable Underline N/A

29.x–Delete Character Option N/A

30.x–Print or Graphics Mode Emulation Configuration

At Power On Print Format

Print Quality

31.x Through 41.x Control Emulation Configuration

Codes
Printer Emulation Configuration

P–Series Emulation

Control Code 06

Control Code 08

Select SFCC

P–Series XQ Emulation

Control Code 06

Elong/Alt. Font
Serial Matrix Emulation

Control Code 06

42.x–EVFU Control Emulation Configuration

Printer Emulation Configuration

P–Series Emulation

EVFU Selected
43.x–Plotting Exit N/A

44.x–Print Buffer With TOF N/A

Switch

45.x Through 49.x Are Not N/A

Used

50.x–Page Perforation Skip Emulation Configuration

Print Format

386
 Migrating From MVP–Series ASCII Printers

Table 80. MVP-150/MVP-L150 to 6500-v Conversion Table (continued)

MVP–150/MVP–L150
IBM 6500-v Menu Option
Menu Option

Perforation Skip
51.x–Lines Per Inch Emulation Configuration

Print Format

Lines Per Inch

52.x–Forms Length At Emulation Configuration
Power Up
Print Format

Forms Length

53.x Through 59.x Are Not N/A

Used

60.x–Data Line 8 Parallel Interface

PC Parallel / Dataproducts

Data Bit 8

61.x–PI Line Parallel Interface

Dataproducts

PI Ignored

62.x–Data Strobe Polarity Parallel Interface

PC Parallel / Dataproducts

Strobe Polarity

63.x–Data / Response Line Parallel Interface

Polarity PC Parallel

Data Polarity

Response Polarity

Dataproducts

Data Polarity
Data Request Polarity

64.x–Not Used N/A

65.x–Busy Line Handling Parallel Interface

PC Parallel

Busy On Strobe

387
Appendix A Printer–Specific Migration Information

Table 80. MVP-150/MVP-L150 to 6500-v Conversion Table (continued)

MVP–150/MVP–L150
IBM 6500-v Menu Option
Menu Option

66.x–Interface Select Printer Control

Interface Selection

Parallel Interface

Interface Type

67.x Through 69.x Are Not N/A

Used
70.x–Serial Interface/ Serial Interface
Protocol Selection
Interface Type

Data Protocol
71.x–Serial Data Transfer Serial Interface
And Baud Rate
Baud Rate

Stop Bits
72.x–Data Word Description Serial Interface

Data Bits

Parity

73.x–Data Polarity N/A

74.x–Request To Send (RTS) Serial Interface

Request To Send
75.x–Clear To Send (CTS) N/A
And Carrier Detect (CD)
Protocol

76.x–Data Set Ready (DSR) N/A

77.x–Reverse Channel N/A

Control (RC)

78.x–Data Terminal Ready Serial Interface

(DTR)
Data Terminal Ready

79.x–XON Buffer Almost N/A

Empty Threshold
80.x–XOFF Buffer Almost Full N/A
Threshold

81.x–Current Loop Source N/A

388
 Migrating From MVP–Series ASCII Printers

Table 80. MVP-150/MVP-L150 to 6500-v Conversion Table (continued)

MVP–150/MVP–L150
IBM 6500-v Menu Option
Menu Option

82.x–XON or ACK Character N/A

Assignment
83.x–XOFF or NAK Character N/A
Assignment

84.x–ETX Character N/A

Assignment

85.x Through 99.x Are Not N/A

Used

Table 81. MVP-150B/MVP-L150B to 6500-v Conversion Table

MVP-150B/MVP-L150B
IBM 6500-v Menu Option
Menu Option

20.x–Expanded Print (Double N/A

Wide)

21.x–Vertical Dot Density N/A

22.x–Insert Auto L/F After Emulation Configuration

Max Character Position Printer Emulation Configuration

Proprinter III XL Emulation

Epson Emulation

P–Series Emulation

P–Series XQ Emulation

Serial Matrix Emulation

Auto LF

23.x–Auto L/F On C/R Emulation Configuration

Printer Emulation Configuration

Proprinter III XL Emulation

Epson Emulation

P–Series Emulation

P–Series XQ Emulation

Serial Matrix Emulation

389
Appendix A Printer–Specific Migration Information

Table 81. MVP-150B/MVP-L150B to 6500-v Conversion Table (continued)

MVP-150B/MVP-L150B
IBM 6500-v Menu Option
Menu Option

Define CR Code
24.x–Inhibit Underlines & N/A
Lowercase

Uppercase Printing Emulation Configuration

Printer Emulation Configuration

P–Series XQ Emulation
Upper Case Select

25.x–PI Line Paper Slew Emulation Configuration

Using Binary Count Printer Emulation Configuration

P–Series XQ Emulation

Slew Relative

26.x–On–line Condition At Printer Control

Power Up
Power On State

27.x–Paper Out Delay N/A

28.x–Spaces With Auto– N/A

Underline
29.x–Delete Character Option N/A
(7Fh/FFh)

30.x–Print or Graphics Mode Emulation Configuration

At Power On
Print Format
Print Quality

31.x–Define Control Codes N/A

32.x–Cedilla Character Set N/A

33.x–Slash Zero Emulation Configuration

Print Format

Print Attributes
Slashed Zero

34.x–Alternate Plot Control N/A

Code (Even Dots)

390
 Migrating From MVP–Series ASCII Printers

Table 81. MVP-150B/MVP-L150B to 6500-v Conversion Table (continued)

MVP-150B/MVP-L150B
IBM 6500-v Menu Option
Menu Option

35.x–Alternate Plot Control N/A

Code (Odd Dots)
36.x–Mode 1 Select N/A

37.x–Mode 2 Select N/A

38.x–Double High Select N/A

39.x–Mode 3 Select N/A

40.x–Additional Printable N/A

Characters

41.x–Extended Character Set Emulation Configuration

Select
Printer Emulation Configuration
P–Series / Serial Matrix Emulation

EVFU Selected

42.x–EVFU Control Emulation Configuration

Printer Emulation Configuration

P–Series Emulation

EVFU Selected

43.x–Plotting Exit N/A

44.x–Print Buffer With TOF N/A

Switch

45.x–Mode 4 N/A

46.x–EVFU Control With No N/A

PI Line

47.x–SOH and ETX Emulation Configuration

Printer Emulation Configuration

P–Series Emulation

Select SFCC

48.x–Character Pitch In N/A

Mode 5 (Condensed Print)
49.x–Not Used N/A

50.x–Page Perforation Skip Emulation Configuration

Print Format

391
Appendix A Printer–Specific Migration Information

Table 81. MVP-150B/MVP-L150B to 6500-v Conversion Table (continued)

MVP-150B/MVP-L150B
IBM 6500-v Menu Option
Menu Option

Perforation Skip
51.x–Lines Per Inch Emulation Configuration

Print Format

Lines Per Inch

52.x–Forms Length At Power Emulation Configuration

Up
Print Format

Forms Length

53.x–Not Used N/A

54.x–Line Spacing At Power Emulation Configuration

Up
Print Format

Lines Per Inch

55.x–Not Used N/A

56.x–Column Print Spacing Emulation Configuration

Print Format

Forms Width

57.x–Input Buffer Size N/A

58.x–ESC DC1 Sequence Emulation Configuration

Printer Emulation Configuration

Epson / Serial Matrix Emulation

Printer Select
59.x–150B / L150B Select N/A

60.x–Data Line 8 Parallel Interface

PC Parallel / Dataproducts

Data Bit 8

61.x–PI Line Parallel Interface

Dataproducts
PI Ignored

62.x–Data Strobe Polarity Parallel Interface

PC Parallel / Dataproducts

392
 Migrating From P300/P600 ASCII Printers

Table 81. MVP-150B/MVP-L150B to 6500-v Conversion Table (continued)

MVP-150B/MVP-L150B
IBM 6500-v Menu Option
Menu Option

Strobe Polarity
63.x–Data / Response Line Parallel Interface
Polarity

PC Parallel

Data Polarity

Response Polarity
Dataproducts

Data Polarity

Data Request Polarity

64.x–Not Used N/A

65.x–Busy Line Handling Parallel Interface

PC Parallel
Busy On Strobe

66.x–Interface Select Printer Control

Interface Selection
Parallel Interface

Interface Type

67.x Through 99.x Are Not N/A

Used

Migrating From P300/P600 ASCII Printers

The Printronix P300/P600–Series ASCII printers were configured by means of
switch settings rather than configuration menus. You may have a
configuration chart that lists your current configuration. If not, you can
determine your current printer configuration in two ways:
• Refer to a configuration chart you have maintained for your printer, or
refer to the User’s Manual for your printer to interpret the switch settings
for your printer and derive their configuration.
• Print the test file provided on diskette and determine the printer
configuration from the manner in which the test file prints.

393
Appendix A Printer–Specific Migration Information

Test File for Determining P300/P600 Printer Configuration

A test file is provided on diskette with your IBM 6500-v printer, that will allow
you to test what the current jumper settings are on a P300 or P600 printer. If
you can, send the file to the P300/P600 printer from an attached IBM PC or
other host system. Otherwise you may have to type the contents of this file on
your host system, in order to send it to the printer.
NOTE: The test file is shown on the following pages in 9 cpi Courier font. If
you will be typing in the file instead of sending the file from the
diskette to the printer, it should be typed in at 10cpi (the default
character size for most terminals).
The entire file is represented on the following pages. Expressions that begin
with the caret (^) are control codes. They will not print when you send the file
to a printer. The test file is self documenting; read the text within the file to
determine how to interpret the printout from your printer. A README file on
the diskette provides additional information about the test file.
The manner in which your previous printer prints the test file will indicate the
settings for several configuration options. Once you have determined how
your previous printer is configured for these parameters, you can then find the
corresponding configuration for the 6500-v printer in Table 82. You will notice
that the test file checks for some but not all of the parameters in Table 82.
A list of the configuration parameters verified using the test file follows, in the
order in which the parameters are verified in the test file.
• Primary and Extended fonts enabled or disabled. This test allows you to
check the code page that is currently selected for your printer. If it is an
extended code page, then Data Bit 8 is enabled for your current host
interface (the Data Bit 8 parameter for the parallel interface is listed under
the heading INTERFACE PARAMETER OPTIONS in Table 82). You may
also use the character set printout at the beginning of the test file to verify
the contents of the character set (code page) currently in use at your site,
so that you can select a code page that is similar for the 6500-v printer
you will be installing.
• Auto Line Feed enabled or disabled; corresponds to the Auto Line Feed
(After Buffer Full) option (under the heading LINE SPACING OPTIONS)
in Table 82.
• Carriage Return (CR)=CR, or CR=CR+LF; corresponds to the
CR=CR+LF option (under the heading LINE SPACING OPTIONS) in
Table 82.
• Compressed Print mode host datastream control code is 01, 03, or 09.
This corresponds to the Compressed Print Mode option (under the
heading SOFTWARE CONTROL CODE OPTIONS) in Table 45.
• Draft Print mode host datastream control code is 02, 03, or 09. This
corresponds to the Draft Print Mode option (under the heading
SOFTWARE CONTROL CODE OPTIONS) in Table 45.
• 132 character wide printing is enabled or disabled
• Elongated characters are selected by 08 or 0E. This corresponds to the
Elongated Print/Alt. char. option (under the heading SOFTWARE
CONTROL CODE OPTIONS) in Table 45.

394
 Migrating From P300/P600 ASCII Printers

• Shift Out code is 08 or 0E

• Default/Alternate lpi setting is 6/8, 6/9, 6/10, 8/8, 9/9, or 10/10;
corresponds to the Line Spacing option (under the heading LINE
SPACING OPTIONS) in Table 45.
• Uppercase only is enabled or disabled; corresponds to the Print
Lowercase as Uppercase option (under the heading PRINT MODE
OPTIONS) in Table 45.
• EVFU is enabled or disabled; corresponds to EVFU Enable/Disable
option (under the heading LINE SPACING OPTIONS) in Table 45.
• Alternate Forms Length is enabled or disabled; corresponds to the
Alternate Forms Length Select option (under the heading PRINTER
SETUP OPTIONS) in Table 45.
• Skip Over Perforation distance; corresponds to the Skip Over Perforation
option (under the heading PRINTER SETUP OPTIONS) in Table 45.
• Underlined text is enabled or disabled; corresponds to the Underline
Enable/Disable option (under the heading PRINT MODE OPTIONS) in
Table 45.
• Mod Plot jumper is installed or not installed; corresponds to the Modified
Plot option (under the heading GRAPHICS MODE OPTIONS) in Table
45.
^HP300 ASCII CHART^M

^M
The following chart may be used to determine the character sets that are installed in a
P300/P600/XQ printer.^M
^M
Bit 8 must be enabled in order to print both the Primary and Extended Fonts. If bit 8 is
disabled, the upper columns (A0–FFH) will be a duplicate of the data that is in the lower
columns. If the upper columns are blank, there is no Extended Font set installed in the
printer.^M
^M
^M
ASCII HEX Char. ASCII HEX Char. ASCII HEX Char. ASCII HEX Char.^M
33 21 ! 88 58 X 143 8f 198 c6 Æ ^M
34 22 ” 89 59 Y 144 90 199 c7 Ç ^M
35 23 # 90 5a Z 145 91 200 c8 È ^M
36 24 $ 91 5b [ 146 92 201 c9 É ^M
37 25 % 92 5c \ 147 93 202 ca Ê ^M
38 26 & 93 5d ] 148 94 203 cb Ë ^M
39 27 ’ 94 5e ^ 149 95 204 cc Ì ^M
40 28 ( 95 5f _ 150 96 205 cd Í ^M
41 29 ) 96 60 ‘ 151 97 206 ce Î ^M
42 2a * 97 61 a 152 98 207 cf Ï ^M
43 2b + 98 62 b 153 99 208 d0 Ð ^M
44 2c , 99 63 c 154 9a 209 d1 Ñ ^M
45 2d – 100 64 d 155 9b 210 d2 Ò ^M

395
Appendix A Printer–Specific Migration Information

46 2e . 101 65 e 156 9c 211 d3 Ó ^M

47 2f / 102 66 f 157 9d 212 d4 Ô ^M
48 30 0 103 67 g 158 9e 213 d5 Õ ^M
49 31 1 104 68 h 159 9f 214 d6 Ö ^M
50 32 2 105 69 i 160 a0 \xa0 215 d7 \xd7 ^M
51 33 3 106 6a j 161 a1 ¡ 216 d8 Ø ^M
52 34 4 107 6b k 162 a2 ¢ 217 d9 Ù ^M
53 35 5 108 6c l 163 a3 £ 218 da Ú ^M
54 36 6 109 6d m 164 a4 ¤ 219 db Û ^M
55 37 7 110 6e n 165 a5 ¥ 220 dc Ü ^M
56 38 8 111 6f o 166 a6 ¦ 221 dd Ý ^M
57 39 9 112 70 p 167 a7 § 222 de Þ ^M
58 3a : 113 71 q 168 a8 ¨ 223 df ß ^M
59 3b ; 114 72 r 169 a9 © 224 e0 à ^M
60 3c < 115 73 s 170 aa ª 225 e1 á ^M
61 3d = 116 74 t 171 ab « 226 e2 â ^M
62 3e > 117 75 u 172 ac \xac 227 e3 ã ^M
63 3f ? 118 76 v 173 ad \xad 228 e4 ä ^M
64 40 @ 119 77 w 174 ae ® 229 e5 å ^M
65 41 A 120 78 x 175 af ¯ 230 e6 æ ^M
66 42 B 121 79 y 176 b0 ° 231 e7 ç ^M
67 43 C 122 7a z 177 b1 ± 232 e8 è ^M
68 44 D 123 7b { 178 b2 \xb2 233 e9 é ^M
69 45 E 124 7c | 179 b3 \xb3 234 ea ê ^M
70 46 F 125 7d } 180 b4 \xb4 235 eb ë ^M
71 47 G 126 7e ~ 181 b5 \xb5 236 ec ì ^M
72 48 H 127 7f 182 b6 ¶ 237 ed í ^M
73 49 I 128 80 183 b7 · 238 ee î ^M
74 4a J 129 81 184 b8 \xb8 239 ef ï ^M
75 4b K 130 82 185 b9 \xb9 240 f0 ð ^M
76 4c L 131 83 186 ba º 241 f1 ñ ^M
77 4d M 132 84 187 bb » 242 f2 ò ^M
78 4e N 133 85 188 bc ¼ 243 f3 ó ^M
79 4f O 134 86 189 bd ½ 244 f4 ô ^M
80 50 P 135 87 190 be ¾ 245 f5 õ ^M
81 51 Q 136 88 191 bf ¿ 246 f6 ö ^M
82 52 R 137 89 192 c0 À 247 f7 \xf7 ^M
83 53 S 138 8a 193 c1 Á 248 f8 ø ^M
84 54 T 139 8b 194 c2 Â 249 f9 ù ^M
85 55 U 140 8c 195 c3 Ã 250 fa ú ^M
86 56 V 141 8d 196 c4 Ä 251 fb û ^M
87 57 W 142 8e 197 c5 Â 252 fc ü ^M
253 fd ý ^M
254 fe þ ^M ^M
^M
^M
^M

396
 Migrating From P300/P600 ASCII Printers

^LThis portion of the test file is used to determine the settings

of the jumpers on the logic A/B controller boards of the P300 /
P600 printers.^M
^M
^M
AUTO LINE FEED ENABLE JUMPER^M
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX^M
If there are two lines of ”X’s” then the Auto Line Feed is enabled^M
If there is only one line of ”X’s” then Auto Line Feed is disabled^M
^M
^M
CARRIAGE RETURN AND LINE FEED JUMPER^M
OOOOOO^MXXXXXX^M
If there is a line of ”O’s” followed by a line of ”X’s” then CR=CR+LF^M
If the ”O’s” have been replaced by the ”X’s” then CR=CR^M
^M
^M
COMPRESSED / DRAFT PRINT JUMPER^M
^AIf this is Compressed Printing then Code 01 selects Compressed Print^M
^CIf this is Compressed Printing then Code 03 selects Compressed Print^M
If this is Compressed Printing then Code 09 selects Compressed
Print^M
^BIf this is Draft Printing then Code 02 selects Draft Print
^CIf this is Draft Printing then Code 03 selects Draft Print
^IIf this is Draft Printing then Code 09 selects Draft Print
132 CHARACTERS = AUTO LINE FEED
^AXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
^CXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
^IXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
If one of the lines above is printed in compressed print and the line wraps at^M
132 characters then the 132 CHARACTERS jumper is installed. (If the text is not^M
compressed, this test is invalid.)^M
ELONGATED CHARACTER / SHIFT OUT CONTROL CODE JUMPER^M
^HIf this is Elongated then Code 08 selects Enlongated Characters^M
^NIf this is Elongated then Code 0E selects Enlongated Characters^M
^M

397
Appendix A Printer–Specific Migration Information

^NABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ^M
If the previous line was not the standard alphabet (or the line^M
is blank) then Code 0E is the Shift Out code^M
^NABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ^M
If the previous line was not the standard alphabet (or the line^M
is blank) then Code 08 is the Shift Out code^M
^M
^M
LINE SPACING JUMPER^M
Line Spacing Test Mode 1^M
Line Spacing Test Mode 1^M
Line Spacing Test Mode 1^M
Line Spacing Test Mode 1^M
Line Spacing Test Mode 1^M
Line Spacing Test Mode 1^M
^FLine Spacing Test Mode 2^M
^FLine Spacing Test Mode 2^M
^FLine Spacing Test Mode 2^M
^FLine Spacing Test Mode 2^M
^FLine Spacing Test Mode 2^M
^FLine Spacing Test Mode 2^M
^M
If the Lines in Mode 1 are at 6 LPI and the lines in Mode 2 are at 8 LPI^M
then 6 LPI is the default and 8 LPI is the alternate^M
If the Lines in Mode 1 are at 6 LPI and the lines in Mode 2 are at 9 LPI^M
then 6 LPI is the default and 9 LPI is the alternate^M
If the Lines in Mode 1 are at 6 LPI and the lines in Mode 2 are at 10 LPI^M
then 6 LPI is the default and 10 LPI is the alternate^M
If the Lines in Mode 1 and the lines in Mode 2 are both at 8 LPI^M
then 8 LPI ONLY is enabled^M
If the Lines in Mode 1 and the lines in Mode 2 are both at 9 LPI^M
then 9 LPI ONLY is enabled^M
If the Lines in Mode 1 and the lines in Mode 2 are both at 10 LPI^M
then 10 LPI ONLY is enabled^M
PRINT LOWERCASE AS UPPERCASE JUMPER^M
abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz^M
If the previous line was printed as all UPPERCASE characters then^M
Uppercase ONLY is selected.^M
^M
^M
EVFU ENABLE / DISABLE JUMPER^M
If this line is not split ^Uthen the EVFU is disabled.^M
If this line is split ^Uthen the EVFU is enabled.^M
^LALTERNATE FORMS LENGTH JUMPER^M
Measure the distance from the Alternate Forms Length Jumper header to^M
the next measure line.^M
^LMeasure to here.^M

398
 Migrating From P300/P600 ASCII Printers

If the distance is 11 inches then the Alternate Forms Length is disabled.^M

If the distance is 12 inches then the Alternate Forms Length is enabled.^M
^LSKIP OVER PERF. JUMPER^M
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

399
Appendix A Printer–Specific Migration Information

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

400
 Migrating From P300/P600 ASCII Printers

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
^M
Check for any blank space between the lines of ”X’s”.^M
Measure any blank space. This is the Skip Over Perf. distance^M
UNDERLINE JUMPER^M
Is this underlined?^M__ ____ ___________^M
If the line above is underlined, the underline jumper is not installed^M
If the line above is blank, the underline jumper is installed^M

401
Appendix A Printer–Specific Migration Information

^M
^M
MOD PLOT JUMPER^M
^E?????????????????????????????????????^M
^E?????????????????????????????????????^M
^E?????????????????????????????????????^M
AND SOME MORE TEXT – IS IT ALL THERE?^M
If the line of text above is complete, then the ’Mod Plot’ jumper is installed.^M
If the line of text above has the first three dot rows ’over–printed’ by the^M
plot data, then the ’Mod Plot’jumper is not installed.^M
^M
^M
^M
End of program^M
^M
^M
^M
P300/600 JUMPER CONFIGURATION VERIFICATION TEST DISK, PN 141997, v1.00A^M
COPYRIGHT 1995 PRINTRONIX, INC.^M
^M
^L^L^Z

P300/P600 to 6500-v Conversion Table

Table 82 lists the configuration options for the P300/P600 printers that are
selected via settings on the printers’ controller boards. Once you have
determined the configuration for the P300/P600 printer at your site, you may
wish to make a copy of this table and pencil in your previous printer
configuration. You can then configure equivalent option values for the 6500-v
once it is installed and ready to be configured.

Table 82. P300/P600 to 6500-v Conversion Table

P300/P600 Configuration
IBM 6500-v Menu Option
Option

PRINT MODE (TEXT) OPTIONS

Print Lowercase As Emulation Configuration

Uppercase
Printer Emulation Configuration

P–Series XQ Emulation

Upper Case Select

Underline Enable / Disable N/A

Select 7,8, Or 9 Dot Rows N/A

402
 Migrating From P300/P600 ASCII Printers

Table 82. P300/P600 to 6500-v Conversion Table (continued)

P300/P600 Configuration
IBM 6500-v Menu Option
Option

Default Print Mode Select Emulation Configuration

Print Format

Print Quality

LINE SPACING OPTIONS

Auto Line Feed (After Buffer Emulation Configuration
Full)
Printer Emulation Configuration

P–Series XQ Emulation

Auto LF

CR = CR + LF Emulation Configuration

Printer Emulation Configuration

P–Series XQ Emulation

Define CR Code

EVFU Enable / Disable Emulation Configuration

Printer Emulation Configuration

P–Series XQ Emulation

EVFU Selected

Line Spacing Emulation Configuration

Print Format

Lines Per Inch

INTERFACE PARAMETER OPTIONS

Printer Control

Interface Selection

Parallel Interface
Interface Type

Inverted I/O Polarity Parallel Interface

PC Parallel / Dataproducts

Data Polarity

Response Polarity

Data Request Polarity

403
Appendix A Printer–Specific Migration Information

Table 82. P300/P600 to 6500-v Conversion Table (continued)

P300/P600 Configuration
IBM 6500-v Menu Option
Option

Inverted Data Strobe Parallel Interface

PC Parallel / Dataproducts

Strobe Polarity

Data Bit 8 Parallel Interface

PC Parallel / Dataproducts

Data Bit 8

PI Line Parallel Interface

Dataproducts

PI Ignored

Move One Line Binary Count Emulation Configuration

Printer Emulation Configuration

P–Series XQ Emulation

Slew Relative

ERROR HANDLING OPTIONS

Paper Motion Detect Printer Control

Paper Jam Detection

Paper Out Delay N/A

GRAPHICS MODE OPTIONS

Double Speed Plot N/A

Modified Plot N/A

PRINTER SETUP OPTIONS

P–300 / P–600 Select N/A

Phase Fire Enable N/A

Skip Over Perforation Emulation Configuration

Print Format

Perforation Skip
Alternate Forms Length Emulation Configuration
Select (12”)
Print Format

Forms Length

404
 Migrating From P300/P600 ASCII Printers

Table 82. P300/P600 to 6500-v Conversion Table (continued)

P300/P600 Configuration
IBM 6500-v Menu Option
Option

SOFTWARE CONTROL CODE OPTIONS

Elongated Print / Alt. char Emulation Configuration

Printer Emulation Configuration

P–Series XQ Emulation
Elong/Alt. Font

Compressed Print Mode Emulation Configuration

Printer Emulation Configuration

P–Series XQ Emulation

Compressed Print

Draft Print Mode Emulation Configuration

Printer Emulation Configuration

P–Series XQ Emulation

High Speed Print Mode

405
Appendix A Selecting A Communications Interface And Cables

Selecting A Communications Interface And Cables

The following host computer interface choices are available for the 6500-v
printer:
• PC–Parallel (may also be referred to as Centronics parallel)
• Dataproducts Parallel
• RS–232 Serial
• RS–422 Serial
The 6500-v configuration menus allow you to select one of these interfaces
from the printer configuration menus, starting from the “Printer Control” menu,
as described in the IBM Infoprint 6500 Line Matrix Printer User’s Manual,
Chapter 4. The signals and pinouts for cables that can be used with each of
these host interfaces are described in Chapter 5 of the User’s Manual.
Your choice for the host interface and cables to install from the printer to the
host depends on the installation at your site, as follows:
• The 6500-v printer replaces a previous Printronix printer, and you
still have the cables that were used with that printer:
In this situation, the simplest choice is to reuse the existing cables and
configure the 6500-v printer for the host interface that matches the
previous printer configuration. (This assumes that the previous printer
was configured for one of the four interfaces listed above.) If you are
using a Dataproducts interface, you will need an adapter to attach from
your Dataproducts cable to the parallel port on the IBM 6500-v printer.
This adapter can be ordered from an IBM Remarketeer.
• The 6500-v printer replaces a previous Printronix printer, but you do
not have the cables used with the previous printer, or you are
adding a 6500-v to your previous Printronix printers:
In this situation, it is recommended that you configure the new printer for
an interface that is compatible with the host that you wish to attach. If you
will use a Dataproducts interface, you will need an adapter to attach from
your Dataproducts cable to the parallel port on the IBM 6500-v printer.
This adapter can be ordered from an IBM Remarketeer.

406
 Migrating From P300/P600 ASCII Printers

Troubleshooting
The following table describes selected print formatting / host interface
problems that may be encountered when initially configuring an IBM 6500-v
printer to match a preexisting product and the action(s) to be taken to resolve
the problem. The symptoms presented are generic in nature and are not
intended to represent all possible combinations of problems that may be
observed. They should be used as a general guide when troubleshooting the
host / printer configuration.

Table 83. Symptom / Action Table for IBM 6500-v Printer

Symptom Action

Line Spacing does not match existing Under PRINT FORMAT check:
application file format
Lines Per Inch

Forms Width

Forms Length

Margins

Perforation Skip

Under PRINTER EMULATION

CONFIGURATION check:

Define CR

Auto LF

Define LF
FF Valid At TOF

Control Code 06

EVFU Selected

Slew Relative

Under PARALLEL INTERFACE check:

PI Ignored
Character font does not match existing Under PRINT FORMAT check:
application file format
Characters Per Inch

Print Quality
Italic Print

407
Appendix A Troubleshooting

Table 83. Symptom / Action Table for IBM 6500-v Printer (continued)

Symptom Action

Under PRINTER EMULATION

CONFIGURATION check:

Alternate Set 80–9F

Compressed Print

Elong/Alt Font

High Speed Print Mode

Print Language

Character Sets
Upper Case Select

Control Code 08

20 CPI Condensed

Under PARALLEL / SERIAL INTERFACES

check:

Data Bit 8

Data Bits

Text formatting does not match existing Under EMULATION

application file format
CONFIGURATION check:
ASCII Printer

Emulation

Under PRINTER EMULATION

CONFIGURATION check:

Select SFCC

Control Code 08
Elong/Alt Font

Upper Case Select

Overstrike

Under PRINT FORMAT check:

Forms Width

Forms Length

408
 Migrating From P300/P600 ASCII Printers

Table 83. Symptom / Action Table for IBM 6500-v Printer (continued)

Symptom Action

Proportional Spacing
Margins

Perforation Skip

Host interface character buffer overrun Under PARALLEL INTERFACE check:

Busy On Strobe

Under SERIAL INTERFACE check:

Data Protocol

Data Terminal Ready

Request To Send

Host interface framing / parity errors Under PARALLEL INTERFACE check:

multiple strobing of characters
missing characters Strobe Polarity
incorrect characters Latch Data On

Response Polarity

Busy On Strobe
Prime Signal

Data Polarity

Data Request Polarity

Under SERIAL INTERFACE check:

Baud Rate

Data Bits

Stop Bits

Parity

Data Protocol
Data Terminal Ready

Request To Send

Host interface not communicating with printer Under PARALLEL INTERFACE check:
Interface Type

Strobe Polarity

Response Polarity

409
Appendix A Contacting IBM Technical Support

Table 83. Symptom / Action Table for IBM 6500-v Printer (continued)

Symptom Action

Under SERIAL INTERFACE check:

Interface Type

Under PRINTER CONTROL check:

Interface Selection

Hardware Interface Options check:

I/O Resistor Pack Values

I/O Cabling

Contacting IBM Technical Support

If you are experiencing difficulty with installation of the IBM 6500-v printer in
order to replace a previous printer, please contact your authorized IBM
service representative for assistance.

410
 B Attaching Host Systems To
An ASCII Printer

Overview
This section provides guidelines for preparing host computers with several
different operating systems for use with your IBM 6500-v ASCII printer. Before
you can send data files to an ASCII printer from a host computer, cabling
must be installed to attach the host to the printer; in addition, the printer and
the host must be configured for compatible emulations and host interface
(port) parameters. For the AIX* host operating system, additional operating
system configuration procedures must be completed.
You may need to change your printer configuration in order to ensure
compatibility with your host computer. For tutorial information on configuring
your printer using the configuration menus and LCD display, refer to the IBM
Infoprint 6500 Line Matrix Printer User’s Manual.

Attaching A DOS Workstation

Preparing a DOS workstation for use with an IBM 6500-v ASCII printer
includes attaching either serial or parallel cabling between the workstation
and the printer, selecting a DOS-compatible print driver, and configuring the
workstation’s serial or parallel port for compatibility with your printer.
Follow these steps when attaching your printer to a workstation that uses the
Disk Operating System, Version 3.3 or later:
1. Attach either PC-parallel or RS-232 serial cabling between the printer and
your DOS workstation. During installation of the cabling, make sure that
the printer and the workstation are powered off.
2. Once cabling is installed, power back on the printer and the DOS
workstation.
3. Verify that your printer has the Interface Selection option on the Printer
Control menu set to match the installed cabling (either serial or parallel).
In addition, if parallel cabling is installed, then PC–Parallel should be
selected from the Parallel Interface menu. If serial cabling is installed,
then RS–232 should be selected from the Serial Interface menu.

411
Appendix B Attaching A DOS Workstation

4. Select a print driver. DOS (Version 3.3 or later) does not provide print
drivers. You will need to select a print driver from the application software
you will be using to send data files to the printer.

Most application software packages provide several print drivers;

following the instructions provided with your application software, select
one of the following two print drivers to ensure compatibility with your
printer:
Epson FX–1050
IBM Proprinter III XL
Make sure that the print driver you choose matches the emulation you
have selected from the printer ASCII Emulation menu. For instance, if you
have selected the Epson emulation from the printer menus, then choose
the Epson FX–1050 print driver from your application software.
NOTE: If your application does not supply a print driver for either of the above
printers, select a print driver that supports the printer that is most
similar to the Epson FX–1050 or IBM Proprinter III XL.
5. Depending on which type of interface cabling you have installed between
the printer and the workstation, you must now set either parallel or serial
port parameters for your workstation using the DOS MODE command.
Following is a list of the parameters you will need to set for a parallel port
or a serial port, using the MODE command.
NOTE: Verify that the values you select using the MODE command match
the values you have selected from your IBM printer Parallel Interface
or Serial Interface menu. You may need to change your printer
configuration in order to match the DOS workstation configuration.
a. Parallel port. Use the MODE command to select values for the
following parallel interface parameters (and verify that the same
values are selected from the printer Parallel Interface menu):
Lpt identifies the parallel port to which you want to send print jobs,
which is LPT1, LPT2, or LPT3. This must match the port connector on
the host system where cabling to the printer is installed.
Cols specifies the forms width in terms of the number of characters.
Choose between 80 and 132 columns.
Lines specifies 6 or 8 lines per inch. Make sure that the value you
select here matches the value you choose on the printer operator
panel under Print Format/Lines Per Inch.
Retry specifies the retry action. Choose any of these options:
e - return an error from a status check of a busy port.
b - return busy from a status check of a busy port.
p - continue retrying until printer accepts output.
r - return ready from a status check of a busy port.
n - take no retry action. (Also can specify none.)

412
 b. Serial port. Use the MODE command to select values for the
following serial interface parameters (and verify that the same values
are selected from the printer Serial Interface menu):
Baud rate should be one of the following values: 300, 600, 1200,
2400, 4800, 9600, or 19200. If your version of DOS and your
workstation support a higher baud rate, you can select up to 115,200.
Data bits must be either 8 or 7.
Stop bits must be either 1 or 2. Do not use the stop bit of 1.5.
Parity must be one of these values: none, odd, even, or mark. Do not
use the sense parity value.
Retry specifies the retry action. Choose any of these options:
e - return an error from a status check of a busy port.
b - return busy from a status check of a busy port.
o - continue retrying until printer accepts output.
r - return ready from a status check of a busy port.
n - take no retry action. (Also can specify none.)

Attaching A Windows Workstation

Configuring a Windows workstation for use with an IBM 6500-v printer
includes attaching either serial or parallel cabling between the workstation
and the printer, selecting a compatible print driver, and configuring the
workstation’s serial or parallel port for compatibility with your printer.
Follow these steps when attaching your printer to a workstation that uses
Microsoft Windows 2000 or later:
1. Attach either PC-parallel or RS-232 serial cabling between your printer
and your Windows workstation. Make sure that the printer and the
workstation are powered off during installation of the cabling.
2. Once cabling is installed, power back on the printer and the Windows
workstation.
3. Verify that your printer has the Interface Selection option on the Printer
Control menu set to match the installed cabling (either serial or parallel).
In addition, if parallel cabling is installed, then PC–Parallel should be
selected from the Parallel Interface menu. If serial cabling is installed,
then RS–232 should be selected from the Serial Interface menu.
4. From your Windows workstation, select a print driver from the Windows
Print Manager that supports either an IBM Proprinter XL III or an Epson
FX–1050 printer.
a. Select Start Settings Printers.
b. Double-click Add Printer.
c. Follow the Add Printer Wizard. Define the port on the workstation to
which the cabling is attached. Specify LPT1, LPT2, or LPT3 for a
parallel port. Specify COM1, COM2, or COM3 for a serial port.

413
Appendix B Attaching A Windows Workstation

d. Follow the Add Printer Wizard and choose a printer from the
Manufacturers and Printers panes.
Choose either IBM and Proprinter XL III or Epson and FX–1050.
NOTE: The print driver you select in Windows must be the same as the
emulation selected for your printer from the ASCII Printer Emulation
menu. You may need to change your printer configuration.
e. Finish installing the print driver.
5. If you have selected a serial communications port, right-click the new
printer icon and select Properties.
Select the Ports tab and click Configure Port. Choose the following
values for the serial interface Port Settings.
NOTE: Verify that the values you select match the values you have selected
from your IBM printer Serial Interface menu. You may need to change
your printer configuration in order to match the Windows workstation
configuration.
• Bits per second (baud rate) should be one of these values: 300, 1200,
2400, 4800, 9600, or 19200. Please note that Windows does not offer
150 baud rate as an option but instead offers 110. Do not set the
printer baud rate to 150 and do not set the Windows baud rate to 110.
If your version of Windows and your workstation support higher baud
rates, you can select up to 115200.
• Data bits must be either 8 or 7.
• Parity must be set to one of these values: None, Even, Odd, and
Mark. Do not use the Space value.
• Stop bits must be either 1 or 2. Do not use the 1.5 value.
• Flow control must be Xon / Xoff. Do not use the Hardware or None
values.

414
Attaching An AIX Workstation
This section provides a description of the 6500-v printer drivers and colon files
(virtual printers) for AIX. You can also this information as a guide for installing
this printer on a UNIX** workstation.
NOTE: UNIX operating systems do not provide the AIX System Management
Integration Tool (SMIT). So for examples where SMIT is used, please
refer to your UNIX documentation for the equivalent UNIX command.
This also applies if you do not use SMIT on AIX; you can use the
equivalent AIX command instead.

IMPORTANT The 6500-v printers are supported on AIX operating system version 3.2.5
or later by printer colon files. These printer colon files are available on a
print driver diskette or may be included in the operator system. If the
print driver diskette was not shipped with your printer or the printer
colon files are not a part of the base operator system, contact your IBM
Authorized Remarketeer or IBM Marketing Representative.
NOTE: The print driver diskette includes a readme file that you should
review. The readme file contains additional information not provided
in this document.
The files are currently delivered on a DOS formatted diskette with two files.
The first file is 65XX-i.readme, which contains this information. The second
file is 65XX-i.tar, which contains all the drivers and additional information files.
To read the diskette from AIX, change your directory to where you want to
copy the files, then issue the following commands:
dosread -a 65XX-i.readme 65XX-i.readme
dosread 65XX-i.tar 65XX-i.tar
Unpack the tar file with the following command
# tar -xvf 65XX-i.tar
The installation commands must be run as super user (root). To install the
65XX-i driver, type:
# add_65XX-i
This places the colon files in /usr/lib/lpd/pio/predef, and adds the device to the
Object Database Manager database.
When these colon files have been installed, you will be able to add a 6500-v
printer as a printer device, and add virtual printers as a 6500-v in three
emulation modes; IBM Proprinter III XL, Epson FX–1050, and Printronix
P–Series. You cannot automatically switch between emulations, so the
emulation mode you choose must match what you selected on the printer
operator panel under ASCII Printer Emulation. For instance, if you chose IBM
Proprinter III XL, then you must attach this printer to your AIX workstation as
an IBM Proprinter III XL.

415
Appendix B Attaching An AIX Workstation

Installing An AIX Printer Device

NOTE: For detailed instructions, consult your AIX documentation.
Additionally, an excellent source of information for installing and
configuring printers on an AIX workstation is Printing for Fun and
Profit Under AIX 3, GC24-3570.
To add a printer device to AIX, Versions 3.2 or later, use the System
Management Integration Tool (SMIT), and follow these steps:
1. Logon as a user with appropriate administration privileges, such as root
or as a member of the printq administration group.
2. Enter the SMIT menu with the following command: smit printer
This command takes you directly to the Printer/Plotter Devices menu.

(Alternatively, you may simply enter: SMIT

This command presents the introductory SMIT menu. From the SMIT
menu, you may then traverse to Devices, then Printer/Plotter, and then
Printer/Plotter Devices.)
3. From within the SMIT menus, select Printer/Plotter Devices.
4. Select Add a Printer/Plotter.
5. Use the “Down” arrow key to locate, then choose: IBM 65XX-i Printer. Do
not select the Printronix P9012 Line Printer as this will produce
unexpected results.
6. Select the Printer/Plotter interface.
7. Choose from Parallel, RS–232, or RS–422. The interface you choose
must match your printer Interface Selection setting. (If you choose Serial,
you must also match your printer Serial Interface Type setting.)
8. Once you have selected an interface, a panel titled Add A Printer/Plotter
will display. Some values will already be filled in; you will need to select
others, as described below:
a. Printer/Plotter type is 65XX-i.
b. Printer/Plotter interface should be either parallel, RS–232, or
RS–422.
c. Description is IBM 65XX-i printer.
d. Parent adapter is either sa1 or sa0.
e. PORT number. You select the port number. Default is same as the
parent adapter. For instance, if you make the parent adapter sa1,
then default PORT number is sa1.
f. BAUD RATE. The default is 9600. Your choices are 150, 300, 600,
1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, and 19200. Select the baud rate that
matches your printer setting for Baud Rate in the Serial Interface
menu.
g. PARITY. The default setting is none. You can choose either None,
Even, or Odd. Select Parity that matches your printer setting for Parity
in the Serial Interface menu. (Do not set the printer for Mark or Sense
as these are not supported by AIX.)

416
 Adding A Virtual Printer To AIX

h. BITS per character is the same as Data Bits. The default is 8. Your
choices are 7 or 8. Select a BITS per character value that matches
your printer setting for Data Bits in the Serial Interface menu. (Do not
set/use the AIX options of BITS per character of 5 or 6 as these are
not supported by the printer.)
i. STOP BITS. The default is 1. You can select 1 or 2. Select a value for
STOP BITS that matches your printer setting for STOP BITS in the
Serial Interface menu.
j. XON-XOFF handshaking. The default is Yes. Xon/Xoff is always on,
so you do not have to set any parameters on the printer serial
interface menu.
k. Sticky XON/XOFF flow control. The default is No. Use this default.
l. Use DTR Communication protocol is the same as Data Terminal
Ready. The default is yes. Select a DTR communication protocol
setting that matches your printer setting for Data Terminal Ready
(Yes=True and No=false).
m. TRANSMIT buffer count. The default is 64. Use the default value.
n. Printer TIME OUT period. The default is 60. Use the default value.
9. After you have completed selecting values for the Add a Printer/Plotter
panel, press Enter or select Do to save your changes. Your printer has
now been added to the AIX operating system.
10. To test if your printer is properly attached, at the command line, type:
cat /etc/qconfig > /dev/lpnn, where lpnn is the printer device number
assigned to the printer, such as s1, which would be entered as lps1. This
should print out the contents of the /etc/qconfig file.

Adding A Virtual Printer To AIX

To add a virtual printer to AIX, Versions 3.2 or later, use the System
Management Integration Tool (SMIT), and follow these steps:
1. Logon as a user with appropriate administration privileges.
2. Enter the SMIT menu with the following command: smit printer

This command takes you directly to the Printer/Plotter Devices menu.

Alternatively, you may simply enter: SMIT

This command presents the introductory SMIT menu. From the SMIT
menu, you may then traverse to Devices, then Printer/Plotter, and then
Printer/Plotter Devices.
3. From within the SMIT menu, select Printer/Plotter Devices.
4. Select Manager Local Printer Subsystem.
5. Select Add a Virtual Printer.

417
Appendix B Attaching An AIX Workstation

6. Make a selection from the following list, that begins Select Printer or
Plotter Attached to Host. If you attached this printer to an Xstation or
some other LAN connection, select the appropriate option.
Printer or Plotter Attached to Host
Printer or Plotter Attached to Xstation
Printer or Plotter Attached to ASCII Terminal
Network Printer (Hewlett-Packard** JetDirect**)
Printer or Plotter Attached to IBM 4033 LAN Connection
Printer Attached to IBM Integrated Network Option
Network Printer (Hewlett-Packard JetDirect)
7. For device name, select lp0 (match number of printer added).
8. For header pages, choose from these three options: none, each file, or
each job.
9. For trailer pages, choose form these three options: none, each file, or
each job.
10. Press the Enter key. The following menu selections will be displayed.
Since the 65XX-i printer supports multiple data streams, a print queue will
be created for each data stream. This enables you to send print jobs to a
print queue that supports the printer you are emulating, such as a
Proprinter or Epson.

------------------- IBM Proprinter III XL Emulation

------------------
Enter print queue name (or, ! to bypass configuration): -> (pro)
6404pro
Should this queue be default queue? -> (y) n
------------------- Printronix P-Series Emulation
------------------
Enter print queue name (or, ! to bypass configuration): -> (pri)
6404pri
Should this queue be default queue? -> (y) n
------------------- Epson FX 1050 Emulation
Enter print queue name (or, ! to bypass configuration): -> (eps)
6404eps
Should this queue be default queue? -> (y) n

Figure 51. AIX Print Queue Creation

418
 Printing To An AIX Attached Printer

Printing To An AIX Attached Printer

You can use standard AIX (UNIX) print commands including: lp, lpr, enq, and
qprt. The qprt command supports a large range of commands for selecting
pitch and print styles. For information on specific flags you can use with the
qprt command, refer to the following subsections:
• Printing in Proprinter III XL Emulation Mode
• Printing in Epson FX–1050 Emulation Mode
• Printing in P–Series Emulation Mode
Here are some examples of AIX (UNIX) print commands:
qprt -P65XX-ipro /etc/motd
enq -P65XX-ieps /etc/qconfig
lptest 50 50 | lp -d65XX-ipri

Printing in Proprinter III XL Emulation Mode

The &65XX-i. colon file for the Proprinter III XL emulation follows the same
conventions as the Proprinter III XL virtual printer driver with only minor
exceptions. The major enhancement is the full support of the 20 pitch fonts.
Some of the most commonly used qprt print command flags are described in
Table 84. The virtual printer attributes that correspond to each flag value
begin with an underbar and have the same character as the flag character.
For pitch, the &65XX-i. virtual printer supports 10, 12, 17, and 20 pitch in
Proprinter III XL mode. Although the printer supports a pitch of 15, this is not
supported by this print driver.
You may select pitch using the flags shown in Table 84 with the qprt
command. Double-wide character printing is also supported.

Table 84. Proprinter III XL Emulation

Function Flag and Attribute Note

10 Pitch -p10 Default

12 Pitch -p12

17 Pitch -k+

20 Pitch -K+ -p12 Requires both flags.

20 Pitch -W+

136 page width -w 136 Default

Draft printing -q0 Usually used with 12 cpi

DP (Data Processing) -q1 Default

DP (Data Processing) -q2 NLQ (Near Letter Quality)

419
Appendix B Attaching An AIX Workstation

Table 84. Proprinter III XL Emulation

Function Flag and Attribute Note

OCR A -q3 Only supports 10 pitch; do not

use with other pitch sizes.
Overrides other character
attributes.
Italic print -sitalic Can be used with all modes.
Forces NLQ mode.

Double Strike -y+ Can be used with all modes.

Emphasized -e+ Can be used with all modes.

8 lines per inch -v8 Default is 6; only 6 and 8 lines

per inch are valid.

Unidirectional printing -U+

The default page width is 136 characters and the default page length is 66
lines. The page width and length adjust automatically with the different pitches
and line densities. For example:
• Page width is 163 characters at pitch 12.
• Page width is 231 characters at a pitch of 17.
• Page width is 272 characters at a pitch of 20.
• Page length is 88 lines at 8 lines per inch.
For additional printer flags, review the qprt command. You can view more
information on the qprt command by typing man qprt from an AIX command
line.

Printing in Epson FX–1050 Emulation Mode

The &65xx. colon file for the Epson emulation takes advantage of most of the
functions of the Epson escape sequences. Some enhancements have been
added in support of 15-pitch printing, and in support of additional print quality
modes beyond the two defined for the Epson emulation.
The page width cannot be set in Epson emulation mode, and therefore must
be set from the front panel of the 6500-v printer. The settings must be saved
as the power on custom set, and the printer powered off and back on for the
these settings to take effect. If this is not done, the data stream will reset the
width to the power on condition with the ESC@ command that resets the
printer.

420
 Printing To An AIX Attached Printer

Some of the most commonly used qprt print command flags for the Epson
emulation are shown in Table 85.

Table 85. Epson FX-1050 Emulation

Function Flag and Attribute Note

10 Pitch -p10 Default

12 Pitch -p12

17 Pitch -p17

20 Pitch -p20 Requires both flags.

20 Pitch -W+

-w136 Default

DP -q0 Data Processing

NLQ -q1 Near Letter Quality1

High Speed DP -q2 Default
Data Processing

OCR-A -q3q Only supports 10 pitch; do not

use with other pitch sizes.2

Italic Print -sitalic Can be used with all modes.

Double Strike -y+ Can be used with all modes.

Emphasized -e+ Can be used with all modes.

Double high -E+ Can be used with all modes.

8 lines per inch =v8 Default is 6; only 6 and 8 lines

per inch are valid.

Unidirectional printing -U+

1 Combining NLQ and 20 pitch produces 17 cpi printing.
2 -p flags will be ignored and may cause problems in OCR quality mode.
In addition, doublewide, double-high, and italic do not work in OCR mode.

The default page width is 136 characters, and the default page length is 66
lines. The page width and length adjust automatically with the different pitch
and line density. For example:
• Page width is 163 characters at pitch 12.
• Page width is 204 characters at a pitch of 15.
• Page width is 231 characters at a pitch of 17.
• Page width is 272 characters at a pitch of 20.
• Page length is 88 lines at 8 lines per inch.

421
Appendix B Attaching An AIX Workstation

For additional printer flags, review the qprt command. You can view more
information on the qprt command by typing man qprt from an AIX command
line.

Printing in P–Series Emulation Mode

NOTE: Set the SFCC value on the printer to 27 (Hex 1B), or the virtual printer
will not work. See the IBM Infoprint 6500 Line Matrix Printer User’s
Manual for instructions on setting this value. The forms length must
be set manually from the front panel in addition to the use of the -l
flag.
The &65xx. colon file for the Printronix P–Series Emulation takes advantage
of most of the functions of the Printronix escape sequences.
Some of the most commonly used qprt print command flags for the P–Series
emulation are shown in Table 86.

Table 86. Printronix P-Series Emulation

Function Flag and Attribute Note

10 Pitch -p10 Default

12 Pitch -p12

13 Pitch -p13
15 Pitch -p15

17 Pitch -p17

20 Pitch -K+ -p12 Requires both flags.

20 Pitch -W+

136 page width -w 136 Default

High Speed -q0 120 by 48 dpi

OCR-A -q1 120 by 144 dpi; use with pitch 10

flag only; all other pitch flags
ignored

DP -q2 120 by 72 dpi Data Processing

NLQ -q3 180 by 96 dpi Near Letter Quality

Double Strike -y+ Can be used with all modes.

Emphasized -e+ Can be used with all modes.

8 lines per inch -v8 Default is 6; only 6 and 8 lines

per inch are valid.

Unidirectional printing -U+

422
 Printing To An AIX Attached Printer

The default page width is 136 characters, and the default page length is 66
lines. The page width and length adjust automatically with the different pitch
and line density. For example:
• Page width is 163 characters at pitch 12.
• Page width is 176 characters at pitch 13.
• Page width is 204 characters at pitch 15.
• Page width is 233 characters at a pitch of 17.
• Page width is 260 characters at a pitch of 20.
• Page length is 88 lines at 8 lines per inch.
Refer to “IBM Proprinter III XL Emulation” in this book for more information.
For additional printer flags, review the qprt command. You can view more
information on the qprt command by typing man qprt from an AIX command
line. You can also obtain information from InfoExplorer.
The code page translation steps are normally done with attributes t0, t1, t2, t3
which point to the code pages, ant c1, c2, c3, c4....which contain the
commands to send to the printer to select a code page. In this virtual printer,
the character set is based on the “ESC l xyz” P–Series Character Set Select
command with the IBM PC character set and English (ASCII USA) language
selected.
To choose another symbol set, use the AIX (UNIX) lsvirprt command to edit
the virtual printer and change the et attribute. The values you may specify are
a subset of the values for the P-Series Character Set Select command
described in Table 28, Table 29, and Table 30 (see page 154). The defined
values you may select for x, y, and z are as follows:

Table 87. x Values for Character Set Select

x Values Character Set Select

0 IBM PC

1 Multinational
2 ECMA 94 Latin 1

3 DEC Multinational

Table 88. y Values for International Language Select

y Values x=0 x=1 x=2 x=2

0 ASCII (USA) ASCII (USA) ASCII (USA) ASCII (USA)

1 French EBCDIC German French

2 German n/a Swedish German

423
Appendix B Attaching An iSeries ASCII Workstation Controller

Table 89. z Values for International Language Select

z Values x=0 x=1 x=2 x=3

0 ASCII PC Multinational Barcode 10 cpi DEC Multinational

1 Mult. NLQ 10 cpi Mult. NLQ 10 cpi Mult. NLQ 10 cpi Mult. NLQ 10 cpi

Attaching An iSeries ASCII Workstation Controller

The ASCII workstation controller provides the ability to attach ASCII printers,
such as this printer, through an RS–232 or RS–422 interface. The attached
printer may be used with either host-directed printing or host print transform.

Host-Directed Printing
The workstation controller enables support for ASCII printers to emulate an
IBM 5224 printer. The ASCII printer appears to the iSeries as a twinaxial
printer. For detailed information, read IBM iSeries Printing III, GC24-4028.
NOTE: When selecting an ASCII printer from an iSeries, make sure you
select either an IBM Proprinter III XL or Epson FX–1050 printer, as
this printer provides emulation support for the IBM 65XX-i printers.

Host Print Transform

The Host Print Transform function is available in iSeries Version 2.0, Release
3.0 and later. This function transforms SCS data streams to ASCII on the
iSeries. The ASCII data stream that is generated is in SCS ASCII
Transparency mode (ATRN 03nn). The translated ASCII goes straight to the
printer without additional transformation. Below are brief steps that describe
how to configure Host Print Transform. For detailed information, read IBM
iSeries Printing III, GC24-4028

Configuring Host Print Transform

For ASCII printers, you need to create or change a printer device description
on the iSeries to use the Host Print Transform.
NOTE: Before you create or change a printer device, you should attach the
printer to the workstation controller and then enable iSeries to auto-
configure the printer device. This creates a printer device you can
update.

424
 Host Print Transform

Follow these steps:

1. After you have attached the printer to the ASCII Workstation Controller,
enable iSeries to auto-configure the printer device.
2. End the printer writer and vary off the device. Before making configuration
changes, the printer writer must be ended and the device varied off. Enter
the following commands on a command line to end the writer and vary off
the device:
ENDWTR WTR(HPTRT2) OPTION(*IMMED)
VRYCFG CFGOBJ(HPTPRT2) CFGTYPE(*DEV) STATUS(*OFF)
3. Change the device description to match this printer. Enter the following
commands on a command line to begin changing the device description:
CHGDEVPRT HPTPRT2
4. From the displayed menu, select the appropriate values for this printer
and press Enter to save your choices. (You can press F4 for a selection of
supported values you may choose.) Among the choices, here are some
suggested values:
Host Print Transform: *Yes
Manufacturer type and model: IBM Proprinter III XL
NOTE: When selecting an ASCII printer, make sure you select either an IBM
Proprinter III XL or Epson FX–1050 printer, because this printer
provides emulation support for the 65XX-i printers.
5. After you have selected and saved the values you want, you need to vary
the device back on. Enter the following command on a command line to
vary the device back on:
VRYCFG CFGOBJ(HPTPRT2) CFGTYPE(*DEV) STATUS(*ON)
6. Restart the writer. Enter the following command on a command line to
restart the writer.
STRPRTWTR WTR(HPTRT2)
You can now begin printing with Host Print Transform.

425
Appendix B Attaching An iSeries ASCII Workstation Controller

426
 C PTR_SETUP Option

Overview
The PTR_SETUP commands are a superset of commands which allows the
printer to perform several tasks by parsing commands either stored in flash
memory or sent to the printer by the host. Commands range from re-routing
debug statements to downloading complete printer configurations.

The PTR_SETUP Commands

Some concepts to keep in mind are as follows:
1. PTR_SETUP commands are not emulation specific. In a system with an
IGP, the IGP level emulation will process the PTR_SETUP commands. In
a system without an IGP, the PTR_SETUP commands will be processed
by the base emulation. The CTHI emulation will not process PTR_SETUP
commands.
2. Since there is no disk on a flash-based printer, DISK_IO commands are
now called FILE_IO. However, for backwards compatibility DISK_IO and
FILE_IO are synonymous.
3. The PTR_SETUP command set is case sensitive; all PTR_SETUP
commands are in upper case characters only.
4. The white space separating commands may be any number of spaces
and tabs. This allows a PTR_SETUP file to be formatted for easier
readability.
5. Any unknown command will terminate the PTR_SETUP processing. The
offending command will be the first line of printed text.
6. Although the original implementation of PTR_SETUP allowed for only a
single parameter, separated from the sub-command by a single
semicolon (;) character, the new PTR_SETUP command set allows for
multiple parameters separated by commas, semicolons, spaces or tabs.

427
Appendix C The PTR_SETUP Commands

Commands
This section describes the existing PTR_SETUP commands and provides a
general description of how commands are formed.
Each emulation has modes in which the PTR_SETUP commands could get
missed. For this reason, it is highly recommended that all PTR_SETUP
commands be placed between print jobs, rather than attempting to imbed
them within jobs.
PTR_SETUP commands have the following format:
(SFCC)PTR_SETUP
Command–Sub Command;Value
PTR_END
For example, if the SFCC assigned to the emulation you are using is the caret
(^, hex 5E), and you wanted to load configuration number 4 and capture all
incoming data to a file named “BIN”, you would use the following command:
^PTR_SETUP
CONFIG–LOAD;4 FILE_IO–CAPTURE;BIN
PTR_END
Table 90 lists all the command, sub-command, and parameter combinations
and gives a brief description of the command.
NOTE: When a file system error occurs, a message will be displayed on the
front panel indicating the error, and the action needed to take to
correct the error.

Table 90. PTR_SETUP Commands

Command Sub-Command Parameter Description

CONFIG LOAD Cfg Cfg can be 0-8. The PTR_SETUP

will load configuration Cfg. If
configuration Cfg was not previously
saved, the operator panel will
display an error message and the
current configuration will be kept.
SAVE Cfg Cfg must be 1-8. This command will
save the current configuration as
configuration Cfg. If Cfg is not in the
range of 1-8, the command is
ignored.

POWERUP Cfg Sets the power-up configuration to

Cfg and loads Configuration Cfg.
Cfg can be any value from 0-8,
where 0 is the factory default.

428
 Commands

Table 90. PTR_SETUP Commands (continued)

Command Sub-Command Parameter Description

CONFIG PRINT Cfg Prints Configuration Cfg. Cfg can be

a number 1-8, or one of four pre-
defined configurations. The four
non-numeric configurations are
requested using the first character
for the CURRENT, FACTORY,
POWERUP, or ALL configuration(s).

DELETE Cfg Deletes Configuration number Cfg.

Cfg must be in the range of 1-8.
UPLOAD Port;Cfg This command uploads the
configuration stored in location Cfg
to the port specified by Port. Port
must either be “1284” or “SERIAL”.
Cfg may be 1-8 or “ALL”.
DOWNLOAD Cfg This command saves the
configuration data that follows as
configuration Cfg. Cfg must be 1-8
or “END” .

RESET Reboots the Printer.

LP MODE Protocol Protocol must be 0-4. This
command resets the software
protocol, and is selected as follows:
0 - P-Series
1 - P-Series XQ
2 - Serial Matrix
3 - Proprinter III XL
4 - Epson FX-1050

FILE_IO CAPTURE Filename Captures all incoming data into a file

(DISK_IO) named Filename. Receipt of a
FILE_IO CAPTURE command
without the Filename parameter will
force the file data to be written to
FLASH, and will end the file
capture.

DRIVE Letter This command is parsed for

backwards compatibility. However,
since the flash file system is a single
device, the drive letter will be
ignored.
DEL Filename The DEL command will mark a file
as deleted. The space the file
occupied will be freed the next time
the printer is powered up.

429
Appendix C The PTR_SETUP Commands

Table 90. PTR_SETUP Commands (continued)

Command Sub-Command Parameter Description

FILE_IO RUNFILE File;Prop The RUNFILE command will open

(DISK_IO) the file named File for printing. After
the PTR_END command is
processed, the contents of File will
get printed before any more data is
read from the host. If the Prop field
is present, RUNFILE will verify that
Prop matches the saved file
properties. Any mismatch will cause
the command to be ignored.

MAXSIZE Kb For backwards compatibility.

MINSIZE Kb For backwards compatibility.

PROPS File;Prop The PROPS command will set the

file properties of a given file. The file
properties are a four letter, case
sensitive file descriptor. The
properties field can be used to
ensure that a file is used for its
intended purpose. Once properties
have been associated with a file,
they can not be changed.

UPLOAD File;Port Reads the file named File out of the

flash file system and sends it to a
host computer via the Port I/O port.
Port is either 1284 (for reverse
nibble or byte mode transfer using
the parallel port), or SERIAL.
NOTE: if the Ethernet option is
installed, 1284 is used to upload
across the network.

PTR_END (none) (none) Exits the PTR_SETUP.

430
 Commands

Summary of the CONFIG Command

The UPLOAD and DOWNLOAD command can be used for uploading and
downloading complete printer configurations. If a customer needs to configure
50 printers identically, the customer needs only configure one printer and
UPLOAD the configurations. The UPLOADed configurations may then be
DOWNLOADed to other printers eliminating the necessity for the operator to
configure each printer manually.
The UPLOAD command will always place a header and a footer into the
uploaded data. This header will be the DOWNLOAD command followed by
the configuration number. The footer will be the DOWNLOAD END command.
The operator should be aware that the UPLOAD and DOWNLOAD
commands use a secondary copy of the menu structure which does not affect
the printer's active configuration. This allows the UPLOAD and DOWNLOAD
commands to operate without affecting the printer's current configuration. If
the operator intends to use one of the DOWNLOADed configurations, the
operator should reboot the printer to ensure proper operation. This can be
accomplished by adding the RESET command as the last command in your
setup file. This is necessary because the printer caches the active
configuration. Rebooting the printer ensures that the desired configuration is
correctly read from Non-Volatile RAM.
NOTE: While an upload or download is in progress, the Front Panel will be
unavailable.
The Configuration Save and Delete commands from the front panel can be
blocked by using the Protect Configurations feature. This is intended to
prevent someone from inadvertently reconfiguring a printer. The PTR_SETUP
commands, however, will override the protect configurations feature. All
PTR_SETUP commands will be honored regardless of the value of the
Protect Configurations feature.

431
Appendix C The PTR_SETUP Commands

Operation of the FILE_IO Command

When a file is opened for writing with the FILE_IO CAPTURE filename
command, the system will allocate RAM for file control blocks and 1 Kbyte for
data. If the file already exists on the Flash File System and the Overwrite
Enable feature in the Flash File System menu is set to disable, a warning will
be displayed on the front panel. After clearing the warning, the file data will be
printed. To overwrite the existing file, set the Overwrite Files option to enable.
Due to the nature of writing to flash, any data intended to be stored
permanently in flash must first be copied into RAM. As a result, the ability to
manipulate files in the Flash File System is dependent upon the printer having
sufficient RAM. None of the captured file data will be committed to flash until
the entire file is loaded. The PTR_SETUP parser will interpret the command
“FILE_IO-CAPTURE<lf>” as an end of file marker. Receipt of the command
will cause all file data to be written to flash. The file system allocates RAM for
temporary data storage in 1 Kbyte blocks. If at any time during the file
download the printer runs out of RAM, a warning will be displayed on the front
panel and as much of the file as possible will be saved in flash. To download
larger files you may need add additional RAM to the printer.
Three things can limit the ability to save a file: insufficient RAM, insufficient
Flash, and lack of empty file system entries. Flash can only be written once
before it needs to be “optimized”. As a result, the maximum file size is limited
to the largest unwritten block of Flash. If any of these problems occur, the
printer will display an error message and will attempt to provide the operator
with a description of what steps to take to correct the error. Normally, the
solution will involve optimizing the flash file system. This can be accomplished
through the front operator panel menu by selecting the Optimize & Reboot
function in the File System menu under PRINTER CONTROL.
NOTE: After selecting the Optimize & Reboot function, do not shut off the
printer's power until after the printer returns to the power-on state.
Loss of power during the optimize process may corrupt the printer's
program. If this occurs, first attempt to repeat the downloading
process. If that fails, contact an authorized service representative.

432
 D ASCII Character Set

B7 0
B6 0
B5 1
BITS
KEY B4 B3 B2 B1
33 OCTAL equivalent
1 0 1 1 ESC 27 DECIMAL equivalent
1B HEX equivalent
ASCII Character Name
B7 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
B6 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1
B5 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
BITS COLUMN
B4 B3 B2 B1 ROW 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
0 20 40 60 100 120 140 160
0 0 0 0 0 NUL 0 DLE 16 SP 32 0 48 @ 64 P 80 96 p 112
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70
1 21 41 61 101 121 141 161
0 0 0 1 1 SOH 1
DC1 17
! 33
1 49
A 65
Q 81
a 97
q 113
(XON)
1 11 21 31 41 51 61 71
2 22 42 62 102 122 142 162
0 0 1 0 2 STX 2 DC2 18 " 34 2 50 B 66 R 82 b 98 r 114
2 12 22 32 42 52 62 72
3 23 43 63 103 123 143 163
0 0 1 1 3 ETX 3
DC3 19 # 35 3 51 C 67 S 83 c 99 s 115
(XOFF)
3 13 23 33 43 53 63 73
4 24 44 64 104 124 144 164
0 1 0 0 4 EOT 4 DC4 20 $ 36 4 52 D 68 T 84 d 100 t 116
4 14 24 34 44 54 64 74
5 25 45 65 105 125 145 165
0 1 0 1 5 ENQ 5 NAK 21 % 37 5 53 E 69 U 85 e 101 u 117
5 15 25 35 45 55 65 75
6 26 46 66 106 126 146 166
0 1 1 0 6 ACK 6 SYN 22 & 38 6 54 F 70 V 86 f 102 v 118
6 16 26 36 46 56 66 76
7 27 47 67 107 127 147 167
0 1 1 1 7 BEL 7 ETB 23 ' 39 7 55 G 71 W 87 g 103 w 119
7 17 27 37 47 57 67 77
10 30 50 70 110 130 150 170
1 0 0 0 8 BS 8 CAN 24 ( 40 8 56 H 72 X 88 h 104 x 120
8 18 28 38 48 58 68 78
11 31 51 71 111 131 151 171
1 0 0 1 9 HT 9 EM 25 ) 41 9 57 I 73 Y 89 i 105 y 121
9 19 29 39 49 59 69 79
12 32 52 72 112 132 152 172
1 0 1 0 10 LF 10
0A
SUB 26
1A
* 42
2A
: 58
3A
J 74
4A
Z 90
5A
j 106
6A
z 122
7A
13 33 53 73 113 133 153 173
1 0 1 1 11 VT 11 ESC 27 + 43 ; 59 K 75 [ 91 k 107 { 123
0B 1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B
14 34 54 74 114 134 154 174
1 1 0 0 12 FF 12 FS 28 44 < 60 L 76 \ 92 l 108 | 124
0C 1C , 2C 3C 4C 5C 6C 7C
15 35 55 75 115 135 155 175
1 1 0 1
13 CR 13 GS 29 - 45 = 61 M 77 ] 93 m 109 } 125
0D 1D 2D 3D 4D 5D 6D 7D
16 36 56 76 116 136 156 176
1 1 1 0 14 SO 14 RS 30 . 46 > 62 N 78 ^ 94 n 110 ~ 126
0E 1E 2E 3E 4E 5E 6E 7E
17 37 57 77 117 137 157 177
1 1 1 1 15 SI 15 US 31 / 47 ? 63 O 79 _ 95 o 111 DEL 127
0F 1F 2F 3F 4F 5F 6F 7F

433
Appendix D

434
 E Proprinter III XL
Character Sets

Overview
This appendix shows the character set charts (also referred to as code pages)
for the Proprinter III XL emulation. The character sets shown in this appendix
may be selected using the configuration menus, described in detail in
Chapter 4 of the User’s Manual.
Each Proprinter III XL character set is shown printed in NLQ. The following
modes can be selected from the operator panel:
• NLQ Serif (also called simply NLQ)
• NLQ Sans Serif (selected from operator panel or via ESC I)
• Draft 12 CPI (default draft mode for most CPI settings)
• Draft 10 CPI (for some character sets, additional characters
will print at 10 CPI and 5 CPI only)
DP mode is not shown in this appendix, because the set of characters that
print in DP mode always matches the characters that print in NLQ (Serif
quality).
The maximum set of printable symbols is shown for columns 80-9F (selected
via the ESC 6 control code). For code pages 0437 and 0850, the Print All
Characters (ESC \) control code has been used to show a full set of printable
symbols for columns 00-1F.

435
Appendix E Overview

0437 PC CHARACTER SET 1

436
 0737 GREEK

0737 GREEK

437
Appendix E Overview

0813 GREEK

438
 0819 ISO/ANSI MULTILINGUAL

0819 ISO/ANSI MULTILINGUAL

439
Appendix E Overview

0850 PC MULTILINGUAL

440
 0851 GREEK OLD

0851 GREEK OLD

441
Appendix E Overview

0852 LATIN 2/ROECE

442
 0853 LATIN 3 PC

0853 LATIN 3 PC

443
Appendix E Overview

0855 CYRILLIC

444
 0857 TURKISH

0857 TURKISH

445
Appendix E Overview

0858 PC EURO MULTILINGUAL

446
 0860 PORTUGUESE

0860 PORTUGUESE

447
Appendix E Overview

0861 ICELANDIC

448
 0862 HEBREW

0862 HEBREW

449
Appendix E Overview

0863 CANADIAN FRENCH

450
 0864 ARABIC

0864 ARABIC

451
Appendix E Overview

0865 DANISH/NORWEGIAN

452
 0866 CYRILLIC

0866 CYRILLIC

453
Appendix E Overview

0869 GREEK NEW

454
 0874 THAI

0874 THAI

455
Appendix

0876 OCR A

456
 0877 OCR B

0877 OCR B

457
Appendix

0912 ISO LATIN 2 PC

458
 0913 ISO LATIN 3

0913 ISO LATIN 3

459
Appendix

0914 ISO LATIN 4

460
 0915 ISO CYRILLIC PC

0915 ISO CYRILLIC PC

461
Appendix

0916 HEBREW

462
 0920 ISO LATIN 5 TURKISH

0920 ISO LATIN 5 TURKISH

463
Appendix

0921 ISO BALTIC MULTILINGUAL

464
 0922 ESTONIAN

0922 ESTONIAN

465
Appendix

0923 LATIN 9 8859-15

466
 1006 ISO URDU

1006 ISO URDU

467
Appendix

1008 ISO ARABIC

468
 1045 ARABIC EXTENDED

1045 ARABIC EXTENDED

469
Appendix

1098 FARSI 1285 (PC)

470
 1116 ESTONIAN

1116 ESTONIAN

471
Appendix

1117 LATVIAN

472
 1118 LITHUANIAN

1118 LITHUANIAN

473
Appendix

1129 VIETNAMESE

474
 1134 HEBREW OLD

1134 HEBREW OLD

475
Appendix

476
 F Epson FX-1050 Emulation
Character Sets

Overview
This appendix shows the character set charts (also referred to as code pages)
for the Epson FX-1050 emulation. The character sets are shown printed in
Near Letter Quality (NLQ), although Draft and DP mode are also supported.
The character sets may be selected using the configuration menus, described
in detail in Chapter 4 of the User’s Manual. The international character sets
may be selected using the “ESC R n” control code (page 104). The maximum
set of printable symbols is shown for columns 80-9F (selected via the ESC I
or ESC 6 control code).
Table 20 on page 97 describes print mode support for each Epson FX-1050
character set. Most of the character sets are supported in NLQ, DP, and Draft
modes; the only exception to this is OCR A and OCR B, as described in the
table.
NOTE: In addition to the 14 Epson foreign language character sets shown on
page 519 through page 533, two additional sets of foreign language
character sets can be specified via the operator panel and/or control
codes.

The second set of foreign language character sets substitutes the

IBM Graphics Code Page 0437 characters (page 480) for positions
hex 80 through FF within each language code page (shown on page
519 through page 533). You may select the second set of foreign
language character sets in two ways: by entering an “ESC t 1” control
code from an attached host, or by choosing the 0437 PC Character
Set and the Epson Print Language menu options on the Epson
Emulation menu.

The third set of foreign language character sets substitutes the IBM
Graphics Code Page 0437 characters (page 480) for positions hex
00-1F and 80 through 9F within each Epson language code page
(page 519 through page 533). You may select the third set by
selecting the Epson code page 0437 at the operator panel, then
entering an “ESC R” control code from an attached host.

477
Appendix F Overview

OCR A

478
 OCR B

OCR B

479
Appendix F Overview

0437 PC CHARACTER SET

480
 0737 GREEK

0737 GREEK

481
Appendix F Overview

0813 GREEK

482
 0819 ISO/ANSI MULTILINGUAL

0819 ISO/ANSI MULTILINGUAL

483
Appendix F Overview

0850 PC MULTILINGUAL

484
 0851 GREEK OLD

0851 GREEK OLD

485
Appendix F Overview

0852 LATIN 2/ROECE

486
 0853 LATIN 3 PC

0853 LATIN 3 PC

487
Appendix F Overview

0855 CYRILLIC

488
 0857 TURKISH

0857 TURKISH

489
Appendix F Overview

0858 PC EURO MULTILINGUAL

490
 0860 PORTUGUESE

0860 PORTUGUESE

491
Appendix F Overview

0861 ICELANDIC

492
 0862 HEBREW

0862 HEBREW

493
Appendix F Overview

0863 FRENCH CANADIAN

494
 0864 ARABIC

0864 ARABIC

495
Appendix F Overview

0865 DANISH/NORWEGIAN

496
 0866 CYRILLIC

0866 CYRILLIC

497
Appendix F Overview

0869 GREEK NEW

498
 0874 THAI

0874 THAI

499
Appendix F Overview

0912 ISO LATIN 2 PC

500
 0913 ISO LATIN 3

0913 ISO LATIN 3

501
Appendix F Overview

0914 ISO LATIN 4

502
 0915 ISO CYRILLIC PC

0915 ISO CYRILLIC PC

503
Appendix F Overview

0916 HEBREW

504
 0920 ISO LATIN 5 TURKISH

0920 ISO LATIN 5 TURKISH

505
Appendix

0921 ISO BALTIC MULTILINGUAL

506
 0922 ESTONIAN

0922 ESTONIAN

507
Appendix

0923 LATIN 9 8859-15

508
 1006 ISO URDU

1006 ISO URDU

509
Appendix

1008 ISO ARABIC

510
 1046 ARABIC EXTENDED

1046 ARABIC EXTENDED

511
Appendix

1089 ISO ARABIC

512
 1098 FARSI 1285

1098 FARSI 1285

513
Appendix

1116 ESTONIAN

514
 1117 LATVIAN

1117 LATVIAN

515
Appendix

1118 LITHUANIAN

516
 1129 VIETNAMESE

1129 VIETNAMESE

517
Appendix

1134 HEBREW OLD

518
 EPSON SET, ASCII (USA)

EPSON SET, ASCII (USA)

519
Appendix

EPSON SET, FRENCH

520
 EPSON SET, GERMAN

EPSON SET, GERMAN

521
Appendix

EPSON SET, ENGLISH (UK)

522
 EPSON SET, DANISH I

EPSON SET, DANISH I

523
Appendix

EPSON SET, SWEDISH

524
 EPSON SET, ITALIAN

EPSON SET, ITALIAN

525
Appendix

EPSON SET, SPANISH I

526
 EPSON SET, JAPANESE

EPSON SET, JAPANESE

527
Appendix

EPSON SET, NORWEGIAN

528
 EPSON SET, DANISH II

EPSON SET, DANISH II

529
Appendix

EPSON SET, SPANISH II

530
 EPSON SET, LATIN AMERICAN I

EPSON SET, LATIN AMERICAN I

531
Appendix

EPSON SET, FRENCH CANADIAN

532
 EPSON SET, LATIN AMERICAN II

EPSON SET, LATIN AMERICAN II

533
Appendix

534
 G P–Series And Serial
Matrix Character Sets

Overview
This appendix shows the character set charts (also referred to as code pages)
for the P-Series and Serial Matrix emulations. DP quality is also supported,
although not shown in this Appendix. The character sets may be selected
using the configuration menus, described in detail in Chapter 4 of the User’s
Manual. There are also several control codes that allow you to select different
character sets, described in Chapter 4 of this book. These include “SFCC l,”
“SFCC OSET,” and “SFCC PSET.”
The maximum set of printable symbols is shown for columns 80-9F (selected
via the ESC 6 control code).
Table 27 on page 146 describes print mode support for each P–Series
character set. Most of the character sets are supported in NLQ, DP, and Draft
modes; the few exceptions are described in the table.
NOTE: The 14 IBM PC Primary foreign language character sets shown on
page 536 through page 549 are based on the IBM PC 0437 character
set. A second set of 14 foreign language character sets can also be
specified that are based on the 0850 PC Multilingual Character Set
shown on page 551. You can select the 0850–based IBM PC sets
either via control codes or using the operator panel.

The “SFCC l xyz” control code allows you to specify the 0850 code
page by specifying z=1, x=0 (Table 30 on page 155), and selecting an
international language set using the y parameter (Table 29 on
page 154).

To select the 0850 language sets from the operator panel, choose the
following from the IBM PC submenu on the P-Series Print Language
menu (described in detail in Chapter 4 of the User’s Manual):

Select Subset Extended - 0850 PC Multilingual

Select Subset Primary - any language selection

The resulting character sets will be based on the 0850 code page
shown on page 551, with foreign language characters substituted in
locations 23, 24, 40, 5B, 5C, 5D, 5E, 60, 7B, 7C, 7D, and 7E (these
characters are shown on page 536 through page 549).

535
Appendix G Overview

IBM PC, PRIMARY SUBSET: ASCII (USA)

536
 IBM PC, PRIMARY SUBSET: FRENCH

IBM PC, PRIMARY SUBSET: FRENCH

537
Appendix G Overview

IBM PC, PRIMARY SUBSET: GERMAN

538
 IBM PC, PRIMARY SUBSET: ENGLISH (UK)

IBM PC, PRIMARY SUBSET: ENGLISH (UK)

539
Appendix G Overview

IBM PC, PRIMARY SUBSET: DANISH

540
 IBM PC, PRIMARY SUBSET: SWEDISH

IBM PC, PRIMARY SUBSET: SWEDISH

541
Appendix G Overview

IBM PC, PRIMARY SUBSET: ITALIAN

542
 IBM PC, PRIMARY SUBSET: SPANISH

IBM PC, PRIMARY SUBSET: SPANISH

543
Appendix G Overview

IBM PC, PRIMARY SUBSET: JAPANESE

544
 IBM PC, PRIMARY SUBSET: FRENCH CANADIAN

IBM PC, PRIMARY SUBSET: FRENCH CANADIAN

545
Appendix G Overview

IBM PC, PRIMARY SUBSET: LATIN AMERICAN

546
 IBM PC, PRMARY SUBSET: DANISH II

IBM PC, PRMARY SUBSET: DANISH II

547
Appendix G Overview

IBM PC, PRIMARY SUBSET: SPANISH II

548
 IBM PC, PRIMARY SUBSET: LATIN AMERICAN II

IBM PC, PRIMARY SUBSET: LATIN AMERICAN II

549
Appendix G Overview

IBM PC, EXTENDED SUBSET:

0437 PC CHARACTER SET

550
 IBM PC, EXTENDED SUBSET:0850 PC MULTILIN-

IBM PC, EXTENDED SUBSET:0850 PC MULTILINGUAL

551
Appendix G Overview

MULITNATIONAL, ASCII (USA)

552
 MULTINATIONAL, EBCDIC

MULTINATIONAL, EBCDIC

553
Appendix G Overview

ECMA LATIN 1, PRIMARY SUBSET: ASCII (USA)

554
 ECMA LATIN 1, PRIMARY SUBSET: GERMAN

ECMA LATIN 1, PRIMARY SUBSET: GERMAN

555
Appendix G Overview

ECMA LATIN 1, PRIMARY SUBSET: SWEDISH

556
 ECMA LATIN 1, PRIMARY SUBSET: DANISH

ECMA LATIN 1, PRIMARY SUBSET: DANISH

557
Appendix G Overview

ECMA LATIM 1, PRIMARY SUBSET: NORWEGIAN

558
 ECMA LATIN 1, PRIMARY SUBSET: FINNISH

ECMA LATIN 1, PRIMARY SUBSET: FINNISH

559
Appendix G Overview

ECMA LATIN 1, PRIMARY SUBSET: ENGLISH (UK)

560
 ECMA LATIN 1, PRIMARY SUBSET: DUTCH

ECMA LATIN 1, PRIMARY SUBSET: DUTCH

561
Appendix

ECMA LATIN 1, PRIMARY SUBSET: FRENCH

562
 ECMA LATIN 1, PRIMARY SUBSET: SPANISH

ECMA LATIN 1, PRIMARY SUBSET: SPANISH

563
Appendix

ECMA LATIN 1, PRIMARY SUBSET: ITALIAN

564
 ECMA LATIN 1, PRIMARY SUBSET: TURKISH

ECMA LATIN 1, PRIMARY SUBSET: TURKISH

565
Appendix

ECMA LATIN 1, PRIMARY SUBSET: JAPANESE

566
 ECMA LATIN 1, EXTENDED SUBSET: MULTINA-

ECMA LATIN 1, EXTENDED SUBSET: MULTINATIONAL

567
Appendix

ECMA LATIN 1, EXTENDED SUBSET: BARCODE

568
 ECMA LATIN 1, EXTENDED SUBSET: GREEK

ECMA LATIN 1, EXTENDED SUBSET: GREEK

569
Appendix

ECMA LATIN 1, EXTENDED SUBSET: GRAPHIC

570
 ECMA LATIN 1, EXTENDED SUBSET: SCIENTIFIC

ECMA LATIN 1, EXTENDED SUBSET: SCIENTIFIC

571
Appendix

DEC MULTINATIONAL, ASCII (USA)

572
 DEC MULTINATIONAL, FRENCH

DEC MULTINATIONAL, FRENCH

573
Appendix

DEC MULTINATIONAL, GERMAN

574
 DEC MULTINATIONAL, ENGLISH (UK)

DEC MULTINATIONAL, ENGLISH (UK)

575
Appendix

DEC MULTINATIONAL, NORWEGIAN/DANISH

576
 DEC MULTINATIONAL, SWEDISH

DEC MULTINATIONAL, SWEDISH

577
Appendix

DEC MULTINATIONAL, ITALIAN

578
 DEC MULTINATIONAL, SPANISH

DEC MULTINATIONAL, SPANISH

579
Appendix

DEC MULTINATIONAL, JAPANESE

580
 DEC MULTINATIONAL, FRENCH CANADIAN

DEC MULTINATIONAL, FRENCH CANADIAN

581
Appendix

DEC MULTINATIONAL, DUTCH

582
 DEC MULTINATIONAL, FINNISH

DEC MULTINATIONAL, FINNISH

583
Appendix

DEC MULTINATIONAL, SWISS

584
 Glossary

active column The horizontal location on the paper where the next
character will print.
active line The vertical location on the paper where the next
character will print.
active position The position on the paper where the next character
will print. The intersection of the active column and
the active line.
ASCII Abbreviation for American Standard Code for
Information Interchange. A standard character
encoding scheme introduced in 1963 and used
widely on many computers and printers. It is a 7–bit
code with 128 different bit patterns. There is no parity
recommendation.
attributes, print Operations performed on text that alter its
appearance but do not change the font. Examples:
underlining, superscripting, bold, etc.
baud A unit of speed that measures the rate at which
information is transferred. Baud rate is the reciprocal
of the length in seconds of the shortest pulse used to
carry data. For example, a system in which the
shortest pulse is 1/1200 second operates at 1200
baud. On RS–232 serial lines, the baud rate equals
the data flow rate in bits per second (bps). To
communicate properly, a printer must be configured
to operate at the same baud rate as its host
computer.
bar code A printed code consisting of parallel bars of varied
width and spacing and designed to be read by a
one–dimensional scanning device.
bit Contraction of binary digit. A digit in the binary
number system, represented by a 0 or a 1. A bit is
the smallest unit of storage in a digital computer,
where 0 and 1 are represented by different voltages.
Groups of bits forms other units of storage called
nibbles, bytes, and words.
bold A print attribute specifying text of a heavy line
thickness. See also character weight.
buffer A reserved area in memory that data is written to and
read from during data transfers.

585
Appendix

byte A group of consecutive bits forming a unit of storage

in a digital computer and used to represent one
alphanumeric character. A byte usually consists of 8
bits, but may contain more or fewer bits, depending
on the computer or protocol.
character cell The invisible rectangular space occupied by a
character, including the white space around the
character. The height of a cell remains constant even
with changes in the current line spacing, and the
width is equal to the current character spacing. Used
as a unit of spacing.
character set A protocol instructing the printer how to construct a
set of printable characters, including symbols,
punctuation, numbers, diacritical markings, and
alphabet characters. Each character is assigned a
unique address in memory.
character weight The degree of lightness and thickness of printed text.
For example: “Bold” refers to a heavy or thick
character weight. “Medium,” “normal,” or “book
weight” refer to the character weight used in this
sentence.
command sequence Two or more bytes that instruct the printer to perform
a special function. The first character in the
sequence is a special function control character
(SFCC). This character alerts the printer that the
string which follows is a command sequence, not a
character or graphic code. See also SFCC.
compressed Refers to a typeface with a font width approximately
60% smaller than normal. Character height is not
changed.
cpi Abbreviation for characters per inch. A measurement
of monospaced fonts indicating the horizontal
character density. For example, 10 cpi means 10
characters can be printed in one horizontal inch.
decipoint One tenth of a point. A unit of length equal to 1/720
inch. See also point.
default A value, parameter, attribute, or option assigned by a
program or system if another is not specified by the
user.
diagnostic Pertains to the detection and isolation of printer
malfunctions or mistakes.
DIP Acronym for Dual In–line Package. A method of
packaging semiconductor components in rectangular
cases with parallel rows of electrical contacts.
DIP switch A DIP equipped with toggle switches.
disable To deactivate or set to OFF.
DP Abbreviation for Data Processing or Draft Print.

586
Elite A name indicating a monospaced font with a pitch of
12 cpi (and usually 10 points in height).
em A unit of measure in typesetting: the width of a piece
of type about as wide as it is tall. (Derived from
uppercase M, usually the widest character in a set.)
emulation Refers to the ability of a printer to execute the
commands of another printer protocol. When used as
a proper noun (e.g., Proprinter III XL Emulation), it
means printer protocol.
en A unit of measure in typesetting equal to half the
width of an em.
enable To activate, make true (1), or set to on.
escape sequence A command sequence in which the first byte is
always the ASCII ESC character. Same as “escape
code.” See also command sequence, SFCC.
expanded A font enhancement referring to larger–than–normal
character width with no change in character height.
family (or type) A set of all variations and sizes of a type style.
fixed–pitch fonts See font, monospaced.
font The complete set of a given size of type, including
characters, symbols, figures, punctuation marks,
ligatures, signs, and accents. To fully describe a font,
you must specify seven characteristics:

1) typeface

2) spacing (proportional or monospaced)

3) type size (12 point, 14 point, etc.)

4) scale factor (character height/width ratio)

5) type style

6) character weight

7) character proportion (normal, condensed,

expanded).
font name See typeface.
font pattern The matrix of pixels which represents a character,
symbol, or image.
font, landscape A font printed parallel to the long edge of a page.

587
Appendix

font, monospaced Also called fixed–pitch fonts. Every character,

regardless of horizontal size, occupies the same
amount of font pattern space. All monospaced fonts
use specific pitch size settings. Monospaced fonts
are sometimes used when strict character alignment
is desired (tables, charts, spreadsheets, etc.).
font, portrait A font printed parallel to the short edge of a page.
font, proportional A font in which the width of a character cell varies
with the width of the character. For example, [i] takes
less space to print than [m]. Using proportional fonts
generally increases the readability of printed
documents, giving text a typeset appearance.
font weight The thickness of the lines making up a character. For
example, “bold” and “light” are different font weights.
font width The measurement of the width of a character cell in
dots.
host computer The computer that stores, processes, and sends
data to be printed, and which communicates directly
with the printer. The term “host” indicates the
controlling computer, since modern printers are
themselves microprocessor–controlled computer
systems.
HS Abbreviation for High Speed.
IGP The IGP is the board-installed Intelligent Graphics
Processor. The IGP provides on-line forms, bar
codes, and many alphanumeric text-generation
capabilities.
initialization A series of processes and self–tests to set power–up
default conditions and parameters.
interface The hardware components used to link two devices
by common physical interconnection, signal, and
functional characteristics.
invoke To put into effect or operation.
italic A slanted type style. This is an italic type style.
LCD Abbreviation for Liquid–Crystal Display. The LCD is
located on the operator panel. Its purpose is to
communicate information to the operator concerning
the operating state of the printer.
lpi Abbreviation for lines per inch. A measurement
indicating the vertical spacing between successive
lines of text. For example, 8 lpi means 8 lines of text
for every vertical inch.
logical link The parameters that specify data transfer, control, or
communication operations.
nibble A unit of storage containing half of a byte, usually
four bits.

588
NLQ Abbreviation for Near Letter Quality.
NVRAM Abbreviation for NonVolatile Random–Access
Memory. A type of RAM in which stored data are not
lost when the power is interrupted or turned off. A
battery supplies power to NVRAM when the system
does not. Unlike ROM (another type of nonvolatile
memory), NVRAM is accessible and its contents can
be altered.
OCR Abbreviation for Optical Character Recognition. A
process by which a machine can “read” characters
printed in a special standardized font. Data are read
by a photoelectric optical scanner and recorded on
magnetic tape or disk. OCR–A and OCR–B are two
widely used OCR fonts.
parity (check) Parity checking is the addition of non–data bits to
data, resulting in the number of 1 bits being either
always even or always odd. Parity is used to detect
transmission errors. Parity represents the value in
the check digit of the received or transmitted data.
PCBA Abbreviation for Printed Circuit Board Assembly.
pica A name indicating a monospaced font with a pitch of
10 cpi and usually a 12 point height. Pica is used in
typography as a unit of measurement equal to 1/6
inch.
pin configuration Establishes the physical attachment and protocol
conversion connections for the host interface.
pitch The number of text characters printed per horizontal
inch. Specified in characters per inch (cpi).
pixel Derived from picture element. The smallest
displayable picture element on a video monitor or
printable unit. In printing, a pixel is a dot.
point A unit of length in printing and typography, used to
specify type sizes, heights of font characters, etc.
There are 72 points in a vertical inch; thus, one point
equals 1/72 inch, or approximately 0.0138 inch.
Some examples of point sizes are: This is 8 point type.
This manual is printed in 10 point type. This is 14
point type.
port A channel used for receiving data from or
transmitting data to one or more external devices.
Postnet A bar code standard defined by the U. S. Postal
Service.
print mode Synonym for print attribute. Includes character
attributes such as italic, underlining, super/subscript,
as well as Draft, NLQ, and DP.

589
Appendix

protocol In general, a set of rules governing the exchange of

information between computer systems. For printers,
a protocol is the coding system used to convey and
print characters and graphics. A printer protocol
includes character codes, printer function codes, and
machine–to–machine communication codes. In this
manual, protocol and emulation mean the same
thing.
RAM Acronym for Random-Access Memory. Also called
“main memory” or “working memory,” this is the
active memory of a printer, into which programs are
loaded. This memory can be read from or written to
at any time-hence the term “random-access.” RAM is
also termed “volatile” because whatever is in RAM is
lost when power is turned off or interrupted.
read To retrieve data from memory (RAM, NVRAM) or
mass storage (hard disk, floppy diskette, etc.).
reset To turn off, deactivate, disable, or return to a
previously determined state.
resolution A measure expressing the number of units in a given
range used to create an image. In printing, this is
expressed as the number of dots per inch (dpi)
horizontally and vertically.
ROM Acronym for Read–Only Memory. Programs,
instructions, and routines permanently stored in the
printer. ROM is not lost when power is turned off and
cannot be written to—hence the term “read–only.”
ROM–resident fonts are fonts permanently stored in
a printer and available at any time.
roman A type style in which the characters are upright. This
is sentence is printed in a roman type style.
serial communicationsThe sequential transmission of data, in which each
element is transferred in succession.
serial matrix A type of printing technology used in some impact
printers. Data are sent to the printer through either a
serial or a parallel interface, but the print head must
receive the data serially in order to form each
character. The moving print head uses pins to form
whole characters one at a time and one after the
other. The pins print dots according to programmed
matrix patterns. A line matrix printer also forms
characters with dots in matrix patterns, but it feeds
print data in parallel to many hammers mounted on a
rapidly oscillating shuttle. The hammers fire
simultaneously to print entire lines at a time.
set To turn on, activate, invoke, or enable.

590
SFCC Abbreviation for Special Function Control Character.
The first character in a printer command sequence.
In Proprinter III XL emulation mode, you can select
one of five characters as the SFCC. In Epson
emulation mode, the SFCC must always be the
ASCII escape character (ESC). See also command
sequence.
slewing Rapid vertical paper movement.
stop bits A signal indicating the end of a character or data
element.
string Two or more bytes of data or code treated as a unit.
symbol set See character set.
type style Refers to either the upright or italic character style in
a specific font family. Roman is upright, italic is
slanted.
typeface A descriptive name or brand name that identifies a
particular design of type. Also called type family.
type family See typeface.
typographic font See font, proportional.
VFU Abbreviation for Vertical Format Unit.
weight See character weight.
word 1. A storage unit consisting of the number of bits that
comprise one storage location in main memory.

2. The name used for a variable or constant in a

program.

3. The data value occupying a storage location.

write To place data in memory (RAM, NVRAM) or in mass
storage (hard disk, floppy diskette, etc.).

591
Appendix

592
 Index

Numerics 0860 Portuguese

Epson FX-1050, 491
0437 PC Character Set Proprinter III XL, 447
Epson FX-1050, 480 0861 Icelandic
Proprinter III XL, 436 Epson FX-1050, 492
0737 Greek Proprinter III XL, 448
Epson FX-1050, 481 0862 Hebrew
Proprinter III XL, 437 Epson FX-1050, 493
0813 Greek Proprinter III XL, 449
Epson FX-1050, 482 0863 Canadian French, 450
Proprinter III XL, 438 0863 French Canadian, 494
0819 ISO/ANSI Multilingual 0864 Arabic
Epson FX-1050, 483 Epson FX-1050, 495
Proprinter III XL, 439 Proprinter III XL, 451
0850 PC Multilingual 0865 Danish/Norwegian
Epson FX-1050, 484 Epson FX-1050, 496
Proprinter III XL, 440 Proprinter III XL, 452
0851 Greek Old 0866 Cyrillic
Epson FX-1050, 485 Epson FX-1050, 497
Proprinter III XL, 441 Proprinter III XL, 453
0852 Latin 2/Roece 0869 Greek New
Epson FX-1050, 486 Epson FX-1050, 498
Proprinter III XL, 442 Proprinter III XL, 454
0853 Latin 3 PC 0874 Thai
Epson FX-1050, 487 Epson FX-1050, 499
Proprinter III XL, 443 Proprinter III XL, 455
0855 Cyrillic 0876 OCR A, 456
Epson FX-1050, 488 0877 OCR B, 457
Proprinter III XL, 444 0912 ISO Latin 2 PC
0857 Turkish, 489 Epson FX-1050, 500
Proprinter III XL, 445 Proprinter III XL, 458
0858 PC Euro Multilingual 0913 ISO Latin 3
Epson FX-1050, 490 Epson FX-1050, 501
Proprinter III XL, 446 Proprinter III XL, 459

593
0914 ISO Latin 4 1129 Vietnamese
Epson FX-1050, 502 Epson FX-1050, 517
Proprinter III XL, 460 Proprinter III XL, 474
0915 ISO Cyrillic PC 1134 Hebrew Old, Epson FX-1050, 518
Epson FX-1050, 503 1134 Old Hebrew, Proprinter III XL, 475
Proprinter III XL, 461 A
0916 Hebrew
Epson FX-1050, 504 AIX workstation attachment and configuration, 415
Proprinter III XL, 462 adding a virtual printer to AIX, 417
0920 ISO Latin 5 Turkish installing an AIX printer device, 416
Epson FX-1050, 505 printing to an AIX attached printer, 419
Proprinter III XL, 463 Alternate Character Set Deselect (SI), P-Series XQ
0921 ISO Baltic Multilingual emulation, 231
Epson FX-1050, 506 Alternate Character Set Deselect (SO), P-Series
Proprinter III XL, 464 XQ emulation, 231
0922 Estonian ASCII character set chart, 433
Epson FX-1050, 507 Attaching your printer to
Proprinter III XL, 465 AIX workstation, 415
0923 Latin 9 8859-15 DOS workstation, 411
Epson FX-1050, 508 host systems, 411
Proprinter III XL, 466 iSeries workstation, 424
1006 ISO Urdu Windows workstation, 413
Epson FX-1050, 509 Attribute Set and Reset codes
Proprinter III XL, 467 P-Series, 145
1008 ISO Arabic serial matrix, 185
Epson FX-1050, 510 B
Proprinter III XL, 468
Backspace (BS), 53
1045 Arabic Extended, Proprinter III XL, 469
P-Series emulation, 151
1046 Arabic Extended, Epson FX-1050, 511
Backspace (BS), Epson FX-1050, 102
1089 ISO Arabic, Epson FX-1050, 512
Backspace (BS), Serial matrix emulation, 190
1098 Farsi 1285 (PC), Proprinter III XL, 470
Bar Code
1098 Farsi 1285, Epson FX-1050, 513
Codabar, 252
1116 Estonian
Code 128, 265
Epson FX-1050, 514
Code 39, 257
Proprinter III XL, 471
Code 93, 259
1117 Latvian
EAN 13, 271
Epson FX-1050, 515
EAN 8, 270
Proprinter III XL, 472
FIM, 272
1118 Lithuanian
German I-2/5, 274
Epson FX-1050, 516
I-2/5, 274
Proprinter III XL, 473
Interleaved 2/5, 274
interleaved 2/5, 280

594
 ITF-14, 274 Bold Print Reset (ESC H), Serial matrix
MSI, 281 emulation, 193
overview, 247 Bold Print Reset (SFCC H), P-Series
PDF-417, 286 emulation, 152
PostBar and Royal Mail (KIX), 292 Bold Print Set (ESC G), Serial matrix
POSTNET, 296 emulation, 193
Royal Mail, 298 Bold Printing Cancel ESC H, 58
syntax, 248 Bold Printing ESC G, 58
Telepen, 299 C
UCC/EAN-128, 305
UPC Shipping, 321 Cancel (CAN), 59
UPC-A, 317 Cancel (CAN), Serial matrix emulation, 194
UPC-E, 318 Cancel Line (CAN), Epson FX-1050, 103
UPS 11, 322 Carriage Return (CR)
Bell (BEL) Epson FX-1050, 103
Epson FX-1050, 103 Proprinter III XL, 59
Proprinter III XL, 53 P-Series emulation, 152
P-Series emulation, 151 P-Series XQ emulation, 232
Serial Matrix emulation, 190 Serial matrix emulation, 194
Bit image graphics Carriage Return Set ESC 5, 59
bit pattern from ASCII character, 328 Character Pitch 10 CPI (ESC P)
density selection, 329 Epson FX-1050, 103
designing bit image pattern, 329 Serial matrix emulation, 195
programming format, 330 Character Pitch 12 CPI (ESC M)
Proprinter and Epson emulations, 327 Epson FX-1050, 104
sample program, 331 Serial matrix emulation, 195
Bit Image Mode Double Density (Half Speed), 55 Character Pitch 12 cpi (ESC:), 60
Bit Image Mode Double Density Character Pitch 15 CPI, Epson FX-1050, 104
(Normal Speed), 56 Character set
Bit Image Mode Quadruple Density code 39, 258
(Half Speed), 57 Epson FX-1050 international overlays, 104
Bit Image Mode Single Density (ESC K), 54 extended, P-Series, 153
Bit Image Mode, Double Density (ESC L), Serial international P-Series, 153
matrix emulation, 191 international serial matrix, 198
Bit Image Mode, Double Density Double Speed multinational, P-Series, 154
(ESC Y), Serial matrix emulation, 192 Proprinter III XL control codes, 47
Bit Image Mode, Quadruple Density (ESC Z), Serial P-Series international overlays, 157
matrix emulation, 192 super-set command, 242
Bit Image Mode, Single Density (ESC K), Serial U.S. ASCII, 433
matrix emulation, 191 Character set overlay, download, 158
Bold Print (SFCC G), P-Series emulation, 151 Character Set Select
ECMA Latin Extended (SFCC OSET), 156
International Languages, 157

595
Character Set Select (ESC l), Serial matrix Code V migration information, 352
emulation, 195 Combining graphics and text, 338
Character Set Select Set 1(A), 60 Command format
Character Set Select Set 2 (B), 60 German I-2/5, 275
Character sets, print modes support, 185 I-2/5, 275
Character Spacing (n/240), super-set commands, ITF-14, 275
245 MSI, 282
Characters 80-9F (Printable Symbols) (ESC u), PDF417, 288
Serial matrix emulation, 198 PostBar and Royal Mail, 293
Characters 80-9F, Control Codes (ESC 7), Serial Telepen, 300
matrix emulation, 197 UCC/EAN-128, 311
Characters 80-9F, Printable Symbols (ESC 6), UPS 11, 323
Serial matrix emulation, 197 Command lines, 145
Check Digit Commands
Codabar, 253 CONFIG, 427
Code 93, 260 FILE_IO, 427
Interleaved 2/5 (I-2/5), German I-2/5, and PostBar, 293
ITF-14, 275 PTX SETUP, 427
MSI, 282 Royal Mail, 293
PostBar and Royal Mail (KIX), 292 Compressed Print (SOH,ETX,HT), P-Series XQ
Telepen, 300 emulation, 233
UPS 11, 323 Condensed Print, 61
Clear Bit 7 of Incoming Data Bytes to 0, 106 Condensed Print (SI ESC SI), 106
Codabar, 252 Condensed Print (SI), Serial matrix emulation, 200
Check Digit, 253 Condensed Print Cancel, 62
command format, 253 Condensed Print Reset (DC2)
Data Field, 253 Epson FX-1050, 107
example, 256 Serial matrix emulation, 200
Quiet Aone, 253 CONFIG command, summary, 431
Readable Data, 253 Configuration menus, main, 355
Start/Stop Codes, 253 Control code description format
Code 128, 265 Epson FX emulation, 96
Code 39, 257 Proprinter III XL, 44
Code 39 character set, 258 P-Series emulation, 144
Code 93, 259 P-Series XQ Variant, 228
Check Digit, 260 Serial Matrix emulation, 184
command format, 260 Control code header, P-Series, 144
Data Field, 260 Control code introducer, IBM, 184
example, 264 Control codes index
Quiet Zone, 260 Epson FX emulation, 100
Readable Data, 260 Proprinter emulation, 51
Start/Stop Codes, 260 P-Series emulation, 148

596
 P-Series XQ variant emulation, 230 Diagnostic features, 36
serial matrix emulation, 188 Diskette storage, emulation
Cut-Sheet/Paper Feed Control (ESC EM), 107 configuration, 39, 91, 141, 181, 225
D Documentation
overview of each chapter, 33
Data Field overview of related books, 34
Code 93, 260 DOS workstation attachment and
Interleaved 2/5 (I-2/5), German I-2/5, and configuration, 411
ITF-14, 275 Dot matrix character formation, example, 37
MSI, 282 Dot matrix line printing illustration, 38
PDF-417, 287 Double High Print Set/Reset (ESC w), 108
PostBar and Royal Mail (KIX), 292 Double Strike (ESC G), 109
Telepen, 300 Double Strike Cancel (ESC H), 109
UCC/EAN-128, 309 Double Wide Print, 63
UPS 11, 323 Double Wide Print (1 Line) Cancel (DC4), 111
Data Field, Codabar, 253 Double Wide Print (ESC W), 110
DEC Multinational Double Wide Print (One Line Only), 64
ASCII (USA), 572 Double Wide Print (One Line Only) Cancel, 65
Dutch, 582 Double Wide Print 1 Line (SO), 111
English (UK), 575 Download character set overlay, 158
Finnish, 583
E
French, 573
French Canandian, 581 EAN 13, structure, 271
German, 574 EAN 8, structure, 270
Italian, 578 ECMA Latin 1 Extended Subset
Japanese, 580 Barcode, 568
Norwegian/Danish, 576 Graphic, 570
Spanish, 579 Greek, 569
Swedish, 577 Multinational, 567
Swiss, 584 Scientific, 571
Default values ECMA Latin 1 Primary Subset
Epson FX-1050 emulation, 92 ASCII (USA), 554
Print Format menu options, 93, 143 Danish, 557
Proprinter III XL emulation, 40 Dutch, 561
P-Series emulation, 142 English (UK), 560
P-Series XQ Variant emulation, 226 Finnish, 559
serial matrix emulation, 182 French, 562
Define a Download Character (ESC &), 107 German, 555
Delete (DC2), Serial matrix emulation, 201 Italian, 564
Delete (DEL), P-Series XQ emulation, 234 Japanese, 566
Delete Character (DEL), 108 Norwegian, 558
Density selection for bit images, 329 Spanish, 563
Deselect Printer, 62

597
 Swedish, 556 0857 Turkish, 489
Turkish, 565 0858 PC Euro Multilingual, 490
Edit mode, P-Series XQ, 229 0860 Portuguese, 491
Electronic Vertical Format Unit (EVFU), P-Series 0861 Icelandic, 492
XQ emulation, 234 0862 Hebrew, 493
Elongated (Double High) Print 1 Line Only, 160 0863 French Canadian, 494
Elongated (Double High) Print One Line Only 0864 Arabic, 495
(ESC h), Serial matrix emulation, 201 0865 Danish/Norwegian, 496
Elongated (Double High) Print Set/Reset 0866 Cyrillic, 497
P-Series emulation, 161 0869 Greek New, 498
Serial matrix emulation, 202 0874 Thai, 499
Elongated Characters, Double High (BS,SO), 0912 ISO Latin 2 PC, 500
P-Series XQ emulation, control codes, 235 0913 ISO Latin 3, 501
Emphasized Print 0914 ISO Latin 4, 502
Epson FX-1050, 112 0915 ISO Cyrillic PC, 503
Proprinter III XL, 65 0916 Hebrew, 504
P-Series emulation, 162 0920 ISO Latin 5 Turkish, 505
Serial matrix emulation, 202 0921 ISO Baltic Multilingual, 506
Emphasized Print Cancel 0922 Estonian, 507
Epson FX-1050, 112 0923 Latin 9 8859-15, 508
Proprinter III XL, 66 1006 ISO Urdu, 509
Emphasized Print Reset 1008 ISO Arabic, 510
P-Series emulation, 162 1046 Arabic Extended, 511
Serial matrix emulation, 203 1089 ISO Arabic, 512
Emulation Reset, 163 1098 Farsi 1285, 513
Serial matrix emulation, 203 1116 Estonian, 514
Enable Printing Hex 00-1F and 80-9F, 113 1117 Latvian, 515
Epson configuration overview, 96 1118 Lithuanian, 516
Epson FX control codes, grouped by function, 100 1129 Vietnamese, 517
Epson FX emulation, control code description 1134 Hebrew Old, 518
format, 96 Backspace (BS), 102
Epson FX, vertical tabs, 342 Bell (BEL), 103
Epson FX-1050 emulation Cancel Line (CAN), 103
0437 PC Character Set, 480 Carriage Return (CR), 103
0737 Greek, 481 chapter overview, 91
0813 Greek, 482 Character Pitch 10 CPI (ESC P), 103
0819 ISO/ANSI Multilingual, 483 Character Pitch 12 CPI (ESC M), 104
0850 PC Multilingual, 484 Character Pitch 15 CPI (ESC g), 104
0851 Greek Old, 485 character set, 95
0852 Latin 2/Roece, 486 Character Set overview, 477
0853 Latin 3 PC, 487
0855 Cyrillic, 488

598
Character Set Select Graphics, Double Density Double Speed
International Languages (ESC R), 104 (ESC Y), 117
Clear Bit 7 of Incoming Data Bytes to 0 Half Speed Mode On/Off (ESC s), 118
(ESC =), 106 Horizontal Tab Execute (HT), 119
Condensed Print (SI, ESC SI), 106 Horizontal Tab Set/Release (ESC D), 119
Condensed Print Reset (DC2), 107 Initialize Printer (ESC @), 120
configuring via control codes and menus, 91 Italic Printing (ESC 4), 120
Cut-Sheet/Paper Feed Control (ESC EM), 107 Italic Printing Cancel (ESC 5), 120
Define a Download Character (ESC &), 107 Line Feed (LF), 121
Delete Character (DEL), 108 Line Feed n/216 Inch (ESC J), 121
Double High Print. Set/Reset (ESC w), 108 Line Spacing 1/6 Inch (6 lpi) (ESC 2), 122
Double Strike (ESC G), 109 Line Spacing 1/8 Inch (8 lpi) (ESC 0), 122
Double Strike Cancel (ESC H), 109 Line Spacing 7/72 Inch (ESC 1), 123
Double Wide Print (1 Line) Cancel (DC4), 111 Line Spacing n/216 Inch (ESC 3 n), 123
Double Wide Print (ESC W), 110 Line Spacing n/72 Inch (ESC A n), 124
Double Wide Print, 1 Line (SO), 111 Make Hex 80-9F Control Codes (ESC 7), 124
Emphasized Print (ESC E), 112 Make Hex 80-9F Printable (ESC 6), 125
Emphasized Print Cancel (ESC F), 112 Master Print Select (ESC !), 127
Enable Printing Hex 00-1F and 80-9F ORC A, 478
(ESC I), 113 ORC B, 479
Epson Set ASCII (USA), 519 Paper Out Detection Disable (ESC 8), 128
Epson Set Danish I, 523 Paper Out Detection Enable (ESC 9), 127
Epson Set Danish II, 529 Pass Bit 7 from Host (ESC #), 128
Epson Set English (UK), 522 print mode support for character sets, 146
Epson Set French, 520 Printer Deselect (DC3), 128
Epson Set French Canadian, 532 Printer Select (DC1), 128
Epson Set German, 521 Proportional Spacing, Select/Deselect
Epson Set Italian, 525 (ESC p), 132
Epson Set Japanese, 527 Reassign Graphics Mode (ESC ?), 129
Epson Set Latin American I, 531 Remove Downloaded Characters (ESC :), 129
Epson Set Latin American II, 533 Reverse Line Spacing n/216 Inch, 129
Epson Set Norwegian, 528 Select 9-Pin Graphics Mode (ESC ^), 131
Epson Set Spanish I, 526 Select Graphics Mode (ESC *), 130
Epson Set Spanish II, 530 Select Italic Character Set (ESC t), 131
Epson Set Swedish, 524 Select Print Quality (ESC x), 131
exceptions and differences for CTA printers, 94 Select Serif or Sans Serif Font (ESC k), 132
factory settings, 92 Select User-Defined Font (ESC %), 132
Form Feed (FF), 113 Select Vertical Tab Channel (ESC /), 133
Graphics Double Density (ESC L), 116 Set Absolute Print Position in 1/60 Inch
Graphics Quadruple Density (ESC Z), 118 (ESC $), 133
Graphics Standard Density (ESC K), 115 Set and Reset codes, 97

599
 Set Bit 7 of Incoming Data Bytes to 1 Escape (ESC) sequences
(ESC >), 133 bit image density, 329
Set Forms Length by Lines (ESC C), 135 Epson FX-1050, 96
Set Forms Length in Inches (ESC C 0), 135 IBM Proprinter III XL, 44
Set Intercharacter Spacing in 1/120 Inch EVFU (Electronic Vertical Format Unit)
(ESC SP), 134 channel assignment, 344
Set Margin Left (ESC l), 134 clearing the memory, 347
Set Margin Right (ESC Q), 134 end load code, 345
Set Relative Horizontal Print Position in 1/120 PI line disabled, 347
Inch (ESC >), 133 PI line enabled, 346
Set Vertical Tabs in Channels (ESC b), 136 P-Series, 344
Skip Over Perforation (ESC N), 136 relative line slewing, 348
Skip Over Perforation, Cancel (ESC O), 137 start load code, 344
Superscript and Subscript Printing using, 345
(ESC S), 137 Examples, Royal Mail, 294
Superscript and Subscript Printing Cancel Exceptions and differences, Proprinter III XL
(ESC T), 138 emulation, 41
Super-Set Commands, 138 Expanded (Double Wide) One Line Only (SO),
Underline (ESC -), 139 Serial matrix emulation, 204
Unidirectional Printing 1 Line (ESC <), 139 Expanded (Double Wide) Print (ESC W), Serial
Unidirectional Printing Set/Reset (ESC U), 139 matrix emulation, 204
Vertical Tab Execute (VT), 140 Expanded Print Double Wide, 163
Vertical Tab Set/Clear (ESC B), 140 Expanded Print Double Wide 1 Line Only, 164
Epson FX-1050 Escape (ESC) sequences, 96 Extended Character Set
Epson Set P-Series, 164
ASCII (USA), 519 Serial matrix emulation, 205
Danish I, 523 Extended Character Set Cancel, 165
Danish II, 529 Extended Set Cancel, Primary Set Select (ESC 5),
English (UK), 522 Serial matrix emulation, 206
French, 520 F
French Canadian, 532
German, 521 Factory settings
Italian, 525 Epson FX-1050 emulation, 92
Japanese, 527 Proprinter III XL emulation, 40
Latin American I, 531 P-Series emulation, 142
Latin American II, 533 P-Series XQ Variant emulation, 226
Norwegian, 528 Serial Matrix emulation, 182
Spanish I, 526 Fault condition, Proprinter III XL emulation, 47
Spanish II, 530 Features list
Swedish, 524 6408-CTA and 6412-CTA printers, 34
Equivalency tables, for migration to 6500-v diagnostics, 36
printer, 353 graphics and vertical formatting, 36
text formatting and language options, 35

600
FILE_IO Command, operation of, 432 Horizontal Tab Set/Release (ESC D), 119
FIM barcode, 272 Host Computer Interfaces, list, 35
Form Feed (FF) Host interface selection, for migrating to the 6500-v
Epson FX-1050 emulation, 113 printer, 406
Proprinter III XL, 66 Host system attachment, 411
P-Series emulation, 165 I
P-Series XQ emulation, 236
Serial matrix emulation, 206 I-2/5
Form Margins, Set command format, 275
P-Series emulation, 167 example, 279
Serial matrix emulation, 208 IBM PC Extended Subset
Forms Length Set (Inches), Serial matrix 0437 PC Character Set, 550
emulation, 207 0850 PC Multilingual, 551
Forms Length Set (Lines), Serial matrix IBM PC Primary Subset
emulation, 208 ASCII (USA), 536
Forms Length Set in Inches Danish II, 547
Proprinter III XL, 66 Dutch, 540
P-Series emulation, 166 English (UK), 539
Forms Length Set in Lines French, 537
Proprinter III XL, 67 French Canadian, 545
P-Series emulation, 166 German, 538
Italian, 542
G
Japanese, 544
German I-2/5, command format, 275 Latin American, 546
Graphics and text, combining, 338 Latin American II, 549
Graphics and vertical formatting, 36 Spanish, 543
Graphics control codes overview Spanish II, 548
Epson FX-1050, 96 Swedish, 541
IBM Proprinter III XL, 45 IBM Proprinter III XL Escape (ESC) sequences, 44
Graphics Double Density (ESC L), 116 Ignored and reserved control codes, Proprinter III
Graphics Double Density Double Speed XL emulation, 47
(ESC Y), 117 IGP/PGL Migration information, 352
Graphics printing, Proprinter and Epson bit image IGP/VGL Migration information, 352
graphics, 327 Image printing overview, 327
Graphics Quadruple Density (ESC Z), 118 Index, control code, P-Series XQ, 230
Graphics Standard Density (ESC K), 115 Initialize Parameters, 68
H Initialize Printer (ESC @), 120
Interleaved 2/5, 280
Half Speed Mode On/Off, 118 Interleaved 2/5 (I-2/5), German I-2/5, and ITF-14
Horizontal Tab (HT), Serial matrix emulation, 209 Check Digit, 275
Horizontal Tab Execute (HT), 119 Data Field, 275
Horizontal Tab Set (ESC D), Serial matrix Quiet Zone, 275
emulation, 210

601
 Readable Data, 275 Epson FX-1050 emulation, 123
Start/Stop Codes, 275 Proprinter III XL, 76
International Character Set Select, serial Serial matrix emulation, 215
matrix, 198 Line Spacing n/216 Inch (SFCC 3 n)
International character sets P-Series emulation, 171
Epson, 105 Line Spacing n/72 Inch, 171
P-Series, 154, 155 Line Spacing n/72 Inch (ESC A n)
iSeries workstation attachment and Epson FX-1050 emulation, 124
configuration, 424 Serial matrix emulation, 214
Italic Printing (ESC 4), 120 Line Spacing n/72 Inch (Executes), 74
Italic Printing Cancel (ESC 5), 120 Line Spacing n/72 Inch (Storage), 75
ITF-14, command format, 275 Line Spacing, 8 or 10.3 lpi (ACK), P-Series XQ
K emulation, 237
M
KIX Format, PostBar and Royal Mail (KIX), 292
L Make Hex 80-9F Control Codes, 124
Make Hex 80-9F Printable, 125
Line Feed (LF) Manuals, overview of related books, 34
Epson FX-1050 emulation, 121 Margin Bottom, 76
Proprinter III XL, 71 Margin Cancel Bottom, 77
P-Series emulation, 168 Margins Horizontal, 77
P-Series XQ emulation, 236 Master Print Select (ESC !), 127
Serial matrix emulation, 210 Migrating to 6500-v from previous printers, 351, 411
Line Feed 1/6 Inch (ESC A12, ESC 2), Serial matrix equivalency tables, 353
emulation, 212 migration checklist, 352
Line Feed 1/8 Inch 8 lpi (ESC A9, ESC 0), Serial MVP-Series information, 384
matrix emulation, 212 P300/P600-Series information, 393
Line Feed n/216 Inch (ESC J), 121 P3000 information, 370
Line Feed n/216 Inch (One Line Only), 71 P4280/P9212 information, 357
Line Feed n/216 Inch One Line Only (ESC J), Serial P6000 information, 375
matrix emulation, 211 P6x40/P6x80 information, 380
Line matrix printing, explanation of, 37 P9012 information, 364
Line Spacing (n/288), super-set commands, 245 Migration from
Line Spacing 1/6 Inch (6 lpi), 168 previous Code V, 352
Line Spacing 1/6 Inch (6 lpi) (ESC 2), 122 previous IGP/PGL, 352
Line Spacing 1/8 Inch (8 lpi), 72, 122, 169 previous IGP/VGL, 352
Line Spacing 7/72 Inch, 170 Migration information
Line Spacing 7/72 Inch (10.3 lpi), 73 contacting IBM technical support, 410
Line Spacing 7/72 Inch (ESC 1) selecting a communications interface and
Epson FX-1050 emulation, 123 cables, 406
Serial matrix emulation, 213 troubleshooting problems, 407
Line Spacing 8 or 10.3 lpi (1 Line Only), 169 Modulo-10 Data Field Check Digit for SSCC-18 and
Line Spacing n/216 Inch (ESC 3 n) SCC-14, UCC/EAN-128, 310

602
Modulo-103 Check Digit, UCC/EAN-128, 310 P9012 migration information, 364
MSI, 281 P9012 printers, substitute IBM 6500-v printer, 351
Check Digit, 282 P9212 printers, substitute IBM 6500-v printer, 351
command format, 282 Paper Out Detection Disable (ESC 8), 128
Data Field, 282 Paper Out Detection Enable (ESC 9), 127
example, 285 Paper slewing, 341
Quiet Zone, 282 Pass Bit 7 from Host (ESC #), 128
Readable Data, 282 PDF, PDF-417, 287
Start/Stop Code, 282 PDF-417, 286
structure, 281 command format, 288
Multinational Data Field, 287
ASCII (USA), 552 example, 291
EBCDIC, 553 PDF, 287
Multinational character sets, P-Series, 154 Quiet Zone, 287
MVP-series migration information, 384 Security Level, 287
MVP-series printers, substitute IBM 6500-v Start/Stop Codes, 287
printer, 351 structure, 286
N PI Line, not used by Proprinter emulation, 44
Plot Even Dot (P-Series High Density
NUL Code, 185 Graphics), 173
O Plot Even Dot, High Density (EOT), P-Series XQ
emulation, 238
Odd dot plot pattern plan, 337
Plot mode
Odd dot plot sample, 337
data line format, 334
ORC A, 478
density, P-Series emulation, 332
ORC B, 479
double density plot, 336
Overlay, download character set, 158
graphics, P-Series emulation, 332
Overscoring, 78, 172
high density plot sample, 333
Overscoring (ESC _n), Serial matrix emulation, 215
normal density plot, 335
P normal density plot sample, 332
P300/P600-series migration information, 393 odd dot pattern plan, 337
P300/P600-series printers, substitute IBM 6500-v odd dot sample, 337
printer, 351 plot data byte format, 333
P3000 migration information, 370 truncated character line, 338
P3000-series printers, substitute IBM 6500-v Plot Odd Dot (P-Series Normal Density
printer, 351 Graphics, 173
P4280 printers, substitute IBM 6500-v printer, 351 Plot Odd Dot, Normal Density (ENQ), P-Series XQ
P4280/P9212 migration information, 357 emulation, 238
P6000 migration information, 375 PostBar and Royal Mail
P6000-series printers, substitute IBM 6500-v command format, 293
printer, 351 example, 294
P6x40/P6x80 migration information, 380

603
PostBar and Royal Mail (KIX), 292 0857 Turkish, 445
Check Digit, 292 0858 PC Euro Multilingual, 446
Data Field, 292 0860 Portuguese, 447
KIX Format, 292 0861 Icelandic, 448
Quiet Zone, 292 0862 Hebrew, 449
Start/Stop Code, 292 0863 Canadian French, 450
POSTNET, structure, 296 0864 Arabic, 451
Print All Characters, 78 0865 Danish/Norwegian, 452
Print Deselect (DC3), Serial matrix emulation, 218 0866 Cyrillic, 453
Print Format menu, factory default settings, 93, 143 0869 Greek New, 454
Print Mode, 79 0874 Thai, 455
Print mode combinations, Proprinter III XL 0876 OCR A, 456
emulation, 42 0877 OCR B, 457
Print mode priority chart, Proprinter III XL 0912 ISO Latin 2 PC, 458
emulation, 42 0913 ISO Latin 3, 459
Print Mode/Pitch Selection, 173 0914 ISO Latin 4, 460
Print Mode/Pitch Selection (ESC [nq, ESC X mn), 0915 ISO Cyrillic PC, 461
Serial matrix emulation, 216 0916 Hebrew, 462
Print modes support, character sets, 185 0920 ISO Latin 5 Turkish, 463
Print Next Character, 79 0921 ISO Baltic Multilingual, 464
Print Quality, 80 0922 Estonian, 465
Print Select (DC1), Serial matrix emulation, 218 0923 Latin 9 8859-15, 466
Printer Deselect (DC3), 128 1006 ISO Urdu, 467
Printer Emulations, list, 35 1008 ISO Arabic, 468
Printer Protocol, Super-set commands, 246 1045 Arabic Extended, 469
Printer Select (DC1), 128 1098 Farsi 1285 (PC), 470
Printing 1116 Estonian, 471
line matrix printing explained, 37 1117 Latvian, 472
speed, 38 1118 Lithuanian, 473
Proportional Spacing, 81 1129 Vietnamese, 474
Proportional Spacing Select/Deselect (ESC p), 132 1134 Old Hebrew, 475
Proprinter control codes, grouped by function, 51 Backspace (BS), 53
Proprinter III XL emulation Bell (BEL), 53
0437 PC Character Set, 436 Bit Image Mode Double Density
0737 Greek, 437 (Half Speed), 55
0813 Greek, 438 Bit Image Mode Double Density
0819 ISO/ANSI Multilingual, 439 (Normal Speed), 56
0850 PC Multilingual, 440 Bit Image Mode Quadruple Density
0851 Greek Old, 441 (Half Speed), 57
0852 Latin 2/Roece, 442 Bit Image Mode Single Density (ESC K), 54
0853 Latin 3 PC, 443 Bold Printing Cancel ESC H, 58
0855 Cyrillic, 444 Bold Printing ESC G, 58

604
Cancel CAN, 59 Print All Characters (ESC \), 78
Carriage Return (CR), 59 Print Mode (ESC I), 79
Carriage Return Set ESC 5, 59 print mode combinations, 42
chapter overview, 39 print mode priority chart, 42
Character Pitch 12 cpi (ESC :), 60 Print Next Character (ESC ^), 79
character set control codes, 47 Print Quality (ESC x), 80
Character Set Select Set 1 (A) (ESC 7), 60 Proportional Spacing (ESC P), 81
Character Set Select Set 2(B) (ESC 6), 60 Select Attributes (ESC [@), 82
Character sets overview, 435 Set Top-of-Form (ESC 4), 85
combining print modes, 41 Superscript/Subscript Printing (ESC S), 84
Condensed Print (SI, ESC SI), 61 Superscript/Subscript Printing Cancel
Condensed Print Cancel (DC2, ESC DC2), 62 (ESC T), 85
configuring via control codes and menus, 39 Super-Set Commands, 85
control code description format, 44 Tab Horizontal (HT), 86
Deselect Printer (ESC Q 22), 62 Tab Set/Clear Horizontal (ESC D), 86
Double Wide Print (ESC W), 63 Tab Set/Clear Vertical (ESC B), 88
Double Wide Print (One Line Only) (SO), 64 Tab Vertical (VT), 87
Double Wide Print (One Line Only) Cancel Tabs Clear All (Return to Default) (ESC R), 88
(DC4, ESC DC4), 65 Underline (ESC -), 89
Emphasized Print (ESC E), 65 Unidirectional (ESC U), 89
Emphasized Print Cancel (ESC F), 66 vertical tabs, 342
Escape (ESC) control codes overview, 44 P-Series configuration overview, 144, 228
exceptions and differences, 41 P-Series control codes, grouped by function, 148
fault condition, 47 P-Series emulation
Form Feed (FF), 66 Backspace (BS), 151
Forms Length Set in Inches (ESC C 0), 66 Bell (BEL), 151
Forms Length Set in Lines (ESC C), 67 Bold Print (SFCC G), 151
graphics control codes overview, 45 Bold Print Reset (SFCC H), 152
ignored and reserved control codes, 47 Carriage Return (CR), 152
Initialize Parameters (ESC [K), 68 chapter overview, 141
Line Feed (LF), 71 Character Set overview, 535
Line Feed n/216 Inch (One Line Only) Character Set Select ECMA Latin 1 Extended
(ESC J), 71 (SFCC OSET), 156
Line Spacing 1/8 Inch (8 lpi) (ESC 0), 72 Character Set Select International Languages
Line Spacing 7/72 Inch (10.3 lpi) (ESC 1), 73 (SFCC PSET, SFCC R), 157
Line Spacing n/216 Inch (ESC 3 n), 76 configuring via control codes and
Line Spacing n/72 Inch (Executes) (ESC 2), 74 menus, 141, 181, 225
Line Spacing n/72 Inch (Storage) (ESC A), 75 control code description format, 144
Margin Bottom (ESC N), 76 control codes
Margin Cancel Bottom (ESC O), 77 Character Set Select (SFCC 1), 153
Margins Horizontal (ESC X), 77 Characters 80-9F, Control Codes
Overscoring (ESC _), 78 (SFCC 7), 155

605
 Characters 80-9F, Printable Symbols Emulation Reset (SFCC @), 163
(SFCC 6), 155 Expanded Print Double Wide (SFCC W), 163
DEC Multinational ASCII (USA), 572 Expanded Print Double Wide 1 Line Only
DEC Multinational Dutch, 582 (SFCC k), 164
DEC Multinational English (UK), 575 extended and multinational character sets, 153
DEC Multinational Finnish, 583 Extended Character Set (S0, SFCC SO), 164
DEC Multinational French, 573 Extended Character Set Cancel
DEC Multinational French Canadian, 581 (SI, SFCC SI), 165
DEC Multinational German, 574 factory settings, 142
DEC Multinational Italian, 578 Form Feed (FF), 165
DEC Multinational Japanese, 580 Form Margins Set (SFCC v), 167
DEC Multinational Norwegian/Danish, 576 Forms Length Set in Inches
DEC Multinational Spanish, 579 (SFCC INCHES), 166
DEC Multinational Swedish, 577 Forms Length Set in Lines (SFCC LINES), 166
DEC Multinational Swiss, 584 high density plot sample, 333
ECMA Latin 1 Extended Subset Barcode, 568 IBM PC Extended Subset 0437 PC Character
ECMA Latin 1 Extended Subset Graphic, 570 Set, 550
ECMA Latin 1 Extended Subset Greek, 569 IBM PC Extended Subset 0850 PC
ECMA Latin 1 Extended Subset Multilingual, 551
Multinational, 567 IBM PC Primary Subset ASCII (USA), 536
ECMA Latin 1 Extended Subset Scientific, 571 IBM PC Primary Subset Danish II, 547
ECMA Latin 1 Primary Subset ASCII IBM PC Primary Subset Dutch, 540
(USA), 554 IBM PC Primary Subset English (UK), 539
ECMA Latin 1 Primary Subset Danish, 557 IBM PC Primary Subset French, 537
ECMA Latin 1 Primary Subset Dutch, 561 IBM PC Primary Subset French Canadian, 545
ECMA Latin 1 Primary Subset English IBM PC Primary Subset German, 538
(UK), 560 IBM PC Primary Subset Italian, 542
ECMA Latin 1 Primary Subset Finnish, 559 IBM PC Primary Subset Japanese, 544
ECMA Latin 1 Primary Subset French, 562 IBM PC Primary Subset Latin American, 546
ECMA Latin 1 Primary Subset German, 555 IBM PC Primary Subset Latin American II, 549
ECMA Latin 1 Primary Subset Italian, 564 IBM PC Primary Subset Spanish, 543
ECMA Latin 1 Primary Subset Japanese, 566 IBM PC Primary Subset Spanish II, 548
ECMA Latin 1 Primary Subset Norwegian, 558 IBM PC Primary Subset Swedish, 541
ECMA Latin 1 Primary Subset Spanish, 563 Line Feed (LF), 168
ECMA Latin 1 Primary Subset Swedish, 556 Line Spacing 1/6 Inch (SFCC A), 168
ECMA Latin 1 Primary Subset Turkish, 565 Line Spacing 1/8 Inch (8 lpi) (SFCC LPI), 169
Elongated (Double High) Print 1 Line Only Line Spacing 7/72 Inch (SFCC 1), 170
(SFCC h, BS), 160 Line Spacing 8 or 10.3 lpi (1 Line Only), 169
Elongated (Double High) Print Set/Reset Line Spacing n/216 Inch (SFCC 3 n), 171
(SFCC w), 161 Line Spacing n/72 Inch (SFCC A), 171
Emphasized Print (SFCC E), 162 Multinational ASCII (USA), 552
Emphasized Print Reset (SFCC F), 162 Multinational EBCDIC, 553

606
 normal density plot sample, 332 Line Feed (LF), 236
Overscoring (SFCC_), 172 Line Spacing, 8 or 10.3 lpi (ACK), 237
plot data byte format, 333 Plot Even Dot, High Density (EOT), 238
plot density, 332 Plot Odd Dot, Normal Density (ENQ), 238
Plot Even Dot (P-Series High Density Select Draft Print (STX,ETX,HT), 239
Graphics), 173 Space (SP), 239
plot mode, 337 Underline (_), 240
plot mode graphics, 332 Vertical Tab (VT), 240
Plot Odd Dot (P-Series Normal Density P-Series XQ Variant emulation, control code
Graphics), 173 description format, 228
Print Mode/Pitch Selection PTX SETUP Option, overview, 427
(SFCC PMODE), 173 Q
Select Attributes, 177
Superscript/Subscript Printing (SFCC S), 178 Quiet Zone
Superscript/Subscript Printing Reset Code 93, 260
(SFCC T), 179 Interleaved 2/5 (I-2/5), German I-2/5, and ITF-
Super-Set Commands, 179 14, 275
Underline (SFCC), 180 MSI, 282
Vertical Tab (VT), 180 PDF-417, 287
VFU Commands, 180 PostBar and Royal Mail (KIX), 292
P-Series EVFU, 344 Telepen, 300
channel assignment, 344 UCC/EAN-128, 309
clearing the memory, 347 UPS 11, 323
end load code, 345 Quiet Zone, Codabar, 253
PI line disabled, 347 R
PI line enabled, 346
Rates, printing and plotting, 38
relative line slewing
Readable Data
See EVFU (Electronic Vertical Format Unit)
Code 93, 260
start load code, 344
Interleaved 2/5 (I-2/5), German I-2/5, and ITF-
P-Series plot mode
14, 275
data byte format sample, 334
MSI, 282
how to exit, 338
Telepen, 300
P-Series XQ emulation
UCC/EAN-128, 310
Alternate Character Set Deselect (SI), 231
UPS 11, 323
Alternate Character Set Deselect (SO), 231
Readable Data, Codabar, 253
Carriage Return (CR), 232
Reassign Graphics Mode (ESC ?), 129
Compressed Print (SOH,ETX,HT), 233
Remove Downloaded Characters (ESC :), 129
Delete (DEL), 234
Reverse Line Spacing n/216 Inch, 129
Electronic Vertical Format Unit (EVFU), 234
Royal Mail, 298
Elongated Characters, Double High
command format, 293
(BS,SO), 235
example, 294
Form Feed (FF), 236

607
 S control codes, 184, 188
DEC Multinational ASCII (USA), 572
Save Custom Sets menu option, 39, 91, 141, 181, DEC Multinational Dutch, 582
225 DEC Multinational English (UK), 575
Security Level, PDF-417, 287 DEC Multinational Finnish, 583
Select 9-Pin Graphics Mode (ESC ^), 131 DEC Multinational French, 573
Select Attributes, 82, 177 DEC Multinational French Canadian, 581
Select Draft Print (STX,ETX,HT), P-Series XQ DEC Multinational German, 574
emulation, 239 DEC Multinational Italian, 578
Select Graphics Mode (ESC *), 130 DEC Multinational Japanese, 580
Select Italic Character Set (ESC t), 131 DEC Multinational Spanish, 579
Select Print Quality (ESC x), 131 DEC Multinational Swedish, 577
Select Serif or Sans Serif Font (ESC k), 132 DEC Multinational Swiss, 584
Select User-Defined Font (ESC %), 132 DEC Norwegian/Danish, 576
Select Vertical Tab Channel (ESC /), 133 Delete (DC2), 201
Serial Matrix emulation ECMA Latin 1 Extended Subset Barcode, 568
Attribute Set and Reset codes, 185 ECMA Latin 1 Extended Subset Graphic, 570
Backspace (BS), 190 ECMA Latin 1 Extended Subset Greek, 569
Bell (BEL), 190 ECMA Latin 1 Extended Subset
Bit Image Mode, Double Density (ESC L), 191 Multinational, 567
Bit Image Mode, Double Density Double Speed ECMA Latin 1 Extended Subset Scientific, 571
(ESC Y), 192 ECMA Latin 1 Primary Subset ASCII
Bit Image Mode, Quadruple Density (USA), 554
(ESC Z), 192 ECMA Latin 1 Primary Subset Danish, 557
Bit Image Mode, Single Density (ESC K), 191 ECMA Latin 1 Primary Subset Dutch, 561
Bold Print Reset (ESC H), 193 ECMA Latin 1 Primary Subset
Bold Print Set (ESC G), 193 English (UK), 560
Cancel (CAN), 194 ECMA Latin 1 Primary Subset Finnish, 559
Carriage Return (CR), 194 ECMA Latin 1 Primary Subset French, 562
Character Pitch 10 CPI (ESC P), 195 ECMA Latin 1 Primary Subset German, 555
Character Pitch 12 CPI (ESC M), 195 ECMA Latin 1 Primary Subset Italian, 564
Character Set overview, 535 ECMA Latin 1 Primary Subset Japanese, 566
Character Set Select (ESC l), 195 ECMA Latin 1 Primary Subset Norwegian, 558
Character Set Select International ECMA Latin 1 Primary Subset Spanish, 563
(ESC R), 198 ECMA Latin 1 Primary Subset Swedish, 556
Characters 80-9F, Control Codes (ESC 7), 197 ECMA Latin 1 Primary Subset Turkish, 565
Characters 80-9F, Printable Symbols Elongated (Double High) Print One Line Only
(ESC 6), 197 (ESC h), 201
Characters 80-9F, Printable Symbols Elongated (Double High) Print
(ESC u), 198 Set/Reset
Condensed Print (SI), 200 (ESC w), 202
Condensed Print Reset (DC2), 200
control code description format, 184

608
Emphasized Print (ESC E), 202 Multinational ASCII (USA), 552
Emphasized Print Reset (ESC F), 203 Multinational EBCDIC, 553
Emulation Reset (ESC @), 203 NUL Code, 185
Expanded (Double Wide) One Line Only Overscoring (ESC _n), 215
(SO), 204 Print Deselect (DC3), 218
Expanded (Double Wide) Print (ESC W), 204 Print Mode/Pitch Selection (ESC [nq, ESC X
Extended Character Set (ESC 4), 205 mn), 216
Extended Set Cancel, Primary Set Select Print Select (DC1), 218
(ESC 5), 206 Skip-Over Perforation (ESC N), 219
factory settings, 182 Skip-Over Perforation Cancel (ESC O), 219
Form Feed (FF), 206 Superscript/Subscript Printing (ESC S), 220
Form Margins, Set (ESC v), 208 Superscript/Subscript Printing Reset
Forms Length Set (Inches), 207 (ESC T), 220
Forms Length Set (Lines), 208 Super-set Commands, 221
Horizontal Tab (HT), 209 Underline (ESC -), 221
Horizontal Tab Set (ESC D), 210 Vertical Tab (VT), 222
IBM PC Extended Subset 0437 PC Vertical Tab, Set/Clear (ESC B), 223
Character Set, 550 Set Absolute Print Position in 1/60 Inch
IBM PC Extended Subset 0850 PC (ESC $), 133
Multilingual, 551 Set and Reset Codes, Epson FX-1050
IBM PC Primary Subset ASCII (USA), 536 emulation, 97
IBM PC Primary Subset Danish II, 547 Set Bit 7 of Incoming Data Bytes to 1 (ESC >), 133
IBM PC Primary Subset Dutch, 540 Set Forms Length by Line (ESC C), 135
IBM PC Primary Subset English (UK), 539 Set Forms Length in Inches (ESC C 0), 135
IBM PC Primary Subset French, 537 Set Intercharacter Spacing 1/120 Inch
IBM PC Primary Subset French Canadian, 545 (ESC SP), 134
IBM PC Primary Subset German, 538 Set Margin Left (ESC I), 134
IBM PC Primary Subset Italian, 542 Set Margin Right (ESC Q), 134
IBM PC Primary Subset Japanese, 544 Set Relative Horizontal Print Position in 1/120 Inch
IBM PC Primary Subset Latin American, 546 (ESC >), 133
IBM PC Primary Subset Latin American II, 549 Set Top-of-Form, 85
IBM PC Primary Subset Spanish, 543 Set Vertical Tabs in Channels (ESC b), 136
IBM PC Primary Subset Spanish II, 548 SFCC 1 (Character Set Select), P-Series control
IBM PC Primary Subset Swedish, 541 code, 153
Line Feed (LF), 210 SFCC, IBM, 184
Line Feed 1/6 Inch (ESC A12, ESC 2), 212 Skip Over Perforation (ESC N), 136
Line Feed 1/8 Inch 8 lpi (ESC A9, ESC 0), 212 Skip Over Perforation Channel (ESC O), 137
Line Feed n/216 Inch One Line Only Skip-Over Perforation (ESC N), Serial matrix
(ESC J), 211 emulation, 219
Line Spacing 7/72 Inch (ESC 1), 213 Skip-Over Perforation Cancel (ESC O), Serial
Line Spacing n/216 Inch (ESC 3 n), 215 matrix emulation, 219
Line Spacing n/72 Inch (ESC A n), 214 Space (SP), P-Series XQ emulation, 239

609
Special Function Code, P-Series, 144 Symbol
Special Function Control Character, IBM, 184 non-standard Epson code, 94
Start/Stop Code non-standard Proprinter code, 41
MSI, 282 Syntax, barcodes, 248
PostBar and Royal Mail (KIX), 292 T
Start/Stop Codes
Code 93, 260 Tab Horizontal, 86
Interleaved 2/5 (I-2/5), German I-2/5, and Tab Set/Clear Horizontal, 86
ITF-14, 275 Tab Set/Clear Vertical, 88
PDF-417, 287 Tab Vertical, Proprinter III XL, 87
Telepen, 300 Tabs Clear All (Return to Default), 88
UCC/EAN-128, 309 Tabs, vertical
UPS 11, 323 Epson FX, 342
Start/Stop Codes, Codabar, 253 Proprinter III XL emulation, 342
Storage of emulation configuration, diskette, 39, 91, Technical Support information, migrating to the
141, 181, 225 6500-v printer, 410
Substituting 6500-v for previous printers, 351 Telepen, 299
migration checklist, 352 Check Digit, 300
Superscript and Subscript Printing (ESC S), 137 command format, 300
Superscript and Subscript Printing Cancel Data Field, 300
(ESC T), 138 example, 304
Superscript/Subscript Printing, 84, 178 Quiet Zone, 300
Superscript/Subscript Printing (ESC S), Serial Readable Data, 300
matrix emulation, 220 Start/Stop Codes, 300
Superscript/Subscript Printing Cancel, 85 structure, 299
Superscript/Subscript Printing Reset, 179 Text formatting and language options, 35
Superscript/Subscript Printing Reset (ESC T), Troubleshooting, migrating to the 6500-v
Serial matrix emulation, 220 printer, 407
Super-Set Commands, 138, 241 Truncated character line, 338
barcodes, creating, 248 U
Character Spacing (n/240), 245
UCC/EAN-128, 305
Line Spacing (n/288), 245
application identifiers, 306
Printer Protocol, 246
command format, 311
Proprinter III XL, 85
Data Field, 309
P-Series emulation, 179
example, 314
Super-set Commands
Modulo-10 Data Field Check Digit for SSCC-18
Serial matrix emulation, 221
and SCC-14, 310
Super-set control codes, selecting a character
Modulo-103 Check Digit, 310
set, 242
Quiet Zone, 309
Readable Data, 310
Start/Stop Codes, 309

610
Underline W
Proprinter III XL, 89
P-Series emulation, 180 Warnings and Cautions, 34
Underline (_), P-Series XQ emulation, 240 Windows workstation attachment and
Underline (ESC -), Serial matrix emulation, 221 configuration, 413
Underline (ESC C -), 139
Unidirectional, 89
Unidirectional Printing 1 Line (ESC <), 139
Unidirectional Printing Set/Reset (ESC U), 139
UPC Shipping, 321
UPC-A, structure, 317
UPC-E, structure, 318
UPS 11, 322
Check Digit, 323
command format, 323
Data Field, 323
example, 326
Quiet Zone, 323
Readable Data, 323
Start/Stop Codes, 323
structure, 322
V
Vertical format unit (VFU), 341
Vertical formatting, P-Series EVFU, 344
Vertical page format planning, 341
Vertical Tab, 180
Vertical Tab (VT)
P-Series XQ emulation, 240
Serial matrix emulation, 222
Vertical Tab Execute (VT), 140
Vertical Tab, Set/Clear (ESC B)
Epson FX-1050, 140
Serial Matrix emulation, 223
Vertical tabs
Epson FX, 342
example, 343
Proprinter III XL emulation, 342
VFU characteristics, 342
VFU Commands, 180

611
612
Readers’ Comments — We’d Like to Hear from You
Infoprint 6500 Series Line Matrix Printers
ASCII Programmer’s Reference Manual

Publication No. G544-5979-00

Overall, how satisfied are you with the information in this book?

Very Satisfied Satisfied Neutral Dissatisfied Very

Dissatisfied
Overall satisfaction h h h h h

How satisfied are you that the information in this book is:

Very Satisfied Satisfied Neutral Dissatisfied Very

Dissatisfied
Accurate h h h h h
Complete h h h h h
Easy to find h h h h h
Easy to understand h h h h h
Well organized h h h h h
Applicable to your tasks h h h h h

Please tell us how we can improve this book:

Thank you for your responses. May we contact you? h Yes h No

When you send comments to IBM, you grant IBM a nonexclusive right to use or distribute your comments in any
way it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you.

Name Address

Company or Organization

Phone No.
 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________
Readers’ Comments — We’d Like to Hear from You Cut or Fold
G544-5979-00
 Along Line

_ _ _ _ _ _ _Fold
_ _ _and
_ _ _Tape
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _Please
_ _ _ _ _do
_ _not
_ _ staple
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _Fold
_ _ _and
_ _ Tape
______

NO POSTAGE
NECESSARY
IF MAILED IN THE
UNITED STATES

BUSINESS REPLY MAIL

FIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO. 40 ARMONK, NEW YORK

POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE

IBM Corporation
Information Development IBM Printing Systems Department
H7FE
Building 004N PO Box 1900 Boulder, CO
80301-9817

_________________________________________________________________________________________
Fold and Tape Please do not staple Fold and Tape

Cut or Fold
G544-5979-00 Along Line



Printed in USA

G544-5979-00